0¥ THE 

FRENCH TONGUE; 

GROU:SDED UPOX TB:i: decisions <8 THE 

; FRENCH ACADEMY. 

"WHEREIIT ALL THE KECESSABY 

RULES, 
OBSERVATIONS, AND EXAMPLES, 

ARE EXHIBITED IN A 

MAJStJ^ER ENTITtELY JSTEW. 



BY JOHN PERRIN. 



XECESSARIA FUERIS, JUCUNDA SENT BUS. Qldniii, 



FROM THE ELEVENTH LONDON EDITION. 
CAREFULLY REVISED 

BY A SUITABLE PERSO^\ 



NEW-YORK: 

PUBLISHED BY EVERT DUYCKINCK. 

S 0. 68 WATER - STRStT'^ " ^^ 



N\ 







A 






^ MILORD LYTTELTON. 

MONSEIGNEUR, 

XL/N dediant cet ouvrage a votre 
Grandeur, je ne debuterai pas par le 
panegyrique de la noblesse de votre 
naissance, et de votre rang : la flatter!^ 
ayant epuise toutes les nouvelles tna- 
nitres de louer les Grands, la seule 
qui me resle pour celebrer vos quali-' 
ih personnelles c'est^ d'oser les passer 
sous silence. 

Je laisse a voire Pairie la gloire 
d'applaudir rhomrne d'Etat, le Con- 
seiller prive de sa Ma.]este, rornement 
de la Societe Royale, le Lord qui 
s'occupe a Tenrichir de monumens 
plus durables que le marbre. Gtu'il 
me soit permis d'admirer rHistorien, 
TAuteur, rHomrae de Letttes. Oui, 
MoNSEiGNEUH, PAngletene vous doit 
les rechercbes h^:^l ' : tjues, les plus cu- 
rieu^es et les plus exaetes. La force 
et la richesse de la langue Angloise 
paroissent dans ton?; vos ecrits : Vous 
iaites plus, Moivseig^eur, tous Fera- 
bellissez. 



AV DEDICATION. 

Tous les talens litleraires sont re- 
liausses en votre Grandeuk, par la 
protection qu'elle accorde aiix Science:^: 
ef aux Arts. Le plus grand plaisir 
pour rhomme de Lettres, est d'encou- 
1 ager tout ce qui pent contribuer a la 
litterature; c'est le caractere distinc- 
iif du grandliomme ; c'est le votre^ 
MoNSEiGNEUR, qui Hc leclieichez pas 
les louanges, et qui faites tout ce qu'if 
faut pour les meriter. 

II ne m'auroit done pas ete facile de 
trouver un autre Mecene aussi ceiebre 
par la superiorite reconnue de son es-' 
prit, pour lui presenter cet ouvrage^, 
eomiiie a un Juge eclaire et judicieux, 
qui connoit toutes les beautes reelles 
de la langue Fran9oise,et dontTappro- 
bation entraine naturellement ceile du 
public : mon ambition sera toujours 
de nrieriter la votre, et d'etre avec le 
plus profond respect, 

monseigneur, 

De Votre Grandeur^ 

Le tres hiunble, et 

Tres obeissant Serviteur, 

PERRIN. 



PREFACE. 



G 



RAMMAR is universally allowed to bean 
object of extensive utility as the foundation of the 
Arts and Sciences, and a key to languages in 
general. An excellent production of this kind 
^ras the first work of the late French Academy, 
who spared n© pains to polish and improve their 
native language, and advance it, as nearsCs pos- 
sible, to a state of purity and perfection. 

I am not insensible that several authors con- 
sider it as an essential part of the prefaces to 
their respective works, to represent their own 
performances in the brightest colours, and treat 
those of others with the greatest severity ; but 
I rather chok)se to give, on this occasion, a short 
analytical account of the present undertaking, and 
then humhly submit the whole to the candid and 
impartial opinion of the public* 

Having divided my Grammar into four parts, 
after a few preliminary observations, I begin the 
first with theFrench simple sounds, in nine figures^ 
to which are subjoined all the sounds of the con- 
sonants ; and I am fully convinced, that any pupil 
will, with more ease and expedition, acquire the 
genuine French accent by repeating those inva- 
riable sounds, with the assistance of a good mas- 
ter, than by the tiresome rules of pronunciatiouj 
which, being grounded on nothing but arbitrary 
custom, are liable to all its changes and alterations. 

The sounds of the French language are fol- 
lowed by an alphabetical list of many French ad- 
jectives, each agreeing in gender and number with 
a dtiTerent substantive to make then^ gr^derjtood-, 
A 2 



j,j PREFACE. 

Another collection of adjectives, with the mao-^ 
ner of placing thein before or after their substan- 
tives, and their signification in either case, is 
likewise exhibited, which cannot fail of contri- 
buting to the scholar's improvement. 

The second part begins with a short analysis 
of the parts of speech, which will enable the pu- 
pil to form an idea of the nature and construction 
of the Grammars of other languages, as well as 
that of the French Tongue ; and the two tables, 
showing the formation of the feminine gender .pt 
adjectives according to the termination, and that 
of the plural number of nouns, are set ma new 
light, and adapted to the meanest capacities. 

As the verb is a principal part of speech, it 
should always be considered as a primary object 
in all grammatical productions; and yet all gram- 
mars are defective on this subject, although of the 
utmost importance. In order to do it all the jus- 
tice in my power, I have both in French and Eng- 
lish, fully conjugated six regular verbs, and all 
those that are irregular, in an alphabetical man- 
aer; followed by particular observations upon 
defective verbs, and the manner of conjugating 

them. , . J .. 

The third part contains the theory and practice 
of the French language ; the former of which 
comprehends the rules of syntax, with many new 
observations, illustrated by proper examples ; 
and the latter is a separate and distinct exeropnii- 
cation of the rules and observations after each 
part of speech, for the scholar's improvement. 

Precepts and practice, rules and examples, 
must go hand in hand to attain a thorough know- 
ledge of any tongue whatsoever. As to the 
French language, the only way for the pupil to 
learn it to any valuable purpose is, to lay a good 



PREFACE. vii 

foundation, by becoming weli acquainted with its 
rules, and then to read proper books, or converse 
with those who speak it in its purity ; but neither 
reading nor conversation will ever enable him to 
speak or write it with propriety and elegance, if 
he be wholly unacquainted with its fundamental 
principles. 

■ In the fourth part are exhibited the practical ir- 
regularities of the French Tongue, alphabetically 
disposed, with the choice of vvrords and phrases, 
warranted by the most approved authors, and es- 
pecially by the decisions of the French Academy. 
It is needless to point out the great usefulness of 
these important articles to those who have made 
a considerable progress in the language, since they 
manifestly contain the most elegant and curious of 
all the French idioms ; some of the rest are inter- 
spersed among the rules and observations exem- 
plified in the third part of this work ; and to ren- 
der the present undertaking more beneficial, I 
have in every part thereof and particularly in the 
conjugation of the verbs, not only in the ortho- 
graphy, but in other respect^, had a due regard 
to the said Academy's regulations. 

Thus I have given a short account of my gram- 
matical performance, vvhich is far from being an 
easy task. A Grammar for thf use of schools, con- 
sists of such a variety of parts, and some of them so 
minute and intricate,that it is a very difficult matter 
to render it at once concise and comprehensive, 
and adapt it to the meanest capacities. The sub- 
ject is,indeed,low and vulgar; but Virgil observes, 
that there is in tenui labor ; that such subjects re- 
quire pains and application. Qidniilian also as- 
sures us, that such works plus habent operis quam 
ostentationis ; that they are not so innch sjtiiuin^. 
as they are laborious production?, 



viii PREFACE. 

General utility was the object I principally re- 
garded in the executioo of my design. I have 
omitted no necessary rules and observations ; 
those that 1 have inserted are just, and illustrated 
by proper examples : whilst, at the same time, I 
have had brevity in view, as far as it could be pur- 
sued without obscurity and confusion. But, al- 
though 1 have taken all the care in my power (o 
render the following sheets correct, 1 make no 
doubt, that unavoidable errors have escaped my 
utmost attention ; for my own experience con« 
firm? the truth of what Mr. Pope asserts in the 
following words : 

" Whoever thinks a faultless piece to see 5 

" Thinks what ne'er was, nor is, nor e'er 6hall be." 

However, if upon a candid and impartiaLexami- 
nation, the present should be found a well con- 
ducted undertaking, I am not without hopes that 
niy involuntary errors will be favoured with the 
reader's indulgence ; which Horace represents 
as a reasonable practice, in these lines : 

Verum uhi plura niient •— — , non ego paucis^ 
Off'endar maculis^ guas aut incuriafudit^ 
Ant humana parum cavit natura. 



N. B. In this Edition, the less essential rules 
are printed in ^mailer type than the more import- 
ant, that the Scholar may perceive what he ought 
chiefly to consider and learn, leaving the minuter 
observations to a farther inquiry ; the Definitions 
have been somewhat altered, in order to attain 
greater perspicuity : And the Practical Examples 
have been numbered, so as to refer to the rules, 
and to the Author's Book of Exercises, both which 
are numbered in like manner. 



CONTENTS. 

Page. 
I^EELIlVlINzVRY Observations .... 13 



PART I. 

CHAP. I. 

IS F Pronunciation - . - . ► - - 15 

CHAP. U. 

The sounds of die Consonants - ~ - - 16^ 

CHAP. III. 
An Alphabetical List of many of the French Adjectives, 
each agreeing in Gender and Number with a different 
Substantive to make them understood - - - IS 
CH\P. IV, 
A List of Adjectives, vi^ith the manner of their being 
placed before or after their Substantives, and their 
Signification in either Case - - - - - 35 
CHAP. V. 
Of the Notes and Points made use of in writing French 3S 

CHAP.VI. 
Of Accents made use of in writing French - - - 39 
A voeabularj', French and English - - - . 42 
Pamiliar and easy Dialogues for young Beginners - 4B 



PART II. 

CHAP. I. 
A SHORT Analysis of the Part? of Speech - - 63 

CHAP. 11. 
Of Gendera 68 

CHAP. III. 
Of the formation of the Feminine Gender of adjectives 72 

CHAP. IV. 
Of the formation of Plural ot Nouns - « - 73 



CONTENTS. 



Pc^^. 



CHAP. V. 

The (lecleiwion of Xouns --*--«. 74 

CHAP. VI. 



Of Pronouns - • . 
Sect. I. Of Personal Pronouns 
Sect. II. Of Possessive Proneuns 
Sect. HI. Of Demonstrative Pronouns - 
Sect. IV. Of Relative Pronouns - 
Sel'T. V. Of I nterro;',ative Pronouns - 
Sect. VI. Of Indefinite Proaouns 



7% 
ib. 
80 
81 
82 
il>. 
83 



CHAP. VII. 

Of Verbs . - - - - - • - - 84 

Preliminary Observations - - - - o - ib, 

Cobjugation of the Auxiliary Verbs - - • - 85 

Conjugation of the Regular Verbs - - * - 89 
Terminations of th^ Primitive Tenses of th« regular 

Verbs - - - - ih. 

Conjugation of the irregular Verbs, alphabetically - 100 
Particular Observations upon some Verbs, chiefly defec- 
tive, and their Manner of being conjugated and used, 

in alphabetical order - - - - * - 154 



PART IIL 

CHAP. I. 

THE Theory joined to Practice , - - - - 159 

Rules and Observations upon x\rticles - - - ib. 

Rules and Observations upon Articles exeraplified for 

the Scholar's Practice - • - - - - 1^3 

CHAP. ir. 

Rules and Observations upon Nouns - - - - 171 
Rules and Observations upon Nouns exemplified for the 
Sclwlar's Practice - - - - - - - ITo 

CHAP. III. 

Rules and Observations upon Pronouns >- » - 178 
Sect. I. Personal Pronouns ----- ib. 
Personal Pronouns exeraplified for the Scho- 
lar's PracJtice . - • • - ^ ISi'^ 



CONTENTS. xi 

Page. 
t|ECT. IL Possessive Pronouns » * ^ « - 18S 
Possessive Pronouns exemplified tor the Scho- 
lar's Practice • - - - - 196 

Sect. III. Demonstrative Pronouns - * - * 194 
Demonstrative Pronouns exemplified for the 

Scholar's Practice - - - - 195 

Sect, IV. Relative Pronouns - - - - - 198 

Relative Pronouns exemplified for the Scholar's 
Practice - - - - - - 209 

Sect. V. Interrogative Pronouns - - • - '^03 
Interrogative Pronouns exemplified for the Seho* 
lar'sPractke , - - - - - 204 

Sbct. VI. Indefinite or Indeterminate Pronouns - 206 
Indeterminate Pronouns exemplified for the 

Scholar's Practice - - - - 21 1 

Sect. VII. The supplying Pronouns, le, en ^ y. - - 220 
Supplying Pronouns exemplified for the Scho- 
lar's Practice - - - - - 221 

CH\P.iV. 

Rules and Observations upon the Degrees of Compari- 
son - - - ... - - - 224 

The Degrees of Conpiparison exemplified for the Scho- 
lar's Practice - - - - - - - 2-28 

CHAP. V. 

Rules and Observations upon Verbs - - - 234 
Sect. I. The Use of Tenses - - - - - 236 
The Tenses of Verbs exemplified for Uie Scho- 
lar's Practice 238 

Sect. II. The Use of the Subjunctive Mood - - 243 
The Subjunctive Mood exemplified for the Scho- 
lar's Practice - - - - - 246 
&£CT. ni. The Government of Verbs - - - 252 
The Government of Verbs exemplified for the 
Scholar's Practice - - - - 255 

e CHAP. VI. 

Roles and Observations upon Impersonal Verbs - 261 
Roles and Observations upon Impersonal Verbs exempli- 
fied for the Scholar's Practice - - - - 264 

CHAP. VIL 

Rules and Observations npOn the Participles - - 267 

Sect. I. The active or present Participle - - ib. 

Sect. II. The Participle passive or pa«it - - - 268 
Rules and Observiitions upor? Participles^ exera- 

plifi:«d for the Scholar's Practice - - 272 



xit CONTENTS. 

CHAP. VIII. 

Ilules and Observations upon Adverbs - - - 27 r 
Kules and Observations upon Adverbs exemplified for the 

Scholar's Practice 279 

CHAP. IX. 

Kules and Observations upon prepositions - - 28S 

Remarks upon some x»repositioiis - • - . 290 

Farther Remarks upon the prepositions h. and de - 293 
Rules and Observations upon prepositions exemplified 

for the Scholar's Practice - - - - - 294 

CHAP. X. 

Observations upon the Conjunctions si and que - - 305 
The Conjunction que exemplified for the Scholar's Prac- 
tice - - - - - - - - - 306 



PART W. 

PRACTICAL Irregularities of the French Tongue al- 
phabetically disposed, with the Choice of Words and 
Phrases, warranted by the most approved Authors, and 
.especially by the Becisions of the FaENca Acai^emy SI 1 



GRAMMAR 

OR THE 

FRENCH TONGUE^ 



PRELIMINARY OBSERVATIONS. 

g^ RAMMAR is a collection of Observations to 
\jr which the Tnanner of speaking or writing, used 
in a language may be reduced. 

This definition explains the nature of Grammar 
^n general, and agrees both with the dead and liviag 
IanguaG:es. However, to have a clear and exact idea 
of the French Grabimar, we may define it in the 
following manner. 

The Fr e n c h Gr a h m a r i s n collection of observa- 
tions drawn from approveo custom, to which the man- 
ner of speaking or writing French may be redticed. 

First, The French Grammar is a collection of ob- 
servations^ established only by accident or fancv, in- 
dependent of reason, like fashion in dress For a 
language is nothing less than the manner ^.herein a 
cerVain'nuTnber of men have insensibly agreed to ex- 
press their thoughts to each other. 

Secondly, Drawn from apfiroved custom^ which is 
the actual manner of speaking or writifig used bv the 
greatest part of persons eminent for wit and learning. 

Thirdly, To these observations the manner ofsfieak- 
ing or writing French ?w»2/ be reduced : for* as we 
convey our ideas not only by speechj but likewise by 
writing, so the m.anner of speaking, or writing 
French, is to be reduced to observations drawn from 
approved custom. 

Pronunciation is the manner of expressing by 
speech the several sounds of a language, agreeably 
■0 the most ar^proved custom. 
R 



14, A GRAMMAR OF THE 



THE ALPHABET. 

A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I. (J), K, L, M, N, 0, P, 
Q,R,S,T,U,(V),X,Y,Z. 



a, b, c, d, e, f, g. h. i, (}). k, 1, ro, n, o, p, q. r, s, t. 



THE FOWELS. 

As they are pronounced in spelling, 
a, e, i, o, u. 

Another Scale, 
a, e, e, ^ i, o, u, on. 

The Scale of the vowels or simple sounds may be 
increased ; for there is in French several other sim- 
ple sounds which are commonly represented by two 
letters as in heureiiXy ptureux. 

THE COJ^SOMAMTS. 
b, c, d, f, g. h, j, k, 1, m, n, p, q, r, s, t, v^ x, z. 

The above characters may be pronounced accord- 
ing to ♦^ht Knglish way of spelling, or by annexing to 
them any vowel eithel* before or after. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 15 

PART L 

CHAPTER L 
OF PRONUNCIATION. 

IN order to give a just and exact idea of the pro- 
nunciation of a language, it is principally neccbisa- 
ry to distinguish^ as candidly as posaibJe, all the difffcr- 
ent sounds used in the pronunciation, without any re- 
gard to the letters made use of to express those 
sounds; because a lacguage, as French, English, 
Sec may express different sounds by the same cha- 
racters, and the same sounds by different characters. 

The French Simple, Sounds in Nine Figures. 

English words wherein the sounds are founds 

(1) a, an what anguish, 

(2) e, answer. 
(S) e edict. 

(4) ^ ore, en, ebb, when, 

(5) i, in, he 

(6) o, on, no, tongue, 

(7) u, C7/rate, curiosity, 

(S) eu, un, this sound is quite wanting in Eng- 

(9) ou, to, de. [hsh. 

I am very srensible that the conformity of sounds in 
every English word, does not fully answer to the nice- 
ty of the French pronunciation, it being impossihle 
to find such English words, as has strictly the same 
sound as in French ; it may, however, be sufficient 
for our purpose to have shovv^n, as exactly as possible, 
the affii}ity of the French and English sounds. 

The siriiple sounds include the true French pro- 
nunciation Tiiere IS no child but will easily, and 
in a short time, get it, if the master takes care to 
make him pronounce these simple sounds properly^ 
and join the consonants to them ; wherein consists, 
the whole and only art of reading Frenchi^ 



fS A GRAMMAR OF THE 

The compound sounds will easily be formed by this 
practice, as, 
'From the ninth and fourth soundS) we have these,raois 

1 or me ; io\, faith ; *by adding an r, noir, black s 

boire, to drinks 
From the ninth and fourth or fifth, these, fpin, hay ; 

moins, less ; point, not at all. 
From the sixth, and r, or gold ; fort, strong ; bord^ 

brim ; port, harbour ^ 
From the ninth and r, court, short ; cour, a yard. 
From the eighth and r, ^eur, Jlower ; beurre, butter. 
From the eighth and liquid 1, deuil, a mourning } 

feuille, a lenf. 
From the fourth and liquid U soleil, the sww /^pareil, 

like. 
From the first arid liquid /, mall, a mall ; eventail, a 

fan. 
The same may be said of all other combinations. 

N. B. At all tiroes, when a consonant follo^\s the 
simple sound, the compound is stronger and more 
open; as,/f^wr, beurre^ or, port, tfc. 

* On such like occasions, the ninth and first are sounded eq. 
quickly, that it is not easy to distijiguish them from the sixth 
and fourth souuds. 



CHAPTER II. 

THE SOUNDS OF THE CONSONANTS. 

B Sounds. 

, has 2 b, bouquet, a nosegay, 

p, absolu, absolute. 

C, 3 k, cofFre, a'trunk- 

s, cierge, a wax candle^ 
g, second, second- 
Ch, 2 sh, (English) choeolat, 

chocolate' 
k, echo, echo. 

D, 2 d, donner, to give, 

t, que venrf-il ? iv/rUi 
'docs he sell ? 



FRENCH TONGUE. lY 

Sounds, 
^9 2, f, vif, (jruick. 

V, neu/ hommies, nine 
men, 
^t 5 g, gi'Zon, turf 

j» geant, a giant, 
kj ^'dvu^^ a profiername^ 
H aspirated, h<iroesj an hero, 

not aspirated, heroine, yitz Heroine. 

L, liq>iid, fille, a girl. 

not liquid, fil, thread* 

M, 2 m, mon, 7/^?/. 

n, nom, a name* 
^, nasal, chien, a dog, 

not nasal, blen aise, -s^ifrt/ ^/^f/. 

P, 1 prccepteur, a flrcceptor^ 

Qj is always followed by 1 
If, hi the begmnuxg of 
words, ai>d sounded like k, quatre,/owr. 
R, 1 vc\\vQ\T, a looking-glass^ 

S» 2 s, sage, wise, 

z, rose, a rose* 
T, S t, am\t\^, frimds/ii/i. 

s, patience»/zdU?>nc^. 
V. 1 vertu, virtue, 

4ks,sexe, sex* 
X, gz, exettiple. an eccatnfile. 

ss, soixante, 5'ij:/:2/. 
s> dixieme,^/?^ ^^7zr>^, or 
dix, teiv/oiloived by a 
vozvel* 

All these soimds are exemplified by sontie more 
words ranged iii their rvspective classes, in my 
Practice of the French Pronunciation 
ALPHABETICALLY EXHIBITED, vvhere you Hiay 
iind words wherein such letters are either pre- 
no.uneed or not 

B2 



18 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



CHAPTER III. 

An Alphabetical List of many of the French Adj^iC" 
tives each agreeing in Gender and number with a 
different Substantive to make them understood. 



Obs, Those Adjectives marked thus t? go generally be- 
fore their Substantives. 



Adjectives. Gender of Substantives. 

ABJECTE, F condition ^ an abject coTidilion^ 

abominable, M crime, an abominable crime. 

Abusive, F coutume, an abusive custom, 

academique, M exercise, an academical exercise. 

acariater, F hwrn^xxv ^ a humoursome temper* 

admirable* F invention^ a wondaful inventiOfi- 

adverse, ¥ pdivtie^ a7i adverse party, 

affable, F demoiselle, an affable lady. 

affaire, Mhom me ^ a busy man. 

affectees, F manieres, affected iuanners, 

^ffirmatiff, M ton, an affected tone, 

agee, F veuve, an elderly widow* 

agreable, F surprise, an agreeable stirprisc' 

agreste, M fruit, wild fruit* 

aigrelette, F ?i'duce, a sourish sauce* 

aimable, '** F fille, a lovely girl. 

aise, M ouvrage, an easy work, 

alimentaire, F pension, an allimony^ 

aliz^s, M vents, trade winds, 

alphabetique, F Viste, alphabetical list, 

altier, M homme, aproudman, 

ambigue, F parole, an ambiguous word 

ambitieux, M projet, an ambitious project 

amere, F boisson, a bitter drink, 

amortissable, F rente, a redeemable rent, 

araou reuse, F fille, an amorous girl. 
amphibologique, F expression, an ambiguous expre^^ 

sio?i. 

anatomique, F di^^tc^on^av av at oinical dissections 



PRENCH TONGUE, VJ 

Adjectives. Gender of Substantives. 

:^ ancien, M ami, an ancient friend, 

AngHcane, F eglise. the church of England^ 

animales, F facultes, the sensitwe faculties^ 

annuelle> F pension^ a yearly fiension 

anodins, M renoedes, anodyne remedies 

anony me, M livre, an anonymous book' 

anseatique, F vWle , a hanse town 

antique, M ciiateau. an antique castle. 

appetissante, F viande relishing meat. 
apre> M fruit, harsh fruit. 

aquilin, M nez, c hawked nose. 

arbitraire> M pouvoir, an arbitrary {lotoer- 

argentine, F voix, a clear voice* 

ardent, M charbon, a burning coaL 

argilleuse, F terre, clayey ground> 

aromatique, F herbe, an aromatic herb, 

attrabilaire, M temperament, an atrabUary tem- 
per. . 

artificieux, M detour, an artful evasion* 

Attique, M sel, polite, genteel raillery * 

avantageux, M poste, an advantageous posU 

aveu^le, M cheval, a blind horse. 

auriculaire, M temoin» an ear-witness- 

austere, F mine, an austere mien* 

authentiquej F \o\^ an authentic law, 

auxiiiaire> M verbe, an helping Verb- 

Bachique, V z\\^x\^qv\, a drinking catch. 

badine, F humeur, a wanton hum,our, 

bai, M cheval» a bay horse. 

barb are, F action, a barbarous actior^. 

basse, Y chSimhYMt a ground room- 

X beau, M tapis, a fine carpet, 

begue, M enfant, a stammering child^ 

belliqueuse, F nation, a ivarlike nation. 

bienseante, F parole, a decent word- 

bilieux, M.iQm\^€v3imeAX, a bilious tempei\ 

bissextile, F a'nnee, the leap year. 

bitumineuse, F matiere? bituminous matter. 

bizarre, M.espr\t^ a whtnwica^ mind- 



3^ A GRx\MMAR OF THE 

Adjectives. Gender of SubstantheSi 

blanche, F chemise, a dean shirt' 

bleu^ M ruban, a blue ribboiK 

blonds, M cheveux,ya2r hair. 

boiteux, M clieval, a laine horse, 

X bnn, M vin, good ivine, 

borgne, F femire^ a one-eyed nvomcm* 

bossu, M homrr.e, a crook-backed jnaxi^ 

botanique, M jnrdm. a botardcal garden, 

bourbeux, M passage a vjuddy passa^e^ 

bourru, M air, a cross air, 

brave, M SDldat, a mxive soldier* 

br»ilar>t, "M t's^rii, a shini7ig wit* 

brulant, Msol^W, a burning sun* 

br'jue, F eouleur, a broivn colour J 

brute, F view- , an unhewed stone, 

bruyante, T covn\>^^%\\i^. a bustling cowji{vm^ 

burlesque, F ^(y6s\ti burlesque poetry. 



Calamiteux, M temps, a calamitous time- 

calleuse, F peau a callous skin. 

calomnieux, M rapport, a slanderous reports 

Caridi, M sucre, sugar-candy 

capable, M m ait re, an able rnastci\ 

capricieuse, F femHne, a capricious tvoman* 

captienx, M di scours, a captious discourse. 

casueiie, F eutreprise, a casual undertakingi 

cattgorique, Mreponse^ a categoiical ans^iver, 

catholique, Fe^lhe.thecatnolicvhurch, 

cavalieres, F nmm^ri:s,blu?itman7iers. 

caverneuse, F moutagne^ a hollow mountain^ 

caustique, M emplatre, a burning plaistevi 

celebre, M auteur, afamous author. 

celeste, M bleu, sky-colour- 

charitable, M rnini^tre. c: charitable rninistjer!^ 

chatouiileux, Mhoitirue, a ticklish man. 

chaud, M temps, a hot weatlier, 

chaude, F m^iio.a wa'rmha7id* 

chauve, F tete, a bald head' 

:j: ch^re, F hc^wr . dear sistci\ 

dher, M r+irii ieai! , a d'^ar /m':- 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



21 



SubstantiYes. 



Adjectives. Gender o£ 

chimerique, Mvvojet, a cMmerkai /irojtci. 

chirurgicale, F operation, a chtrurgical ofieration. 

circonspecte, F coiiduite, a wary behaviour* 

circulaire, F lettre» a circular letter- 

clair, NLjowY^a clear day^ 

colossale, F statue, a Colosstan statue. 

combustible, F mati^re, a combustible matter^ 

commode, F maison, a convenient house, 

commun, M prix, a common firice, 

compacte, M corps, a compact body* 

com pie t, M traite, a com file te treatise. 

coafus, F idee, a confused idea, 

conjecturale, F connoissance, a co?ijectural knoixf- 

ledge* 

conjp^ale, F fidelite, conjugal fidelity* 

cciisclentirux Mttegocianf>a conscientious merchant* 

considerable, M bien, a considerable estate* 

constant, M ^dm\, a constant /riend* 

contagieuse, F maladie, a contagious sickness* 

comptant, M. stY^i^nU ready 7yioney, 

continue!, M bruit, a continual noise, 

contraire, F resolution, a contrary resolutio?h 
contradJctoire, F nouvelle, contradictory news* 

convenable, M logement, a convenient lodging> 

cordiale, F liqueur, a cordial liquor, 

corporelle, F piinition, a corfioral punishment- 

correct, M ouvrage, a correct work* 
cruel, ' M.\Qnvv[ienX^ a cruel torment. 

curieuK, M tableau, a curious fiicture. 

Dangereux, M passage* a dangerous fiassage^ 
decent, M habillement, a decent dress* 

decisive, F hentence, a decisive sentence^ 

delicate, F viande, dainty meat. 

delicieuse, F poire, a delicious fie ar. 
demonstrative. F preuve, a demonstrative proof* 
deraisonnable, F demande, an unreasonable ftetition^^ 
Jdernvere, F jilsLCGy the last /ilace* 
desagreable, F conversation, an unfileasant con^ 
versation^ 



22 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Adjectives. Gendei' of Substantives,. 

desastreux, M jour, a7t ill fated day* 

desavanta- F siiu^t\on, a disadvamageoi^ts sitita. 
tion, 
F parole, a dishonest word. 
M bien, a desirdbk blessing. 
M pouvoir, desfiotical flower* 
F femiTje, a devout woinan* 
M libelle, a defamatory libel' 
F iangue, a difficult tongue. 
M magisu at, a worthy magistrate^ 
M ecolier, a aili^ent scholar* 
M ami, a discreet friend* 
M etat, a disagreeable sztuation^ 
F guerre, an expensive war, 
F marque, a dtstmctwe mark* 
M professeur, a learned professor 
M style, a dogmatical style, 
F oraison, the Lord^s prayer. 
F condition, a grievous condition^ 
F odeur, a sweet s?7ielling odour^ 
F main, the right hand* 
F pierre, a hard stone, 
F prosperity, lasting ftrosflerity. 



geuse> 
deshonnete, 
desirable, 
de^pot-que> 
de\^ote, 
jd'fFamatoire, 
difficile, 
tdigne, 
diligent, 
discret, 
disgracieux, 
dispendieuse, 
distinctive, 
docte, 
dogmatique, 
dommicale, 
douloureuse, 
douce, 
droit, 
dure, 
durable, 

Ecclesiastique, 

econome, 

efFectif, 

efficace, 

efficiente, 

(dfrov able, 

eiastique, 

ejegant, 

emblem atique, 

e noilient, 

empbyteotique, 

empirique, 

eneririque 

eniantin, 



F digiiite, an ecclesiastical digpUij- 

M mai*i, a saving husband* 

M he: itage, a real estate, 

M mx)yen, efficacious m&ans* 

F cause, efficient cause. 

M incendie, a frightful conflagration^ 

M corps, an elastic body- 

M conipliment, an elegant iompli- 

merit* 
F figure, cm emblematical figure* 
M remede, a softening remeely* 
M bail, kaseholdfor 99 years, 
M m^f^ecin, a cjuuckdcctor' 
F demande,(z?2 emrgetical petition. 
M disCQurs, a chitmsh discourse^ 



FRENCH TONGUE. 25 

Gender of Substantives. 

F proposit:Ion, an tnigmatical proliQ- 

sicion, 
F semaine, a whole week- 
M artisan, an envious tradesman* 
M miage, a thick cloud, 
F maladie, a72 efiidemical disternflei. 
M proces, a crabbed lunv-suit* 
M palais, a bishop's Jialace^ 
M poeme, an epic fioem, 
M style, epistolary style, 
M droit, an exclusive right, * 
M com I ills, Qw expeditious clerk, 
M medecin, an expert physician, 
M mot, an expyessiroe 'word, 
M tntts, a dainty mess* 
M partie, the exterior part* 



Adjectives. 
enigmatique> 

enti^re, 

envieuxj 

epais, 

epidecniquej 

epineux, 

episcopal, 

cpique, 

epistolaire, 

exclusif, 

expeditif, 

expert, 

cxpressif, 

exquis, 

exterieure, 

extraordinaire, M eveuement, an extraordinary 

event, 
extreme, F difference, a very great difference' 



Fabuleuse, F histoire, a fabulous story- 

facile, F languev an easy tongue. 

fantastique^ M ^vo]qU a fantastical project. 

farineuse, F dartre, a white tetter- 

fastidieuse, F societe, ajastidious society' 

fatalj M moment, an unlucky momenta 

favorable, F occasion, a favourable occasion- 

favori, M\i\2iim'^ a darling pleasure* 

4: faasse,# T noxw^Wt^ false news, 

ferme, M piller, a firm fiillar, 

feroce, F bete, a fierce bea^t* 

fertile,. F province, a fertile, province- 

^dele, M am ant, a faithful lover, 

f^er, M homme, a haughty man, 

figuratif, M sens, a figurative sense. 

iine> F etoffe, fi?ie stuff, 

fixe, M prix, a set price, 

flasques, F joMe^.Jlabby cheeks. 

flatten r, M courtisan, ajawning courtieri 

i foible, F ii^nt6,Jeeble health. 



24 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Adjectives. Gender of SuWantives. 

fortuit, M cas, a mere chance* 

frais, M air, a cool air, 

% franc, M arbitre,/rc^ wilL 

Frangoise, F mo(le> a French fashion* 

frauduleux, M commerce* a fraudulent trade ^ 

friand, M pat€, a dainty pye. 

froid. M temps, cold weather- 

frugale, F vie, frugal life, 

frivolet M conte, afrivolons story. 

fruitier, M arbre, a fruit tree* 

fanebre, Foraison, a funeral sermon,, 

funeste, F aventare, afatnl adventure* 

Galantes, F mani^res, genteel manners- 

gauche, . F maio, the left hand, 

genereux, lA n^^eaxxe, a generous master, 

g^ographique, F carte, a vmfi, ^ 

g^onrietrique, F demonstration, a geometrical de- 
monstration- 

glorleuse, F entreprise, a glorious undertaking, 

Gothique, F lettre, black letter- 

gracieux, M compliment, a gracious comfili- 

ment, 

grammaticale. F r^gle, a grainmaticalrule 

X grand, M verger, a great orchard, 

gras, M jambon, a^ar ham* 

grave, F de m ar che , a grav e gait- 

grenu, M ^pi, a full ear oj corn, 

!i: gros, M paquet, a /ar^^Z>z/?2rf/^ .^ 

grotesques? F figures, grotesque figures* 

gu^able, F riviere, afordable river* 

guerrier, M peuple, war like fieople- 

gutturale, F l^nre, a guttural letter. 

X Habile, M ouvrierj an able workmaru 

habituel, M vice, an habitual vice. 

hazards, M 3 eux, fierce eyes- 

haissable, M object? an hateful object ^ 

hsirdje^ F eotreprise, a bold undertaking, 

harmonieuse, F periode,aw harmonious period^ 



FRENCH TONGUE. 25 

Adjectives, Gender of Substantives. 

j: haute, F montagne> a high mountain. 

hero'ique, F action, an heroical action. 

honorifique, M titre, an honourable title, 

humide, M linge, wet linen. 

hypocrite, F mine, an hyfioaitical mien. 

lllegitime, M pouvoir, an illegal fiower. 
iilicite, M contrat, an illicit convention, 

illustre, F famille, an illustrious family, 

imaginaire, M houhtnYy fantastical happiness, 
immemorial, M temps, immemorial time. 
immoderee, F passion, an immoderate passion- 
immodeste, F posture, an immodest posture, 
am pardonable, F faute, an unpardonable fault, 
i m pa rfait , M ouvra ge, an imperfect work, 
impenetrable, M secret, an impenetrable secret. 
imprenable, F ville, an impregnable city, 
impraticable, M chemm, an impracticable road> 
i m p r op re , M t er m e, an improper term . 
imprudent, M avis, an imprudent advice, 
impudente, F conversation, a shameful conversa- 
tion, 
inaccessible, F montagne, an inaccessible moun- 
tain. 
incomparable, F beaute, an incomparable beauty. 
inconstant, M amour, inconstant love, 
incontestable, F verite, incontestible truth. 
incorrigible, M gargon, an incorrigible lad. 
incroyable, F nouvelle, incredible news. 
irjcurable, F maladie, an incurable sickness, 

indigent, M auteun an indigent author, 

indigeste, M manger, indigestible victuals, 

n\disciplinable, M ^colier, an unruly scholar. 
indispensable* M devoir, an indispensable duty. 
indubitable, M jsucces, undoubted success. 
iner>aisable, F source, inexhaustible source, 
inevitable, M naufrage, an unavoidable ship^ 
wreck, 
^ infeodeej F rente, rent-charge. 

infinie, F obligation, an injinite obligatiom 



26 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Adjectives. 

ingenieuse, 

inhabitable, 

inhumaine, 

xni5iiitable> 

inintelligible, 

iniqije, 

injurieuse, 

inqu»et, 

insatiable, 

insolvable, 

insoutenable, 

intime, 

intrinseque, 

invalide, 

ittvafiabie, 

inventive, 

invincible, 
inviolable, 

inutile, 
irrevocable, 
isabelle, 
X jeune, 
i joiie, 
joyeuse, 
Judai'que, 
judiciaire, 
judjcieux, v 

juridique, 

juste. 

jastificative, 

Laborieux, 
labourabie. 



Gender of Substantives, 

F invention, an ingenlou^i invention. 
F maison, an unmhubitabk house, 
F durete, fflw inhuman hardness, 
M sculpteur, an inimitable carver. 
F proposition, an unintelligible fiTO- 

fiosition. 
F action, a wicked action, 
F parol- ,a?z injurious word, 
M esprit an unquiet mind, 
M appctu, an unsatiahle afiftetUe* 
M debitenr, an insolvent debtor, 
F opinion, an unwarrantable ofnu'* 

ion, 
M 2i.ix\\, a7i intimate friend, 
¥ q\\?L\\X€. an inwari quality, 
F convention, an invalid conven- 
tion, 
F amiti^, an unchangeable fiend- 

M/i, 
F imagmation, aw invaitive imaginar 

tion, 
M courage, an invincible courage, 
M attache nient, an inviolable attach-' 

ment* 
M travctii, an useless labour, 
M arret, a7i irrevocable decree. 
M cheval, a yellow-dun horse. 
F beauts, a young beauty, 
F demoiselle, a handsome lady. 
F fille. ajoyfuigirl. 
F coutume, a Jewish custom. 
Fast r ologie, judicial astrology, 
M philosophe, a judicious philosc 

pher 
F conviction? a juridical conviction. 
M j tigentent, a just judgment. 
F piece, a voucher. 



M j irdinier, a laborious gaw 
F terre, arable ground. 



'df7ier< 



FRENCH TONGUE. 5 

Adjectives?. Gender of Substantives, 

lacomque, M style, a laconic style. 

::^ laide, Y^^vwe^ an ugly face. 

lamentable, M cri, a lamentable shriek, 

langoureuse, F situation, a languishing situatiQU' 

languissante, F ^Sinte, weak health. 

large, F rne» a broad street. 

lascif, M (\6Bh\ a lascivious desire. 

lent, M pf^s, a slow step. 

licentieuse, F condu'vey a licentious conducts, 

licite, F vernier a laufid sale. 

limitrophe, M pays, a neighbouring country ^ 

liquide, F miciecixe, liquid fihysic. 

litter ale, F tra.dnctio\h a literal translation 

litigieux, M droit, a litigious right. 

li\^ide, M teint, a livid complexioji. 

% long, M discours, a long discourse, 

lourd, M paquet. a heavy burdeii, 

lucratif, M metier, a lucrative trade. 

lugubre,^ M spectacle, a mournful spectacle, 

Lyrique,* F poesie, Lyric poetnj^ 

Magique, M art, magic art. 

magnetique, F vevtUy magneticaliui?'tue» 

m aj e stueu X, M pwr t, a majestic carriage ^_ 

maigre, M nrioutcm, lean 7nutton. 

majuscule, F lettre, a capital letter. 
malencontreuxF monrien , an ominous momer.'L 

malingre, M cheval, a sickly horse. 

malicieuse, F ieHiwey a mahciotis tvoman. 

malpropres, F manchettes, slovenly ruffles. " 

malsaine, F saison, an univholesome season ^ 

manifeste, F v^rite, manifest truth. 

marchande, F ville, a trading town. 

marecageux, M terrain, a marshy ground. 

marin, M monstre, a sea monster. 

mantiracs, F pnisssLxice^^ maritime powers. 

martiale, F intrep-.dite, warlike intrepidity. 

massif, M or, soM goid^ 

miUerielle, F subhtaiice, a material substance^ 

Maternelle, F tendresse, a motherly tenderne^e. 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Adjectives. Gender of 



matrice, 

% niauvaise, 

mechanique, 

:^ mechante, 

inedicinale, 

melancholique, 

inelodieuse, 

memorable, 

mesquine, 

methodique, 

militaire, 

minerale, 

mobiliaire, 

tnode&te, 

niodique, 

TTioelleux, 

momentan^, 

monotone, 

montagneux, 

X morne, 

mortelle, 

municipal, 

municipaie, 

mur, 

musical, 

mutuel, 

mvthologique, 

Natal, 

naturelj 

naval, 

navigable, 

nebuleux, 

neigeux, 

necessaire, 

net, 

Eieave, 

jioire, 

nojichalant, 



Substantives. 

F eglise, the mother church, 

F excuse, a dad excuse, 

M art, a mechanical art, 

F creature, a wicked creature. 

F potion , a physical drink- 

F humeur, a melancholy humour" 

F yoix, a melodious voice, 

M evenement, a memorable event. 

F economie, solid economy, 

M discours, methodical discourse. 

F acadetnie. a military academy, 

F eau, mineral water, 

Mbieii, a personal estate, 

F fille, a modest girl, 

M prix, (z moderate piice. 

M drap, a soft substantial cloth. 

M plaisir, a momentary pleasure. 

F voix, a voice of one and t-ke sa?r 
sound, 

M pays, a hilly country, 

M silence, sullen silence, 

F ^^vxQ^ a mortal fever. 

M droit* common laws, 

F \\\\^, a co7'poration towJi, 

M. rhisiUt 7ipe g7'apeS' 

M air, a musical tune, 

M amour, mutual love. 

M dictionnaire, a mythological diction- 
ary, 

M air, the native air 

M penchant, a natural inclination. 

M combat, a sea fight, 

F riviere, a navigable river. 

M [temps /^If^} weather. 

F condition, a necessary conditioth 

M verre, a clean glass, 

F perruque a new wig, 

F culotte, black breeches. 

M donaestique, a careless servant, 



FRENCH TONGUE. 29 

Adjectives. fjender of Substantires. 

notoire^ M vol, a notorious robbery, 

X nouvellc, F mode, a newjashion, 

% nus, M pieds, bare feet. 

Oblique, f" Hgite, an oblique line, 

obscene, F \ie;mXnv^.y an obscene fiictnrei 

obstructif, M remiede, a sto/iping remedy^ 

occuile, F quality, a htdden quality. 

occulaife, M temoiri, an eyewitne^Si 

odoriterantfe, F fleur, an odoriferous flower* 

odieuse, F comparaison,an odious comfiarisom 

Oisif, M ecolier, an idle scholar. 

Olympiqiies, M jeux, the Olymfiic gatnts, 

Olympien, M Jupiter, Olyfnfiic Jove, 

onereuse, F charge, a burthensome emfiloymtttt^ , 

opiniatre, M honime, an obstinate man, 

opulerite, F ville, an opulent city. 

orageux, M vent, an obstinate tvind. 

orgueilleux, M mepris? a firoud scorn. 

originel, M p6che, original mi. 

outrageux, M sdupgon, an offensive su8picio7u 

Pareiine, F religion, the Pagan religion, 

pair, M nombre, an even number. 

pale, M vissLge^ a fiale face. 

pacifique, M roi, peaceable king, 

panique, F terreur, a fiantc fear. 

pardonable, F meprise, a pardonable mistake* 

paresseuse, F servantG^ an idle maid. 

particulier, M soln, a particular care. 

patentes, F lettYeti, letters patent, 

ptternel, M dtvoh\fatherly duty^ 

pathetique, M ion^ a pathetic tone. 

patrimonial, M hien, a patrimonial estate* 

pattu, M p'lgeouj a rough footed pigeot7, 

pedantes, F nnianieres,^erfaw//c manners^ 

pen ale, * F loi, a penal law 

penates, M dieux, household gods. 

pendable, M cas, a hanging matter, 

p^nible, M ouvtaf^e a toilsome ivorh- 
C2 



m 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Adjectives. 

perceptible, 

peremptoire, 

pernicieux, 

perpetual, 

personnelle, 

pertinente, 

pesant, 

t petit, 

philosophale, 

philosophique, 

pleine, 

poetjque, 

pointilleux, 

poissonneux, 

polie, 

poiyglotte, 

pompeux, 

ponctuel, 

poreux, 

posthume, • 

poudreux, 

poussif^ 

pre a] able, 

precieuse, 

precis, 

precoces, 

prefixe, 

preliminare, 

premature, 

piesomptueuse. 

principale, 

probable, 

problematique, 

prochain, 
prodigieux, 
proiond, 
prolixe, 
f prompte. 



Gender of 



Substantives. 



F ia.\isset6t a ftercefitible untruth. 

M argument, aficremfitory firoojl 

M jeu, a fiernicious game, 

M tourment, afierfietual torment, 

F faute, a fiersonalfault, 

F r^pllque, a pertinent reply- 

M paquet, c^heavy bundle, 

M raouchoir, a small handkerchief , 

F -^iftrr a ^ the philosopher^ s stone. 

F question, a philosophical question. 

F bouteille. a full bottle, 

M style, a poetical style. 

M critique, a cavelling critic* 

M etang, a fish-pond well stored. 

F lidition t a polite nation. 

F hiblp. a polyglot bible, 

M equipage, a pompous equipage, 

M horn roe, a punctual man* 

M hon, porous wood- 

M ouvrsi^e^ a posthumous work, 

M souliers. dusty shoes. 

M cheval, a short-winded horse, ^ 

F convention, a previous convention. 

F pierre, a precious stone, 

M jour, a precise day, 

F fruits, hastings, 

F heure, a fixed hour. ^ 

F observarion, a preliminary obser- 
vation, 

M esprit, an U7itimely wit, 

F jeunessf't a presumptuous youth, 

F etude, a chief study. 

M sentiment, a probable opinion, 

F pi^oposition, a problematical propQ- 
sitio7i, 

M printemps, next spring, 

M colosse, a prodigious cohssus, 

Mv fosse, a deep ditch. 

M discourN, aprolix discourse^ 

F coUrCy sudden an^er. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



31- 



Adjectives. Gender of Substantives. 

public, M affront, fiublic affront, 

pueril, M amusement, childish amusement- 

pyramidale, Mcolonn^f a fiyramidal column- 

Quadrangulaire, F plsLCe^ ajour-sguare filace- 

querelieuse, - F iemme, a quarrelsome wife. 

quotidien, M pain, daily dread, 

Raboteuse, F planche. a rugged shelf, 

raisonnable, F demande, a reasonable demand, 

rapide, M cours, a rafiid stream. 

rare, M oiseau, an uncommon bird, 

rebelle, M sujet, a rebellious subject, 

recente, F plaie, a recent wound. 

reciproque, F ^d6Vn€, reciprocal fidelity, 

recreative, F lecture, an entertaining lecture. 

redoubtable, ¥ mort, a dreadful death' 

reelle, F perte, a real loss. 

reform^, M officier> a rejormed officer^ 

regulier, M plan, a regular plan. 

remarquable, F enseigne, a remarkable sign, 

reprehensible, M precede, a blameable proceeding , 

respectueuse, F reponse, a respectjul ansv)er. 

riche, F robe, a rich gown. 

ridicule, M habillement. a ridiculous dress 

rigoureuse, F peine, a rigorous pain* 

royal, M palais> a royal palace, 

rouge, M vin? red wine, 

' roux, . M cheveux, red hair. 

^rubicond, M visage, a ruddy face. 

rude, M hiver, a hard winter- 

ruineuse, F depense, a ruinous expense^ 

rustique, F vie, country life. 

Sablonneuse, F terre, sandy ground. 

sage, F conduite, wise behaviour 

sain, M fruit, sound fruit, 

Salique, F loi, the Salic law. 

sanguinaire, M conquerant, a blood-thirsty cm> 
queror. 



32 A GliAiVlMAll OF THE 

Adjectirei Gender of Siibstatitiv€sl 

satirique, M trait, a satirical holt. 

savant, M. v\\sxc\^^, a learned work. 

sauvage* M canard, a wild duck. 

scabreuse, F en\.v^Xiv\se^ a dangerous undertak- 

sec, ^\ Wn^Qy dry linen. 

scientifique, F \)r€iQ,ce.^ a learned firef ace. 

scorbutique, F maladie, scorbutical sicknesio 

secret, M art, a secret art* 

seditieux, M ecrit, a seditious luriting. 

sempiternelie, F Vieille, an old woman. 

serieuse, F r^prim^indc, a serious re/iri7nand» 

severe, M ton, a severe tone. 

similaire^ M son, a similar sound* 

sincere, M ami, a sincere friend. 

sinistre, M presage, anurducky omen. 

soigneux, M jardinier, a careful gardener. 

solide, M fdndennent, asolidjoundatioru 

solitaircy F \\e, a retired life. 

solvable, M debiteur, a solvent debtor. 

sonobre, F mdiXmie, a dark morning. 

soluble, M prohlcmct a soluble /irodtemj> 

somptueiix, M repas, a sumfituous mrnh 

:{: sot, M mKY(:k.€y a silly bargain, 

spacieux, M jardin, a spacious garden. 

specieux, M pretexte, a sfieci&us pretence. 

^piritueuse» F liqueirr, a spirituous liquor. 

splendide, F entree, a splendid entry. 

sterile, M arbre, a barren tree. [ty^ 

Stoi'que, F insensibtbte, a stoical insensiMi'% 

studieiix> M icdlier, a studious scholar* 

suave, F odeur, a sweet smell. 

sublime, M siyle^ a sublime style. 

subreptice^ F dispense^, a suireptitious dispensa^^ 

(ion, 

succincte, F analyse* a short analysis* [^tef* 

suffisant, M temoignage, a sufficient charac^ 

superbe, M batinient, a magnificent building' 

superstitieuse, F pratique, a superstitious practice^ 

|urnatureL M si^ntt a supernatural sign^ 



FRENCH TONGUE. S3 

Adjectives. Gender of Substantives, 

suspect, M dessein, a susficcted design* 

Tacite, M consentement, a tacit conseiit* 

tardifs, IVJ raisins, tardy grapes* 

t^meraire, M combat, a rash combat. 

tendre, M poulet, a tender chicken. 

terrible, F epouvante, a terrible fright, 

tiede, M \.h€ , lukewarm tea- 

timide, M Yxqvv^^ a fearful h^e. 

tolerable, M tn'dl^atoleradle evil, 

tortueiix, M ruisseau. a winding rivulet. 

touffue, F haie, a bushy hedge* 

tricnnal, M. h2i\[y a triennial lease* 

triomphal, M 2lvc^ a triumphal arch- 

% tris*^e, M souvenir, a sad remembrance, 

tumuitueuse, F compagnie, a tumultuous com- 
pany. 

tuil-bulente, F r^publique, a turbulent republic- 

Turque, F religion, the Turkish religion* 

tyrannique, M ^ouwoir, tyrannical power, 

Ulterieur, M examen, a further examination. 

unanime, M consentemcnt, an unanimoui; 

consent 

uniforme, M rapport, an uniform report 

unique, M iils, an only son. [pledge 

universelle, F connoissance, universal know- 

urgente, F nccG^s'it^, a pressing necessity. 

utile, F decouverte, an useful discovery. 

Vague, F signification, a vague significa- 
tion* 

vaiilant, M g6n6ra\f a valiant ge7ieral' 

vaine, F pens^e, a vain thought. 

valide, M contrat, a valid contract, 

variable, M temps, variable weather* 

vaste, F prairie, a vast meadow* 

venimeuse, F araign^e, a venomous spider 

vefd, M tapis, a green carpet. 

Yereuse, F pomme,'^ ^ciggoty apple- 



3^' 

Adjectives. 

veridique^ 

vertueuse, 

viagere, 

victorieuse, 

:j: vieux, 

vieoureuse,, 

visible, 

voeale, 

volage, 

volontaire^ 

vraie, 

vide, 

vulgaire, 



A GRAMMAk OF THE 



Gender of Substantives, 

M cjazettjer, a true gazetted^ 

F femrae, a virtuous woman. 

F pen Him), an annuity- 

F arwee, a victonous army^ 

M pont, an old bridge* 

F defense, a vigorous de/mc^^ 

F eclipse, a visible eclifise' 

¥ musiqiiCt vocal music > 

F jeunesse?^cAr/*f youth. 

M tneurtre, a wilful mvrdef^ '^ 

F wons^}^*^'^ true news. 

M potman em/ity/ioto 

F opinion, a vulgar ofiinion. 

M predicateur, « zjsmwsfirea.ekfK 



FRENCH TONGUE 



35 



CHAPTER IV. 

yf List of Adjectives, mth the manner of their b^ing 
filaced before or after their Substantives^ and s/itir 
Signification in either Case- 

JUSTE prixj a reason- homme juste, a just man, 
ble rate. [fnce, 

juste defense, a just de- action juste, a just action^ 

^ bas prix, at a low rate, action &asse,a wcawac^/ori, 

te baf^ ventre, the iower les Pays-bas,* the lonv 

part of the beliy. countries^ 

wne mure deliberation, a du truit inur, ripe fr- at' 

mature deliberation 

maigre cliet-e, ftoorfare* viande tnaVgre, lean meat. 

v\ved(mltur,a^mart/iain esprit \nl a lively nvit- 

bon horrime, a man who hommeb'm,agoodnatur'' 

means no harm, or a ed inan^ 

simfiie man* [fellow [man. 

pauvre homme* a sorry homme pauvre, a r 

graadhomme,c/,§'re'a?ma72. homme ^rand, a tail ma?!, 

certaine nouvelle, a ccr- nouvelle certaine, true, or 

tain /liece of neivS' certain news' [ man^ 

sage-femme» a midwife* femmesage, a sober wo- 

grossefemme, a/argezi>o- femme grosse, a woman 

?na7i. big with child* 

galanl homme, a complete homme galant,a man com- 

gentleman^ " /lUtsant to the ladies* 

Ic grand monde, the great air grand, a noble aspect, 

folks. 

plaisant homme, an ifn- homme plaisant? a plea- 

pertinent fellow* sant man* 
vilain homme, a disagree- hoaui»e vilain, a niggard- 
able man, ly fellow* 
furieux animal, a large aniaa:il furieux, a fierce 

creature* creature* 

mort-bois, wood of no va- bois mart, dead trees, 

hie. 

* III other cases, speaking of countries, the adjective i^oes 

before, as le bus Languecloc, la basse Normandie, la basse 
8axe, la htiute Saxc !a ba^re Aiitriche ; le bete Khin, le haiit 
ilWn, §cc. 



A GRAMMAR OF THP: 



niorte-eau, the nvater at 
the bottom of the sea- 

en droite ligne, straight 
along' 

franc coquin,a very rogue, 

iranc-sale.«tt allowance of 

salt. 
i'r2iuche'\€vit6,nakedtruth 
f ranc-tillac,^/je lowermost 

deck' 
basse coun an inner yard, 
basse-fosse, a dungeon^ 

le bas bord, the larboard 

of a ship,, 
les basses voiles, the main, 

and mizzen sails. 
le bas peuple, the mob' 

les basses cartes, the small 

cards, 
cher ami, dear/riend. 
clairs deniers, clear or 

spare money. 
un doux zephir, a gentle 

gale- 
dure iDere, dura mater. 
faux frais, extraordinary 

expenses* 
fin matois, a sly cunning 

man, 
fol espOir, a foolish hope- 
lol amour, Cupid. 
je haut bout, the upper 

end. 
menus piaisirs, pocket- 
money, 
molle condescendance, a 

duU cornpUance, 
les pales couleurs, the 

green sickness, 
rou^e bofil, a bumper. 



eau morte, standing water. 
li^ne droite, a straight^ 

horn me franc, a7i honest-^ 

downright man, 
arbre frauc, an ungrafted 

or real tree, 
marchandise franche,.^e^ 

juerchandise, [zen, 

bourgeois franc, afree citi- 
voix basse, a low voice, E j 
riviere basse> a shallottf^ 

river. 
faire m^in bsLHse^to put all 

to the sword, 
coeur bas, a base soul, 

avoir la vue basse, to be 

short-sighted, 
esprit bas, a mean wit. 

habit cher a dear suit. 
du linon clair, clear lawn. 

un billet doMK.a love-letter,} 
viande dure, tough ineat. 
cheval faux, a stumbling 

horse, 
diamant fin, a right diar- 

mond, 
peintre tbp, a mad painter. 
poete fou, a mad poet. 
ia chambre haute, the up.^ 

per house, 
jambe"^^ menues, small ^ 

slender legs. 
vie molk, an easy life. 

visage pale, paleface. 

des yeux rouges, blood- 
shot eyes. 



PRENCH TONGUE. ^1 

rcfiige-gor'ge> a robin red- couleur rouge, red colour. 

breast, [field* 

rase campagne, an ofien velours ras, shorn velvet. 
saine doarine triie doc- temps sain, %uholesoim 

trine- weather. 

la saine raison, soundrea- )U^emenisam, sound judg- 

son*^ ment, 

3e vains efforts, x;am ew- peine vaine, unfirojitable 

deavours. [5072. trouble. 

foible raison, a weak rea- I'age foible, infancy. 
vaine gloi re, vain glory. hom m e vain , a vain-glo - 

rious man. 
iunVifressentiment,a/ii;e- des yeux vifs, sfiarklinc; 

ly sentiment. eyes. 

double biere, strong beer, acte double, dufdicate of a 

'writing. [horse, 

Yive douleur, a s7nartfiain, cbeval vif, a mettlesome 
vif-argent, quick-silver, couleur v'we.alively colour^ 
de Vive voix, by noord of teint vif, a lively complex - 

mouth- ion, 

ferme resolution, jfrm re- muralHe ferme, a firm 

solution^ wall. 

de vastes desseins, great un esprit vai5te>«^rm^^e 

designs. nius. 

vieille mode,aw oldfashion. vin vieux, old wine, 
laLverte}eunesse,yout/i/:dS' bais vert, green wood, 
une verte reponse, a sharp fruit vert, unripe fruit. 

answer. 
me verte reprimande, a pois verts, ^^e;z /zra**?. 

sharp reprimand, [bat, [man. 

apre combat, a cruel com- wn esprit apre, an austere 
un vert g^lmt, a brisk gal' une tete verte, a hare- 

^^^^' brained fellow, 

la tendre jeunesse, tender Page tendre, lender a^e, 

^.^"'^^- .., \soiL 

m^\%rQ YQ\^^s,tuttful cheer-, terroir mai^^e, a barren 
roaigre auteur, a pitiful style,maigre,a /zoor 5ifv/^, 
, author, ^ 

froide mine, cold look- viande froide, cold meat. 

ample pouvoir,yw///iow^r. discours ample, a diffusa 
^ discourse, 

a plus forte raison, how raison forte, a strong rca:- 

Tymchmore- son, " ' 

D ^ 



38 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

CHAPTER V. I 

Of the notes and points made use of in nvriting French 

THE several marks used in writing French are the 
following : ,..,,,- ^ 

A comma, unevirgule, (,) divides the lesser part 
of a sentence, and stops the reader s voice till he 
can count one. ^_ ^ " . , v j. .j 

A semicolon, une virgule & un pomt^ (;) divides 
the greater part of a sentence, at which the reader 
must stop till he can count two. ^ , ,. _ 

A colon, deux points. (:) marks the half of a sen- 
tence, at which the reader must stop till he can 
count i:Ar<?^.— Semicolons and colons are sometimes 
used promiscuously. ^ . 

A period, or full point, unpomt (.) is used when 
the sentence is fully ended, and requires a pause 
till he can count/owr. 

A note of interrogation, un signe d interrogation, (?^ 
is used in askkjg a question. ,,,.,. ,„ • 

A note of admiration, un signe d' admiration.. (!) is 
used when we adift ire, v;bh, or wonder ; it serves 
also to express some violent passion. - 

^ \xi apostrophe, un apostrophe, ( ) is set over the 
place where some letter is lett out ; as Famour, in- 
stead oHe amour, /ore- ,.,. 

A hyphen, un tiret, ou un trait d'umon, (-) joina 
words or syllables together ; a*- parla-t-i). did he 
sfieak ? parJe-t-eV.e, dots she speak ? 

A cedilla, tine cedille, {q) is plac.'d under c, when 
h is pronounced like s, berore a, o, or u. ^ 

\p2Lrent.hesis.unepare?ithe8e\) includes somethmg 
not necessary to the seiise, but brought in to explain 
«r illustrate it, and is very seldom used. 

* These three vowels, g, e, i, when the following wor«3^ 
begin with a vowel or an h not aspirated, are left out in h rencl^ 
in the following words : , ., , d ^3 

* Le, la, je, me, te, se, de, «e, ne, que ; I', j', m , t , s , <i , e 
n', qu', puisqu', kc. 



FBENCH TONGUE. 39 

A dialysis, un trema^ (••) parts two vowels coming 
logether, a^id sij^niii s their making two sy)^al)les, as 
Saiil ^toit roi d'Israel ; Saul was king of Israel, 

There are several other notes made use of by au- 
thors and printers ; but it would be needless to trou- 
ble the learner here with any. 

O Bs. I. Le^ la, ce, suffer no elision before onze^ onzi^me 
"mi \ neither in the imperative mood, as laissez-ie ailer, let 
Hfti g& ; except when followed immediately by en ov y, as, 
laissez I'y aller, let him ^o thither* 

Obs. II. Si suffers an elision onl) before il or ils. 
I, Obs. III. Ld^ there, and qui, who, are never contracted, 
y. Obs. IV. e m grande is contracted in some words begin- 
ning with a consonant, as, %v2^nd^ mire, grandmother ,k grand'- 
,peiDe^ -with much ado, 6fc. 



CHAPTER VL 

Of Accents made tcse of in 'writing Fre^ich. 

AN accent is a note put over a vowel, at the end 
of a syllable or word, to denote its sound, quanti- 
ty, nature, <3r signification. 

An accent is either acute, aigu, (') ; grave, grave ^ 
C); or circumflex, drco^eore* ('). 

The first is placed upon e, when it has a slender 
sound ; as in ete, the summer ; except in the words 
of the second person plural, because^ is joined with 
z, as vous ainnez, ye love. 

The second accent is sometimes put upon e. when 
it has an open sound ; as in saliere, salt-ceUer ; in 
some monosyllables, ending with an s^ pres, near^ tres, 
-very, most. See* also at the end of words of rnore than 
one syllable, as in progresi progress ; apres after- Ic 
is used in the last case, when an s follows. 

This accent is likewise used to distinguish arti- 
cles, adverbs, verbs, prepositions, and conjunctions, 
as in the following words : 

a, has. a, aPov to^ 

la, the, la, there- 



40 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



de la, of, or from the. 
des, some, of orfrom-the^ 
ga, come on. . 
Gu, or- 



de-lki from thenct. 
deS' que, as soon a^« 
§a. hither. 
ou, where. 



N. B. Compounds follow the same rule, as la- 
hain, above ; la-bas, down, there, below ; lk»dessus, 
ufion that ; la-dessous, under that, under ihere ; de 
la, thence^ from thence ; par la, that way ; celui-B,> 
celle-la, that- 

This accent is never placed in the beginning or in 
the middle of words, when an e\% followed by a con- 
sonant, with which it makes a syllable. 

The third jis placed commonly upon a long vowel, 
as» in age, age ; fete, a feasts and particularly upoG 
tjiose which were formerly spelt with an «, as in 
abime, an abyss ; les ndtres, oursy &c. 

In some monosyllables, as in mat, a vmst. 

At the end of some words ending with t^ as in foret^ 
aforest-^ 

In the third person singular of the preterite sul> 
junctive, as, qu'il parlat, that he might sfieak, to dis- 
tinguish the subjunctive from the indicative, il parlaj, 
he spake* 

Observe that words of the first conjugation take a 
t, besides the accent, in the conjunctive mood, and 
none in the indicative : whereas all other words 
have a t^ in the indicative and subjunctive moods. 

Cardinal ]S[ttjja- 
bers. . 

1, one, 

2, two. 

3, three, 
^yfour. 
5,fiv€. 

6, six. 

7, seven. 

8, eight, 

9, nine. 

10, teii, 

11, eleven, 

12, twelve, 

13, thirteen. 



Numerical ' 


Les Nombres 


Letters. ' 


CardinauXc 


I. 


un. 


II. 


deux» 


III. 


trois. 


IV. 


quatre. 


V. 


cinq- 


VI. 


six. 


VII. 


sept 


VIIL 


huit. 


IX. 


neuf. 


X. 


dix. 


XI. 


onze« 


xiri 


douze. 


XIIL 


trei2;e. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



41 



lAt^ fourteen, 
ISjifteen. 
16, sixteen, 
ir, seventeen. 
is, eighteen. 

19, nineteen. 

20, twenty. 

21, twenty-one. 
2Zy twenty 'two. 

and so on to 

30, thirty. 

31, thirty-one, 
^2, thirty-two. 

and so on to 
AQyforty. 
Ai\^ forty 'One. 
A%fortijtwo^ 

and so on to 
SO^ffty. 
5l,ffty'0ne. 
^%fifiy'two. 

and so on to 

60, sixty. 

61, sixty-one. 

62, sixty-two. 
and so on to ^ 

70, seventy. 

71, seventy-one. - 

72, seventy- two. 
and so on to 

80, eighty. 
81 y eighty ~07ie, 
82, eighty -two, 
and so on to 

90, ninety. 

91, ninety-one. 

92, ninety- two, 
and so on to 

100, one hundred. 
200, two hundred. 
300, ^^r/?e himdred. 



XIV. 

XV 

XVI. 

XVII. 

XVIII. 

XIX. 

XX. * 

XXL 

XXII. 

XXX. 
XXXI. 

xxxn, 

XL. 

XLI. 

XLII. 

L. 

LI. 

LIL 

LX. 
LXL 
LXII. 

LXX. 
LXXL 
LXXII. 

LXXX. 
LXXXI. 
LXXXIL 

XC. 

XCI. 

XCH. 

C 

CC 

CCC- 

D 2 



quatorze, 
*qu?nze. 
seize, 
dix -septa 
dix huit. 
dix-neuf 
vingt. 

vingt-&-un. 
vingt-deux. 

ju^gu'd , 
trenti?. 
trente-6c un- 
trente-deux. 

jusqu^Q. 
qaarante. 
quarante-&-uri* 
quaranie-deiix, 

jusqu'd 
cinquante. 
cinquante-6c-un. 
cinquante-deux. 

ju^qu^d 
soixante. 
soixante-^-un- 
soixante-deuX' 

jusqu^d 
soixante-&:-dix. 
soixante-8c onze> 
soixante -Sc-douze- 

jusqu^d 
quatre-vingts. 
quatre- vingt-un. 
qaatre- vingt-deux 

jusqu^d 
quatre-vingt-dtx. 
qiiatre-vingt-onze. 
qnatre-vtnet-douze 

jusqu^d 
cent. 

deux cens. 
trois cen< 



42 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



cccc. ^ 


quatre cens^o 


D, or 13. 


cinq cens. 


DC, or 13c. 


six cens. * 


Dec, orl^CC. 


sept cens. 


DCCCor 


huit cens. 


loccc. 




DCCCC, QT 


neuf cens^ 


locccc. 




M,or ClQ. 


mille. 



400, four hundred, 
500, Jive hundred, 
600. six hundred. 
700. seven hundred. 
800, eight hundred. 

900, ni?ie hundred, 

1000, one thousand* 



These numbers never vary their termination, ex- 
cept u?i, which makes une in the feminine : eent^ 
"which makes cents or sens in the pkiral ; mille is writ- 
ten ndl, when we write the date of the year, in this 
case cent does not vary ; as, 
1796, one thousand se- MDGCXCVI. mil-sept-cent 

ven hundred and quittre-vingt- seize- 

ninety-six. 

The words septanle, ociante, and nonante are obsolete ; 
hmtante and neuvunte have been made use of only by some 
calculators. The advantage of admitting these words septan- 
te, huitante^ neuvante, which preserve their roots, is obvious 
enough to those who have numbers to put down, in figures 
under the telling of another personi Six-vingt C six score J^^ 
was the common appeHation tor 120 in the last century, but 
has been abandoned : quatre-vingt ffour score J will proba- 
bly soon experience the same fate. Those false numerical_ 
appellations are entirely rejected by Mathematicians, 



Ordinal Numbers 

l^t^ Jirst\ 

2d, second. 

3d, third. 

Axh^ fourth. 

SWiyfifth. 

6th. sixth. 

7th, seventh, 

8th, eighth, 

9tb, ninth. 
lOtli, tenth. 
11 .t), eleventh, 
12Va; twelfth, 
13th, thirteenth. 



Les Nombres Ordinaux. ' 
ler. premier, M. premiere, FJ 

2^. second. 1V1. seconde, F«| 

3^. troisieme, M. 6c F. 

4^. quatrieme. 

5^. cinquieme. 

6®. sixieme. 

7^' septieme. 

8^. huilieme' 

9^- neuvieme- 
10^' dixie me. 
11^. onziemc- 
12^' dr'uzieme- 
13«. trei::ieme^ 



^^^ FRENCH TONGUE. 


Uth,fourteenth. 


I4e. quatorzieme. 


15th,Jift€€nth, 


15e. quinzieme. 


16th, sixteenth. 


16e. seizieme. 


17th, sei^enteenth. 


I7e. dix-septieme. 


18th, eighteenth. 


18^. dix-huitieme* 


19th, nineteenth. 


19^ dix-neuvieme- 


20th twentieth. 


20^ vingtieme. 


2lst, twenty -first. 


21e. vingt-et-unieme 


22d^ twenty-second. 


22e. vingt-deuxieme- 


and so on, £ce. 


Isf ainsi cle mite^ 


Once, 


une fois; 


twice^ 


deux fois. 


thricey 


trois fois. 


four times. 


quatre fois. 



45 



First, or in the first filace, premie rement,oz^ en pre- 

wiier lieu. 

sm:ondly, or in the secorid secondement, ou en se^ 

filace, cond lieu. 

thirMy, or in tJie third troisiemementj owen troi- 

flctce, sieme lieu. 

fourthly, or in the fourth quatriepiementj on en 

place. quatneme lieu- 



The Months of the Year. 
January^ Jarjvier. 
February Fevrier. 
March, Mars. 
AjiriL Avril. 
'May, Mai, 
Juncy Juin. 
July, Juillet. 
August, Aout. 
September, SeptembrCo 
October. Uctobre. 
November, Novembre. 
December^ Decembre. 

The Seasons of the Year. 
The Spring, ieprintenips. 



The Summer, Tete. 

The Autumn, I'automne. 

The Winter, I'hiver. 

The Days of the Week 
Monday, Lundi 
Tuesday. Mardi. 
Wednesday, Mercredi*' 
Thursday, Jeudi. 
Friday, Vendredi. 
Saturday, Samedi- 
Sunday, Dimanche. 

The Four Elements 
The fire, ic feu. 
The air, I'air' 



44 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



The earthy la terre. 
The water ^ Teau- 

The Cardinal Points. 

The east, Porient, ou I'est. 
The west, roccident, ou 

roiaest. [sud. 

The s&uth, le midi, ou le 
The north, le nord, ou le, 

septentrion. 

The Five Senses. . 

The sight y la vue. 
The hearing, Tou'ie. 
The feeling, le toucher. 
The taste, le goiit* 
The smell, Todorat, 



The Four Divisions 
of the World. 

^urofie : y Europe^ 
^sia, J'Asie. . 
4^te, TAfriquei 
America, rAmerique, 

Of the Moon. 

JVewmpon, nouvelle lune. 
Fi7'st quarter^ premier 

q 11 artier. 
Full moon pleine lune. 
Last quarter, dernierquar- 

tier. 



Of Geography. 

Terms relatingto the land. 
I. 

A continent, iin continent. 

^^? jWof^?^, une lie. 



A/ieninsula>\me presqu'tle^ 
An isthmus, un isthme. 
Afiromontory, un promon- 
toire. [tague. 

A mountain^ une mon- 
A coast or shore, une cOte- 

II. 

Terms relating to Water. 

The ocean^ Tocean. 

A gulf Mil golfe. 

A straight, un detroit. 

A channel, un canal. 

Alake^vinXsLZ, 

A river, une riviere. 

Of the Weather» 

The heat^ le chaud. 
The coldi le froid. 
The rain, la piuie. 
The dew, la ros^e. 
The hail, la grele. 
The S7WW, la neige. 
The frost, la gelee. 
The thanv, le d^gel [lard; 
^fog- '>^ ^^2^^< un brouil- 
TheglazedfrostM verglas. 
A storm un orage. 
A temfiest, urse tempetc. 
A flash of lightnings un 

eclair. 
The thunder, le tonoerre; 
The thunderbolt i la foud.re. 
The rainboiv, Tarc-en-CieK 
The wind, le vent. 
A hurricane, un ouragan. 

The AoKs of Men 

Birth, la naissance. 
Childhood, VenisLUC^. 
Youthf la jeuness^ 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



45 



IManhood, la virility. 
Old Age, 1^ vieillesse. 
Deaths la mort. 



Arts and Sciences- 

Divinity ^ la theologie. 

PMo5q/z/i2/, la philosophies 

luOgic^ la logique* 

jYatural Philoaojihxj ^ la 
physique. 

Physic^ la medecinea 

Surgery^ la chirurgie. 

JLaw, le droit. 

Gramrnar^ la gram m aire. 

JRhetoric, la rhetorique- 

Poetry^ )a poesie. 

Mathematics^ les mathe- 
matiques. 

Astrology^ rastrologie. 

Cltronologyy la chronolo- 
gic. 

Arithmetic, rarithmetique* 

Algebra., i'algebre. 

Geometry, la geometrie. 

Geography, la gi^ographie. 

Perspective ^•Si perspecti ve- 

Diallings la gnomenique^ 

Surveying, I'arpentage. 

Architecture, I'architec- 
ture 

Portifications, les fortifica- 
tions. 

JVavigation, la navigation. 

Music, la musique. 

Chymistry, la chy mie. 

Painting, la peinture- 

Statuary 1 la sculpture* 

Fencings I'eserime. 

Riding, le manege. 

Dancing, la dan^e. 

^mwiTzg-jledessein, 



The Periods of Time. 

^n instant, un instants 
^ moment, un moment, 
w^ minute, une minute. 
^ quarter qf an hour, un 

quart d'heure. 
//h^ an hour, une demi- 

heure. 
An hour, une heure. 
./^ day, un jour. 
7%^ morning, le matin, 
JVbon, midi. 

Afternoon, rapres-midi" 
J7z^ evening, le solr. 
Midnight, minuit- 
^ wed'A:, une semainc* 
A month, un mois. 
A year, un an 
./^Tz a^^, un siecl6 
Eternity^ reternite- 
The beginning,- le Coiij* 

mencement, 
The middle, le milieil* 
The end, la fin. 

Parts of the Body, 

The head,\2itHe, 
The hair, les cheveux. 
The face, le visage. ' ' 
The forehead, le front. 
The features, les traits. 
The eyes, les yeux. 
T^e eye-brows^ les sour- 

cils, 
7%e eye-lids, les paupie° 

res. 
7%e nose, le nez. 
77/e nostrils, les nariiies., 
TTie cheeks, les joues. 
7%e /i/z5. les levres. 
The mouthy la bouchf .-^ 



46 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



The teeth^ les dents. 
The ^U7ns, lesgencives. 
Thejaiv, la machoire. 
The throaty le gosier. 
The ears, les oreilles. - 
The chiUy le menton. 
The neck, le cou. 
The shoulders, les epaules. 
The arms, les bras. 
The elboiVy le coude. 
The lurist, le poignet. 
The hand, la main. 
The fingers^ les doigts* 
The thumbs le pouce. 
The nails^ les ongles. 
The fist, le poing. 
The knees, les genoux. 
"The legs, lesjacnbes. 
The feet, les pieds. 
The heels, \tst2i\on^. 
The hip, la hanche. 

Wearing Apparel- 
A coat, un habit. 
A waistcoat, une veste. 
The sleeves y les nnanches. 
The buttons, les boutoiisv 
The button-holes, les bou- 

tonnieres. 
The pockets, les poches- 
A fob, un gousset. 
7%e lining, la doublure. 
Linen, ou linge. 
7%e ruffles, les manchet- 

tes. 
*/^ handkerchkf un mou- 

choir. 
Stockings, des has. 
Garters, des jarretieres. 
'SZioes dessouliers. 
Buckles, des boucles* 
.i //«^, un chapcau. 



./^ wzg*, une pcrruque. 
Gloves, des gants. 
^ mzf^, un manchon^ 
^ com^, un peigne. 
A sword, writ ep^e. 
Boots, des bottes. 
^ riTtg-, une bague. 
A %vatch, une naontre* 
A snuff-box fXxnt tabatiere^ 
A purse, une bourse. 
Spectacles, des lunettes. 
A petticoat, une jupe* 
A gown, une robe- 
A shirtyMue chemise. 
An apron, un tablier. 
Afa?it un eventail. 
Ear-rings, des boucles d'o- 

reille. 
A pin, une ^pingle. 
A needle, une aiguille. 
A pin cushion, une pelote. 
Sweet water, eau de sen- 

tear. 
Powder, de la poudre. 
The powder-bo Jt:, la boite 

a poudre. 
Ribbands, des rubans- 
Jewels, des bijoux. 
Scissars, des ciseaux. 
Fattens, des patins. 
Cloth, du drap. 
Zw^, de la lisiere. 
Muslin, de la mousseline. 
Lawn, du linon. 
Gauze, de la gaze. 
Buckram, du bougran^ 
Dimitty, du basin. 
Velvet, du velours. 
Camblet, du camelot. 
Drw^^e/^ <lu droguet« 
Ratteen, de la ratine- 
Lustring, du tafetas- 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



47 



Household Furni- 
ture- 

A bedy un lit. 

The curtains, les rideaux. 

A warming pan ^ \xa^ bas- 

suioire- 
The bed-clothes, les cou- 

vertures. 
AfiillonVt un oreiller. 
A mattrass. iin matelas, 
A straw -bed, wne. paillasse 
A feather 'bed ^ un lit de 

pluties. 
The tester, le fond du lit. 
The top, of the bed, le ciel 

du lit. 
Tfi£ bed's feety les pieds 

du lit. 
Ahouse^MiXs^ maison. 
The hangings^ la tapisse- 

rie. 
A looking glass, un miroir* 
^^f/zair. line chaise. 
A table, une table- 
A carpet, un tapis* 
A table-cloth, une nappe- 
A plate, une assiette. 
A nafikin, une serviette- 
A knife, un couteau. 
A fork une fourchette. 
A spoon, une cuiller."* 
A salt celler, une saliere. 
A dish, un plat. 
A porringer, une ^cuelle- 
A baso7i, un bassrn. 
A towels un essui-main. 
A bottle, une bouteille. 
A glass. uiiN^'^s^re. 
A corkscre%v, un tire-bou- 

chon. 
1 candle, une chandelle. 



A candlestick, un chande- 
lier. 

A ivax'light, une bougie. 

The snuffers, les rnouchet- 
tes. '^ [reau. 

A chest of drawers, un bu*- 

A trunk uncoffre, 

A box^ une boite- 

A cradle, un berceau. 

The fire, le feu. 

The chimney, le cheminee* 

The hearth, le foyer- 

The belloivs, le souffle t« 

A grate, une grille. 

A gridiron, un gril. 

The tongs, les pincettes. 

The shovel, la pelle- 

The poker, le fourgon. 

The ashes, les cendres. 

The flames, la iiamrne- 

The smoke, la fumee- 

77/e 500/^, la suie- ^ 

Matches, des allumettes. 

The tinder, la ifieche. 

A tinder-box, une boite a 
fusil. 

A flint, une pierre a fusil- 

The steely ie fusil, le bri- 
qiiet- 

A kettle, un chaudron. 

A pot, un pot- 

Apot-lid, \m couvercle. 

A flesh-hook, un crochet 

A trevet, nn trepied- 

A skimmer, une ecumoire. 

Afrying-pan, une poele. 

A pudding-pan, une tour- 
l^ere. 

A spit, une broche. 

A jack, un tournebrocheo 

^ broom, un balai- 

^ rubber, un torchon* 



* r is pronoun cecf. 



43 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



ji drififii7ig'fiany une leche 

frite. 
v^ chafing -dish^wn rechaud. 
Asieve^ un tarwis. 
A washing tub y une euve» 
Pincersy des tenailles. 
-A naily un clou. 
A hamin€i\ un marteau. 
A cidlendeTy un couloir. 

Herbs, Plants, and 
Fruit. 

TurnifiSy des navets. 
CarrotSy des carottes. 
Red-beetS'y des betraves. 
RadisheSy des raves. 
Sfiinagry des epinards. 
Cahbagesy des choux. 
CauliflowerSy des choux 

fleurs. 
Artkhokesy des artichaux. 
AsfiaragUH, des asperges. 
Lettuce y de la laitue. 
EndivCy de la chicoree. 
Celery y dii celeri. 
Parsley y dti persiK 
Purslainy du pourpier. 
CresseSy du ere sson. 
Sorrel y cle Toseille. 
OnionSy des oie^nons. 
Garlic y de Tail^ 
Shallots y d^s eGhalotles. 
L's^ksy des porreaux. 
Thyme y du thym. 
Chervil du cerfeuiL 
^S^^d-, d* 'a saua:e. 
Melons y Jes melons, [bres- 
CucumberSy des cancom- 
Gourdsy des citrouilles. 
PompionSy des courges. 
J^ettlesy Jes orties. 
/'^'f^r/z, de la fougere: 



Thistles y des chardons; 
AfioweTy une fleur. 
•/^ m/z/^, une tulippe. 
^ x^?o/iP^, une Violette. 
A pinky un ceillei. 
•/^ gilliftoivery une giroiSee. 
A poppy, \m pavot. 
Wild-popjiy y^M coquelicot 
iyo//z/, du houx. 
^ ^r^e, un arbre. 
^ shruby un arbrisseau. 
^ wall-tree y un espalier* 
BrambleSy des ronces. 
»/4 ^Aor/j, une epine. 
Afiplesy des pommes. 
PearSy des poires. 
Cherries y des cerises. 
Plumbsy des prunes. 
Almondsy des amandes. 
Peachesy des peches. 
jPz^-^, des figu€s^ 
ChesnutSy des chAtaignes. 
WalnutSy des noix. 
Small nutSy des noisettes. 
FilbertSy des avelines. 
OrangeSy des oranges. 
CitronSy des Citrons. 
Grapes^ du raisin. [les, 
Gooseberriesy des groseil- 
StrawberrieSy des fraises. 

Of the Study and the 
School. 

Papery du papier. 
Blotting Jiapa\ du papier 

bronillard. 
Brown papery du papier 

^ris. 
Giltpapevy du papier dore. 
./? <7z^ir<? of papery une maiis 

de paper. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 49 

^ sheet offiafier, une feuil A seal, nn cachet. 

le de papier. Pocket-book, des tablettQS, 

^^f^^ff^^fi^^^^^^^^^^^ ^ ruler, \iue regie. 
c ..o^.^- J writing, une ecriture. 

A letter, une lettre. 
A syllable, une syllabe^ 
A word, UD nnot. 
An accent, un accent. 
Afihrase, une phrase- 
•^ sentence^ une sentence* 
\4fteinod, une periode- 
An exercise, un theme. 
A translation, une traduc- 
^ tion. 

Verses, des vers. 
jProse, de la prose, 
^ fi^e^X:, un pupitre. 



de papier 
A book, un liyre- 
Afiage, une pige- 
v^ /^c/; un feuil let- 
The margin, la marge. 
The ink, I'enCre. 
The ink-horn, I'ecritoire 
Xlotton, du coton. 
Afien, une plume- 
The nib-, Iq bee- 
The slit, la fente- 
Afienknife, un canif. 
Z)i^5^, de la poussi^re, 
Sand, durable, 



/i^ J -^--»w. . ^ ac^AT, un pupitre. 

-^fio'mder-boa: Mnpoudtiev Parchment dJpJzhemm 

rn^JllT •'^°"- r J^^'^^^-l'o^rd, dl cartel 
^ap de la ere. [ter. ^ /Wo?, un pate. 
^J^fl/er*, des pains a cache- ^ fiendl. un crayon. 

FAMILIAR AND EASY DIALOGUES 

FOR YOUNG BEGINNERS. 

I^IR your most humble Monsieur, votretres-hum- 

•«t T'"\i bleserviteun 

Ihave the honouf to be J'ai I'honneur d'etre levS, 

l^'o°^nn? ^''^^^"- Votresante est-elle bonne? 

|^o^-r^"^^'°^-- r™--esdevo.s. 

house*"/ ^^ '^^ ^' ^""""^ Comment se porte-t-on 
"ri,« „ „ , chezvous.* fbien 

*^PaX tn h" ''""• t^'""- Tout le monde s'y porte 

SvoL •''°" ^"5^'^'^- Pretavousrendrelervice. 

At your service. A votre service. 

voudo> '^^™'^°''*^'' ^* ^°"^> Madame-; com- 
lo/p't. ",^1m it ,. ™ent vous portez vous ? 

-leaywe!!. Very well. PassableiTientbien. Fnrt 
bien, 
E 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Is all your family well ? 

Perfectly well. 

How does your mother 

(\q p — your father ? — 

your sister ? 

You do them much ho- 
nour, they are in good 
health. 

I am very glad to see you 
in good health. 

And I also. 

I am infinitely obliged to 
you. 

I most hurvkbly thank you. 

I am much indebted to you. 
1 i^ive you a thousand 

thanks. 
M'ddam, you jest; I do 

but my duty. 

Now I think on it, how 

does your brother ? 
Exceed i n gl y w ell . 
I am verv glad of it. 
, Dres he learn French ? 
Yes, Sir, and my sister 

likewise. 
Does be go to school. 
He ^xoes tn the acp.deniiv, 

and my sister is in a 

boarding school. 
I shall be very glnd to see 

them at the i^cxt: ho:y- 

dayJv 
Sir, they will not be less 

glad to see you. 

Fare well, present my most 
hu*:»ble respects to your 
%ther ar,d mcirer. 



Tout le mcnde se porte- 
t-il bien chez vous; > 

Parfaitement bien. 

Comment se porte Mada- 
♦ me votre mere ?--Mon- 
sieur votre pere.^ — Ma- 
demoiselle votre soeur 't 

Vous leur faites bien de 
I'honneur; ils sent teas 
en bonne sante. 

Jesuisbien charmede vous 
voir en bonne sante. 

Et moi pareillement. 

Je voqs suis infiniment ob- 

Je vous remercie tres- 

h!.¥nblement. [ble* 

Je vous suis bien redeva- 

Je vous rends mille graces= 

Madame, vous vous mo- 
que 2, je ne fais que mon 

clev^rir. 
Apropos, comrr^entsepor- 

t( Ml-n ieur votre frerer 
Parfaite.'-ent bien. 
J'f'D suis l;ien aise. 
ApprenV il le Frangois ? 
Cjn'i, M')n&ieur> &: ma 

sce'.r aussi. 
Va-i'ii ii Tecoie ? 
il va?. i'ilcademie, 6c ma 

seeur est dans une pen- 

-jp serai bien al:se de le - 
voir aux vacances pro- 
chaines. 
Monsieur, ilsne serontpas 
moins cliariTies de vous 
voir. 
Adieu, presentezmes ties 
humbles respects a Mon- 
sieur votre pcre & a Ma^ 
daiLC Tctrc rrere. 



\ 



FRENCH TOKGJLJE. 51 

Tell them Iwiii go rind see Dites-leur que j'irai les 
them some day or other. voirun de ces jours- 

' 5 *^ 5^» ^'^ plaisir. 

Well, good bye. I ah 5a, a Thonneur. 



IL 



Sir, I L".m overjoyed to 

meet you here- 
Sir, you are verykincl. 

How have yon done since I 

had the pleasure to see 

you ? 
Always very well ; thank 

God. 
My mother is sick. 
[Is she ? indeed I am vepy 

sorry tor it. [her ? 

What is the matter with 
She has theheadach. 
She has the toothach. 
She has a fever. 
Sh^has not gone out this 

fortnight. 
1 ann very Sorry I have not 

time to see her to-da^^- . 

What hinders you ? 

♦ 

Indeed, I cannot : I must 

go to Islington. 
She would be very glad to 
I see you- 
|To-morrow, without failj 

shall have that honour. 
I aai very sorry t6 hear 

she is ill. 

Do not fail to call to-mor- 
j row. 
! No, no, I- will not fail 



Monsieur^ je suis ravi de 

vous rencontrer ici. 
Monsieur, vous avez bien 

de la bonte. 
Comment vous etes-vous 

porte depuis que je n'ai 

eu le ph' isir de vous voir. 
Toujours fort bien ; Dieu 

merci. 
Ma mere estmalade. 
Eile ^st malade ! En vc- 

v'ltej'en suls tresfacht. 
Qii' St ce qa'clle a? 
EUe a nial a la tete. 
Eile a mal aux dents. 
Hlie a la fievre. 
II y a quitizp jours qu" eile 

n'est sortie. 
Je suis tres faclie de n'a- 

voir pas le temps de la 

voir a^jourd'hui- 
Qu'est cc qui vous en em- 

peche ? 
En verite, je ne saurois : ii 
faut que j*aille a Islington^ 
Eile seroit bien aise de 

vous voir. 
Demain, sans faute, j'au- 

rai cet honneur la. 
Je suis tres fache d'ap- 

prendre qu'elle se porte 

mal. 
Ne manquez pas de venir 

demain. 
Non> non ; je n'y manque- 

rai pas» 



52 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



I rely on you- Je compte sur vous. 

You may depend upon Vous pouvez compter sur 

me. moi. 

Farewell; I will tell it her. Adieu ; je le lui dirai. 



in. 



Let us speak nothing else 
hut Fre^ich. 

I agree to it ; it is the best 
means to. learn a lan- 
guage. 

Well ; let us begin- 

Do you speak French ^ 

I speak it a little. 

French is a very useful 
language. 

It is now- a- days the uni- 
versal language- 

The French language is 
very difficult. 

The English is still more 
so^ 

Are you very well versed 
in the French tongue ? 

l^ot much, I do but begin. 

Do you understand what 
you read ? 

I understand better than I 
can speak. 

I do not wonder at it ; it 
is always easier to un- 
derstand a language 
than to speak it. 

Who teaches you French? 

It is master A, 

J know him ; he is a very 

able man. 
How many times a week 

does he attend you ? 



Ne parlons que Francois ^ 

J'y consens ; c'est le meil^ 
leur moyen d'appren- 
dre une langue- 

He bien ; commengons. 

Parlez-vou*^ Frangois f* 

Je le parle un peu* 

LeFraii^ois est une langua 
tres utile. 

C'est aujourd'huna lan- 
gue universelle* ~ 

Le Frangois est tres diffi- 
cile. 

L'Anglois I'est encore da- 
vantage. 

Etes-vcusbien savant dans 
la langue Frangoise ? 

Pas beaucoup, je ne fais 
que de commencer. 

Comprenez-vous ce que 
vous lisez } 

Je comprends mieux que 
je ne parle. 

Je ne m'en etonne pas : il 
est toujours plus facile 
de com prendre une 
langue que de la parler. 

Qui est ce qui vous en- 
seigne le Frangois ? 

C'est Monsieur A.^ 

Je le connois ; c'est un 
fort habdehomme. 

Combien de -legons vous 
donne-t-il pat semainer' 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



As often as I am at lei- 
sure. 

Alfnost every daJ^ 

How long have you been 
learning French ? 

Six months. 

Indeed you have nnade a 

- great progress. 

Sir, you encourage me to 
make greater. 

You must always speak 

French. 
I am afraid of making 

blunders. 
They would laugh at me. 
Not at all ; do not be 

afraid of being laughed 

at 



Aussi souvent que j'en ai 

le temps. 
Presque tou« les jours. 
Combien y a- t-il que vous 

ap|5r#nez le Frangois? 
Six m'ois. * 
En verite vous avez fait 

de grands progr^s- 
Monsieur vous m*encou- 

ragez a en faire de plus 

grands. 
II faut toujours parler 

Frangois. 
Pai peur de faire^ des 

fautes. 
On se moqueroit de moi. 
Point du tout ; ue crai- 



gnez pas qu on semoque 
de vous- 



IV. 



Where are you going ? 

I am going to the Park, 
to church, tp the play, 
to Greenwich, to Is- 
lington) &c. 

Where do you come from? 

I come from the Park, 
from church, from the 
play, from Greenwich, 
from Islington, 6cc. 

Was the king at the play ? 

Yes, and the queen too. 

How do you like the Eng- 
lish lat)guage ? 

The English tongue is vcr 
ry diffecult for French' 
men to learn. 

Do you learn Latin ? 

I have been learning it 
these two years 

E 



Ou allez-vous .^ 

Je vais au ParCjaPeglise, 
k la comedie, a Green^ 
wich, a Islington, 8cc. ^ 

D'ou venez-vous ? 

Je viens du Pare, de 

Teglise, de la ccmedie, 

de Greenwich d'ls- 

lington, 8cc. [diei^ 

Le roi etoit-il a la come- 
Oui, & la reine aussi. 
Comment trouvez vous la 

langue Angloise I 
Je trouve que I'Angloisest 

trds difficile pour les 

Frangois' 
Apprenez-vous le Latin i 
Jl y a deux ans que je 

Tapprends. 
9 



u 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



What do you tbiok ot the Que pensez-vous du La- 
Latin ? tin ? 

Sir, I think that the Latin Monsieur, je pense que ie 

13 niore difficult than Latin est plus difficilg^ 

the French. que le Frangois- 

You are inahe ri^fht. Vous avez raison. 

What French authors do Quels auteurs Frangois li- 



i 



you read ? 



sez-vous.^ 



I read the adventures of Je lis les a ventures de Te- 
Telemachus, Gil Bias, lemaque^ Gil Bias, le 
the age of Lewis XIV. siecle de Louis XIY. 
the history of Charles Thistoire de Charles 
Xil- king of Sweden. XI f. roi de Suede. 

^0 not yoji read some- Ne lisez-vouspasquelque 
times Lafontaine's F^- iois les fables de La- 
bles ^ fontaine ? 

Yes, Sir, my master told Oui, Monsieur, mon mai- 

me he was the best au- tre m'a dit que c'etoit 

thor for fables. le meilleur auteur pour 

[heart ? les fables. [ur ? 

What do you learn by Qu'apprenez-vons par coe- 

I learn the articlesjthepro- J'apprendsles articles, les 
nouns, the verbs, 6cc. pronoms,les verbes,&G. 

You pronounce theFrench Vous prononcez ties bien 
very well. le Francois. 

I take a great deal of Je prends beaucoup de 
pains. peine. 

Nothin^^' is tQ be got with- On n'a rien sans peine* 
out pains. 

V. 
Est-il vrai ? 



Is it true ? 
Yes, it is true. 
Do you believe it ? 
It is but too true. 
Believe me on my word. 



Qui, il est vrai* 
Le crcyez-vous ? 
11 n'est que trop vral 
Croyez moi suf maparole^ 



I would not tell you a lie Je ne voudrois pas vous 
for all the gold in the dire un mensonge pour 
world. tout Tor du motide. 

Did you see it ? L'avez vous vu ? 

Why did you not tell it Fourquoi ne me Faves- 
me?. vous pas dit ? 

I can assure ymi Je puis vous a'>s'rer 

1 beJieve yon. ie vov.v. : rriis 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



•55 



Do you speak in earnest ; 
1 speak in earnest. 
Well, let it be so. 
I will not oppose it- 
That is not true. 
You are mistaken*? 
l>id you guess it ? 
Who told it you i 



Parfez-vousserieusement? 
Je parle serieusement. 
He bien, a la bonne he u re. 
Je ne m'y opposerai pas. 
Cela n'est pas vrai. 
Vous vous trompez. 
L'avez vous devine ? 
Qui est-ce qui vous Ta dit? 



It h somebody you know. C'est quelqu'un que vous 
connoissez. 

Are you certain of it ? Etes-vous sur de cela ? 

You 112 ay be mistaken. Vous pouvez vous trora* 
per. 

I do not believe I am mis- Je ne crois pas que je me 



taken. 
There is no such thing;. 
Who doubts it? 
I will never doubt it. 
There is no doubt of it 



trompe. 
11 n'y a rien de cela. 
Qui est-ce qui en doute? 
Je n'en douterai janr.ajs. 
II n'y a point de doute- 



1 will lay any thing you Je gage^ai tout ce qu'il 

please. vous plaira- [vire. 

I never lay any wager. Je ne fais jamais de ga^e- 

When did you see him, Quand Tavez-vouu vu or 

or her ? vue ? 

When did you see them ? Quand las avez-vous vus? 



I saw him last week. 
I saw her last month. 
I did not see them. ' 
What do you say ? 
I said nothing at all. 
I heard it. [story. 

Do you believe such a 
I do not believe it. 
When did you hear it? 



Je le vis la semainepassee.o. 

Je la vis ie moi.s passe. 

Je ne les ai pas vus. 

Que dites-vous ? 

Je n'ai rien dit du tout 

Je Tai oui" dire* 

Ne croyez pas un tel conte. 

Je ne le crois pas. [dire ? 

Quand Tavez vous oui" 



To-dayv« yesterday, the Aujourd'hui, hier, avant- 

day before yesterday. hier. 

Will you tell it him ■* Le lui direz vous ? 

I shall never telj it him. Je ne le lui dirai jamais. 

YL 

Bq you choose to drink a Souhaitez-vous prendre 

%ish of tea ? une tasse de the ? 

Sir, I am m^ch obliged IVBbn^iieur, je v<ius 8tt% 



56 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



I never drink 



to you, 
any. 

What ! you *r.ever drink 
tea? 

You like coffee better, per- 
haps. 

Do you know any news ? 

I know of nothing worth 
your while to hear. 

[thing. 
There is no talk of any 
When do you expect him? 
Did you ever know him ? 
I know him by reputation. 

Bo you remember it ? 

No, Sir, I dp not remem- 
ber it. 

I have a very bad memo- 
ry. 

You forget easily.: 

WiU you take a little 
walii ? 

With all my heart. 

Where shall we go ? 

Letus go into the Park; we 
shall see the king there. 

At what o'clock is he to 
be seen ? 

About twelve o'clock. 



tres-oblige ; je n'en 

prends jamais. 
Quoi! vois ne prenezja* 

mais de the ? 
Vous aimez peut-etre 

mieux le caffe? 
SaveZ'Vous quelque nou- 

velle ? 
Je n'en sais point qui soit 

digne de vous etre rap- 

portee. 
On ne parle de rien. 
Quand I'attendez^vous ? 
L'avez-vous jamais connu^ 
Je le connois de reputa- 
tion. 
Vous en souvenez-vous f 
Non^ Monsieur, je ne m'en 

souviens pas. 
J'ai la memoire tr^s man- 

vaise. 
Vous oubliez aisement 
Voulez- vous f aire un petit 

tour de promenade ? 
De tout mon-coeur, 
Ovl irons-nous ? 
Allons au Pai^ ; nous y 

verrons le roi- 
A quelle heure peut on 

le voir? * 

Vers midi. 



1 should be very glad of Je serois bien aise de la 



seeing him. 
He is a very 

prince. 

I shall be glad to see the 

% queen likewise ; every 

body speaks well of her. 
Did you ever see the 

prince of Wales ? 
They say he is a hapd-^ 

some young prince ^ 



voir^ 
handsome C est un tres beau prince. 



Je serai bien aise de voir 
aljssi la reine : tout le 
monde en dit du bien. 

Avez-vous jamais vu le 
prince de Galles ? ^ 

On dit que c'est un pfan 
jeupe prince 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



5T 



VIL 



It is very fine weather. 
J)o you believe it will rain 

to-day ? ■ 
I do not believe it will 

cease raining alLtheday 

long. 
The sky is very clear and 

serene. 
We are in the best season 

now. 
What season do you like 

best ? 
The summer is the most 

agreeable of all the sea- 
sons. 
It is sometimes very cold 

in the spring. 
I do not hke winter at all. 

Do you not go to the play ? 
, [evening. 

I am to go thither this 

There is a ne# play. 

There will be a great ma- 
ny people. 

I have a mind to go thi- 
ther likewise. 

Do : I shall be very glad 
to accompany you. 

Stay a little ; 1 will be 
with you in an instant^ 

Do your business : I shall 
stay for you. 

Now, I am ready, 

Let us go. 



II fait tres beau temps. 
Croyez-vous qu'il pleuve 

aujourd'hui ? 
Je ne croispas que la plui^ 

cesse d'aujourd'hui. 

Le ciel est tres clair et 

serein ? * 

Nous sommes a present 

dans la meilleure saison* 
Quelle saison aimez vous 

davantage ? 
L'^t^ est la plus agreable 

de toutes les sais.ons- 

II fait quelquefois tr^a 

froid au printemps. 
Je n'aime pas du tout 

Thiver. 
N'allez-vous pas a la 

com^die ? 
Je dois y aller ce soir. 
11 y a une nouvelle piece^ 
11 y aura un grand con- 

cours de monde. 
J'ai envie d'y aller aussi. 

Venez : je serai bien ais^ 
de vousy accompagner. 

Attendez un peu ; je suis 
a vous dans I'instant. 

Faites vos affaires; je vous 
attendrai. 

A present, je suis pret. 

Aliens. ' 



VIII. 



What o'clock is it ? 
What o'clock do you be- 
lieve it is ? 
I believa it is not yet late* 



Quelle heure est-il ? 

Quelle heure croyez-vous 
qu'il soit ? 

Je crois qu'il n'est pas en- 
core tard. 



58 



Guess- 
Nine o'clock. 
It IS past ten o'clock:. 
It is a quarter past ten 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 

# 



Devinez. 
Neuf hvures* 
II est dixheures passees« 
il est dix heures &; un 
quart 

It is half an hour past ten. 11 est dix heures 6c demie- 
It is three quarters past 11 est onze hpiires moins 

ten. un quart. 

Indeed, I did not think it En \6ni6t je ne croyoi| 

\vks so late. pas qu'il ffet si tard. 

Time goes away swiftly. Le temps s'ecoule av6C| 

rapidite. 
One is never dull in good Oji-ne s'ennuie jamais ei 

company. bonne compagnie. 

Let us go and take a walk Allons faire un tour d^ 

into the garden. jardin. 

With all my heart. De todt mon cceur. ^ 

Have you any fine flowers Avez-vous de belles fleur 

in your garden } dans votre jardin ^ 

Very fine ones. De fort belles. 

Will you give me leave to Voulez-vous me donner la 
gather some ? permission d'en cuclllir? 

You may gather as many Vousenpouvezcueillir^au 

as you please. tant qu'il vous plaira. 

fDoyou choose some pears, Souhaitez-Vous despoiresj, 
apples, cherries, &c. des pommes, des cj^rises, 
# &c. 

I am not fond of fruit. Je ne suis pas grand ama- 
teur de fruit. 
Let us go home : it is al- Allons au logis; il e;st bien- 

most dinner time- tot temps de diKer. 

Are you hungry ? Avez-vous faim ^ 

Have you a good appetite? Avez-vous bon appetit 
I do not know if I shall be Je ne sais pas si je pourrai 
able to eat a dinner ; I diner ; j'ai tresbien de- 
breakfasted very hear- jeune. 
tiiy. * 

One gets a stomach by L'appetit vient en mange* 
eating. ant* 



IX. 



Let us sit down to table* 
Is dinner ready ? 



Mettons-nous a table- 
Le diner est-il pret ? 



# FRENCH TONGUE. ^^' 

The meat is upon the ta- On a servi. 

Sir you make ceremonies; Monsieur, vous faites des 

pray do not make any. ceremonies ; de grace, 
[have n'en faites pomt 
What do you choose to Que souhaitez vous I 
WhacyouDkase. Ce qu'il voUs plaira„ 

How do vo'u like this roast Commenttrouvez^vousce 

meat f 5"^ti ? 

It is exceeding good and II est excellent &tres ten- 
very, tender- . dre. 
Sir. if you are dry, call for Monsieur, si vous avez 

some drink. soif, demandez a boirc« 

You do not eat Vous ne mangez pas. 

I beg your pardon ; I eat Je vous demande pardon; 

very heartily. |e mange de bon appetit. 

This is all we have. C est tout ce que nous a- 

vons. 
There is no need of any II ne faut rien de plus. 

thing else. ........ 

I invited vou to dinner on- Je ne vous ai mvite a di- 

ly to enjoy your compa- ner, que pour jouir de 

ijy. . [drink? votre compagnie. 

What do vou choose to Quesouhaitez-vous boire? 
Sir, to your health^ Monsieur, a votre sanle. 

Madam, I have the honor Madame, j'ai 1 honneur dc 

to drink to vour health. boire a votre sante. 
To all that pleases you. A tout ce qrij^ vous fait 

plaisir. ^ 

Sir. it is the pleasure of Monsieur, c'est celui de 

seeing you. vous voir. ^ 

Shall I help you to a little Vous servirai-je un petit 

bit of the leg of mutton. morceau de gigot ? 
I am inPiiiitely obliged to Je vous suisinfiniment ob- 

vou; Ihaveeatenough. lige ; j'ai assez mange. 
No more. Pas davauta^e. ^ ^ 

What shall we do afj:er Que ferons-nous apres di- 

dinner ? ner ? 

"^Vhat the ladies please- Ce qu^il pi aira aces darner.^ 

X. 

We shall have ahol)>'day Nous aiirons demain con - 
• to-morrow. £;e. 

' Show me vour exercise. Mnntres-n. oi voire thejvie 



60 



A GRAMMAR OJP THE 



I shall show it tb you af- 
ter breakfast. 
XVho took my hikstand ? 

Give me my penknife. 
I did nt)t see it. 
Do not blot your paper. 
Who has got any wafers ? 
Comq, I will give you 

some. 
They make a great deal 

of noise there. 
Sit down in your place 

and be quiet. [word. 
Indeed, I do not speak a 
Learn your lesson. 
1 know it perfectly well. 

Will you be pleased to 

make me a pen ? [at all. 

That is good for nothing 

Make your pens yourself. 

Why is your exercise so 

ill- written ? 
That paper sinks. 
It is wet s you must dry it 

nearthti^fire. 

What is the French for—-? 
How do you say in French? 

Why do you not shut the 

door? 
I found it open, [in them, 
'/our stockings have holes 
1 shall get them mepded. 
I did not observe it when 

I put them on. 
Tie your garters ; your 

stockings areaboutyour 

heels. 
Mow, come and say your 



Je vou s le montrerai apies 

dejeuner. 
Qui est-ce qui a pris mori 

ecritoire ? 
Donnez-moi mon canif. 
Je ne Tai pas vu. 
Ne faites point de pat^s. 
Qui est-ce qui a des pains 

a cacheter ^ [rai. 

Vene^, je vous en donne- 
On fait beaucoup de bruit 

pat- la. / 

Asseyez-vous a vo'tre place, 

& soyez tranquille. 
En verite, je ne dis mot. 
Apprenez votre legon. 
Je la sais parfaitement 

bien. 
Vous plait-il de me tailler 

une plume ? [tout. 

Celle-ci ne vaut rien dtk 
Taillez vos plumes vous- 

meme. 
Pourquoi votre theme est-=^ 

il si m^l ecrit ? 
C'est du papier qui boit. 
11 est humide ; il faut le 

faire secher devant le 

feu. 
Quel est le Francois de— I 
Commient dit on en Fran^ 

cois ? 
Pourquoi ne fetmez-vous 

pas la porte ? 
Je I'ai trouvee ouverte. 
Vos bas sont troues- 
lelcs ferai ratcommodefj 
Jc n'y ai pas pris eardfe 

quand je les ai mis. 
Attachez vos jarretieregj 

vos bas sont ravales. 

A present, venez dire vo* 
tre le^on. 



FRENCH tONGUE. 



61 



2 have but two luords to 

'Write, 
Give me leave to go ou&» 

Goy and come back imme- 
diately, 

I have lost my fiencil. 

You lose every thing. 

You do not take care of any 
thing. 

Somebody took it from me. 

Look for it, 

I have looked every where, 

Lend me your book, 

I want it myself. 

Do not flush nwy I cannot 
write, 

tVho shakes the table f 

I did not do it on purjiose. 

Well, let us see* 



Je n'ai que deux mots a 

ecrire. 
Donnez-moi permission 

de sortir. 
Allez, 8c revetiez dans 

Tinstant. 
J'ai perdu mon crayon. 
Vous perdez tout. 
Vous ne prenez garde a' 

rien* 
Quelqu'un me l*a f>ris» 
Cherchez-leo 
Je I'ai cherche par-tout. 
Pretez-moi voire livre. 
J'en aibesoin moi-meme: 
Ne me poussez pas, je ne 

puis ecrire. j^ble? 

Qui est-ce qui remue la ta- 
Je neTai pas fait expres* 
Ah, $a, voyons. 



IX. 



It is tbne to go to bed* 

It grows late, 

I never go to bed so early. 

At what o^clock do you 

rise ? 
I have no fixed hour. 
You may sit up, as long as 
you please ; for myphrty 
I am going to bed* 

I am used to go to bed be- 

times. 
Light a candle. 
Where are my sUppers ? 
J am going to fetch tham 
Snuff the candle. 
Jijr<ifiV the curtains. 



II est temps de s*aller 
coucher. 

11 se fait tard. 

Je ne me couche jamais 
de si bonne heure. 

A quelle heure vous le- 
vez-vous? ' 

Je n'ai point d'heure fixe* 

Vous poiivez veiller tant 
qu'il vous plaira ; pour 
mbi, je vais m'aller cou^ 
cher. 

J'ai coutume de me cou- 
cher de bonne heure. 

Allumez une chandelle- 

06 sont mes pantoufles? 

Je m'en vais les querir^ 

Mouchez la chandelle. 

Tirez les rideaux% 



62 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



JOo not fail to wake me, Ne manquez pas de m'e- 

veiller. 
I shall come sooner fierhaps Je viendrai,peut-etre,plu- 

than you choose, tot que vous ne voudrez. 

JSTo ; do not be afraid, Non ; n'ayez pas peur. 

Gentlemen and ladiesy I Messieurs&MesdamesJe 

wish you good night, vous souhaite le bon soir. 

^ir^ or Madam, I wish you Monsieur, ou Madame, je 

a good night's rest, vous souhaite une bonne 

nuit. 



Xil. 



What I you are a- bed still'/ 

Do you sleefi ? 
Mo ; I am awake. 
You awake me too early; it 
is V pry dark yet. 

Your curtains are drawn ; 
you do not see the day- 
light. 

How did you sleefi last 
night? 

I did not sleefi a wink all 
the night long, 

M) matter; I shall get ufi 
presently, 

J am going to bid the ser- 
vant to make afire. 

Bring me some water, I 
must wash my face, my 
mouthy and my hands. 

Where are my shoes ? 
They are at the door. 
Are they clean ? 
Give me my silk-stockings. 
Somebody knocks at the 
door; go ctnd s^e %vho iti^- 



Quoi ! vous etes encore au 

lit? 
Dormez vous ? 
Non ; je suis eveille. 
Vous ni'eveillez de tro 

grand matin ; il ne fait 

pas encore jour. 
Vos rideaux sont tires ; 

vous ne voyez pas la 

clart^> du jour. 
Commetit avez-vous dor- 
mi cette nuit. 
Je n'ai pas ferm^ Toeil de 

toute la nuit. 
Nlmpprte ; je me leverai 

dans rinstant 
Je m'en vais dire au do> 

mestlque de faire du feu- 
Apportez moi de I'eau, il 

fauc que je me lave le 

visage, la bouche, et les 

mains. 
Ou sont mes souliers ? 
lis sont a la porte. 
Sont-ils nettoyes ? [sole, 
Donnez-moi mes bas de 
On frappe a la porte ; al. 

lez voir qui c*est« 



FRENCH TONGUE. 63 

lam ready to go out, Je tie suis pas encore pret 

asortir. 
Take care to keefi a good Ayez soin de faire bon feu 

fire in the parlour. dans la salle. 

Tell Mr. A. lam coming Allez dire a Mr. A. que je 
down immediately. vais descendre dans 

I'instant; 
Sir, I dm overjoyed to see Monsieur, je suis ravi de 
you ill good health. vous voir en bonne sante. 

/ am so7Ty to have made Je suis fache de vous avoir 
you wait so long. fait attendre si long- 

temps. 
Not at ally you jest. Point du tout, vous vous 

ilioquez. 
l£t US go and take a turn. Allons faire un tour de 
promenade. 



PART IT. 

C H A P T E R L 

A Short Analysis of the Parts ofSfieech, 

THERE are in the French language ten sorts ot 
words, or parts of Speech, namely; the Arti- 
cle, the Substantive or Noun, the Adjective 
or Adnoun, the Pronoun, the Ver^. the Ad- 
verb, the Participle, the Preposition, the 
Conjunction, and the Interjection. 
I I. The Article is a word prefixed to substan- 
jtives to point them out, and to show how far the sig- 
nification extends ; as, the study of history is useful 
and agreeable ; /' etude de I'histoire est utile & agre- 
able : the nature of man is unknown to man ; la na- 
ture de Thomme est inconnue a I'homme : A bad 
man is ungrateful towards God and towards men; 
im mechant homme est ingrat envers Dieu 8c envers 
;leshommes: *^ prince is not always so happy as 
'people believe : un prince n^est pas toujours aussi 
heureux que le peuple croit. 



64 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Grammarians admit of two sorts of articles s 

The definite {the) le, in. /a, Lfor tlie sifigular ; les^^ 
plurol Jbr doth genders. 

The indefinite (a or an) un, m, une, f. for the sin- 
gular, des instead of guelguesi filusieuf^Si for the plural^. 

The definite article, 1st, restrains the signification 
of a general appellation ; as, Z'etude de I'histoire est 
utile 6c agreable. La nature de I'l^omme est inconnue 
a Thomme. 

2dly. Indicates the gender and number of substan- 
tives : and for that reason is used in French before 
a noun taken in its widest sense ; as, P6t\ide orne 
Tesprit ; study adorns the mind ; la nature a bean- 
coup d'ohservateurs, mais elle a peu de confidents ; 
nature has many observers, but she has few tonfi- 
dants, Les princes ne sont pas toujours aussi heu- 
reux que le peuple croit j princes are not always so 
Jiappy as people believe ; les exemples instruisent 
plus que les preceptes ; examples instructs more 
than precepts. 

Substantives in French having no final to distinguish suffi- 
ciently the plural from the singular, it has been necessary to 
prefix a particle, in order to denote the number of the things 
spoken of and the article, which, as we have shown, limits 
the general signification of nouns^ was also formed to point 
out their gender and numbero 

The indefinite article is used in a vague sense, and 
restrains the signification of a general appellation to 
one or several objects in an indefinite or partitive 
sense ; as, un prince n'est pas toujours aussi heureux 
que le peuple croit. Nous voyons quelquefbis des 
princes tres malheureux : we sometimes see princes 
very unhappy. Un homme de genie est sujet, com- 
me un hautre homme, ^ commetre des erreurs t^ 
des fautes ; a man of genius is subject, like another | 
man, to commit {some) errors and faults, 

IL A Substantive or noun, is a word which ex^ 
presses the name of any thing that exists, or which 
we conceive as existing, as, the Earth,— a house,--? 
man, — Peter, — virtue, — prudence. La Terre^ — une 
maison^ — Vhommey — Pierre^ — vertUy — prudence. \ \ 

To Substantives belong gender, number, and case? 
The gender is either masculine or feminine as lefier^^ i 



FRENCH TONGUE. 65 

Id mere ; le jardin,la inaison- There is no neuter in 
the French Tongue. 

The number is either 5i/x§^/ar ov filural. 

The singular signifies one thing ; as, le fiere^ Id mere. 
Th^ plural, more than one ; as, les fieres, les 7?ims , 

The case signifies the different stateS) or the differ- 
ent circiimstances of ajipun. 

Afftoun in a proposition is to be considered either as subject 
or object, that is to say, as governing or governed. The go- 
verning case> called Siheihe nominative, expres^s the subject 
of the verb, and is placed in French, as in English, before the 
verb. 

III. An Adjective is a word added to a Substan- 
tive to express its quality ; as, a riUigent scholar, un 
ecolier diligent. In French the adjective is declina- 
ble, and agrees in gender and number with the sub= 
stantive to which it is joined or refers ; as, am fietu^ 
homme, unefietite femme, a little man, a little woman. 

The feminine of the adjective is formed, by adding an e 
(called mute or" feminine) to the masculine gend«r ; as, xin 
/e/i^ homme, une petite femme : but if the primitive mascu- 
line ends with an e mute, then there is no alteration, and the 
feminine is like the masculine ; as un champ ycr^f/e, une ter- 
re fertile, Se6 page 72. 

IV. The Pronoun supplies the place of a noun, 
and removes the confusion arising: from a frequent 
repetition : asfaivu mon frere^ 'AetoiC4res viatade ; 
instead of mon frere etoit tres malade, I saw my bro- 
ther, he was very sick ; instead of 7ny brother was \evy 
sick. 

Pronouns are of six kinds, viz. personal, possessive, 
demonstrative, relative, interrogative, and improper 
or indefinite. 

The personal pronoun is used instead of the name 
of a person ; asyje, tu, il, m. e//e,f. for the singular ; 
nous, vous. Us, m. elles, f. for the plural. 

The possessive pronouns mark possession ; they 
are of two sorts» conjunctive and absolute. 

The conjunctive pronouns are used only with sub- 
stantives ; as, mon. ma, mes ; ton,ta, tes ; son, sa, ses; 
7iotr€,nos ; votre,vos; leur,leur3. 

The absolute pronouns are used by themselves, 

their substantives being understood, as, le 7722m, la 

mienne, les miens, les miennes ; le lien, la tienne les 

tiens, les tiennes ; le dm, la sienne^ les siensy les sin: 

F 2 



66 A GRx\MMAR OF THE 

nCfS ; le notre^ la ndtre ; les notres ; le votre^ la vo^'e^ 
les votres ; le /c^r, la leur^ les /ewrs. 

The demonstrative pronouns are useji to particu-^^ 
larize persons or things, ks if pointed at by the lin-*"* 
ger. 

The relative pronouns refer to persons or things 
spoken of in a former part of a sentence* 

The interrogative pronouns are used in asking 
questions- 
Tie indefinite pronouns are used in a vague sense ^^ 
as, tout, quelque^chaque, &c. 1| 

V. A Verb is a word which signifies to be or t(#! 
do ; as Thomas est studieux, Thomas is studious ; 
Thomas etudie, Thomas studies. 

The proper definition of the verb is, tfiat it is a word which 
jisignifies affirmation ; for its proper office is to affirm some 
^ut tribute of the subject (or nominative) of the proposition. 
But if we join Jts principal accidence, it may be thus defined : 
a word which signifies affirmation xvith the designation of ihe^ 
person, number^ and time : - vf\\\c\\ definition agrees properly 
with the verb substantive to be (~etrej. But, since men have 
frequently united certain attributes to the affirmation, for 
sake of brevity, the verb (active or neuter) may be again de- 
fined thus, a word signifying the affirmation of some attri- 
bute,ivith the designation of person, number, and time. 

Verbs are divided, first into regular and irregular, 
personal an4 impersonal. 

When a verb follows the rule of its conjugation, it 
is called regular ; but if it deviates from it, it is cal- 
led irregular. " 

Personal verbs, are those which are conjugated 
with the personal pronouos,y>, tih iL lUe^ &c. 

Impersonal pronouns are those which are conju- 
gated only in the third person singular vvitl'i the pro- 
noun il, it. Secondly » verbs are divided into active, 
passive, neuter, and reflected. 

The active verb marks the action of its subject, or 
nominative case; and makes good sense with the 
accusative of its object, or the thing on which it acts ; 
as. je mange diipain^ I eat bread ; tu bois de la bij^rp^ 
thou drinkest beer ; il chante unc chanson^ he sings 
a song. 

The passive verb marks th^ passion or suffering of 
its subjext : je suis aime» I am loved ; tu cs puni, than 
art punished ; il est l^anni, he is banished- 



FRENCH TONGUE. m 

A n^ter verb is a word denoting the action of its 
subject or nominative, which remains in the subject, 
and does not with propriety admit an accusative af- 
ter it : as, Je dors, I sleep ; U court, he runs. 

The reflected verbs receive their name from re^ 
fleeting the action of a subject or nominative on it^ 
self; as, je me brdle, I burn myself; il s'aime, he 
loves himself. 

There are also,two auxiliary or helping verbs, ©tre, 
to be ; and avoir, to have ; these arc called auxilia- 
ry, from their helping in conjugation of other verbs. 

Four things are to be distinguished in verbs ; the 
mood, the tense, the number, and the person. 

The mood expresses the different manner an4 
uses made ot a verb positively, conditionally, or in an 
unspecified manner. There are four moods, inhni- 
tive, indicative, subjunctive, and imperative? 

The infinitive is the root of che verb ; it express^ 
the action or passjonin an indefinite sense, without any 
particular circumstance of time, number or person. 

The indicative expresses the action oi' passion in a 
direct or positive manner, in a time present, past, or 
future. We shall have a more precise idea of the in-* 
dicative in comparing it with the subjunctive mood. 

The subjunctive is a manner of expressing the ac- 
tion or passion with a modified affirmation or nega- 
tion, always supposing another verb, which it follows, 
or it belongs to, or some conjunction by which it is 
governed.* 

* The differences between the indlcath'e and the subjunc= 
tive are chiefly: 1. The tenses of the subjunctive affirm or 
deny indirectly, always supposing another verb affirming or 
denying directly ; as in this phrase : I will havfe you do your 
•juty, Je veux que vous fassiez votre devoir. Je veux is a 
direct affirmation, and independent of any other ; whereas, 
gue vous fassiez votre devoir is but an indirect affirmation^ 
and depending on the first. 2. The tenses of the subjunctive 
are so depending on the words or conjunctions that are before 
them, that they cannot be separated from them without having 
an undetermined sense, nor, consequently, a simple affirmation. 
So, if from the foregoing example you take away je veux que., 
what follows, vous fassiez votre devoir^ has no\letermined 
sense, and could not he put in the beginning of a phrase " 
v/hereas, the tenses of the indicative may be separated, and 
ajake by fheiDsetyes, M'itho'U Che help of the conjunction^ a 



68 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

The imperative expresses the action or passion by 

commancls, prohibitions, desires, &c. 

The future tense has sometime^*' the signification of 

the imperative mood, when it commands or forbids; 

as, thou shalt love the Lord thy God, tu aimeras le 

Seig7i€ur ton Dku, , 

The tenses express the period of time in which an 

action or passion is, was, or shall be. They are pro^ 

perly three, the present, the past, and the future- 
Each teutie has two numbers, singular and plural ; 

and each number has three persons. 

VI. A Participle partakes something of the 
nature of a verb, and something of an adjective. 

Besides the qliaUty or attribute, which is the property of the 
adjective, the participle expresses time^ together with the con- 
sideration of actings or being acted upon ^^rom thence the parti- 
ciple present or active, and the participle past or passive ; as, 

Les hommes craignant Dieu. Dieu craint pas les hommes. 

The Latin have also formed a participle future. 

If the definition of the verb is right which is to signify affirm-- 
atian, the participles must be the root of the Common Ellyptical 
verbs, since the participle can be united only with the verb 
substantive to be, Eire ,• which vei'b substantive is reckoned 
by the best Grammarians to be the 07ily verb, the sole verb. 

VII. An Adverb marks the difference and cir- 
cumstance of an action or passion. 

Vin, A Preposition is a word placed before 
those nouns and pronpuns which it governs, or before 
some verbs, in order to connect words one with ano- 
thor, and to show the relation between them. 

IX. A Conjunction serves to connect one word 
with another, and sentences with sentences. 

X. An Interjection expresses the motions or 
passions oPthe soul, as joy, grief, admiration, &c. 

The four last parts of speech are undeclinable- 

C H A P T E R 11- 

Gf Genders, i 

njlQ give rules for knowing the Gender of Substan- 
JL tives would be needless and puzzung : ** They 
are so many," says Boijer. *' so intricate, and liable 

clear and determined sense ; as, I l)elieve we shall have some 
rain, jd crois que nous aurons dela pluie ; take away je crois 
que, what follows, nous aurons de la pluie, has a determined 
sense, and is understood wit^hout any other word. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 69 

to so mahy exceptions, that the best and easiest way- 
is to learn them in his royal Dictionary." And, in- 
deed, rules would be of no advantage to the learner. 
However, as some substantives are of the njasculine 
gender in one sense, and of the feminine in another? 
it will not be amiss to give a list of those* 



MASCSUl^INE. 

un ajgle, an eagle- 

un aire, a nest of a bird of 
firey. 

un aine, an alder-tree. 

un barbe, a barb^ (a hprse)- 

on coche, a public travel- 
ling coach. / 

un cornette, a cornet of a 
troop of horse, 

un couple, a couple^ {two 
persons united together 

Hn cravate, a Croatian sol' 
dier. 

tin delice^pleasure^ delight. 

un ^cho, an echo. 

un espace, a space^ a cUs- 
tance. 

un enseigne, an ensign. 

un exemple, an example* 

le iin d'un affaire, the main 
or chief part of a business^ 
un foret, a drill' 
le foudre de Jupiter, Jupi^ 

ter^s thunder-bolt' 
an garde, one of the guards. 

le grelFe, the rolls. 

un livre, a book. 

le gueule, the gules {in he- 

raldry.) 
pn h^le, dry weather. 



FEMININE, 

les aigles Romaines, the 

Roman eagles. 
une aire, a threshing floot^ 

une aune, an ^11 
une barbe, a beards 
une coche, a sow- 

une cornette, a woman^s 

coronet. 
une couple a pair^ {two 

things together*) 
une crv ate, a cravai op 

neckcloth. 
des dejjces, delights* 
Echo, th6 nymph Echo. 
une espace, a space use4 

by printers. 
une enseigne, a post-sign 
une exemple, a copy for 

writing. 
la fin d'une affaire, the end 

of a business. 
une foret, a forest. 
la foudre, thunder^ 

une garde, a guard; alsQ 
a sick person's murse* 

une greffe, c slip of a tree 

une livre, a pound* 

la gueule, the mouth of a 
dog, cat, lion. t!fc. 

une halle, a market halt 



70 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



MASCULINE. 

un quatrieme, the fourth 

fiart of something' 
un lis, a lilly- 
un loutre, a sort of hat- 
un manoeuvre, a labourer. 



un manche, a handle. 

un memoire, a bill, a me- 
morandum* 

un itiestre de camp, a co- 
lonel of horse, 

un mode, a mood, {fihUo- 

sopJiical term,) 
un moule. « mould, 
un mousse, a cabin-boy, 
un navire, a ship, 

[siness, 
un office, an office for bu- 
le grand oeuvre, the/ihilo- 

sopher^s stone, 
un page, a young page, 
un palme,a hand^s breadth. 

un parallele. a comparison, 
un peiidule, a pendulum. 

un peridde. a period, {a 
course of space,) [body. 
persoane, nobody, any 
un piqac ,a spade{at qards,) 
un pivoine, a gnat snapper- 
un poele, a stove^ a pcUl. 
an plane, a plane-tree, 
un \iCi'^\,Q,apost^anemplQy' 

ment. 
ie pourpre, the purples, 

d'un beau pourpre, of a 
fine purple colour. 



FEMININE. 

une quatri^me, a sequra'ce 
of four cards at piquet, 
la Lis, a river in Flanders^ 
une loutre, an otter- 
la manoeuvre, the tackling 
of a ship^ and the wor Ic- 
ing of it. 
une mauche, a sleeve, 
la m^ moire, memory, 

le mestre de camp, the 
first company of a regi- 
ment of horse, 

une mode^ a fashion, 

une moule, a muscle, 

de la mousse, moss, 

la navire, the ship, {a terj?i 

of heraldry,) 
une office, a buttery, 
une oeuvre de piet^,a work 

of piety, 
une page, a page of a book;. 
une palme, a branch of a 

palm-tree, Uine, 

une parallele, a parallel 
une pendule, a pendulum- 
clock, 
une periode, a period, (Jn 

discourse,) 
une per^iOune, a person, 
une pique, a pike, 
une pivohse a piony, 
une poele, a frying-pan- 
une plane, a plane, 
la poste, post, the post^ 

office, 
la pourpre, the purple 

7nark of regality, Isfc, 
de la pourpre Tyjrieune, 
Ttjrian purple- 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



n 



MASCULINE. FEMININE. 

le r^clagpe, the sign to call la reclante> the catch-word, 
back a hawk. 



xm satyre, a sdtyr^ a hea- 
then demi'god, 
un somme» a sleeps a nap, 
un souris, a smile. 
un temple, a church, 
un triomphe, a triumph, 

un trompette, atrumpeter, 
un tour, a tuiHy a trick, 
un teneur de livres,a book- 
keeper, 

lyase. 



une satire, a satire {inpoe- 

try,) 
une somme, a sum. 
une souris, a mouse^ 
la temple, the temple, 
une triomphe, trump at 

cards, 
une trortipette. a trHmpet, 
tine tour, a tower. 
la teneur d'un acte, the 
tenor or contents of a 
writing, [sea, 

un vase, ajar^ a vessel, a la vase, the bottom of the 
un vigogne, a hat made of de la vigogne, a sort of 

a sort of Spanish wooL Spanish wool, 
iin voile, a vail, une voile, a sail 

The following Substantives are 



Rather Masculine 
amour, love. 
amours, cupids, 
!>ronze, cast copper- 



Rather Feminine. 
absinthe, wormwood, 
2iV[io\\v^, passions, intrigueis. 
alcove, alcove, 
caque, cag ^^w barrel. 
cloaque, common sewer or epitase, epitasis. 



[gram. 



sink, 
Comte, county, 
duche, duchy, 
episode, episode, 

^pithalame, epithalamium. 

amulette, an amulet, 
sphinx, sphinx, 
orgue, an organ, 
holocauste, bwmt sacrifice. 
horoscope, horoscope, 

* According to the French Academy, this word is feminine 
when we speak of hymns in churches, otherwise it is mascu» 
iine. 

t This word is masculine in the singular, according to the 
French Academy. 



epitaph e, epitaph. 
hymne,''^ hymn, 
e ni g m e . ^ riddle. 
idylle, idyl, 

Canagi^amroe, an ana- 
C epigram rr.e,a/i epigram. 
orgues.f organs, 
Xi2iXV^\hixe, parallax, 
theriaque, treacle. 
horlojie, a clock. 
equivoque, an equrvoca- 

ti07l. 



7^2 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



CHAPTER III. 

t^ the formation of the FerrAine Gender of Adjectives, 
GENERAL RULE. 

A bJECTIVES take an e mute for the formation 
JljL of their feminine > as, aime, mmee ; ecrit, ecrite; 
Constant, constante-*^ Adjectives endingwith an e 
mute have no variation in their feminine, without ex- 
ception, as, admirable> m. admirable^ f. aimable> m, 
nimable, f. 

Other adjectives form their femininie according to 
their termination, as in the following Cowdse Table. 



Adjectives ending 


form their Feminine 


in 


in 


^f 


1 che. 


f 


ve^ 

gue, 
2 elle, eille, ille, olle, ulle 


ei,eU,ii^oi,U!, ' 


on, 


onne, 


ien. 


ienne. 


eur, 1 
eux.S 


5 eusCi 


€tSy eSy OSi 


4 asse, esse, ossEj 


ous. 


oute. 


et, ot^ 


5 ette, otte, 


eau^ 


elle. 


ou. 


olle. 


OUX;, 


6 ouce. 


HUX^ 


^usse^ 


EXCEPTIONSb 



* Favori, favourite ; benin, bienigne ; malin, malis^ne i fraw^ 
fraiche ; ^pais, epaisse. 

1. Grec, Qrecques Turc, Turguis ; y\ih\io\ publiquef ^^ ca^ 
due, caduque. i 

% Civil, cmfe; subtil, swMfe/ pueril,/>wMk 

3. ^\^M\,'vieilLes ant^rieur, posterieur, cit6rieur, ult^i?icurj 
lnt<^rieurj exterieur, majeur, mineur, sup^rieur, iwf^rieur^ 
jueiileur, follow the general rule. 

^. Kas, vast s ^losj c^^^eo '' 



FRENCH TONGUE. ^3 

5. Secret, Secrete ; coraplet, complete; discret, discrete ^ 
inquiet, inqidete ; replet, replete ; ri^vot, devote. 

6. Jaloux, jalouscf roux, rmisse. 

N. B. The French Academy write, first, cm, raw ; nu, na^ 
feed ; vert, green : and not crud, nud, verd. Secondly b^nit, 
and beni, blessed, holy^hoth follow the general rule. Thirdly^ 
tors, and not tort, t-wisted^ wrung. The adjective makes JQ 
its femvinine both torie, and torse / for we say une colonne 
iorse, de Im sole ^arse,' and popularly we say, ime jambe 
torte, une bouche torte, Une giieule torte, 

CHAPTER IV. 

Of the formation of Plural of jYouns. 
GENERAL RULE. 

NOUNS in general form their plural by adding au 
s to the singular ; as, homme ^hommes-* 

Polysyllables ending in nt^ in the singular, 
form their plural by changing the final t into 5; as, en - 
fant, enfans ; but monosyHables follow the general 
rule. 

Nouns ending in s, x^ or z, are alike in both num- 
bers. 

Nouns ending in ciJ, or al^ change ail and al into 
auxy in the plural: as, travail, travaux ; cheval, che- 
vaux.f 

Nouns, ending in au^eu^ eau^ ieu^ and ow, havex 
their plural by adding an :r to their smgular.4 

N. B. CEiJ mi\ke?>yeux; xieul, (3ye2^:r,' gentilhomme, 
gentilshommes J monsieur, measiairs ; madame, tnes- 
dames ; \mmse\?;r\euv, messeigneurs ; mon^mesj ton,, 
ies ; son, sfs; notre, ?zos / votre, vos ; ciel, heaveiu 
rti2i^^% cieux. However, ^ve say, des ckh de lit ; 
testers of beds ; lesdif/e d'un tableau, the top, of a pic- 
iure ; des arcs en cieL rainbows. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

* Tout makes toui, 

jAil, aux, 

jBrt/, carjiaval^ local, pal, r^gal, and jiroper itHraes ending 
ino?, likewise these pou»s, attirail, camail, d^lail^eventaiL^ 
mudl^ ^pQiivantail, gouvernail, par tail, strati, follow the ge- 
neral rule. 

i Bleu, i -on, clou, cjOu, rtiatou, licov, bihQii,fou^ CirAIouP ■ 
p'aron^ follow the eeueral role. 

a 



H A GRAMMAR OF THE 

CHAPTER V. 

Of the Declension ^ JVouns. 

AS I have hinted before, the nominative in nouns Is 
like the acctisativey the genitive 's like the abla-^ 
true jf/So we shaU call tht nominative the frst case the 
geniifue the second c^ls^s and the dative, the third case. 

Nouns substantive of the masculine gender, and be- 
:ginning with a consonant, are thus d'cciined : 

SINGULAR. 

1st. le livre, the book. 

:2d, du livre, of ox from the book,. 

t5d. au livre, to the booke 

PLURAL. 

ies livres, the books. 

des livres, of arffvm the books. 

aux livres, to the books. 

Nouns substantive of the feminine gender, an^ be 
ginning with a consonant^ are thus declined : 

SINGULAR. 

1st. la table, the table. 

Sd. de la table, of '^x from the table, 

3d. a la table, to the table. 

PLURAL, 

Ies tables, the tables, 

des tables, qf(^rfrom the tables. 

aux tables, to the tables. 

Nouns substantive of either p^ender begianins W.Ufe 
^ vowely or an h mute, are thus declined : 

SiNGULARc 

1st. rhomine, the man. 

2d. de rhomme, of or from th€ ^OT^c 

M^ ^ rhomnoe, ^o th€ mm. 



FRENCH TONGUE. fS 

PLURAL, 

les hom tnes, the men* 

des hommes, of ov from the mexi^ 

aux hommes, to the men- 

Nouns substantive of the masculine gender, and^^ 
beginrinj? with a consonanty are thus declined with 
the mdejinite article : 

SINGULAR. 

lst» un miroir, a looking glass. 

2d. d'un miroir, of qx from a looking-glass . 

od. ^ un miroir, to a looking-glass. 

PLURAL. 

des miroirs, some looking-glasses. 

de miroirs* of ov from some looking-glasses. 

a des mirotrs, to some looking-glasses 

Nouns substantive of the masculine gender, and be- 
ginning with a vowel, or an h mute, are thus declined! 

SINGULAR. 

1st. un accident, an accident. 

2d. d'on accident, of c^ from an accidents 

Sd, a un accident, to an accident* 

PLURAL. 

^s accidens, sovw accidents. 
d'accidens, of or from some accidents^ 
k des accidens, to some accidents. 

Nouns substantive of the feminine gender^ and b^^ 
ginning with a consonant, thus : 

SINGULAR. 

1st. une peine, a pain. 

2d. d'une peine, of^yvfromafiain. 

3d. a une peine to afiain. 

PLURAL. 

des peines, some pains. 

de peines, of^n from somepaiTis, 

^ des peines, tQ some pains. 



76 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Nouns substantive, beginning with a voivel, or an; 
h mute, and of they&mzmVze gender, thus : 

SINGULAR. 

1st. une aiguUle, a needle, 

2d. d'une aiguille, ofovfrom a needle. 

3d. ^ une aiguille* to a needle, 

PLURAL. 

des aigjuilles, some needles, 
d'aiguilles, qf or from some neecEes, 
a dfs aiguilles, to some theedles. 

But in the /?A/ra/ number, when a noun substantive 
^l cither gender is preceded by an adjective^ ^cg*n*l 
aing with a consonant ^ it is thus declined : 

PLURAL. 

1st. de malheureux aceidens, some nnhafifiy accidents^ 
2d. de nnalheureux aceidens, of some unhappy acci^ 

dents, 
3d.a de tnalheureux aceidens, to some unhappy acd- 

(MltS. 

Before an adjective beginning with a vowel or an /^ 
mute, thus : 

.1st. d'itidignes amis, some unworthy Jriends, 

2d. d^indignes amis, of or from some unworthy friends. 

3d. a d'indignes amis, to some unworthy fiends. 

Proper names of men, women, cities^ villages, &cc. 
take no articles before them ; but in the 2d and 3d 
cases they take the prepositions de and a, thus : 

1st. Jean, John, 

2d. de Z^im^of or from John. 

3d. a Jean, to John. 

When they begin with a vowel, or an k mute» thu^ : 

1st. Alexandre, Alexander, 

2d. d'Alexandre< of v- from Alexander. 

3d. a Al xandre, to Alexander. 

Observe ; Some in English, expressed or understood 



FRENCH TONGUE. t7 

before a noun taken in a partitive sense, is express- 
^ in French by dts^ de la, de I' for the singular^ and 
des for the filural, or de for both genders and num- 
bers in the following nianner : 

When the word of the niascuUne gender begllis 
with a consonant^ thus : 

1st. du sel, some salt, 

2d. de sel, of or from soirw $alC. 

3d. a du sel, to some salt. 

When the word, either masculine or feminine, BSi* 
gins with a vowels or h mute, thus: 

1st. de Targentj some money, 

2d. d'argent, of ov from some money ^ 

3d. ^ de i'argent, to some mon^ij, 

1st de I'huile, some oil. 

2d. d'huile, of or from some otl^ 

3d. a de I'huile, to some oil- 

When the noun is feminine, thus : * 

1st. de la salade, some sallad* 

2d. de salade, of or from some sallad» 

3d. a de la saiade, to some sallad. 

Before an adjective of either gender or number, 
thus : 

1st. du bon pain, some good bread- 

2d. de bon pain, of or from some good bread. 

od. h de bon pain, to some good, d? tad. 

The plural is the same as the plural of the definite 
article* 

G 9. 



78. A GRAMMAR OF THE 



CHAPTER VI. 



Of Pronouns* 

THE construction of the pronoun belnj^ the most 
difficult part of our language, I shall here, for 
perspicuity's sake» nearly follow the denonrmatlon 
-which other gramanarians have given them, though 
many of the pronouns may be looked upon as adjec- 
tives, 

SECTION I. % 

Of Persojial Pronouns, 

They are two-fold : conjunctive and disjunctive — - 
The first generally precede the verb ; the second 
commonly follow the verb. The fi|:.st take neither 
article nor preposition before them ; the second take 
in their second case the pieposition d^, add in their 
third case the preposition d^ 

The Conjunctive Pronouns. 

All nouns and pronouns, as we have hinted before, 
have three cases : the first answering to the Nomi- 
native and Accusative ; the second to the Genitive 
an^ Ablative ; the thir& to the Dative. The three 
cases of the conjunctive personal pronouns alone, and 
the three cases of the third person indeterminate, 
when they take no preposition .before them, do not 
answer the three cases of other nouns ; therefore we ,, ,, 
shall call the first the Nominative case, the second | 
the Dative case, and the third the Accusative case* ' 

The First Person. 

Singular. Plural. 

Kom. Je, /, Norn, nous we^ 

Dat. me, io me^ Dat. nous^ fo usy 

Ace, me, mc. AcCi jdousj w*» 



FRENCH TONGUE. 79 

The Second Person. 

Singular. Plural. 

Noin. tu, (hout Nom. vous, you, 

Dat. te, to thee, Hat. vous* to you, 

Ace. te, t/iee. Ace. vous, you- 

The Third Person Masculine, 
Singular. ' Plural. 

Nom. il, he or it, Nom. ils, ihey^ 

Dat. lui, (0 him or to it^ Dat. leur, to thcm^ . 
x\cc. le, hifn or it. Ace. les, them. 

The Third Person Fenriinine. 

* Singular. Plural. 

Nom. elle, she or it^ Nom. cWqs, they, 

Dat. lui, ^0 her or to it, Dat. leur, to them. 
Ace. la, Aer or zV. Ace. \cb, them. 

The Third Person Indeterminate. 
Nom. on, oijCt theyy or ficopk' 
Dat. se, ^0 orze's self, to himself, to herself, to itself i. 

to themseliie^s or to one another. 
Ace. se, one's self, himself, herself, itself, themselves, 

or one another. 

The Third Person supplying and governed. 

1st. le, it, so, 

2d. en, of him, of her, of ity some of them, from them^ 

by them, with them. 
od. y, to it, tfiere, therein, in it, in them, about it, cr 

them. 

The Disjunctive Pronouns, 
The First Person. 
Singular, Plural. 

1st. moi, 7, me, 1st. nous, we, us^ 

2d. de moi, ofovfromine^ 2d. de nons, of or from us^ 
33. ^ |noJ, moi, to pic. 3d. a nous, nous, to t^s-> 



so A GRAMMAR OF THE 

The Second Person. 
1st. toi, thou, thee, 1st. vous, you. .^ 

^6. detoi, of ox from thee, 2d.de vous, ofoYjromvom 
od. a toi, toi, to thee, 3d. a vous, vous, to you. 

The Third Person Masculine, 
1st. hii^ him he or it, 1st. eux, they, them, — 

, 2d.de lui,o/or/ro/w/;w2, 2d. d'eux, of or /rom 

oU. a lui, lui, to him, or lY. 3d. a eux, leur, to them. 
The Third Person Feminine. 

l^}' ^"f; ^^^^ ^^^^ "^^ ^^^ 1st- ^iies, /Aey, r/;<?w, 
^d.delle,o/or/rom/K?r, 2d. d'elles, of or from 

od. a elle, lui, ^o /^er, or it. 3d. ^ elles. leur, to them. 

The Third Person Indeterminate. 
3st. soi, oney self himsetf, herself, or itself [self 
ja, de SOI, oj ox from one's self himself, herself, or it- 
^d. a SOI, to one's self, himself, or itself 

J^ote : Their compounds have the same cases as 
their Simples ; as, 

rnoi-nrieme, myself, nous-memes, ourselves, 
toi-meme, thyself . -> ynursf^hip^, 

lui-meme, himself vous-memes, \lZr^ff'' 

^^'m^xf^^, herself eux-memes, 1;^ r 

soi-meme, one's self elles-memes, j ^^^^^^^-^'^^ 

SECTION II. 

Of Possessive Pronouns, 

.,, S'^^- Plur. 

Masc. Feai. 
lst.mon, ma, mes, ,;2V, 

2<L de moD, de ma^ de mes, of or from miu 

3d. a mon, a ma, d mes, to my. 

After the same manner are declined, 
ton, ta, tes, thy. 
son, sa, ses, his, or her^ its. 
notve, nos, oi^r ; vctre, vos, your ; leur.Ieurs, thm.^ 



FRENCH TONGUE. 81 

Observe, first, these conjunctive pronouns come 
always before a noun to which they are joined. 

Obs-rve secondly, the following absolute possess- 
ive pronouns, being used by themselves, aredeclin- 
ed with the definite article, thus : 

Sing. Plur. 

Masc. Fem. Masc; 

1st. le mien, ia mienne, les, "^ miens, Cmine,^ 
2d. du mien, de la mienne, des > F. ^of minty 
3d. au mien, a la mienne, auxj miennes,C ^o mine*. 

After the same manner are declined, 

le tien, la tienne, les tiens, les tiennes, thine, 
lesien, la sienne, les siens* les siennes, /its er her^s. 
le notre, la notre, les n5tres, our^s, 
le vdtre, la v6tre, les votres, youths, 
le leur, la leun les leurs,7/feir'5. 

SECTION III, 

4 Of Demonstrative Pronouns. 

Sing. Sing. 

Masc. Fem. 

1st. c^, or cet, before a cette, this or that, 

vowel, [that. 

2d. de ce, or de cet, de cette, cfcrfrom this or 

Sd. ^ ce or a cet, a eette, to thia or that. 

Plur. 
M, and F. 

1st. ces, these or those, 

2d. de ces, cf or from these or those, 

od. a ces, to these or those. 

After the same manner is declined, 

SiNG.M.F. Plur. M. F, 

Celui, celle, fie or she ; ceux, celles, those. 
N. B. The foregoing demonstrative pronouns are 



82 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

used speaking of persons or things. Ceci an^ ceia ai^ 

used speaking of things only. 

1st. ceci, rto, cela, ^//ar, 

2d. de ceci, of ox from thiBy de cela, of or from that, 

Sd. a cecj, to this^ a cela, to that- 

SECTION IV, 

Of Relative Pronouns. 

Most pronouns in French have a relative signifiGa- 
tion ; but those which are proj^erly so called are the 
follow in-g : 

Sing, and Plur. 

Tst. qui» que, w//o, whom^ or which ^ 

2d. de qui, or dont, oj tvhom ovivhose^ 

3d. ^ qui, to whom- 

1st. quoi, cequi, ceque, what^ 

2d. de quoi, or dont, of what ^ or which, 

Sd. a quoi, to tiohat. 

Sing. Masc. Sing. Fem. 
1st. leqnel, laquelle, which. ^ 

2d. duquel. de laquelle, of which or whos^^ 
3d. auquel, ^ laquelle, to which, 

Plur. Masc. Plur. Fem. 
Ist. iesquels, lt;squelles, which ^ 
2d. desquels, desqaelles, ofwhich^ or whose, 
3d* auxquels, auxquelles, to whifh. -^ 

SECTION V, 

0/ Interrogative Pronouns. 

1st. qui, who or whom^ que. what^ 

2d. de qm.ofovf^omwhom, de quoi , of ov from ivhat,.^^ 

3d. a qui, to whom, ^ quoi, to xQhat» 

After the same manner is declined. 
Sing. M. F. Plur. M. F. 

quel, quelle, quels, qi:\plles. what. 

This pronoun is always followed by a substantive. 



FRENCH TONGUE. S3 

Sing. Masc. Sing. Fem. 

1st. lequel, laquelle^ ivhick, 

2(L duquel, de laquelle, of or from whichy 

3d. auquel. a laquelle, ^o -lyte/f. 

Plur. Masc. Plur. Fe3I. 

1st. lesquels, lesquelles, vMch, 

2d. desqnels, desquelies, of or from HJolnch,. 

Sd, auxquels, auxquelles, to "-jjhkh. 

SECTION VL 

Of Indefinite Pronoims^ 

Sing. Plur. 

Masc. and Fem. Masc and Fem, 

Ist. quelque, quelques, 5©7;z^, 

2d. de quelque, de quelques. of or from 8ome,y 

3d. a quelque, a quclqaes, to some. 

After the sante manner are declined, 

quelqu'un, quelqu'unei quelques-uns? quelquesmnes, 

some, somebody, 
chaque, cKacun, chacune, every, each, 
quiconque, qui que ce soil, 'whoever, whosoever^ 
pas un, aucun, nul, \)ersoi\T\e, nobody* 
rien, nothing : pen, little : plusieurs, beaucoup, man^y. 

Sing, Masc, Sing. Fem. 

st- Fun I'autre, , Tune I'autre, one anot/ier, 
2d. I'un de I'autre, Tune de I'autre, of one another. 
3d. Tun a I'autre, Tune a Tautre, to one anothei*'. 

Plur. Masc. Plur. Fem. 

les uns les autres, les unes les autres, one another, 
les uns des autres, les unes des autres, of one anv. 
les uns aux autres, les unes aux autrts, to one ano» 

Sing. Masc. Sing. Fem. 

1st. Tun 8c I'autre, Tune 6c i'autre, both, 
2d.de Tus&de l'autre,de Tune 6c de Vautre of both 
M» ^ i'un & a I'autrev ^ Tune 6c a I'au^re, ta botk 



S4 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Plur. Masc. Plur. Fem. 

les uns 6c les autres, les unes 6c les autres, both. 
des uas 8c des autres, des unes 6c des autres, of bath, 
aux uns 6c aux autres, aux unes 6c aux autres, to bc^th. 

Sing. Masc. Sing. Fem. 

1st. Tun ou i'autre, Tune ou I'autre, either 
Sd.del'unoiide I'autre, de Tune ou de VsLutr^, of either. 
3d. a Tun ou a I'autre, a Tune ou a Tautre. to either^ 

Plur. Masc. Plur. Fem. 

les uns ou les autres, les unes ou les autres, either, 
des uns ou des autres, des unes oudesautres,o/'d^Aer, 
aux uns ou aux autres, aux unes ou aux autres, el tker. 

Sing. Masc. Sing. Fem. 

1st. ni Tun ni I'autre, ni Tune ni Fautre* neither, 
2d.nidei'unniderautre, nidel'une ni de I'autre, o/Vzd^A 
Sd. niaTun nia Tautre, ni a Tune ni a I'autre,^© neither, 

Plur. Masc. Plur. Fem. 

ni les uns ni les autres, ni les unes ni les autres ,72«V//«\ 
nidesunsnides autres, ni des unes ni des autres, o/'wd. 
iiiauxunsniauxautrea^ ni aux unes ni aux autres, to 

Inek/ier, 

CHAPTER VIL 

PRELIMINARY OBSERVATIONS. 

Of Verbs. 

3. k LL personal verbs are conjugated by the help 
Xjl of these pronouns,jV, tu^ il^ or elle^ for the sin- 
gular, and nou8, -vous, ils, or elles, for the plural, 

2. Ail reflected verbs are conjugated with these 
pronouns, ^V me^ tu te, il se or elle se ; nous nous, votiH 
'vous, its se or tiles se ; e, in me, te, se, ifionnitted, and 
an apostrophe is put in its place, when the following 
■word begins with a vowel. 

3. All active verbs may become reflected, by put- 
ting se, before the infinitive, when the action may 
iveturn upon the agent that produces it. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 65 

4. Reflected verbs, in a reciprocal sense are used 
in the rlural only. 

5. All neuter and active verbs are conjugated in 
their compound tenser by th^ help of the auxfliary 
aruGiry likewise the verb e^re. 

6. Reflective and reciprocal verbs are always con- 
jugated in their compcund tenses by the h^lp of etre; 
also iht^ae following verbs, a/Z^r, aberder, arriver, ac- 
courir^ decider, descendre, entrer, monter^mourir, naftre, 
ftartir, retoumery sortir, tomber. venir, and their oeriv- 
ativej, t:xcepi w »: somr of them ire used actively. 

7. In all the verbs of the first conjugation, where- 
in an e is preceded by a g^ that e is kept through all 
tenses and nnoods,as7ncn^^,to eat; ma7igeant, eating. 

8, The compound regular and irregular verbs 
eonin.r^ly follow the conjugation of the simple, from 
which 'hey are derived. 

9, The termination of the tenses* B, d, ', {see page 
90) (b the ^ace in all verbs both regular and irrt gi; ar. 

10. Custom requires that an 5 should be addtci to 
the second person of the imperative i: ood,in verb*^ of 
the first conjugation, when they are tollowed dv the 
particles en and y ; as, disposes-en ; fieiises-y ; vas-y ; 
the latter take a t, when it is followed by en, as va-t-au 

Conjugation. 

Of the auxiliary verb AVOIR, to have. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Avoir, to Move, 

Participles. 

Present* Past. 

Ay ant, Aariw^. | ^\^Jiad, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 
Singular. Plural, 

T^iyl/iave, I Nous avons» *3:y<? ^ax'<?, 

lu as, thou hast^ j vous avez, ye hax^e, 

il * SL,he has. j ils •\ ont, they have. 

* Or elle^ she, in the third person singular of all verbs, 
t Or elles^ for the feminine, in all verbs in the third persou 
plural H 



m A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Imperfect. 

ysiVois.IMd, I Nous avion s, "jy^Aa^f, 

tu av is, thou hacht^ \ vous aviez, ye had^ 

il avoit, he had. \ ^Is avoient). they Iiad. 

Preterperfect. 

J'eus, I hady I Nous eumes, we had^ 

tw eus^ thou hadsty \ vous eulea, ye had, 

il eut, he had- \ ils eurent, they had. 

Future. 

J'aurai, I shall or luill^ ^. j Koas p^urons^weshall^ ^ 
tu aura^, thou shalt > g ! vous aurez, ye shall \ g 
il aura, he shall j<t | hs auront, they shall j '^ 

IMPERATIVE MOOD, 

Singular. Plural- 

Aye, harae thou, j Ayorss, let us have, 

qu'il ait, let him-have^ \ ^ds ez./iave ye^lthem ha'Oe. 

cju'elle ait, let her have, \ q'i'iisorqu'ellesayeni,/e^ 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

que Singular. que Plural. 

J'aye, that I may "^ ,; | Nous ayons^ "Oiemay^ ^ 

tu ayes, thou may est > § vous avez. ye mayK § 

il ait, he may j -^ j ils ayent, tJiey may j <: 

Imperfect. 

Singular. Plural. 

3'aurois, I should* "1 ^ j Nous aunons, wesh,"^ ^ 
tu 2i\3iVO\Sythou shouldst > § ! vous auriez, ye sh. C | 
il auroit, he should y^ \ ijs auroient, ^/^ey sZ/.j"^ 

que ' Pretei perfect. 

J'eusse, I^iat I might f "^ ^^ Nous eussions, we in.'^ 
tu eusseSjt^ow mightest > « vous e\\%s.\e7.jiiemhrht C 
il eQt, he might j 

* Or i could^ ivouhly or mi^^ht have, 

t Or, / hadj or could, i^QUid, or should havi 



vous euss\ezyye might L - 
ils eussent, they mig, j "^ 



FRENCH TONGUE. 87 

Now to have the compound tenses, you seed only 
add aftr*r each person the participle past, eu for the 
Frtiicli. and had for the Enghsh, through all tenses 
and moods; as,^* ai eu, I have had, and so on. 

Conjugation. 

Of the auxiliary verb ETRE, to be. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Etre, to be. 

Participles. 

Present. Past.. 

Etant, being. |Ete, been. 

INDICATIVE MOODo 

Present Tense, 

Singular. Plural. 

Nous somoies. ive are. 



Jesuis, Iain, 
tu es, thou artf 
il est, he is., 



vous etes, T/e are^ 
lis sont, they are. 



J'^tois, I was, 

tu ^lois, thou wast, 

il etoit, he was. 



Impertect. 

Nous ^tions, we were^ 
vous etiez, ye were^ 
lis etoient, they wera 

Preterperfe<;t. 
Singular. Plural. 

Je fus, I was, I Nous fumes, we werc^ 

tu fus, thou wast, I vous fiites, ye were, 

il fut, he waS' \ ils furent, they were. 

Future. 
Je sev:i.i,I shall or will ^ I Nous serons, ^tve shall ^ 
tu seras, thou shalt >^ I vous «erez, ye shall C^ 
il sera, he shall j \ ils seront, they shall j 

, IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Singular. Plural. 

Sois, be thou, I Soy ous, let us be. 

%u'il soit, let him be, I soyez, be ye, [them be, 

qu'elle soit, let her be* j qu'ils or qu'elles soient/e(? 



88 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense, 
que Singular. que Plural. 

Je soJs, that I may "^ [Nous soyons, nise may"^ 
tu sois, thou may est >^ jvous soyez, ye may C 
ii soit, he may j jiis soient, they may j^ 

Imperfect. 

Je serols, I should ^ \^ ons serious fTveshoidd '^ ^ 
tu sevois^thoushouldst C *^ jvous seriez, ye should K^ 
il seroit, he should j ^ lils seroient, th» should 3 

que Preterperfect. 

le iu^se^ that I mighi'^ ll^oudussionSyivemight'^ 
tu fusses, thou tnight' v <i^ vousfussiez» ye might C C 
il flit he might j ^ jils fusst^nt- they might j 

The compound tenses of this verb are Itemed by 
the hel?) of the auxiliary verb avoir, through all itn 
tenies aiid moods, by adding after each person and 
tense, e/e, for the French, and been for the English, 
as,/'(zi ete^ I have been, ^c-j^avois etS^ I have beeii» 
Sec. and so on, &c. 

Observe, 1st. the compound tenses of all other verbs, 
both regular and irregular, are formed by the help of 
these two auxiliary verbs, by adding the participle 
past of the verb you are conjugating, after each 
ten.se and person of the auxiliary verb. For example^ 
to find all the cottj pound tenses of this verb parler^ 
tospt*ak» its participle past h^Aw^ parte , you need on- 
ly put it after the simple tenses of the verb avoir^ 

Observe, 2dly> those verbs that are ccnju. aced by 
the help of e^r^, are only comj^ounded of tli simple 
of that auxiliary verb ; that is to say^ the compound 
of the verb etre does not serve for the compounti 
of others; whereas the compound of the verb avoir 
may serve, but seldom, for the compound of others : 
consequently, verbs conjag:ated by the help oi avoir 
are omet nics compounded of the coir pound and 
th' corjuy'fted by the help of etre a^?^ : 1 iy ^um- 
pounded of its simple tenses. The reason oi it may 
be, because the compound tenses of the verb e'crs are 



FRENCH TONGUE. 89 

formed by the help e«i che verb avoir, which reflect- 
ive, and some :>euter verbs will not admit of. Ex- 
cept from this observation verbs used passively, which 
are conjuga*^ed by the help of eire in all its tenses, 
both sii: pie 4nd compound. 

JV- i?. What verbs are conjugated by the help of 
avoir or the help oi etrt. — See Freiiminary Odserva" 
tionsy p. 85. Art 5 and 6. 

Conjugation of Regular Verbs. 

ft is very indifferent how many conjugations we * 
admit. Some admit four, others ten, and even Fa- 
ther Buffer reckons twelve. There may be reck- 
oned six conjugations: 
The 

lst."\ er ^ raimer, to love. 

^d. I tr I I punir, topunislu 

3d. \evoir l-a:< ^^^^^''» ^^ ^^^^• 

4th. Crd preceded by d f ^^ vendre, to sell, 

5th. 'j r^?- preceded by wz I } trsiduire, to translate. 

6th.J rif preceded by inti J Ljoindre, to join, 

TERMINATIONS of the PRIMITiVE TENSES 
of the REGULAR VERBS. 

Infinitive. Participle Participle Present of Preterpevfect 
Piesent, Passive. _the Indica. cf the Snai, 

1st con J. aim 
2d conj.pun- 
Sd conj.d- 
4thcoDJ.v*nd-re 
^thconj.trad' 
-^irliconKJo- 







M. F. 




er 
ir 


-ant 
'issant 


-e ee -e 
-i ie -is 


-ai 
-is 


evoir 


-evant 


-w ue 'Ois 


'US 


re 

uire 

indre 


-ant 
- uisant 
-ignant 

m 


'U ue -s 
^uit uite 'Uis 
'int inte -^ins 


-is 

'Uisis 

'igmsp 



97 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Unvariable TERMINATIONS in all the CONr 
JUGATIONS. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Singular. 



Present Tense, 



A 



c: 



Ih 



E. 



G.' 



Variable -ons -ez 

Imperfect. 

-Qis -Gis 'Oit 'io72s ^iez 

Preterperfcct. 

-ai -as- -a -dmes 'dies 

'is -is 'it 'ices -ties 

'US 'lis 'Ut 'Umes -utes 

-ins 'ins -int -i nines -zntes 

Future. 

-rai -ras -ra -rons -rez 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

-e -es '€ 'ions -iez 



Plural, 
-ent 



- eren'S' 
'Trent 
'Urent 

'Ton$ 



'tnt' 



'Tois 



Imperfect. 



-ricz 



-rQient- 



-assent 

'issent 
-ussent 

'imsent 



rozs -^Toit -rions 
Preterperfect. 

-asse -asses -de -asnons -assiez 

'isse 'isses ^it -issions 'issiez 

'Usse -tLsses -fit -ussions -ussiez 

4.} 'inss'e ^insses -int -infsions -inssiez 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Participle Present. 

H. -ant 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
K Variable. -ons -ez -fcri^. 

First Conjugation. 
INFINITIVE MOOD. 
AiM-ER, ^0 love. 
Participles. 
PrEsenlt. Past. 

Aii%aQt, lori"^^. \ KvsrA^ loved- 



FRENCH TONGUE. 91 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Singular. Plural. 



Jaime, Iiox>e* 

tu almes. thou lovesty 

II aime, he loves. 



Nous aimons, we love^ 
vous aiinez> ye love^ 
ils aiment, they love. 

Imperfect. 



J'aimoi?, I did love,-\- 

tu aimoisj thou didst love, 

11 aimoit, h^ did love. 



Nous Blrnxon^we dldlove^ 
VQUS aimiez, t/e did love, 
lis aimoient, they did love. 



J'almai, / loved, 

tu aim as, thou lovedst, 

il aima, Ae loved. 



J'aimerai, /s/za// or will I. 
tu aimeras, thou shalt I. 
W aimera, A^ shall love. 



Fjeterperfect. 

Nous aimames, we loved^ 
vous ai mates, ye loved, 
ils aimerent, they loved. 

Future. 

Nous aimerons, we shall L 
vous ai«»erez, ije sh. love^ 
iis aimeront, they sh, love. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SiNouLAR. / Plural. 

Ainie, love thou,X I Aimdns, let ics love, 

qu'il aime, let him love, I ai-r^ez, love ye, 

qu'eile ainie, let her love, \ v^\x^\\^2i)fc\Gui^let them love, 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

<]ue Singular. que Plural. 

^^Siiiii^, that Imay love, I Nous aimions, we may I. 
tu aimes, thou mayest 1. 1 vous aimirz, ye may love, 
ii aime, he may love, \ «ls aiment, they may love, 

* Or, 1 do love^ lam laving, which is to be observed in all 
other verbs. 

f Or. Iwis loving, or, 1 -was used tolove, or, 1 used to love. 
It is the same \ix ail other verbs. 

t Or, dQ^t tkQU Iqvc ,' ^^d likewise m all other verbs, «^ 



92 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Imperfect, 

Singular. Plural. 

J'aimerois, I should love ^ jNous ^xm^voxn^.wefihJovr^ 
tu aimerois, thou sh, lovcSvou% aimeries, ye sh. love^ 
il aimeroit^/ze should love }\\\& ameroient, they sh. love,,. 

que Preterperfect. 

J*ai masse, t/ml I might /.iNous aimassions, w^^w./oT'f » -^ 
tu aimasse.-, thoumight, /Jvous aimassiez, ye mi love^ 
il aimat, he might love, (ils aimassent, they inL lonsx 

Second Conjugation. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PuN-iR, tojmnish. 

Participles. 

Present. Past, 

Pun-issant, fiurmhing. | Pun- i , pami^hed, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tensee 

Singular. Plural. 

Je pun'is, I punish, iNous punissoiis, we punish. 

tu punisi thoufiunishest, jvous punissez, yc punishy 
il punit, he punishes, ills punissent, they punish. 

Imperfect. 

Je punissois, I did punish , | Nous punissions, roe d, "1 -4 
tupunissois,?/^aif c?./z2imV/ Jvous punissiez, ye dcd vS 
il punissoit, he did punish ]\ls punissoient, they d,j S 

Preterperfect. 

Je punis, I punished^ 'Nous punimes.nuepiUTiished^ 

tu punis, thou pimishedst,w ous punites, z/e pimished^ 

I pun'it, he punished. lils punirent, they pamishtd , 

Future. 

Xe punirai, / shall pimishj\No\i% punirons, we sh."^ -^^ 
tu puniras, tho2i shaltpunA vous punirez, ye shall. C '^ 
W punlra, he shall pnmshMls puniront, they shall j^^ 



FRENCH TONGUE. 93 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Singular. Plural. 

Pg?ii3 punish thou^ {Pnmssous, let us fiunish, 

qu'il yx'Xnssv Jet hi?nfnmishy 'pimissezy flunish ye, \fiun. 
qn'cUQpunvsat, let her pun, \ quails punisseat, let them 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

que Singular. que Plural.- 

Je punisse, that I may "^-^ 'Nous piiriissions W€m,'\% 
tu puaisses, thou mayt. C g j vous punissiez, ye may C'S^ 
il puuis&e, he may jM^Ws pa«issent> they may j -oj 

Imperfect. 

Jc punirois, I should '^^g iNous punirions, we sh. 
tu punirois, thoushouL C'| I vous puniriez, ye sh, 
il puiiiroit, he should j 4,!ils puniroient, they sh. 

que Preterperfect. 



Nous puDJSsions, wem, 
vous pURissiez, ye 7n. 
ils punissent, they mi* 



Je punisse, iVz(2^ Imight "^-^ 
tu punisses^^/^oz^ mx^'A^. vg 
ii punit, he might j ^ 

Ti ir.< CoQJn.eation. 
INFINITIVE MOOD. 
De VOIR, to Give. 
Participles. 
Present. Past, 

D-evant, owin^, \ D-u, d^ed, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 
Singular. Plural 

Je dois, lowe^ Nous devoir^j we owcj, 

tu dois, thou owest, 
il doit, he owes 



vous dev^z, ye owe, 
ils doivent, they o%ve. 



Imperfect. 

Singular. Plural. 

Je devois, I did owet i Nous devious, we did ow^, 

tu devoid, thou didst owe, vous deviez. ye did owe, 

55 devoiti hedidoitre^ I ils devoretit, t/iey did owe" 



94 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Preterpcrfect 

le dus, I owed i i Nous d^mes, nue owed^ 

tu dus, thou otvedsf, vous dutes, ye owed, 

il dtit, fie owed, I ils durent, they owed. 

Future. 



Jedevrai, I shall owe ^ 
tu devras, thou shalt owe, 
ii devra, he shall owe. , 



Nous devrons, we shall owe^. 
vous devrez, ye shall owe, 
ils devront, they shall owe^. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Singular. Plural. 



Dois, owe thou, 

qu'il doive, let him owe, 

qu'elie doive, let her owe- 



Devous, let us owe^ 

devez, owe ye, 

qu'ils doivtnt, let them owe.. 



S^BIUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense, 
que Singular. que Plural, 



Je doive, that I may owe, 
tu doivesi thou mmje, owe, 
Tt d^ive^ lie may owe. 



Nous devions, we may owe^ 
vous deviez, ye may owe, 
ils doivent, they may owe^ 



Imperfect* 

le devrois, I should owe, iNousdevrions* we sh. owe^ 
tu devro\s,thoic should: otveJvous 6evvlez,ye should owe^ 
II devroit, he shotdd owe, iils devroient, they s/i, owe, 

Preterperfect. 



Nous dussions,we mgt.owe^ 
vousdussiez, ye might owe^ 
il dussent, they might o'he. 



Je dusse, thati might owe, 
tu dus-:es,^Aoz^ might, owe, 
il dut, he might owe. 

Fourth Conjugation. 
INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Ven-dre, to sell- 
Participles. 

FrESEN;Tw PaS-T 

Ven-dant, selling, } Ven-du, soldr 



FRENCH TONGUE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
PreseRt Tense* 



95 



Singular. 
Je vends, 1 sell^ 
tu vends, thou s^llesi, 
il vend, ke sells. 



Plural. 

Nous vendons, we sel'l^ 
vous vendez, ye sell^ 
ils vendent, they sell. 



Imperfect. 



Je vendois, 1 did sell, 
tu vendois, thou didst sell, 
il vendoit, he did sell. 



Nous vendions,we? didselU 
vous vendiez, ye did sell, 
lis vendoient, thrj did sell. 



Preterperfect. 



le vendis. I sold, 

tu vendis, thou solde^t^ 

ii vendit, he sold. 



Nous vendimesjWd* sold, 
vous vendues, ye sold, 
ils vendirent, they sold. 



Future. 
Je vendi^i, / shall sell) INous vendrons,we sh.sell^ 
tu vendras, thQU shalt sellAwoMS vesdre^, ye shall sell, 
ii vendra, he shall sell. 41s vendront,rA^?/ shall selL 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Singular Plural 

Vends, sell thou, Vendons, let us sell, 

qu'il vende, let him sell, vendez, sell ye, 
qu'elle vende, let her sell, qu'ils vendent Jet them sell- 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense- 
•^ue Singular, que Plural. 

Je vende, Y^a^ I may sell,ySQ\isven(lions,wemaijseil* 
tn vendes^thou may est selly\o\i% \end\ez, ye may sell* 
il vende, he may sell, ils vendent, they may sell. 

Imperfect. 
Je vendrois, I should sell, jNous vendrions,we sho seH, 
tu vendrois, thou sh. sell, |vous vendriez, ye sh. sell, 
il vendroit, he should sell ils vendroient, they sh. sell- 
que Preterperfect. 

3e vendisse,7/zQ;/ / mi. se/ZjlNous \end:\^^\ons,nventi.seli 
tu vendisse,?AoM might 5f//,lvous vendissiez, ye mi. sell, 
il vendit, he mighf sell* 'ils vendissent, they mi. setL 



9S A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Fifth Conjugation. 
INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Trad-tjire, to translate. 
Participles. 
Present. Fast 

Trad uisant, translating. | Trad-uit, translated 
INDICATIVE MOOD, 
Present Tense. 
Singular. Plural. , 

t« tr ^ '^Z ^^«^^^^^^» jNoustraduisons, tve tran, \ 
il traduit, he translates^ hh traduisent. they tranl 
Imperfect. 

^tv&Amso^^Moudidst i I Ivous traduisiez, ye did h 

il traduisoit, he did S I lihtradoisoient.iet/Sf 

Preterperfect. 

n.lv^A!''^-\f"''""^"^'''' i^°"* traduisimes. «;os 
tatradmsis,i/iou tramld,t.\ vous traduisites, ve i U 
il traduisjt, he translated, lils traduisirent, tLj $ S ' 

Future. 
Je traduirai, I shall ^^ 'Noustraduirons.s,^ M. ^ « 
A traduira, he shall S S.iistraduiront.Mf^Sy | 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
^ Singular. ,' Plueal. 

Traduis, ?ra«*/a^f ?/««, .Traduisons, let us transla 
qu iltraduise.to /;i«i trans, traduisez. tranlale ve 
qu ebetraduise let her 'ra.lqu'ilstraduisent,to///cm fr 
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 
que Singular. que Plukal. jn 

Je trad.iise, that Imay^l Noustraduisions,w»2 1 v 
tutraduiseVAowmot/,/Cg vous tradu.siez.wemay il 
il tradvise. he may 5 g ils traduisent, ?//f5/,«,|5i 



FRENCH GRAMMAR, 97 

Imperfect. 

Singular Plural 

%eX.V2id,mYo\%, I should "^^ Noustraduirions we^A.'^g 

tViX.nii^\\\xo\s,th, should V | vous traduiriez^y^sA. >1 

il traduiroit, he should j g ilstraduirQient,^A^y sA. 3 S 

que Preterperfect. 

^e traduisis&e^ I might '^^ Nous tnaduisissions -we mLC^ 
tutraduisisses, thoum, C § voustraduisissiez,!/^^.^ g 
il traduisit, he might j 2 ilstraduisissent,r^et/7n'C f 

Sixth Conjugation. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

JO-INDRE to join. 

Participles. 

Present. Past. 

lo-ign ant, joining. | Jo-int, joined* 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 
Singular. Plural, 

Je joins, I join, jNous joignons, wejoin^ 

tu joins, ihoujoinest^ vousjoignez, t/ejom, 

il joint, he joins- |ils joignent, they join. 

Imperfect. 



Nous joignions, we did Join, 
vous joigniez, ye didjoin^ 
lis joignoient, they didjoin,^ 

Preterperfect- 

Jejoignis I joined, NousjoigpimeB^weyomfcf, 



Jejoignois, Jrffr/jom, 

tu joignois, thoii didst join, 

il joi§noit» he did join> 



tu joignis, thoujoinedsti 
H joignit, ht joined. 



vous joignites, ye joinedy 
ils joignirent, they joined^ 



Future* 

Je joindrai, J5//«//yom» jNousjoindrbns, we^^.*^ • 
tujoindras, r/iows/m/r^'omjvousjoindrez, yeshally-^ 
il joindra, he shall join* ills joindront? th, shaliy^ 



98 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Singular. Plura^l, 

Joins, jfom ?y^ow, lloi^nons, let us joiUf 

qu'^iljoigne, let himjoiny j^ignezjoin i/<?, 
qu'elle joigne, let her join}\qvC\\sjo\^tntyl€t thewjoin, 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense, 
que Singular. que Plural. 



Je joigne, that Iviayjoin^ 
tu joignes,^Aoz^ may est join, 
il joigne, Ae may joiri' 



Nous joignions, Tve may join, 
vous joigniez, ye may join ^ 
ils joignent, they may join. 



Imperfect, 
le joindrois, I should join, iNous joindrions, we sh^joo 
tujoindrois, thou skouldstjoin}vo\x^-}omdiv\tz, ye sh.join. 
il joindroit,Af s^ow/rf7oi«ojilsjoindroient,?^ey stujo, 

que Preterperfect. 

Je joignisse, that I mi, jo. NousjoignissionSjWeywiy^?, 



tu joignisses,rZ5. might join, 
il joiguit, he might join. 



vous joignissiez, ye mi^jo, 
ils joignisseat, they mijoin^ 



Conjugation of Refiected Verbs, 

A Reflected verb,as I have hinted before ,his always 
se before its infinitive ; ^s^serepentir, to repent ; but 
it is, generally, an active verb, whose action returns 
upon the agent that produces it The following ex- 
ample of the first conjugation, will be sufficient to 
learn how to conjugate any reflected verbi^^ 
INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Se Lever, to rise. 
Participles. 
Present. Past- 

Se ievant, rising, jLeve, risen, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense- 
Singular. Plural. 

le me l^ve, Irise^ jNous nous levons, we rise^ 

tu te l^ves, thou riseH^ vous vous levez, ye risej 
il 3C leve, he risee* I ils se le^vent, they rise 



4 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



99 



Imperfecte 
Je me levois, I did rise ^ i Nous nous levions,u'^ (^. ri 
tu te levGis* thou didst rise A vous vous leviez, ye did ri, 
il se levoit, he did rise. \ ils se levoient, they did ri, 

^ Preterperfect- 

Je me levai, Irosey INous nous levames, ive ro. 

tu te le^vas, thou didst me,!vous vous levates? ye rose, 
il se leva, he did rise, [ils se leverent, they rose. 

Future. 

[rise» 
Nous nous leverons,%y^ sh^ 
vous vous leverez,t/e sh.m 
ilsse leveront, they sh. rise. 



Je me leverai, I shall rise, 
tu te levsras^ thou sh, rise, 
il se levera, he shall rise,. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD, 



Plural. 

L^vons-nous, let us ?w,. 
levez-vous, rise ye. 
qu'ils se Invent Jet them ri. 



Singular. 

L^ve-toi, rise thou, 
qu'il se leve, let him rise, 
mi'elle se leve, let her rise. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 
Singular. Plural. 

que que [rise, 

Je me leve, that I may rise. Nous nous levions,we/?zay 
tu te leves, thou mayest riscy - 
ik se leve, he may rise. 



Je me leverois, I shou, rise, 
tu te leverois, thou sho, rise, 
il se leveroit, he should rise. 



vous vous leviez,2/e may ri 
ils se levent, they may ri^ 

Imperfect- 

[should rise^ 
Nous nous levencs. we 
vous vous leveriez,2/c^/^7?z> 
ils. se leveroient, th, sh, rt 



Preterperfect* 

[might rise. 
Nous nous levassions, ive 
vous vous levassiez,t/. m, r, 
ils se levassent, they mi. ri. 

There are neuter verbs which become reflected by 
tlie axMition of the particle eii immediately after tb'^ 



que 

Je me levasse, that Imiri, 
tu te levasses,^/^.7?2i§-A^e^^ ri. 
ils se levat, he might rise^ 



100 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

double pronouns, s'en alter, to go away ; si'enfuir^ to 
run away ; s^en retourner^ to return. 

A reciprocal verb, which is by no means to be con- 
founded with a reflected one, is used in the plural 
only, and conjugated like reflected verbs, with a 
double pronoun. 
Conjugation of the Irregular Verbs Alfihahetkalbh^^ 
INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Absojjdre, ^0 absolve. 
Participles 
Present. Past. 

Absolvant> absolving. jAbsous absolved, 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Singular. Plural. 



Nous absolvons, we abso^- 
vous absolve z, ye absolve* 
ils 2ih^\wtTiUthey absolve^ 



ez t/' ^^- ^1 

Uth.s.y^ 



J'absous, I absolve, 

*u absous, tAou absoivest^ 

11 absout, he absolves. 

Imperfect. 

Singular. Plural. 

J'absolvois, Idid "J ^ | lSous absolvions, w. «. "^ ^ 

tu absoJvoiS) th9U didst Cl |vousabsolviez,^e(iz(i C"| 

il absol voit, he did j q 'i^^ absolvoient,^/^z/ of. j "§ 

Buture 
J^absoudrai,^ I shall y ^ }Noi.sabso«drons,w.5. 
tu absoudras, thou shalt >'© vous absoudre 
il absoudra, he shall y ^ |ils absoudront; 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Singular. Plural. 

Absous, a3<so/i;(? thou, \h\i%^y[Q\\^ Jet tis absolve^ 

qu'il absolve, let him a^.so/x'e. I absolve z> absolve ye, ^ 
Iqu'ils absolventj/t"^ ^y^. «^, 
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 
que Singular. que Plural. 

J'absolve, that I may ") ^ |Nousabsolvions,'zy'm. ^ g 
tu absolves, thou mayest C"© I vous absolviez.z/^ m >'§ 
il absolve, he may J c I ds absolvent/i^f z/ma. j -§ 

* When a tense will not be conjugated at length, you will 
iind a reference to the proper tense in the table ot* termini 
trons, p. 90. . 



11 



FRENCH TONGUE. iOi 

Imperfect. 
rsihsoMeiYoisJshouldC i Nous Bbsondnons.ivcsh.'^c 
tvi absoudrois,^/^o:^5// < t vous^bsoudriez, tje sho. V-s 
\Uhsoudro\Uheshoiddi'%\i\s3bsoudYoiei^uthey s/uy ^^; 

Accaeillir, to receive, like cwd//?n 
Accourir, to run to, like cowrin 
INFINITIVE MOOD, 
Ac qu E R 1 R , ^0 acquire. 
Participles. 
Present. past* 

Acqut^rant, acquiring. \ Acquis, acquired. 
INDICATIVE MOOD. , 
Present Tense. 
Singular. Plural. 

J'acquiers I acquire, iNous 2itq}^€xi)\^^,^€ acquire 

tu acquiers, thcuacquirest A vous acqu6rez, ye acqmre^ 
il acquiert, he acquires, lils acquierent.^Aq/ acquirc^ 

Imperfect 
J'acquerois, I did ■;^ c iNous ^cqu6noi^s,tvedid 1 i 

tu acquerois. thou didst y|! vous acqueriez, ye did > g, 
il acqu^roit, he did 3 « 'i^s acqueroient,^/iet/ did J ^ 

Preterperfect, , 
J'acquis, I acquired. INous acquimes,?i^^ acquire. 

tu acquis, thou acquiredst, voas acquites, y^ acquired. 
iJ acquit, he acquted. ils acquirent.r//.^ acquired. 

Future. 
J'acquer-rai, / shall acquire. See p. 90. D. 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Singular. ~ Plural. 

[AcqueroRS, /e^^wsacgz^zr^. 
Acquiers. acquire tkoii, lacquerez, acquire ye, 
qu'ii 2LC(imQv\Mhim acqu^qv^'M acquierent, tet tfi, ac. 
SUBJUNCl IVE MOOD. 
Present Tense, 
que Singular. que Plural. 

r^cquiere. / may "> | iNous acquerions,?:.'^ ;?2. r| 
tu acQuiere-. th-mayest \ %\ vous acquenez,t^'^ may< g,, 
il acquiere, he may 3 ^ 1 '^s ^zv^i\^xtxx\,theijmay C ^^ 



102 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Imperfect. 
J'acqaer-rois, I should acqmre* See p. 90. F. 
que Preterperfect. 

J'acquisse, / might "1 J INous acquissiGns,i2y^/w» "1 g 
tu acquisses, thou mig* > ||vousacquissiez,2/(?mi^. C | 
11 acquit, he might j ^ jils acquissent/Aq/ ^^g'J ^ 
Admettre, to admits like mettrc/ 

INFINITiVE MOOD- 

Aller, /o go* 
Participles. 
Present. Past. 

A\\2itii^ going. \A\\€, gone, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. . 

Singular. Plural. 



Nous allons, wegt^ 
V0U6 allez^ ye go, 
lis vont, they go. 



Je vais, I go, 

tu vas, thou goest, 

ilva, he goes. 

Imperfect. 
J^allois, IdidgOy I'Nous alliens* tve didgo^ 

tu allois, thou didst go ^ jvous alliez, ye didgo\ 
il alloit, he did go. 'ils alloient, they did go*' 

Preterperfect. 



J^allai, * Iivent, 

tu alias, thou wentest^ 

il alia he tuent. 



Nous allames, ^i&e went^ 
vous allates, ye iventy 
:1s allerent, they went. 



* Or. je fus, tu fus, il fut. Nou3 fumes, vous futes, ilg 
furent. 

Future. 

Virsih I shall go, \^ousivoT\s, ive shall go ^ 

tu iras, thou shall go, vous irez, ye shall go, 

il ira, he shall go. 'ils iront. they shall go. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Singular. Plural- 

I Aliens, let us go, 
Ysl, go thou, M\ez go ye, 

(ju'il aiile, let hm§ Q» Iqu'ils aijkntj let tfi-emgo^ 



FRENCH TONGUE. 10 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
qMQ Singular. Plural.. 

3^aille,/maz/^o, l^ous slum >ns, we may go^ 

tuailles. thou mayestgOy jvous alliez, ye may go ^ 
il aille, he may go, \U aillent, th£y may go- 

Imperfect 

J'lrois, I should^ JNous irioDS, *we shovid gqi, 

tu irois, thou should* st go, jvous iriez, ye should go ^ 
si iroit, he should go* Jils iroient, they should go^ 

que Preterperfect* 

3'allasse, I might go, jNous allassions, %ve mi.go^ 

tu 2i\\a,sses^thou?nightestgOj. vous alla&sitrz , ye might go^, 
fl all»t, he might go, j ils aliassent, //^^z/ might ^€>^ 

, INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Participles. 

S'AssEOiR, to sit down. 

Presi^lnt. Past. 

& A%%ty2iXiX,y sitting doivn. I Assis, sat down-. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense- 

Singular, Pj^urai., 

[sit down^ 



Je nn'assieds, I sit down, 
tu t'assieds, thou sittestdO' 
il s'assied , he sits down. 



Je m'asseyois, I did sit do, 
tu t'asseyois, thoudi.sit do* 
il s'asseyoit, Jie did sit do. 



Nous nous assfvons, we 
vou s vous assc vez , ye sit do,. 
ils s'asseyent,^/iq/ sit down. 

Imperfect. 

[did sit down. 
Nous nous asseyions, we 
vous vousasseyi^z,|^<2fife'.si.^» 
ils s'asseyoientj^/t^ir^^'. si. d 



PreterperfecL 



Je m'assis, I sat down, 
tu \^2i%%\Sithousaitest dow7i, 
il s'assit? he sat dmvn^ 



Nous nous assimes,"»^ satd^ 
vous vous assitf s, ye satd. 
Os s'assni'ent,-?^^j/^a:5 d^w^^ 



104 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Future. 

I [shall sit doivn^ 

Jem'assi^rai,*/5/z.si^c^oJNous nous assierms, ive 

tu t*assieras, thou sh. sit do, vous vous assierez,*^^*^ 5i.d 

il s^assiera, he shall sit daw ils s'assieront, they sh. sit d 

* Or, Je ni^asseyerai, according to the French Academy, 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Singular. Plural. 

I Asseyons-nous. /e^ ^^s szVcf. 
Assied-toi, eit thou' down, > asseyez- vous,sif {ye)doivn. 
qu'il s'asseye, let him sit dJquHls s*asseyent, let th, sit d- 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense* 

Singular. Plural. 

que \_doiimfi [may sit down, 

Je m'asseye> / may ^z^ Nous nous asseyion^. we 

tu t*asseyes, r>^. may. sit do) vous vous SLSSi^yiez.yem.si.d, 

H s'asseye, he may sit do. ils s'asseyent, th. m. sit. do. 

Imperfect. 

Singular. Plural. 

[sit down,\ [should sit down^ > 

Je ni'assierois,* / 5/zow/tf|Nous nous assieii . . we 
tu t'assierois. thou wo. sifd*\ vous vous assieriez,^^*^*^-^ 
il s*assieroit, /^e wo, sit do. 'lis s'assieroient,^/t.5i^o 5//a'. 
* Or, je m'asseyerois, ibidc. 
Preterperfect. 
^ue [doiim,\ ^[might sit down, 

Je rn'assisse, / might sir^Nous nous assissjons, we 
tu t'assisses. th, rmght.s. c/.jvous w(ms2LS^\i?s\QZ,yemi.n.d 
i\ s'assit, hemight sit down, ih s^assissent, they m. sit d. 

Observe this manneV of conjugatine the verb 0:5- 
^oir, is very puzzliiie; for learners. 16 avoid these 
d)ffif^nlties, the best way is to follow the advice of 
Vaugelas, and instead of that verb, to make use of 

se placer fir endre place, se reposei\ semettre szir un 
^iif^^, ^rX'Tdlne to the ^'-»v.t. 

AprreDclre, to learn, lik prendre. 
' Assaillir, to assaidt, like tressaUiir 



FRENCH TONGUE. m 

INF.NrilVE MOOD. 
Battre, ^0 6ea/. 
Participles. 
Present. Past. 

Battant, beating. \ Battu, beaten. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
PreseDt Tense. 
Singular. Plural. 



Nous battons we beat^ 
vous battez. ye baat^ 
lis battent, they beat. 



Jebats, I beat 

tu bats, thou beatest, 

\\ bat, he beaPs, 

Imperfect. 

Jebatt-ois, I did beat. See p. 90. B. 
Preterperfect. 
Singular. Plural. 

Je battis. / beat^ iNous battimes, we beat 9 

tu battis. thou beate^t^ ivous battites, ye beat, 
il batti, he beat. |ils battirent, they beat. 

Future. 
le batt-rai, I shall beat See p. 90- D. 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Singular. Plural. 

jBattons, let us beaiy 
B^ts, beat thou \bsiitez. beat ye, 

qu»il b2X\tj€thim befit, Iqu'ils battent, /e///^e;?2 6f«f, 
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense, 
que Singular. Plural. 

Je batte, I may beat. lNousb:Utioii.3,^e772flydm^, 

tubatte, thou may est beat A\om battiez, ye may beat, 
il battc, he may beat, |ils battent, they may beat. 

Imperfect. 
Je batt-rois, I shozildbeat. See p. 90 F. 
que Preterperfect, 

Je battisse, Imi^ht beat, iNous battissions, w^ ml be. 
tu battisses» thoti mi beatj vousbatMssiez,i/e mi beat^ 
i\ battit, Ae mi^ht beat, |ils b^Xii^^ni^hey mu beat. 



106 A GRAMMAR OF TKE 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

BoiRE, ^0 drink. 

Participles. 

Present. Past. 

Buvant, drinking!, |Bu, drank, or drunk 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

SlN<JU.LAR. PlURALo 

Je bois, I drink, jNous buvons, ive drinks 

t\x bois, thou drinkest, jvous buvez, ^(? drink. 
ii boit, he drinks, jils boivent, they drink. 

Imperfect. 
Je buv-ois, I did drink)- See page 90. B. 

Preterperfect, 
Je bus, I drank, jNous bumes, we dranky 

tu bus, thou drankesti jvous butes, ye drank, 
il but, he drank, jils burent, they dranL 

Future. 
Je boi-raij I shall dmiL See page 90. D« 
IMPERATIVE MO0D. 
Singular. Plural. 

I Buvons, let us drink ^ 
Bois, drink thoic, Jbuvez, drink ye* 

qif 11 boive, let him drink, (qu'ils boivent, ktthemdri, 
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense.* 
que Singular Plural- 



Nous buvions, nve may dr. 
vous buviez, yemaydnnk^ 
ils boivent,^/tq/ may drink. 



2q boive, I may drink , 
to boives, thou may est dr, 
ii boivcj he may drink. 

Imperfect 
Je boi-rois, I should drink- See page 90. F, 

Pretei*perfect. 
que Singular. Plural, 

Je h\x%%Q, I might drink, [Nous bussions, we mi. drink^ 
t-d busses, thou mi, drinkSvoMS bussiez, z/e mi, drink, 
^i bfit; he might drink. [ils bussent, they m^ght dri^h 



'FRKNCH TONGUE. ^W 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
BouiLLiR, to boil. 
Participles. 
Present. Past. 

Bouillant, boiling, \ Bouilli, boiled, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 
Singular. Plural. 



Nous boinlions» weboiL^ 
voMS bouillez, ye'ML^ 
ils feouillent, they boiL 



le bou§, / boUy 

tu bou6, thou boUest, 

i\ hoxxuJie boils» 

Imperfect. 
Je bouilli-ois, I did boil- See page 90. B. 

Preterperfect. 
Je bouiliisj / boiled, lNou<5 bouilli mes> we boiled-, 

tu bouillis, thou boiledsty jvous bouillites, ye boiled, 
\\ bouillit, he boiled* \ ils bouiilirent, they jboUed. 

Futureo 
Je bouilli-rai, IshcdlboiL See page 90. Do 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Singular, Plural. 

I Bouillons, let us boiU 
hoyuW^z ^ boil ye ^ [boil, 

i;{Kk^\\hQ\k\\\tilet him boil jqu'ils bouillent, /^^ than 
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present T^nse. , 

que Singular. Plural. 

Je bouille, I may boil, iNousbouillions, we may b 
tu bouilles, thou may* /^oi/Jvous bouiUiez, ye may boil^ 
il bouille, he may boil. lilsbouillent, //jf?/ 7nay boiU 

Imperfect. 
•le booilli-rois, I should boil See page 90. F- 
que Preterperfect. 



'Je bouillisse, I might boily 
tu bouillisses» thou mi.boily 
il bouillit, he might boil* 



Nousbouillissions, wem,l?. 
vous bouillissiez,!/^ imboih 
ils bouillissent,M^z/ ml boiL 



This verb is seldom used, except in the third per- 
sons singular and plural ; and instead of bouillir de 
la viande, to boil meat, "vve say, faire box0ir4^h 



308 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

CiRCONCiRE, to circumcise. 

This verb is not of great use. It is conjugated like 

lire, to read, ('xcept in both the preter tenses, and ir 

thepartici|)le past, where it makes circsnciSf circon* 

cisse^ ctrconcis' 

- Comprendre, io understand^ like prendre. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Cong LURE, to conclude. 

Participles. 

Present. Past. 

Coneluantj concluding* iConclu, concluded. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Singular, Plural. 



Nousconcluons, we conciu- 
vous concluez. z/<? conclude^ 
lis concluent, th* conclude. 



Je conclus, I conclude, 
tu conclus, thouconcludest^ 
il conclut, he concludes' 

laiperfect. 
Singular. Plural, 

Je conclu-ois, I did conclude. See page 9(). B. 

Preterperfeet. 
3e conclus, I concluded, jNcus conclumes? we con. 
tuconclus,?//ot/ cowc/r^^e^^.lvous conolutes,t/^ conclude 
jl conclut, /le concluded* lils conclurent, they conclu. 

Future. 
Je conclu-raij J^Aa// conclude' See page 90. D» 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. -| 

Singular^ Plural- §1 

jConcluonsif r us conclude^' 
^QncinSi conclude thou, IconcJutz. conclude ye 
qu'il concluejet Mm co72c/Jqu'ils co»iCluent>/fjf th-xoit 
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 
'Singular Plural. 

[conciudct 



f[ue 
e conckie,i 772^2/ conclude^ 
tuconclues, tho. may^slcon- 
II conclues he may conclu- 



nous concluiotis, ive may 
vous concluiez, yemaycon^ 
Us eoncIucBt, they may co% 



FRENCH TONGtJE^ KB 

Imperfect. 
3e conclib-rois, / should conchide. See page 90. F« 
Preterperfect 

SllTGULAR. P1.URAI... 



que 

Je concl»sse, I'7nighi coji. 

tu conclusses, thoti mi. con. 



[coTiclude:^ 
Nous conclussicns, ive mt 
yous conclussiez, £/e mL c. 



ilCGncliit> he might condu. lis conclussent, thcyj7u.ce, 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

C ON F I R E » ^0 pickle- 

1'articiplf.s. 

Present. Past. 

Confisant, pickling, | Confit , pickled, 

INDICATIVE ]^'R)OD. 

Present T^nse. 

Singular. Plurat.. 

Je confis, I pickle^ Nous confisons, wepkkk^ 



vous confisez, ye pickle ^ 
lis coufiseiit , they pickle. 



tu confis, thoupicklest.^ 
il'Confit, lie pickles. 

Imperfect. 
Je Confis-ois, /(fic/Z/fcAcV. See p^a^ge 90. B. 

P-reterperfect. 
Je con^Si I fiickledy iNousconfim^Si'iryif/zH'MrV 

tu confis, tkou fiickled^st^ jvous confites, ye pickled, 
a confit t he pickled. |ils confirent, they pickled. 

Futurcc 
le conii-rai, I shall pickle. See page 90. D. 
IMPERATIVE MC)OD. 

Singular. Plural. 

jConfisons, let us pickle ^ 
Cojx^s, pickle ihozi^ [cot)i\sez, pickte ye^ 

qu^il coufise, let hi?n pickle ^qu'ih coniisQnX, let:ih.^:a 

SUBJUNCTIVE MO0D. 
Present Tense, 
qiie Singular. pLURArL, 

ie confise, / may pickle, INous cor\ fisUms^ we nm.pf. 
tu confises, th.77uii/est pick) vous eoufisiez,?/^ may pick' 
i! confise, he may pickle, jils conf^ent, th, mayjiick. 
K 



110 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Imperfect* 
Je cdnfi-rois, I should pickle. See page 90. F- 
Preterperfect. 

[pickle. 
Nous confissions, we mig. 



vous confissiez, ye mi. pic. 
Is conhssent ^they mi. pick. 



que 

Jeconfisse, I might pickle, 
tu confisses, thou might, pi 
il confitj he might pickle, 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

CoNNOiTRE, ifa Arnow. 
Participles. 
Present. Past. 

Connoissant, knowing. \ Connu, known- 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 
Singular. . Plural. 

le connois, I know, |Nous connoissons, weknx, 

tuconnois, thouknowest^ |vousconnoissez»i/eX:now, 
\\ cormditi he knows, \\\s zom\o\%stx\X.ythey know. 

Imperfect. 
Je connoiss-ois, I did know. See page 90. B« 
Preterperfect. 

Je connus, J^wew, iNous connumesi we kne, 

til connus, thou knewest, I vous connutes, ye knew, 
il connut, he knew, |ils connurent, they knew. 

Future. 

I [know, 

Je connoitrai, I shall know ^\^oxxs connoitrons, we sh, 
tu connoitras, thou sh^ A-no.jvousconnoitrez^^e^A kn, 
il connoitra, he shall know, jils connoitront,?^^ sh,kn, 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. , 

Singular. , Plural. !' 

Connoissons, let us know, 
connoissez, know ye, 
qu'ils connolssentj/e^ th. k. 



Connois, know thou, 

qu'il connoisse, kt him kno. 



FRENCH TONGUE. Ill 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nous connoissions, we may 



qUfe 

Je connoisse, I may know, 
tu connoisses, thou ma, kn» 
l\ connoisse, he may kno^v. 



vous connoissiez, ye m. kn. 
ils connoissejitj they m, kn. 



Je connoitrois, I should kn, 
tu conncitrois, thou sh. kn, 
il connoitroit, he sh. know. 



Imperfect. 

IknoWj, 
Nous connoitrions. we sho. 
vous con noi trie z,T/e sh. kn. 
ils connoitroientj^/^. sh, kn. 



Preterperfect. 



que 

Je connusse, I might know, 
tu connusses thou mi, kno, 
il connut, he might know. 



\know^ 
Nou& connussions, we mig, 
vous connussiez, yem. kn. 
ils connussent, they m, kn. 



C % N QU E R I R , to conquer* 
This verb is conjugated like acquerir, and is not 
commonly used, except in the infinitive, in both the 
preter tenses, and participle past, and consequently, 
in the compound tenses. 

Contenir» to contain like tenh\ 
Contrevenir, toHnfringe.'Yikt venij^. 
Qous^iiX.\r, to consent ^Xxk^sentir, 

C ON T R E D IR E, ro gainsay. 

This verb is conjugated like dire^ except in the se- 
cond person plural, where it makes vous cantredisez. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

CoNvAiNCRE, to convince, 
Partlciples. 
Present. Past. 

Convainquant, convincing. \ Convaincu, convinced. 



HS A GHAMMAR OF THE^ 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense- 

Si-NGULABi. - Plural. 

fe convafTies, / convince^: \ Nou s convain(|uons, %ve 
tu convaincs, thou coizvzAvons convainquez, ye co7i^ 
il Gon vainCy kc coirvinces^ | Us con vainquent, they con> 

Imperfect- 

[fon-vinceA Iconvince^ 

le convainquoiS;, / did\Nons coi\v2imqn\onsywedid 
m conyamqwois^ th, did. co.tvous eonvainquiez, ^e d. c. 
iJ convainquoit, he did co/z.jils convainq.uoient,^/^. d. c. 

Preterperfect. 

Jeccmvainquis,rconrmce(i,lNotis convainquimes, we 
tVi convainquis, thou conviAvoxn^ convainquites, 2/e co7z» 
i\covi%dimqmt.,fie convince \i\?> ct)nviilnquirent, thep co. 

Futureo 

IcanviTiceA {cojrvince^, 

le convamcrai, I shalll^ousconvhincronSyWe.sh 

tu convaincras, th.sh, cotz.Ivomis convaincrez, y^ sh, c 

il Gonvaincra,. Ae shall conjils convaiacront, they sh, c 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Singular. Plural. 

^Cowwmnqxxon^ilet us conv. 
ConvaincSj convince f//ow,| convainquez, convince ye^ 
«|u'il eonvainquCj /t'^ hL co\(\\i\\^ coHvainqiient,/e; thjo. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Singular. ' pLURALr 

qiie [yince, [convince^ 

Je QonvBAiiquer T may con- Nous convaTnquions,'zyem. 
tu convainques, ^/^. may, co. vousconvainquiez, ye m. c, 
H convainque^ he may con. ils convainquent, tkey jn.c. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 113 

^ Imperfect. 

Singular. Plural. 

[convince, i [sh- convince , 

Je convaincrois, I should l!^ous convHincrions, we 
tu convaincrois, thoush. coJvous convaincriez, ye sh. co, 
il convaincroit, he sho* cow. I ils con vaincroieat^^/f.^/z.co. 

Preterperfect 

que \_convince,\ [m. convince^ 

Je convainquisse, / /wzg-A^lNous convainquissiors ^^<? 
tu convainquisjies th. m.c.'vousconvainqa|ss>ez,^^wj.c 
a convalnquit, he might co. ils convainqui53entj^^»??^-co. 

Convenir, to ag)^ee. Xsk^vemr- 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

CpuDRE, to SeiV' 
Participles. 
Present. Past. 

ptusant, serving, j Cousu, sewecL 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense* 
Singular. Plural. 



Nous cousons, wesew^ 
vous cousez, ye se-w, 
lis cousent, theij se^v. 



Je coMdb, Isew 

tu couds, thou seivest, 

il coud, he scws^ 

Imperfect. * 
Je cous-ois, I did sew. See page 90- B 
Preterperfect. 



Je cousis,* I sewed, 
tu cousis, thou sewedst, 
il cousit, he sewed. 

Future* 
Je coud-rai, I shall sew^ See page 90. D. 



Nous cousimes, we sewed, 
vous cou sites, ye sewed, 
ils cousirent, they sewed. 



* Some grammarians have je cousuSi arid the subjunctive 
moodj/e coumsse ; but the Fhe»gh Academy write in those 
two tenses'as above.. 



214 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Singular. Plural, 



Couds, setv^ thou^ 
qu'il couse, let him sew. 



Cousons, let us seti\ 

eousez, ^ew ye^ 

qu'ils cousent, let tjietn sd^\ 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense, 
que Singular. Plural. 

Je couse, / 7nay sew^ ' Ncus cousioivs, nve ina, sew^ 



vous eousiez> ye may seWj, 
ils couseuXythey may sew. 



[sew, 
Nouis cousissions, we might 
vous cousksiez, ye mi. seWy 
ils cousissent, they mi^sew^ 



tu couses, thou mcf.yestseWy 
il cmise, he may sew* 

Imperfect. 
Je coud-rois, I should sew. See page 90. F, 

Pr etc r perfect, 
que 

Je cousisse, I might sew, 
tu cousisses, th, might, sew, 
il cousit, 7?^ might sew. 

INFiNITIVE MOOD. 

QovRiRytonin. 
Participles. 
Present. ., Past«' 

Caurant, runmng. \ Couru, run. 

INDICATIVE MOOD, 

Present Tense. 

Singular. Plural. 

Je cours, Irun^ [Nous courdhs, tve run,, 

tu cours, thou runn'st^ vous courez, yerun^ 

il court, he runs, jils courent, they run. 

Imperfect. 
Je eour-ois, Ididrun. See page 90. B- 

, Freterperfect. 

Jecourus, /m??, 'Nouscourumes, ?^^ ra?^^ 

tu courusy thou ranrCstt vous courutes, ye ran, 
51 courut, he ran, jils coururent, they ran* 

Future. 
Je eour-rai, I shall run^ See page 90. D^ 



FRENCH TONGUE. ^^^ 



IMPERATIVE MOOD, 

Singular. Plural. 

\Co\iroviSy let nsru?!^ 
Cours, run thou, 
qu'il coure, let him run, 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 
Present Tense, 
que Singular. que Plural 



coure z, run ye, 

qu'ils courent, kt thein riioi. 



Nouscourionsj'zre may run, 
vous couriez, ye may run^ 
ils courent, they may run- 



Je coure, I may run^ 

tu coures, thou may^st run, 

\\ couYCi he may run^ 

Imperfect. 
Je cour-rois, I should ruru See page 90- F* 
Preterperfect. 

que I . C^'^^.^^ 

Jp courusse, I might run, iNous courussions, ive mig, 
tu cour asses, than 7ni,ru7iA\G\iscouTuss\tz,yenu.run, 
ii courut, /i£ might 7mn. Ills Go«russent,?//e't/ 7nu rmu 
INFINITIVE MOOD. 
CouvRiR, ro co-r;er« 
Participles. 
Present. Past. 

Couvrant, cown/z^. | Convert, coremA 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 
Singular. Plural. 

Je couvre, I cover, 'Nous couvrons, we cover, 

tu couvres. thoucoverest, vous coxxwtz, ye cov a , 
\\ couvre, he covei^s. \x\s couvrent, they cover. 

Imperfect 
Je couvr-ois, / did cover- See page 90- B. 

Preterperfect. 
Je couvris, I covered, \ Nous couvrimes, we cove7\ 
tu couvris, thou cover'dst, | vous couvrites, ye covered, 
il couvrit, he covered. lilscouvrirent/Z/f^i/ covnrd 



T16 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Future. 
Jc cQUvri-rai, I shall cover. See page 90- D, 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Singular. Plural. 

. , Couvrons, let us cover ^ 

Couvre, cover thou, 
qu'il couvre, let hivfi cover 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 

Singular. Plural 



couvre z, cover ye^ 

qu'ils couvrent,^^^y^em co,. 



Nous cbuvrions, nife ma. co, 
yous couvrie25. ye may co. 
lis couvrent, they may cov 



que ^_._., 

Je couvre, Tmay cover, 
tu couvres, thou TTiayest CO 
il couvre, he may cover. 

Imperfect 

ie couvri-rois, I should cover. See page 90. F. 
Preterperfect. 

[cover^ 
Nous couvrissions, we mi, 
yous couvrissiez, 3/^7722. co. 
ils couvrissent, ^/?l?^wz.(rn. 



que 

le cou vrisse, Imight cover, 
tu couvrisses/^/zoz^ mi, cov, 
M couvrit, he might cover, 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Croire^ to believe. 
Participles. 
Present. Past/ 

Creyant, beliemng, \ Cru, believed. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense- 

Singular. Plural. 

Je crois, I believe, jNous crovons, we believe, 

tu crois, thou believest, vous croyez, yelelieve, ' 
n croit, he believes. j ils croient , they believe. 

Imperfect. 
Je croy-ois, I did believe. See page 90 F. 

Preterperfect. 
Je crus I believed. Nous crumes, we bellied. 



tu crus. thou believednt^ 
n Grut, he believed. 



yous crutes, ye believed.. 
ils crurent, (hey believed-r 



FRENCH TONGUE. lif 

Future- 
Je croi-rai, Ishgll believe^ See page 90- D, 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Singular. Plural. 

I C roy on s , /f r us believ e > 
Crois, believe thoUy jcroyez, believe yc^ 

qu*il croie, let him believe, jqu'ilscroient/ef r/z.^jf/ieff- 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 
que Singular. Plural. 



Nouscroyions,7y^7wci/1 ^ 
vous croyiez, t/e 7iiay >;^ 
lis croient, they may J-S 



Je croie,/ may 

tu cvoi^Sythou mayest 

il croie, he may 3 -c 

Imperfect. 
Je croi-rois, I should believe. See page 90. F« 
que Preterperfect. 

Je crusse, / might "It ^ jNous crussions,w€ mi» °> ~ 
tu crusses, thou might* >^ vous crussiez, ye ml >;i 
il crut, he 7nigkt j^ [ils crussent, they ml j < 

INFINITIVE MOOD^ 

Croitre to grow. 

Participles. 
Present. Past., 

Croissant, growing- ICyu, grow7i^ 

- INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

Singular. Plural^ 

Je crois, I graw^ jNous croissons, we grow, 

tu crois, thou growest, I vous croissez, ye grow^ 
il croit, he growS' {ils croissent, they grow> 

Imperfect. 
Je'Croiss-ois, i did grow- St^ page 90. B. 
Preterperfect. 



Je eras, / grew, 

tu crus, thou grewest^ 

il crut, Ae grew- 



Nous crunaes, we grew, 
vGUs crutes, ye grewy, 
ils crurent, they grew. 



118 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Future. 
Je croit-rai, I shall gronx)- See page 90. D. 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Singular. Plural. 

Croissons, let us groiv^ 
Crois, grow thou^ 
qu'il croisse, let him grow. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense* 
que Singular. Plural. 



croissicz, grow ye, 
qu'ihcro\sseniyl€t them gr*^ 



Nous croissions,wf maygr^ 
vous croissiez, ye may gr* 
ils croissent, they may gr^ 



Je croisse, 1 may grow, 
tucrorsses, thou may'stgr. 
il croisse, he may grow* 

Imperfect- 
Je croit-rois, 1 should grow- See page 9a F- 
que Preterperfect. gro^v, 

Je crusse, 1 might grow. Nous crussions, we might 



vous crussiez, ye might gr^- 
ils crussent, ?/iet/ might gr. 



tu crusaes, th, mightest gr. 
il criit, he might grow- 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Cueillir, to gather* 
Participles. 
Present. Past. 

Cueillant, gathering, |Cueini, gathered, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 
Singular. Plural. 



Nous cueillons, we gather ^ 
vous cneiW^z, ye gather, 
il cueillent, they gather. 



Je cueille, I gather, 

tu cweS\\e% thou gat her est . 

il cueille, he gathers. 

Imperfect. 

Je tueill-ois, 1 did gather- See page 90. R 

Preterperfect. 



Je cueillis, I gathered, 
tu c\xt\\\\^,thou gathered St 
il c\x^\\Yii, he gathered. 



Nous cueillimesjW^^a^Aer. 
vous c\xe\\Yiie^,ye gathered, 
ils Gueillirent, they gather. 



FRENCH TONGUE, 119 

Future. 

Je cueille-rai, I shall gather^ See page 9Q. D. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Singular. Plural. 

Q,xxti\\oxi% Jet ics gather^ 
Cueille, gather thou, cueillez, gather ye, 

qu'il cueille, let him gather, qu'ils cxxtiWtnt. Jet th.gath. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Pifeseiit Tense. 

que Singular. Plural. 



Je cueille, I may ^ |J 
t}iz\it\\\c%thou7nayest >'$, 
\\ cueille, he may j ^ 



Nous cueillions, wem. ' 
vous cueilliez ye may 
lis cueillent, they may ^ 



Imperfect. 
Je cueille-rois, I should gather. See page 90. F- 
Freterperfect. 

lgatha\ 
Nous cueillissions, we mig. 



vous cucillissif z, yemi.ga. 
ils cueillissent, they mi ga_. 



que 

Je cueiWissQkMfnight gather, 
tucueillisses^/?oz^ mi.gath. 
il cueillit, he might gather, 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

De' choir, to decay y to decline. 
Participles. 
Present. Past. 

v/ anting |Dethu, decayed, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense- 
Singular. Plural. 



Je dech«5is, I decay ^ 

tu dechois, thou decay est , 

il dechoit, he decays. 



Nousdechoyons, we decay ^ 
vous dechoyez, ye decay y '' 
ils dechoient, they decay. 



Preterperfect. 



Je dechus, I decayed^ 

tu dechus,- thou decayed'st, 

il dechut, he decayed. 



Nous dechumes, we decay, 
vous dechutes, ye decayed^ 
ils d<^chui ent//?^7/ c^cayed% 



120. A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Future. 
Je decher-rai, I shall decay. See page^O. Bo 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOB. 
Present T^nse. 
que Singular. Plural, 

le d6chote//mai/ "^ >,|Nousdechoyions, w^;;z,fif(?. 
tKx^^z\\Q\e^ythouviay- C S jvous dechoyiez, 1/^772^1/ r/e. 
il dechoie,^^ may \estj '^ jiis d^choient, tberj may de. 

Imperfect- 
^ed6ch^^-VQis, I shoidddecay- See page 90. F. 
que ^Freterperfect. 



Je dechusse»/mi^/^^ decay ^ 
tu dechusses,^^/zo2/ inLdecay, 
il d^chut, he 7night decay, 



Nous dechussions,we^.^6'. 
vous d«chussiez, ye mi tic, 
Us dechussent, they mi. de. 

T)^ZG\xv\ryto discove7\\\^ecouvrir. 
Demettre, to rhnoroe, like mettre* 
Deaapprendre, to iinleaim^ like firemlre, 
Desaervir, to take away, like sei^nr. 
ID^tenir, to detain, like tenir, 
Devenin to become ^ like venj/t* 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

-Dire, to say ^ or tell. 

Participles. 
Present. PasTo 

Wiaant, saying' |Dit, 5^id 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

Singular. Plural, 

He dis, I say, INous disons» we say. 

tu d\Sy thou sayesty vous dites, t/e 5Q!z/, 

il dit,/?t' says. ]ih disent, they say. 

Imperfept. 
Je dis-ois, / did say. See page 90- B. 
Preterperfect. 



Je dis, 1 said, 
tu diS) thou said's 
" y. dit, he said. 



Nous dimes, we smd, 
vous dites, ye said, 
ils dirent; they salt- 



FRENCH TONGUK I2i 

Future* 
Sedi'tdii, Ishallsay. See p. 90. D. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

SlNGt^LAR. PtURAL» 

Disons, let us say, . 



Dls, say thou^ 

qu'il dise, let him say. 



dites, say ye^ 

qu'ils disent, let them say. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOR 
Present Tense- 



que Plural, 
Nous disions» nve may my-^ 
VGUS disiez, ye may say, 
ils disent, they may say. 



que Singular. 
Je dise, I may say, 
tu discs, thou mayest say, 
il dise, he may say. 

Imperfect. 
Te di-rois, I should say. See p. 90- F. 
que Preterperiect. 

Je disse* I might say, .Nous dissions, nve ?nL say, 
tu ^xssesythoumightest say, vous dissiez, ye might say, 
41 dit, he might say, |ils dissent, they might say, 

Redire, is conjugated after the same manner. 
Ti\^c<y^\ Qxnv, to disagree, Wk^venir, 
Discourir, to converse, like courin 

DissouDRE, to disrwlve, 

Tliis verb is conjugated like absoudi^e. The tw6 
^^ter tenses are likewise wanting. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

DoRMiR, to sleefh ' 

Participles. 

Present. Past. 

Dormant, sleeping, | Dormi, sleiit, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 
Singular. Plural. 

Je dors, Isleefi, jNous dormons, nve sleepy 

tu dorb, shou sleepest, Ivous dormez,2/e sleep, 
il dott, he sleeps, . ills dorment, they sleep. 

L 



122 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Imperfect. 
Je dorm-ois, I did sleep. See page 90. B. 

Preterperfect. 
Je dorm-is, /5/<?/2^. See page 90. C. 2. 

Future. 
Je dtrmi-rai, I shall sleep. See page 90. D. .. 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Singular. Plural. 

Dormons, let us sieefi. 



dormez, sieefi ye, 

quils dorment,/^^ them sle. 



Dors, sieefi thou, 

qu'il dorme, let him sieefi, 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense, 
que Singular. que Plural. 

Je dorme, that I may sieefi, Nous dormions, we7n,sle, 



vous dormiez, ye may sle, 
ils dorment, they may sle. 



tu dormes, th^ maye, sieefi, 
il dorme, he may sieefi. 

Imperfect. 
Je dormi-rois, Ishoiold sieefi. See page 90. F. 
que Preterperfect. 

Je dorm-isse, I might sieefi. See page 90. G. % 
INFINITIVE MOOD; 
Y^CRi^Y., to write. 
Participles. 
Present. Past. 

Ecrivant, writing, iEcrit, nmitterv, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Singular. Pleural. 

J'ecris, / wnte, , 'Nous ecrivons, we write 

tu ccris, thou writest, vous ecrivez, ye write, 

il ecrit, he writes, jils ecrivent, they write^, 

Imperfect. 
J'ecriv-ois, I did write. See p. 90. B, 
Preterperfect. 

J'ecriv- is, / wrote. See page 90. C. '2: ' 



FRENCH TONGUE. 123 

Future. 
J'ecri-rai, / shall i^rite. See page 90. D. 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Singular, Plural, 

|Ecrivons, let us write, 
Ecris^, ivrite thou^ ecrivez, write ye^ 

qu'il ecrive, let him write, |qu'ilsecriveni,/e?^/?.wnV^: 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

que Singular. que Plural. 

J'ecrive, that I may write ^\l!^ons€crW\c)v.% we m,%vritey 
tu dcrives.z^/zoz^ may, write Avo\\% ecrivicz, ye ma, wjite^ 
il ecrive, he may nvrite, (iis ecrivent, they may W7ite.. 

Imperfect. 

recri-rois» I should write. See p. 90, F. 

que Preterperfect. 

J'ecriv-is»e, I might write. See page 90. G. 2. 
Etnouvoir., to stir up, ; like mouvoir, 
Encoiirir, to incur, like courir. 
Endormir, to lull asleep, like dormir, 
S'ersquefir, to inquire, like acquerir, 
S?entrennettre, to intermeddle, like Tnettre, 
Entreprendre^ to undertake, Y^kf^ prendre, 
Er)tretenir, to entertain, iiice tenir, 
Entrouvrir, to open a little, like couvrir. 

Envoyer, to send. 

This verb is irregular in two tenses only, wr. 
Future. 
J'enver-rai, I shall send. See page 90. D. 

Imp's RFECT of the Subjunctive Mood. 

yeiweY'Tois, I should send. See page 90. F, 

The other tenses are regular. Its conipound ren 
voyer, to send back, is likewise irregular only in the 
two above tenses. 

Equivaloir, to be of equal value^ like valoir. 



124 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

ExcLURE, to exdttde. 
This verb is conjugated like conclure^ except in 
the participle past, where it is spelled exclus, 
INFINITIVE MOOD. 
ExTRAiRE, to extract. 
Participles. 
Present^ Past. 

wanting, [Extrait, extracted, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 
Singular. Plural. 



J'extrais, I extract, 

tu extrais, thou extracteaty 

W extrait, he extracts, 

Future- 
J 'extrairaij I shall "> ^ 
tu extrairas, thou shalt C | 
il extraira, he shall j ti 



Nous ^•xXVB.yonSy'weexp^act^ 
vous extrayez, ye extract y 
lis extraient, they extract. 



Nousextrairons,w^«/f. ^^ 
vous extrairez, ye shall ' - * 



ilsextrairont, they shall, 
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Imperfect Tense. 
Singular. Pi^ural. 

3*extrairois, I should^ ^V^o\x% extrairions, nve sh 
tu extrairois, th, sho, Cg'vous extrairiezj ye sh^ 



ho, C 2 



il extrairuit, he shoid.^ ^ \ ils extrairoient, they sh, 

Observe ; abstrmre, distraire, and soustraire, are 
conjugated after the same irianner, and want the 
same tenses : Moreover, they are Seldom used in 
many of their simple tenses. -Even instead of ex- 
traire, and soustrairey we frequently make use of jairc^ 
un €xtrcLit,faire U7ie soustraciion. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Faire, /o dOi or to make. 
Participles. 
Present. , Past- 

Faisant, (/^ro^^ i^^dcai) doing. \ Fait, do72e: 



;erench tongue. i^.. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Singular. Plural. 

J.e fais, Ido^ |Nnusfaisons,(/zro7z.fesons}- 

tu fais, thou doe^t, vous faites, ya dOi \nve doj 

i] fait, /le does. jils font, they do. 

Imperfect. 

Je fais-ois, {/iron, fes-ois) I did do. See page 90. B. 

Preterperfect. 



Je fis, Ididy 

tu fis, thou didst, 

jl fit, he did. 



Nous fimes, Tje did^ 
vous i»tes, ye did, 
ils firent, they did. 



Future. 

Je fe-rai, I shall do. See page 90. D, 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Singular. Plural, 

Faisons, let us do^ 



Fais, cfo thou, 

qu'il fasse, let hini dv. 



taites, do ye, 

qu'ils fassent, let them^do, 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 
Present Tense, 
que Singular. Plural. 

Je fasse, I may do, iNous fassions, we may do^ 

tu f asses, Viou may est do, I vous fassiez, ye may do, 
n fasse, he may do, jils fassent, they may do. 

Imperfect. 

Je fe-rois, I should do. See page 90. F. 
qwe Preterperfect. 



Je fisse, I might do, 

tu fisses, thou mightest dOy 

il ftt, he might do. 



Nous fissions, nve might dc, 
vous fissiez- ye might do^ 
iis fissent, they might do. ^ 
L2 



12B A GRAMMAR OF TK^ 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

FuiR, to Jiy, 
Participles. 
Present. Past. 

Fuyant,/2/iw^A \Y\xhficcL 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 
Singular. Pluha.Lo 

lefuis, I fly. Nous fuyons, nve flij.^ 

tu fuis. thouflycHty vous fuye:^, y^fly^ 

il fuit, he flies. jils fuient, they fly. 

Imperfect. 
Je fuy-ois, X did fly. See page 90. B. 

Future. 
1% fui-rai, I shall fly. See page 90. D, 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Singular. Plural. 

FuyoDs, let us fly y 
Fm.fly thou, inyez^fly ye, 

qu'ii fuie, lef him fey. qu*ils tuient, let thez 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense, 
que Singular. Plural. 



Nous fuyions, we may fly . 
vous fuyiez, ye mayfly,^ 
lis fuient, they mayfly. 



Je fuie, I may fly, 

tU fuies, thou may est fly ^ 

il fuie, he mayfly. 

Imperfect. 

Je fui-rois, I should fly. See page 90. F, 

This verb is seldom used in the proterperfect 
tenses of the indicative mood and subjunctive mood i 
instead of them we %2c^, Je piis la fuite,Je fmsse Ic^ 
/}a^e— when that verb is neuter; and JV-'i/a/, Jr^^/- 

''c!S3r, when it is active- 



FRENCH TONGUE. 12^ 

Hair, to hate. 

This verb is regular; its irregularity falls only upon 
the pronunciation of the first, second, and third per- 
son singular of the present tense of the indicative 
mood, and of the second person of the singular in 
the inoperative mood. Thus we write and pronounce 
in one syllable, Je haiSy i hate, tu hais, thou hatest, U 
kait^h^ hates ; /^aw, hate thou ; whereas, in all other 
tenses, <z is pronounced separately from the follow- 
ing i, and makes a syllable by itself, as nous haistons^ 
we hate ; vous ha'issez, ye hate ; Us Imissenty they 
hat€, 

INFINITIVE MOOD, 

Lire, to mad. 
Participles. 
Present, Past. 

Lisant, reading. 1 Lu, read, 

INDICATIVE MOOD, 
Present Tense. 
Singular, Plural. 

Je lis, I ready Nous lisons, "ive reads 



vous lisez, ye rtad^ 
ils lisent, they read. 



\\x lis, thou readest^ 
U lit, he reads. 

Imperfect. 
Je lis-ois, I did read. See page 90, B . 

Preterperfect. 
Jc lus, Iread, Nous lumes, ive read. 



vous lutes, ye read, 
ils lur^Tity they read. 



tii lus, thou readest, 
11 lut, he reads. 

Future^ 
Je li-rai, I shallread. See page 90. D. 
IMPERATIVE MOOD, 
Singular. Plijral. 

Lisons, let us ready 



iJwy read thoUy 

qu'il liscj let hpn read^ 



lisez, readyCy 

qu'ils lisent, letthemvead. 



128 A GRAMMAR OF TSE 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 

Present Tense, 
^ue Singular. que Plural. 



Nous lisions, we may re(M^, 
vous lisiez, ye may ready 
ils lisent, they may read^ 



Je lise, 1 may ready 

t;u lises, thou may est ready 

il lise, Jie may read: 

Imperfect. 
Je li-rois, J should read. See page 90. F. 

que Preterperfect. 

Je lusse, I might ready Nous lassions, we ml read^^ 



vous lussiez, ye might read] 
ils lussent,r//<^2/ might reado 



tu lusses,?^. mightestread, 
il IGt, he might read, 

Maintenir, to maintain, like tenp-- 

INFINITIVE MOQD, 

MEt^Tiiiy to lie. 

Participles. 

Present. Past. 

Mentant, lying, IMenti, lied. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 
Singular. Plural. 

Je mens, I lie. Nous in,entons, ive lie., 

tu mens, thou liest^ vou$ mentez, ye lie^ 

il ment, he lies. |ils mentent;, they lie. 

Imperfect. 
Je ment-ois, I did lie. See page 90. B, 

Preterj^erfect. 
Je ment'is, / lied* See page 90. C. 2. 

Future. 
Je menti-rai^ / shall lie. See page 90. D. 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Singular. Plural 

jMentons, let us lie^ 
imentez, lie ye. 




Mens, lie thou, 

qii'il mente, kt him lit, 



f qu'iis mentent) let them & 



FRENCH TONGUE, 129 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense, 
que Singular. que Plural^ 

Je mente> that Itnay Iky j Nous mentions, ive may Ik ^ 
tu mentes, ^/;.ow mayest /i^J vous mentiez, ye may lie ^ 
il mente, he may lie* Ills mentent, they may li^. 

imperfect. 
Je menti-rois, I should lie. See page 90. F. 
que Preterperfect. 

Je meut-isse, I might lie- See page 90- G. 2° 
Me 'dire, ^0 slander. 
This verb is conjugated like contredire, 
Se meprendre, to mistake^ like prendrC' 
Mesoffrir, to underbid^ like offrir, 
Maud I RE, to curse. 
This verb is likewise conjue;ated like contredife^ 
except in the second person plural, where it dou- 
bles the s ; as, vous 7naudisseZy you c^jrse ; also in the 
other tenses and persons, and in the participle pre- 
sent. 

INFINITIVE MOOD, 
Mettre, ^o/i«?. 
Participles. 
Pres;ent. Past. 

'Me\X2iXit^fiutting, \M\Sy fiut, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 
Singular. Plural. 



Nous mettons, we fiv^^ 
vous mettez, yefiut^ 
lis mettent, they put ^ 



Je inets, Ifiut^ 

tu mets, thou fiuttest^ 

il met, he puts. 

Imperfect, 
Je mett-ois, I did put. See page 90. B. 

Preterperfect. 
Je mis, Iputy |Nous mimes, nve puf^ 

tu mis, thou puttesty vous mites, ye put ^ ■ 

il mit, he put. 'ils mirent, they put. 



130 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Future. 
Je mett'TdLiy I shall fiiU, See page 90. D. 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Singular. Plural. 

Mettous, let us fiut, 
"MetSyfiut tkou^ mettez, fiut ye, 

qu'il mettc, let him fiut, qu'ils mettent, let them put. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense, 
que Singular. que Plural. 

3 e mette, I may fiut, iNousmettions.we nm.fiut^ 

tu mettes,^y^ow mayest fiut,\vous mettiez, ye may put, 
il mette, he may put. lils mettent, they may put. 

Imperfect. 
Je mett-rois, I should put. See page 90. F, 
que Preterperfect. 

Je raisse, / might put, ! Nous missiQns,w^ mig.pui, 
tu misses, th,mightest put,\vous missiez, ye might put^ 
il mit, he might put, ils missent, they might put . 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

MOUDRE, ^o^nW. 

Participles. ^ 

Present. Past. 

Moulant, griwc?m^. | Moulu.^rowncf. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 
Singular. Plural. 

Je mouds, I grind, iNous raoulons, we grind, 

tu mouds, thou grindest, vous moulez, ye grind, 
il moud, he grtnds, ils moulent, they grind. 

Imperfect. 
Je moul-ols, I did grind. See page 90. B. 

Preterperfect. 
Je i^#ul-us, I ground. See page 90. C. 3. 

Future. 
Je moud-rai, I shall grind. See page 90^» D, 



FRENCH TONGUE. 131 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Singular. Plural. 

jMoulons, let us grinds 
Moudsi grind thoUy inoulez, grind ye, 

qu'il moiile, let him grind.\q[x"\\%v[iQ\x\exiX, let them gr;, 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense, 
que Singular. que Plural. 

Je moule, that Imay gr- jNous moulions, we. m gr. 
tu moules, th* may est gr* vous mouliez, ye may gr, 
il moule, he may grind, |ils moulent,?^ey may grin. 

Imperfect. 
Je moud-rois, I should grind. Seepage 90. F. 
que Preterperfect. 

Je moul-usse, I might grind. Seepage 90. G. S. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

MouRiR» to die. 
Participles. 
Present. Past. 

Mourant, dying, \ Mort, dead, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

Singular. Plural. 

Je meurs, 1 die, jNous mourons, ive die^ 

tu meurs, thou diest, ! vous mourez, ye die, 

il meurt, he dies, jils meurent, they die. 

Imperfect. 
Je mour-ois, / did die. See page 90. B. 

Preterperfect. 
Je mour-us, / died. See page 90. C. 3. 

^Future. 
Je mour-rai, I shall die. See page 90. D. 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Singular. Plural. 

iMourons, let us die, 
Meurs, die thou, mourez, die ye, 

qu'il oieure, let him die, tqu'ils meurent, le^ th> die- 



1^ 



A GRAMMAR OP THE 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense, 
que Singular. que Plural, 

Je meure, that I may die^ Nousmourions,w^/^dtt/c?i^,^ 



tu meures, thou may est die ^ 
il meure, he may die. 



vous mouriez, ye may die^ 
ils meurent, they may die. 



Imperrect 
Je Ttiout-rois, / should die. See page 90. F. 
que Preterperfect. 

IzmQwr-y^^^G^ Imight die. See page 90. G. 5. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

MouvoiR, to move. 
Participles^ 
Present. , Past. 

Mouvant, moving, \ Mu, moved, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Singular, Plural. 



Je meus, / move^ 
tumeus,//;0M movest^ 
\\ meut, he moves. 



Nous mouvons, i&e ?nQvt^ 
vous mouvez, yejnove, 
ils meuvent, thaj move. 

Imperfect. 
le mouv-ois, I did move. See page 90. B. ' 

Preterperfect. 
Je m-us, I moved. See page 90, C. 3. 

Future. 
Je mouv-raT, I shall move, SeeT^age 90. D. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Singular, Plural. 

Moiivnns, let us move^ 



Meus, move t/mu, 

qu'il meuve, let him move. 



mouvez, move ye^ 

qu'ils nieuventj/<f^' th, moioe* 



Nous mouvions. we m.mQ.^ 
vous mouviez, ye m.move^ 
ils meuventj they ma, move,- 



FRENCH TONGUE. 133 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOa 
Present Tense, 
que Singular. Plural. 

Je meuve, I may movCi 
tu meuveStt/i. Tizay est move t 
11 nieuve, he may move- 

InDperfect. 
Je mouv-rois, I should move. See page 90. F.I 
que Preterperfect. 

Je m-usse, I might move. See page 90. G. 3. 

This verb according to the French Academy, h 
seldom use^ ; instead of which we make use of re- 
7nuer^ or mettre en mouvement^fmve aller d^un lie2{ ^ 
V7i atitreyfaire changer de fdace, 

INFINITIVE MOOD, 

NAiTRE,ro he born. 
Participles. 
Present. Pas']^- 

Naisj^ant, being born, | Ne, bom. 

INDICATIVE MOOD, 
Present Tense. 
Singular. Plural. 



Nous naissons, we are born^ 
vous naissez, ye are bom^ 
I ils naissenti they ane bom. 



Je nais, / am born^ 
tu nais, thou art born^ 
Jl nait, he is born. 

Imperfect' 
Je naiss-ois, I was born. See page 90. B. 

Preterperfect. 
Je naquis, I was born, j Nous naquimes, we w. bor, 
tu naquis, thou wast bornJvous naquites, ye we. bom, 
il naquit) he was boim. J ils naquirent, th. were born^ 

Future. 

le naU-raij I shall he bom. See pag,^ 90^ J>' 

M 



que 

Je naisse, I may be born. 
tu naisses, th, may be born^ 
il naisse, he may be horn. 



134 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Singular. Plural. 

INaissons, let us be borv^ 
Nais, be thou born^ [naissez, be ye born, 

qu'il naisse, /c? him be ^onx. I qu'ilsnai^sent,^^^^6eto•7^ 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 
Singular. Plural. 

[bom^ 
Nous naissions, we may be 
vous naissiez,t/e tnay be bor, 
ils naissentj^Aet/ mJbe born,. 

Imperfect, 
lenatt-rois, /s^om/^^^ dom. Seepage 90. F. 

Preterperfect. 
ope ^ I [be bom., 

Je naquisset/wzzg-A^ be 6orn,iNous naquissions, w. might 
tu naquisses//ro. m, be dorw,} vous naqaissiez,z/f m^be bo. 
i\ naquit, he might be born,\\\s naquissent,^^ez/ m,be bo. 

Obtenir, to obtain^ like tenir. 
OfFrir, to offer ^ like couvrir. 
Omeltre, to omit, like metfre. 
Ouvrir, to ofien^ like couvrir, 

OmR^tohear* 

This verb is very seldom used, except in the parti- 
ciple past, and before ditr ; as, Je Vai ou'i dire, I heard 
it. In this case it is conjugated by. the help of avoi7\ 
through all its tenses. Instead of the verb ou'ir, we 
make u»e of entendre. 

' T AIT ViE, to graze. 

This verb is conjugated like nailre, but the two 
preter tenses, and the participle past, are wanting-, 
whereas refia^tre, its compound, though little used, 
has them all. See Repattre. 

Parcourir, to run over, like courtr.. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 135 

P A R oiT R E , /o afipmr. 

This verb and its compound are ccmjugated like 

crottre. . 

Partir, ro ^0 ttway. 

This verb is conjugated like mentir, 

Parvenir, to attain, like venir. 

Pern>eUre, to/iermit^ like mettrc. 

INFINITIVE MOOa 

Plaire, to please. 

Participles, 

Present. Past, 

Plaisant, fileasing, j Plu* pleased^ 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Singular. Plural. 



Je plais, Ifilcasey 

tU| plais, thou fileasest^ 

W plsLii, he fiteases. 

Imperfect. 

Je plais-ois, Ididfilease. See page 90. B, 



No^isj>laisons, we fxleasc^ 
vous plaiscz, ye filease, 
ils plaisent, they please . 



Preterperfect. 



Nous plumes, we pleased^ 
vous plutes, ye pleased^ 
ils plurent, they ixleased^ 



3e plus, Ifileasedy 

tu plus, thou pleased sty 

il plut, he pleased. 

Future. 
Je plai-rai, /5^a///?/ea5e. See page 90. D. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Singular. Plural* 

Y\2\^G^%y let us please y 
Plais, please thouy plaisez, please z/e, 

fyj'il plaise, let him please, qu'ils plaisent, let them pi 



136 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 
Present Tense, 
que Singular. Plural. 



Nouspiaisions, wem.fdea.^ 
vous plaisiez ye m. please^ 
ils plaisent,^;^c2/ maypleme. 



Je plaise, I may please^ 
tu plaises, thou mayestple. 
il plaise, he may please. 

Imperfect. 

le plai-rois, I should please. See p. 90. F. 

que Preterperfect 



Je plusse, I might please^ 
tu plusses, th, mightestple, 
il plut> he might please. 



Nous plussions, nve m.ple., 

vous plussiez, ye mig.ple. 

ils plussent, they mi. please, 

FovRwoiR^ to provide. ** 

This verb is conjugated like pr^voiVy except in 

both the preter tenses, where it m^k!t^ Je pourvii^-^ 

Je pourvusse, 

INFINITIVE MOOD.. 

PovvoiRy to de able. 

Participles. 
Present. Past. 

Pouvant, being able. [Pu, been able» 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Singular. Plural. 



le puis,* Tamable, 
tu peux, thou art able^ 



Nous pouvons, 'ive are abk^ 
vous pouvez, ye are able^ 



il peut, he is able. jils peuvent, they are able. 

Imperfect. 
Je pouv-ois, I was able. See page 90. B. 
Preterperfect. 



Je pus, / was able, 
tu pus, thou wast able, 
71 put, he was able. 



Nous pumes, we were able, 
vous putes, ye were able, 
ils purent, they were able. 



* Jc peux may be used in conversation and iu poetry, ac- 
eording to the Fbench Acauemy. 



FRENCH TONGUE 137 

Future- 
Je pour-rai, 1 shall be able See page 90. U 
IMPERATIVE MOOD is wanting. 
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
que Singular. qu« Plural. 

Je puisse, / ?my be able. [Nous puission^ we m.be ab. 
tu puisses, th,may,be abie,\vo\x^pn\^s\^z,yemary beab^ 
il puisse, he may be able, i ils puissent,^/^. mmj be able. 

Imperfect. 
Je pourrrois. / should be abk^ See page 90. F. 
Preterperfect. 

\abl€y 



Nou^ pussionsjwe might be 
vous pussiez^t/d" ml bt able^ 
ils pussent. they mig, be ab^ 



que 

Je pusse, / might be able, 
tu pusses.^/j might, be able. 
il put, he might be able* 

Preoire. to foretell- 
This verb is conjugated like confire^ 
INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Prendre, to take. 
Participles. 
Present. Past. 

Prenant, taking. iPris, taken. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense- 
Singular. Plural* 

Je prends, / take, INous prei ons, we take, 

tu prends, thou takest, vous prenez, ye take, 
il prend, he takes- iils prennent, they take. 

Imperfect. ^ 
Je pren-ois, I did take- See page 90. B. 
Preterperfect 



Je pris, 1 took, * 
tu pris, thou cookest^ 
il prit, he took* 



Nous primes, we took^ 
vous prices, ye took, 
ils prirent, they took^ 



M2 



138 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Future. 
Je prend-rai, Ishalltake, See page 90. D« 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Singular, Plural. 

iPrervons, let us takCy 



prenez, take z/e, 

qu'ils prennent, let th, take. 



P rends, takethoti^ . 
qu'il prenne, let him take, 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOO0 
Present Teuse^. 
que SINGULAR. Plural. 



Nous prenions, nve 7nay tu^ 
vous preniez, ye may take^ 
lis prennent, they mayta. 



Je preiii te, / may take^ 
tu pvtim^^^thou may' take^ 
11 prenne, he may take. 

Imperfect. 
Je prend-rGis, I' ahotild take^ See p^ge90. F. 
que PreterperieGte 

Je pr jsse, / mig/it take^ J N ousprissions, we mi, take^ 
tu prisses, thou mi^ht, ta. kous prissiez, ye mi, take^ 
il prit, he might take. 'ils prissent, they mi, tuke, 

Pressentir, tojaresee, like sentir. 
Pr^valoJr, tofirevail, like valoir. 
Prevenir, to prevent, Hke 'Venifr 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
P R E V 1 r , to foresee. 
Participles. 
Present. Past- 

Vvivo^^^^ntj foreseeing, {Pv^vxy^ foreseen, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Singular. Plural. 

Je prevois, I foresee. Nous prevoyoiis, ivefore$. 



vous prevoyez, ye foresee^ 
ila prevoient, they foresee. 



tu prevois, thotiforeseest, 
il prevoit, he foresees. 

Imperfect. 
Te pr^voy-ois, / did foresee* See page 90- B 



FRENCH TONGUE, J^ 

Preterperfecto 
le prev-is, I foresaw, Se& page 90. C. % 

Future, 
lej Jj>r©voi*rai, I shall foresee. See page 90, P. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD- 

Sl^GULA«. PX.UKA3u. 

iPrevoyons, let iisforesep^^ 
Vt€vo\s^ foresee thou^ mx^voytz ^foresee ye, 
q\x'\\]^v€y oiQy lei hi7nforesee Jiqu^ils prevoient, let th.forp 

SU B JUNCTl VE MOOD. 
Preseat Tense^ 
Singular.. Pj^ural. 

{foresee^ 
Nous pr^voyions, we mdij 



vousprevoyjez. yem,fores, 
ils prevoifcnt, tfum.foresee. 



que 

Je pi'evoie, I may foj'esee, 
tu prevoies, th.ma. foresee^ 
il prevoie, he may foresee. 

Imperfect. 
Je prevoi-rois, I should foresee. See page 90. F. 
que PreterperfeCt. 

Je pr^v-isse, Imightfortsee, See page 90. G. 2. 

Prono^ttre, to promise ^ like mettre, 

Pvovemr^ to fir oceed like venir, 

Se rasseoir, to sit down again, like asseoif. 

Recourir, to have recourse, like cowir. 

HeGouvrir. to cover again, like couvrin 

Jiecueillir, to reap, hke cueillir, 

Reinettre, tofilace again, like mettre, 

Repaitrk. to feed. 

This verb is conjugated like naitre, except in botl^ 
the preter tenses, and in the participle past, \vhereiH 
it makes Je refiiis^-^Je rejmssey^-repu, 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Repe^tir, (SE,) to Ttjiertt. 

PARTIClPvt.ES. 

Present. Past, 

Se repentant, rejienling, j Repenti^ vepenttM, 



140 A GRz\MMAR OF THE 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present T* nse. 
Singular Plural. 

j [re/ienf, 

Se me repens, I repent. Nous nous repenton^. we 
tu te repensr fhou refienteJvons yousrepentez yere/te. 
il se repent, he re/ients, lils se repentent, they re/ie. 

Imperfect, 
le me repent-ois, I did repe/it. See page 90. B. 

Prf terperfect. 
Je me repent-is, Irepented See page 90- C % 

Future. ' 
Je me repenti-rai, I shall vefienU See p. 90- D. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Singular. Plural. 

Kepentbns-nous let us refi, 
repentez-vous, refient ye, 
qu'ilsse repentenij/^^ ^A^c*. 



Repr-v^s toi refient thou, * 
f^u'il ae repente, let him re. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Singular. Plural, 

que I que [may repent, 

Je me repente»/ max/ ?r/2e. Nous nous repentions. we 
tu te repentes, th. may^ refl.]Vous vous repentit^-z ye m.r, 
il se repente, he 7nay refi€.\ns se repentent, th, may re» 

Imperfect. 
Je me repenti-rois, / should repent. See p. 90* F. 
que Pre ter per feet. 

Je me repent-isse, Imight repent. See page 90. G 2. 

Reprer.dre, to takeaguin, like prendre, 
Reque^rlr^ to reqtmr^ like ac^terir 



FRENCH TONGUE. 14J. 

INPtNfTIVE MOOD. 

Re'soudre, ^0 resolve. 
Participles. 
. Present. Past. 

R^solvant, resolving. \ Resolu,* resolved^ 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 
Singular. Plural. 

Je resous, IresohxCy Nous resolvons, we resolve^ 



tu r^sous, thou resolvei^t^ 
l\ resout, he resolves. 



vous r^solvez, ye r^solve^ 
ils resolvent, they resolve^. 



Imperfect. 
Je resolv-ois, / did resolve. See p. 90. B. 
Je resol-us, I resolved. See page 90. C. 3. 

Future. 
Je r§soud-rai, I shall resolve. See page 90. IJ. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Singular. Plural. 

R€solvons^ let us resolne^ 
Resous, resolve thoUy resolvez, resolve ye,. 



qu'il r^solye^let him rf solve. 



qu'ils r^solvent,/e^ th, re^a^ 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 
Singular. Plural. 

que I [resolve^ 

Je. resolve, I Tnay resolvey\l!^ ous r^solvions, we may 
tu resolves, th, mayest re^. vous resolviez, ye mayreso, 
il resolve, he may resolve, 1 ils resolvent, th, may reso^ 

Je r^soud-rois, I should resolve. See page 90. F. 

* We say likewise r^sous^ speakJngof things which mayhte 
resolved into others. It is never used in the feminine gender, 
according to the French Acahei^iy: thus we say, un brouil" 
lard rSious en phde, a tog resolved into rain* 



142 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

que Preterperfect. 

Je resol-usse, I might resohie. See page 90. G»^. 

Ressentir, tofeel^ like sentir^ 

Retenir, to retain^ like tenir. 

Revenir, to return^ like -venir, 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Re V E T I R , ^0 mx;^5^. 
Participles. 

Present. Past. 

Revetant, investing, \ Revetu, invested. 

INDICATIVE mood: 

Present Tense. 

Singular. PLtrRAL. 

le VQV^t^y I invest, |Nous revetons, w^ 2wx;e5/; 

tu revets, thou investesty ivous revetez» ye invest y 

il revet? he invests- | ils reve tent, they invests 

Imperfect. 
Je revet-ois, I did invest* See page 90- B« 

Preterperfect. 
Je revet- is, Unvested. See page 90« C. 2. 

Future. 
Je reveti-rai, Ishallinvest. See page 90. D. 

IMPERATIVE mood. 

Singular. Plural. 

IRevetons, /If^ z^ ^i^f*^, 
Revets, invest thou, revetez, invest ye, 

qu'il revcte> let him invest \(ixi^\\% revetent,/e^ tbeminv^ 
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense, 
que Singular. Plural. 



Je revete, I may invests 
tu revetes, th. may est inve, 
il revcte, he may invest. 

Imperfect. 

Je rev^ti-rois, Ishould irwest. See page 90. F^ 



Nous revetions, we may in* 
vous revetiez, ye may inve. 
lis revetent, th.m^ty mvest* 



FRENCH TONGUE. 14^ 

<yic Preterperfect. 

Je revet-isse, I might invest. See page 90- G. 2*^ 
Rev oiRy to eee again, li ke voir. 
INFINITIVE MOOD. 
RxRE, to laugh. 
Participles. 
Present. Past- 

Iftant, laughing. \ Ri, laughed* 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
^ Present Tense. 
Singular. Plural. 

ZtfvSy Ilaugh, \^QVi% Yiow^iWe laugfi^ 

t\x rhi tmuiaughest^ \vousnez,x/e laugh, 

il rit, he laughs. Jils rient, they laugh 

Imperfect. 

Je ri-ois, I did laugh. See page 90. B. 

Preterperfect. 

Nous rimes, w^ laughed^ 
vous rites, ye laughed. 



ils rireht, they laughed. 



1er\% I laughed, 
tu ris, thou laughest, 
il rit, he laughed. 

Future. 
Je Ti-YSLi, I shall laugh. See page 90. D, 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Singular. Plural. 

\Rions, let us laugh 9 
RiS, laugh thou, lYiez, laugh ye, 

qu'il rie, let him laugh. Iqu'ils rieiit, let them laiigh. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
que Singular. Plural. 

Je rie, I may laugh, ' Nous riions, we may laugh , 

tu riest, thoumayestlaugh,\\o\x% riicz, ye may laughs 
il rie, he may laugh, _ |ils rient, they may laughs 

•'" Imperfect. 

Je ri-rois, Ishovid laugh. See ji^age 90. F. 



144 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

^^e Preterperfect. . 

Jt risse, I might laugh, iNousrjssions, ^^^/f?^f^*» 
tu r>sses ^^02? mf^^^e^^ to. vous rissiez, ye might lau. 
^MrnightlcSigh. ilsrissent,^.mz^A^ lauglt. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

RoMPRE- to break. 
Participles. 
Present. Past. 

Hompant, breaking- IRompu, broken* 

INDICATIVE MOOD,^ 
Present Tense. 
Singular. Plural, m 

le roipp;^; / break, iNous ronipons, we break^ 

tu roi« ps, thcu breakesty vous rompez, ye break, 
il rompt, he breaks. lils rompent, they break. 

Imperfect. 
le romp-ois, / did break. See page 90. B. 

Preterperfect, 
3e romp-is, / broke. See page f 0. C. 2, 

Future. 
Je romp-rai, I shall break. See page 90. D. 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Singular. Plural. 

Rompons, let us break. 
Romps, break thou, rompez. break ye, , 

^u'il rompe, let Mm ^r^<zA:. qu'ils rompent, kt them trr^ 

SU^BJUNGTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense, 
que Singular. Plural. r^^^gm 

Je rompe, 1 may break, jNous ro.mpions, ive mafM 
tu rompes. th, tnayest bre.\\ous rompiez, yem. break,^ ; 
■jA rompe; he may bret^k, !Us rompent, tA may break.;: \ 



TFRENCH TOKGUE, lie 

Imperfect. 
Je romp-rois, I should break. See p. 90. F. 
que Preter perfect 

Je romp'isse, I might break. See p. ^0- G. 2, 
JNFlNITiVE MOOD. 
Savoir, to knoTj, 
Participles. 
Present. Past. 

Sachant, knowing. \ Su, known. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense- 
Singular. Plural. 

Je sais, I knorj, [Nous savons, we knew, 

tu sais, thoic knoivest, I vcnis savez, ye know, 
il sait, he knows. tils sa\ ent, theij kno%i\ 

Imperfect 
Je sav-ols, Idid know. See p. 90. B. 

Preterperfect, 
Je BUS, / knew, iNous sumes^ we knew, 

tu sus, thou knew'st^ hous sutes, ye knew, 

il sut, he knew. iils suveut, they knew. 

FuturCc 

5e saur ai, / shall know, \ Nous saurons,?ye sh. kno^v, 

tusauras, thou wilt know, vous saurez, ye wulkJiow, 

'il saura., he will know. lilssauront, they will know. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Singular, Plural. 

ISachons, let us know, 
S^dit.know thoii, sachez, know ye 

qu'il «ache, let him kyiow. [qu'ils sachent,/^'?/^^?.^ uu: 



M6 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense- 

que Singular. Plubal, 

3e sache. Imay know, (Nous sachioiis. we mav kn 

il sache, he may knm, |ils sachent, they may TrZl 

Imperf'ect. 

Je sznrois I should frnoiv, jNous saurions,^£»<? sho kn 
tu s^rcn,,ihouwould^tkn:.voMs sauries, yewo^likn 
,1 saumt, he would know, ils s^nrdtntjeywokno^, 

^"^ Preterperffect 

£ sMs'e; ^f ^^.' If'^' iNous sussions, w w». >t«o. 

nsau he might know. \M^sxx^sen\thhf might kno. 

Secourir, to succour, like courir. 

Sentir, to feel. 

^^nviR, to serve. 

IpeSon^J"^ ^ ""^^ inoperative mood secon^ 
person singular, sers-^m other tenses follows thl 
same variation as ?> m /^26>?2r/r. ^ 

SoRTIRj^O^O out, 

p .12^1' ^ ^^""^^ ''^'^' ^""^ conjugated like mentir. Se, 

Souffrir to mffer, Wke coiwrir. See p. 115. 

Soutenir, ^o mfi/iori, like r^ mn 

3e souvenir> lo remember, like i^mzr 

SpFFiRE, ro «W^C<fo 

This verb Is conjuR:ated like Ore, except in th^l i 
^wo pretf- :-. :;es, nH the participle past^ where jti 



FRENCH TONGUE, 14? 

INFINITIVE M06d« 

SUIVRE, to/QlloW, 

Participles. 
Present* Past. 

Buivant,yo//owi72§', | Smv\, followed. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 
Singular. Plural. 

Je suis, I follow^ Nous suivons, wejollo'v?^ 

tusuis thou fodowest^ vous fimve?iiyc follow^ 
il suit, he follows. ils suivent, theyfoUoWc 

Imperfect. 
Je suiv-ois, I did follow. See page 90. B. 

Preterperfect, 
le suiv*-is» I followed. See page 90. C 2. 

Future, 
le suiv-rai," I shall follow. See page 90. D. 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Singular. Plurau 

jSuivons, let usfollow^ 
SmStfoilow thou, suivez,/o//ow ye, 

qu'il suive, let himfollow, Iqu'ils suiv*. nijet th, follow 
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense- 
que Singular. que Plural. 

Je suive, I may follow^ |Noussuivions.we7n.yb//ow5 
tw^\i\\t^,th.mayestfollowy\o\xs suivie? ye tnay folio. 
il suive, he may follow, j ils suivent/^^j/ mayfollo%(fs 

Imperfect. 
Je suiv-rois, J should follow. See page 90. F. 
que Preterperfect. 

Je suiv isse, I might follow , See page 90. G. 2. 
Surpreucl.t: to surprise h)s.^' prendre. 
Surseoir, to cMjjQum^ like asseoir. 



im. A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Taire, (SE,) to hold one^s tojigue^ 

This verb is conjugated like /z/air^. See page 135- 

INFINITIVE MOOD, 

Te^ir, to /wkL 

Participlkso 

Present. Past. 

Tenant^ holding. f Tenu, held, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense* 

SiHGULAR. Plural. 



J^ous tenons, we holdy 
vous tenez, ye hold^ 
ils tiennentjY^^ hdd.^ 



Je tiens, / hold^ 

tu tieos, thou holdest^ 

M tient, he holds^ 

Imperfeet, 

Je ten-ois, I did hold. See page 9a B. 

Preterperfecte 

^et'ms.Iheld, jNous tinmes, ^ry^i^e/cfj 

XM tms^ thou heldest, jvous tintes,t/e/fe/Q?, 

il tint, he held. [ils tinrent, they held,^ 

Future- 
Je t\end't2L\^Ishall hold. See page 90. D» 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Singular. Plural. 

Tenons, let us hold, 
Tiens, hold thou^ tenez, hold ye, 

qu'il tienne, let him hold, qu'ils tienneni, let th, hokh 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense, 
q^ue Singular. que Plural. 

Je tienne, I may holdy I Nous tenions,we may holdy 
tu tiennes, thou may, hold^vons teniez, ye may hold, 
\l iltnnGi he may hold* \'i\s ikimcnty they may hold^ 

Imperfect. 
Je tiend-rois, I should hold. See page 90. F. 



FRENCH TONGUE, 14,9 

que Preterperfect. 

Je tinsse, I might holdy jNojLis tinssions, nve m. hold^ 
tu tinsses, thou mightest /jJvous tinssiez,t/e might hold^ 
11 tint, he might hold, jils tinssent, they might hQ> 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Traire, ^0 mz/X:. 

Participles. 

Present, Past, 

Trayant, milking. \ Trait, milked. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

SiNGujLAR. Plural. 

Je trais, I milky Nous trayons, we milk, 

tu trais, thou milkest, vous trayez, ye milk, 

il trait, he milks, {ils traient, they milk. 

Imperfect. 

Je tray-ois, J did milk. See page 90. B» 

Preterperfect. 

Jetrai-rai, I shall milk. See pacje 90. D. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Singular. Plural= 

Trayons, let us ?nilkf 

trayez, milk ye, 

qu'ils ithient Jet the7n7nilk, 



Trais, milk thou^ 
qu'il traie, let him milk, 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

que Singular. que Plural. 

Je traie, / may milky jNous tray ions, -zi^^ may mL 

tu traies, thou mayest mUk Avoxxs trayiez, ye may milk\ 
il tr3i\ef he ?nay milk. jils traient, they may milk. 

Imperfect, 

Je trai-rois, / should milk. See page 9a F- 

N2 



150 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

INFINITIVE MOOD, 

Tressaillir,7o Mart. 

Participles. 

Present. Past. 

Tressaillant, starting, \ Tressailli, started. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense- 

Singular. Plural. 

Je tressaille, / starts INoiis tressaillonsj %ve starts 

tu tressailles, ^//^2^ s^^tes^, vous tressaillez, ye sjiart^ 
.11 tressaille, ^^ stores. jils tressaillent, they starts 

Imperfect. 

Je tressaill-ois, / did stai^t. See page 90. R. 

Preterperfectv 

Je tressaiiHs, L started. See page 90. C.2 

Future. 

Je ixess^\Vi'X2ih I shall start. See page 90. B, 

IMPERATIVE MOOD is wanUng, 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 
Singular. Plural. 

[start.. 
Nous tressaillions, nve may 
vous tressailliez,^^ may st^ 
ils tressaillent, they ??i.''sta. 
Imperfect. 
Je tressailU-roiSs I should start. See page 90. F. 
que Preterperfectv 

le tressaill-isse, I might start. See page 90. G. 2. 

N. B. The French Academy say tressaillir defieur^ 
de craintey to start out of fear ; tressailUr de joye^ 
to leap far joy. 



que 

Je tressaille, I may star ty 
tu tressailles,^/^. maijest st, 
il tressaille, he may start. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 151 

Y Ai^NCRE 9 to vangtds/i. 
This verb is conjugated like convaincre ; but it is 
seldom used in some tenses, never in the singular ot 
the present tense of the indicative mood. Inbtead 
of this verb, we often make use of triomliher, mir^ 
monter, etre victorieux. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
y A-LOlViy to be wortlu 
Participles- 
Present. Past. 

Valant, being worth. ^ I Valu, been nvortlu 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense, 
Singular. Plural, 

Je vaux, lam worthy jNous valotis,W(? are nvortfh 
tu vaux, thou art worth, vous valez,t/^ are worthy 
il vaut, he is worth. lils valent, they are worths 

Imperfect. 
Je val-ois, / was worth. See page 90* B. 

Preterperfect. 
Je val-us> I was worth. See page 90- C. 5. 

Future= 
Je vaud-rai, I shall be worth. See page 90. D. 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Singular, Plural. 

' Valons, let us be worth, 
Vaux, be thou worth. jvalez, be ye worth, 
il\xl\v2ii\\G,let himbc worth) qu'ih vailieat, let th.be wa^ 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

Singular. Plural. 

que j [worthy 

Je vaiiles, Jwaz/ ^ewor^A, Nous valionsj we maybe 
tu vaM\^Sith.7nayest be 'zyo. vous vaiiezjz/^ ^^^U bewor. 
U vaille, he may be worth, 'ils valUeLtj th. maybe lujpr^ 



152 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Imperfect. 
Je vaud-rois, I should be worth- See page 90. Fv 
que Preterperfect. 

Je val-usse, I might be 'worth. See page 90. Ge3, 

Prevaloir, to prevail, is conjugated in the same 
manner, except that in the third person singular of 
the inaperative nnood it makes fircvale ; and in the 
present tense of the subjunctive mood, it makes, in 
the singular, Je fircvale ^ tu firdvalesy il firdvale* 

Venir, to come. 
This verb is conjugated like tenir. See page 148 
INFINITIVE MOOD 
ViVRE, to true. 
Participles. 
Present- Past, 

Vivant,/ii;in^. \N6c\i/lived. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense* 
Singular. Plural. 



Nous vivons, tvelrvCi 
vous y'lvez, ye live ^ 
ils vivent, they live- 



|e vis, I live, 

tu vis, thou livestf 

il vit, he lives. 

Imperfect* 
Je viv-ois, I did live. See page 90. B. 
Preterperfeet^. 

Je vecus, I lived, .Nous v^eumes, nve lived, 

tu vecusy thou livedst, vous vecutes, ye lived, 
il v6cut, he lived. 41s vecurent, thetj lived. 

Future. 
Je vive-rai, I^halllive: See page 90. D. 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Singular. Plural. 

jVivons, let us livCy 
Vis, live thou, vivez, live ye. 



riu'iVvive, kihlm live» |q«'ds vivent, kt them livf 



m 



FRENCH TONGUE. 15;: 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense, 
que Singular. Plural- 



Nous vivions, tt*€ may live^ 
vous vivlez, ye may Irve^ 
\ls vivent, ihey may live. 



Je vive I may lirve^ 

tu vivas, thou may est live, ^ 

il vive, he may live. 

Imperfect. 
Itxvf'XOis, J should live. See p. 90. F. 
que Preterperfect, 

Jevecusse, I might live, INous vecussions, 7ue mi, IL 
tu vecusses, thou mig' live Jvoms vecussiez, ye mi. live, 
il vecut, he might Iwe* jils vecussent, they mi, live. 
Voir, to see. 
This verb is conjugated like fir^vmr, see p. X38, 
except in the future, and in the imperfect tense of 
the subjunctive mood, where it makes Je verrai, Jq 
verrois^ 

INFINITIVE MOOD, 

Voux^oiR, to be willing. 
Participles. 
Present. Past. 

Voulant, deing willing, \ Voulu, been willing, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Singular. Plural. 

Je veux, / am ivi^ng^ /Nous voulons» we are ^ ^^^^ 

tu veux> thou art willing, vous voulez, ye are C^ 

il veut, he is -willing, lis veuleut, they are j% 

Imperfect. 
Je voul-ois, / was willing. See p. 90. B. 

Preterperfect. 
Je voul-us, I was willing. See p. 90. C. 3, 

Future. 
Je voud-rai, I shall be willing. See p. 90. D 
IMPERATIVE MOOD is wanting. 



154 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense* 
Singular. Plural. 

que . . I Iwilling^ 

Se veuWle, I fnay be willingAl^^om voulions, %ve may be 
tu veuilles, thou m, be wz7/J vous vouliez, yem. be will* 
il veu^Ile//^ may be wiUing\\\^ veuiilent, th- m. be will^ 

Imperfect. 
Je voud-rois, I should be willing' See p. 90. F. 
que Preterperfect. 

Je voul-usse, Zftnig/it be mlling. See p. 90- G. S- 



Particular Observations upon some Verbs ^ (chiefly 
Defective^ and their Manner of being conjjigated 
and used : in Alphabetical order. 

ASSORTIR, to suit, to match ; this verb is rec^u- 
lar, and conjugated like fiunir : so is ressortir^ 
•when it signifies to be under the jurisdiction of a 
court ; but, when it signifies to go out again, it is ir- 
regular, and conjugated like /^anir. 

Br AIRE, to bray : this verb is used only in the fol- 
lowing tens':t^s, il brait, il braira, il brairoit* 

Bruire, to bluster : this verb is used only in the 
infinitive, and in the third person of the imperfect 
tense, indicative mood, both singular and plural, il 
hruyoit its brtiyoient, as, les vents bruyoientj the 
■winds blustt red. 

Bruyanty having both genders and numbers, is by 
no means the participle ot this verb, but an adjec- 
tive : as, lesjiots bruyansy the blustering waves. 

Choir, to fall : this verb is hardly used, but in 
the infinitive mood, and in the participle past cA7^9 
Instead of the feminine chue, we formerly made use 
of chute, which is still used in these proverbial man- 
ners of speaking, cher-cher chafie- chute ^ trouver 
c/iafie chute.to look for,to find some occasion to make 
an advantage of the negligence, or misfortune of 
somebody^ 



FRENCH TONGUE. 155 

Clorre, to close ; this verb is used only in the 
three peisos singular of the present tense, indica- 
tive vnoodije dosy tu clos, il dot : in the future, je dor- 
rai ; in the inri perfect tense of the subjunctive mood, 
je dorrois, and in the participle past» dos. This verb 
is so letimes neuter in the third person sincjular : as, 
iafiofte ne dot fias bien, il yfautrnettre de la lisiere^ elk 
dorra mieux : the door does not shut well, you must 
put so!Y,e bst to it ; it will shut better* 

Defaillir, todecay, to grow faint and weak ; this 
verb is used only in the plural number of the indica- 
tive mood, present tense, nous defaillons^ votes defaii- 
lezy Us defailleat ; in the imperfect and preterperiect 
tenses, both singular and plural, of the same mood, 
je defaiUoiSykSfcjedefhilHs, ^c in all its compound 
tenses, y'az defaitky Istc and in the infinitive mood. In- 
stead Of thi- verb, it is always better to make use of 
tomberen def alliance. This verb likewise sip;nifies to 
fail, to want ; as, toutes choses commencent a leur dt:^ 
faillir- they begin to want every thing ; but m this 
sense it grows obsolete ; it has no participle active 
in either sense. 

Demouvoir, to make desist, (a law term :) this 
verb is us'ed only in the infinitive mood : as, nen ne 
Va fiu demouvoir de ses pretentions ; nothing could 
make him give up his pretensions* ^ 

Eg HoiR . to fall out, to chance: this verb is conjugat- 
ed like dechoir, see page 119 ; but it is only used in 
the third person singular of the ind cative mood, pre- 
sent tense, in the preterperfect and future tenses of 
the said mood,in the imperfect and preterperfect ten- 
ses of the subjunctive mood, in the participle past, 
and the participle of the present, wherein it makes 
icheant. 

EcLORRE, to be Iiatched : this verb is used only in 
the third person singular and plural of the present 
tens»e, indicative mood, il Sclot, Us Sdosent ; in the fu- 
ture, Wedorra, Us e dorr out ; in the present tense, 
subjunctive mood, iledose. Us Sdosent ; in the imper- 
fect tense of the same mood, il edon^oit^ Us eclorroi- 
mt ; and in the participle past wherein it makes 
ecloS' This verb, in its compound tenses is conjugat- 
ed with the auxiliary v^xhetre^ and is sometimes used 



156 A GRAMMAR Qf^ THE 

in a figurative sense, speaking of odc's thoughts, de- 
signs, 6cc. which begin to be discovered, after hav- 
ing been some time hidden: as, ses de&seins eclorront 
qudqiie JQiiT ; his designs will one day come to light. 

Emouvoir, ^0 stir u]i^ to move : this verb is con- 
jugated like mouvoir^ see page 132; it is used both in 
a proper and figurative sense ; in the first it is said 
of the most subtile parts of the body, as humours, 
vapours, blood, &c. : ^LS^^le soldi emeutles vapeurs^ the 
sun stirs up the vapours ; in the second, it is applied 
to whatever may cause a motion, or excite a passion, 
^c. : as, c'^est un limnTne que rieii rCement^ he is a man 
^hom nothing moves. This verb is likewise used in 
a reflective sense : 2L%^ils'emut line grande tempete^ 
there arose a great tempest. 

Enclorre, ^0 e^c/o5<?, is conjugated like clorre^ 
and used in the same tenses. 

s'Ensuivre, to ensue ^ to follow .: this verb is con- 
jugated like suture ^ in all its tenses and moods, only 
in the third person singular and plural. See p. 14r. 

Faillir, tofml: this verb is conjugated in the 
present tense, indicative mood, jefaux^ tu faux, il 
jaut, nous faillons^ vousfailleZy ilsfaillent ; in the pre- 
terperfect tense, of the same mood, /e/az/Zis, Isfc, and 
in the participle active, faillant ; as, arriver a jour 
faillant^ to arrive at the close of the day. This verb is 
seldom used ; however, we still make use of the par- % 
ticiple past : as, sHl afaUli, ilfautquHlsoitfiUni, if he ^ 
has done amiss, he must be punished. We Ukewzse 
say in conversation, le aeurmefaut^ I am fainting.* 

Falloir, sometimes signifies* to want, to come 
short, to be far from : as, il n'enfaut beaucoufiy there 
wants a great deal, it comes infinitely short : in this 
sense, it is preceded by s^en, and conjugated only in 
the third person singular, both in its simple and com- 
pound tenses : as, it s'en faut, falloit^ fallut^ fmidra, 
faille, faudroit^fallut ; il s^en estfallu, &c. 

* The authors of the dictionary of Trevoux have ilfaillira 
Jn the future tense ; they seem to be in the right ; however, 
^e sHy .9071 amine luifaudra pas ait besoi?i, his friend will not 
be wantin.^ to him in time of need ; ♦' but then it is rather 
tiie future of the \evhfaUair ; which, though different from 
the vQvh failUvy has sometimes the same signification^" Die- 
TrowNAiBEBE Tni:yox7x. 



FRENCH TONGUE. lot 

FSRIR, to Strike : this verb is used in the infinitive 
tnoo(3, only in this phrase, ^^725 coii/i fnir, without 
striking a blow. Ti:e participle pastjeru is still used 
in the two following expressions, speaking in a jest : 
as, ilestferu contre un tel ; he is indisposed against 
such a one ; il e^t fern de cettefemmc : he is snnitten 
With this woman. 

FRiRiLy to frij : this verb is used only in the three 
persons singular ofthe present tense, indicative Tnoodg 
jejrisy tufris^ ilfrit : in the future tense singula and 
pIoral,y>j97>m, 6cc. in the iniperative niood second 
person singular,j^7<s ; in the inrif)erfect tense, subjunc- 
tive mood, singular and plural, /e7?2>oi5, &c. and in 
the participle past^^iV. 

Gesir, to lie : this verb is quite obsolete, even in 
the infinitive mood ; however, we still say, git^ nou.s- 
gfsons. Us gisenty ilgisoU; as, tout gtt en cela ; the 
ivhole business lies in that point ; ci gtt, here lies. 

JLuiRE, to shine : this verb is conjugated like 
gmdiiirey see page 96, except in the participle past, 
where it makes lui ; and so is its compound reluire : 
mimeover, these two verbs want the preterperfcct. 
tense of the indicative and subjunctive nioods. 

^VilRF.y to hurt : this verb^ in all its tenses and 
moods, is conjugated like tr'adidre^ except in the par- 
ticiple past, where it makes nui. ' 

Pleuvoir, z^o ram : this verb is used only in the 
third person singular, and sometimes in the pluraL 
>— f/ plenty il pleuvoity ilfiluty il fileuvray il fikuvey \i 
fileuvroit^il fluty filu, 

. pROMouvoiR, to promote: this verb is used only in 

t^e infinitive mood, and in the participle past/'rcJ7?zzc, 

QtTERXR, foj^Tk? A : this verb is used only in the 

infinitive mood, with the verbs aller, venir^ and envoy- 

fr :■ as, aUez qucriry go and fetch. 

Ravoir, to have again : this verb is used only in 
the infinitive mood. 

Repartir : when this verb signifies either to go 
away again, to set out a^;ain, orto reply, it takes no ac- 
cent upon the first syllable, is irregular,and conjugat- 
ed like fiartir ; but when it signifies to share, to di- 
lyide, it takes an acute accent upon the first syllable, 
is regular, conjugated like /zz^72/r, and scarcely used, 



158 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

but in a few expressions speakinp: of an estiate^ tno - 
ney, &c. : as, refiartir une somme <f argent ; to divide a 
sum of money. 
Ressortir, see As sort ir, page 154. 
Sajllir : when this verb signifies to gush out, it is , 
regular, and conjugated like jiunir ; but when it sig- 
nifies to jut out, it is irregular, wants the participle 
past, is used only in the infinitive mood, and in the 
third person of some tenses: as, ce balco?i, cettecomiche, 
saille trop-^saillera troftysailleroit trofi. In this sense it 
likewise wants the participle of the present, though 
we sav inFortification, angle saillant, and in Architec- 
ture, corniche saillante^ but then saillant is an adj ecti ve* 

Seoir, to Jit welly to become } this verb is never used I 
5n the infinitive mood, but only in the third person sin- 1 
gular and plural of the following tenses: ilsieds^ilseie^^ 
ent ; il seyoit^ Us seyoknt ; il siera, il sieront ; ilsie^t 
roity Us sieroient' This verb is still used in the parti-l 
cipleof the present : sls, cette couleurvoUs sei/ant si 
bieuy vous auriez tort d'^enfiorter cT autre ^^xxiQ^e, th; : co- 
lour becc^mes you so well, you would be in the wrong 
to wear any other : but it is better to avoid it. This 
verb is sometimes impersonally used : as, Usieds mal 
d un homme de — ; it does not become a man to - ^ 
This verb, in the sense of to sit down, is obsolete; 
however, in Chancery or Law, we still make use of 
the participle of the present, seant, and the paitici- 
ple of the past sis : the former is applied to a person 
or persons who are sitting or residing : as, le Rol 
scant en son lit dejusticcy the King sitting onhis throne; 
le Parlement est scanty the Parhament is sitting ; the 
latter signifies situated? as, un heritage sis a. — , an es- 
tate situated at— ; une maison sise rue St^ Paul^ a 
house situated in St. Paul*3 street. 

SoRTiR : when this verb is used in Law, and sig- 
nifies to get, to obtain, it is regular, and conjugated 
likQfiunir; but it is used in a few tenses ; as, ceite sen^ 
tence sortirasonfilein^eiitler effct ; this sentence will 
take effect ;fentends que cette clause soj-tisse sen plein 
<:f entier effety I expect this clause should take effect. 
SouDRE (une question) to solve cr resolve {-^ ques- 
tion)- This verb is used only in the infinitive ivnoodj 
but it is obsolete, and we make use of rcsoi\djx^> 



FRENCH tongue; 159 

PART Ilf. 



THEORY JOINED TO PRACTICE . 

THE FORMER CONTAINTNG THE 

RULES OF THE FRENCH SYNTA3C 

WITH MANY 

J^E W OBSER VATIOJ^S: 

THE LATTER, THE 

RULES AND OBSERVATIONS 

EXEMPLIFIED SEPARATELY, 
rOR THE 

SCHOLAR'S PRACTICE, 

AFTER EACH PART OP SPEECH. 



CHAPTER L 

Rules and OBservations upon Articles* 

1. rilHE definite article is used before the com m on 
X nouns, denoting an individual distinction, or a 
totality ot objects : a<^, the spring; is an agreeable sea- 
son, le iirintemfis est une saison agreable : men are 
mortal, les hommes sont mortels. 

2. The indefinite article is used before nouns taken 
in an indefinite and indeterminate sense, or in a sense 
which does not denote either an individual distinction, 



160 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

or a specific totality : as, learned people have ap- 
proved his work, ^Q^savaiie oiit approve son ouvrage^. 
See Rule 18. 

3. All common nouns of substantives take the defi- 
Siite article ; also names of kingdoms, rivers, pro- 
vinces, mountains, 5cc. unless in the sense of remain- 
ing in, going to, or coming from ; in this case we 
make use of the prepositions en and de : as, I am go- 
ing V) France ; je vais en France : he is arrived trom 
Flanders, il est arrive de Flandre, They live in Italy, 
ils deineurent en lUilie, 

4. Obs, Proper names in the plural take the definitive arti- 
cle, though they have none in the singular, as, les Homere, 
les Vii'gile, Sec. 

5. When a superlative follows inimediately its suhstantive^ 
the definite artiele is always put before the superlative \\\ the 
first case, and agrees with the substantive 'm gender and num- 
"ber ; as, he is the most learned man, c'est, I'hOmme le plus 
savant : you speak of the most learned man, vous parlez de 
I'homrae le plus savant. 

Except when im or line are fallowed by a substantive ; in 
this case the definite article is commonly used in the second 
case plural, as, he is one of the most learned men, c'est ua 
liomme des plus savans, or, c'est Un des hommes les plus sa- 
vans, or, c'est un des plus savans horoimes. 

6. Adjectives used substantively take the article : 
as, idle people are despised, \qs parcsseux sont me- 
prises, 

Kouns of measure, vveight, &c. of things bought or 
sold, take the definite article, rendered in English by 
apvan", as, ten, crowns a bushel, dix ecus Icdoisseau, 

7. When a substantive having the definite article 
before it, it is preceded by tour, the article is kept, m 
the first case, through all the cases of tout : as, all 
the worWy tout le ?nonde ; of all the world, de toiit 
le monde ; to all the world, a tout le monde. 

8. Some adverbs or prepositions, used substanti^^•^ 
ly, require the article ' as, the inside, le dedans ; the 
outside, ie dehors ; the upper i^art, le dessus ; the 
under fiart^ le dessous, 

9. Obs. The definite arclcle is put before the names of the 
Italian authors according to their syntax, as, Tasso, le Tasse^ 
except Raphael, Michel-Ange, Pctrarque, Bocace, Sannazar, 
kc. and tijose who have \yritten in I^atin, as Sadolet, Manure, 
I^rouius^ Sec. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 16! 

10. Obs. After the \erhJQuer, to play, we make use of the 
definite article in the second case, speaking of musical instru- 
nuents, as, jouer, du violon, de la guitarre ; and speaking of 
games at cards, or some bodily exercises, we make use of 
the same article in the third case, as, jouer aux cartes, a la 
pautne; and aherjoueur, a player, we make use of the pre- 
position de in both instances, as, un joueur de violon, de gui= 
tarre, de cartes, de paume. 

11. Obs. The adverb bieyi, taken for beaucoup, much, takej 
after it the definite article in the second case, as, he has much 
money, il a bien de Targent, whereas beaucoup, takes the pre- 
position de, as, il a beaucoup ci'argent,unless it be determined 
jand specified by a restive pronoun that follows it, as, il a de- 
pense^eat/cow/K/e/'argentgz^e vous lui aviezdonne,he hasspent 
a great deal of the money that you gave him : but beaucoup 
being the proper word, it is better never to make use of bien, 

12. Obs. Some names of countries, contraiy to the excep- 
tions of the third rule, refain their article even in the sense 
of remaining in, coming to, or going from. These nouns are 
particularly those of remote countries, viz. of America, Asia, 
or Africa, to which we may join la Marche, le Perche, le 
Maine, &c. provinces in France ; le Mans, le Catelet, la Fere, 
la Ferte, le Havre de Grace, la Rochelle, le Quesnoy, &c, 
<iities in France, le Mantouan, le Milanez, le Parmesan, &cc, 
divisions of Italy : to which add, la Haye, the Hague. 

13. Obs. No article is used before cardinal numbers, except, 
first, when the nouns to which they are joined have a fixed 
number, either by themselves, as, les quatre saisons, the four 
seasons ; or by a relation to something else expressed by the 
circumstances of the discourse, as, les deux lettres que je 
vous ai ecrites ; the two letters which I wrote to you. Se- 
condly, speaking of cards, or tlie day of the month, as, le dix, 
le neuf"-de Janvier, de Fevrier-" de coeur, de pique, &c. 

14. No article is used before proper names, par- 
ticular places, towns or villages, &c. 

Except some nouns, when they denote an indivi- 
dual distinction, or a particular appellation : as, 
VAthalie deRACiNE,/a Merofie de Voltaire, speak- 
ing of two plays of these two authors- 

15. No article is used before nouns immediately 
following certain verbs, or prepositions^, with which 
th^y form a kind of adverb : as, avec amitie^ with 
frieiwlsliip ; sans dedaiiu without disdain ; fiar dS/iit^ 
through spite; avofr envie^ to have a mind to. 

Except, first, when these nouns are followed by the 
relative pronouns, quU que^ lequdy &c. Secondly, by 
9- superlative Thirdly, by a noun in the second case. 
92 



162 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

16. No article is used after the preposition cn^ ex-> 
cept in a very few cases, which y/iil be taken notice 
of in the observations about prepositions ; v.hereas. 
dans always requires an article after it, unless it be 
foUowed by a conjunctive possessive pronoun : as,, 
dans ma chambre ; in my room. 

17. No article is used before a noun which follows 
immediately the name of a particular place, to whicli 
it belongs : as, I was born in London, the capital city 
of England : Je'sui& ned LondreSi ville capitate d^ An-^ 
gletterre. Neither is the article used after the verb. 
Strc : as, it est medeain, he is a physician, and not il- 
f;5^ un mcdecin: unless in the exception of the Ijth' 
observation) and unless the verb be preceded by cc • 
as, c'est un mcdecin. 

18. The indefinite and partitive articles des^ de, du, 
de kiy a da, a des^ a de^ a de la, are used according 
to the second observation, and answer to soine^ either 
expressed or understood before a substantive. 

19. Obs, When the adjective goes before its substantive, in- 
stead of the foregoing indejQnite articles, we make use of da 
for the first case, d de for the third case, as, vdiik de bou 
pain, there is good bread ; voilk de belles dames, there are 
fine ladies ; and not, du bon pain, des belles daraes. 

N, B. There are sooae substantives in the plural, though 
preceded by their adjectives, where we make use of des, and 
not de ' it happens when the adjective and substantive raake 
but one idea, and the adjective is only used to render the sig- 
Bification of the substantive complete ; such are belles-lettres^ 
beaux-esprits, grands-^eigneurs, which signify beiles-lettres^ 
men of learning, people of great quality. 

20. The articles un, une, are used when they signi- 
fy only a kind of indeterminate individuality^ or aa 
individuality in an indeterminate manner : as, a king 
ought to be the father of his people, un roi doit Stre 
lefiere de sonpeufile, Hov/ever, these articles may 
sometimes be resolved into the definite article : as, a 
wise man rules his passions, un ho7nme sage regit se% 
passions, or, Vhomme sage, 6cc. The articles un anci 
une are expressed in English by a or an. 

\ 21. Articles are repeated before each substantive, 
though synonymous : as, lesfaveurs ^ les graces qias 
nous recevons die del, the favours and kiadnessei^ 
which v/e rece^ye from heaver. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



162 



22. Obs. When two adjectives, positively used, are joined 
top^ether by a conjunction, and have the same substantive, the 
Rtiicle is only put before the first of them, if they are synony- 
mous, or very nestr alike, as, les riches & niagnifiques presens, 
the rich and magnificent presents. If they are not synonym 
jnous, the article must be repeated, as, les riches &c les pau- 
¥res ; the rich and the poor. 

Rules and Observations upon Articles^ exemplijied 
for the Scholar'' s Practice. 



[1,] There are nine parts 
of speech : the^^ article, 
the Roun, the pronoun, 
the verb, the participle, 
the adverb, the preposi- 
tion, the conjunction, 
the interjection . 

TViC article shows the ob- 
ject or thingr^ 

The noun names the thing. 

llie pronoun supplies the 
place of the noun. 

The verb shows the action 
or passion ofth-s object. 

ThG participle partakes of 
the nature of the verb 
and noun ; it^ is used in 
the conjugation of pas- 
sive verbs, and for that 
of the compound tenses 
of the other verbs. 

The adverb marks the 
difference and circum- 
stances of the action or 
passion. 

?4'-je' preposition is an inde- 
clinable wordjplaced be- 
fore the nouns, pronouns, 

* The words wliich are the objects of the rules are printed 
ill Italic, botii in ihe French aad Eiigliiih examx^les, if there 
L>e any expressed in the last throi?y hour, the rules and obser 
^ fttioif'^ ^^Acmpljfied; to th^ cna of Uic !■ ji?£KUM SisfTaxt. 



11 y a neuf parties d'orai- 
son ; r * article, le nom, 
le pronom, le verbe, le 
participe, /'adverbe, la 
preposition, la conjoncv 
tion, /'interjection. 

Zr'article montre /*objet 
ou la chose. 

Le nonn nonime la chose, 

Le pronom tient la place 
(III noni. 

Le verbe oaontre /'action, 
ou /a passion de Tobjet. 

Le participe tient de la 
nature du verbe, & du 
nom ; il sert c} la con- 
jugaison des verbes pas- 
sifs, et h celle des temps 
composes des autres 

V verbes. 

-L'adverbe marque la dif- 
ference et les circon- 
stances aV I'action ou de 
la passion. 

La preposition est un mot 
indeclinable, place de* 
V an I les n om s, . les pro - 



164 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



and verbs which it go- 
verns. 

llie conjunction joins 
words and phrases. 

Tfie interjection expresses 
the motions or passions 
of the soul. 

Summer is an agreeable 
season. 

Idleness is despicable. 

Shut the door. 

Open the window. 

Draw the curtains. 

Bring the mustard. 

Give me the loaf. 

Cut Me meat. 

Emulation is a noble pas- 
sion. 

Virtue and beauty are es- 
timable. 

Virtue is preferable to 
riches. 

The heart often betrays 
the mind. 

I like fruit, 

[3.]France is a large coun- 
try. 

I speak of France. 

I^et us speak of Ent^Jand. 

He only talks of Holiand. 

Touraine is the garden of 

France. 
J'/^eThamesis a fine river. 

7%^ Rhine is a rapid river. 

Parnassus, Pindus, and 
Helicon, are the itioun- 
tains of the poets. 

My brother is come fvcm 
thit Indies. 



noms, & les verbes 

qu'elle r^git. 
luU conjonction joint ^%' 

mots 6c /e«'phrases. 
Z'interjection exprime/^^ 

mouvements, ou/es pas-. 

sions de /'ame. 
L*ete estuqesa,isonaer^a= 

ble. 
La paresse est meprisabl^v 
Fermez. la porte. 
Ouvrez la fenetre. 
Tirez les rideaux* 
Apportez la moutarde. 
Donnez-moi le pain. 
Coupez la viande. 
jLYmulation est une noble 

passion. 
La vertu & /a beaute sont 

estimables. 
La vertu est preferable 

aux richesses» 
Le coeur trompe souvent 

/'esprit. 
J'aimeJi? fruit. 
La France est un pays 

considerable. 
Je parle de la France. 
Parlous de Z'Angleterre. 
II ne parle que de la Hol-^ 

lande. 
La Touraine est /e jardin 

de la France. 
La Tamise est une belle 

riviere, 
Le Rhin est une riviere 

rapide. 
Le Parnasse, le Pinde, et 

/I'lelicon, sont, les mon- 

tagnes des poetes. 
Mon fiere est arrive rler^. 

Indes 



FRENCH TONGUE. ^ 16^ 

My sister lives \\f France. Ma soeur demeare en 

France. 
I ^hult go to Italy next J'irai en Italic an prin- 

spring. temps prochain* 

I am going to Spain- Je vais €7i Espagne. 

I come from Portugal- Je viens de Portugal. 

He /n/ ^5 z?2 England. ^ UdemeurefnAngleten^^^ 
[5.] It is the custom ofihc C'est la coatume cies peun 

most barbarous people. pies les plus barb ares. 
He speaks of the most 11 parle de /'homme Ip 

unhappy man. plus mal^eureux. 

He is the best educated C'est , /'enfant k mieux 

child. ^leve. 

He is the most presump- C'est /'homme le plus 

tuous man- pr^somptueux. 

She is the most beautiful C'est /a demoiselle /a plus 

and a?niable lady. belle 8c la plus aimable. 

I am writing upon the ni- J*ecris sur la matiere la 

cest matter, tliough the plus delicate, quoique 

least shining* la moins brillante. 

* It is one of the most C'est U7ie des coutume.s 

barbarous customs. /es plus barbares. 

He speaks of one oj the 11 parle dhm des homme^ 

most unhappy men. les plus malheureux. 

He is one of the best ed- C'est un des enfans les 

ucated children. mieux elevt-.s. 

ifb is one of the most pre- C'est nn des hommes les 

sarflfptuou3 men- plus presomptueox. 

She is one of the most C'est tmc des demoiselles 

beautiful and amiable /i^s plus belles &/<?5 plus 

ladies. aimabies. 

I am writing upon one of J'ccris sur 7^?2<? matiere ^^6- 

the nicest matters, plus deiicates, quoique 

though the leastshining. des moins briilantes- 
[6] Coals are sold lor a Le charbon se vend un 

shilling a bushel. cheling le boisseau. 

* I make use, on purpoae, of the siime six foregoing exam'^ 
pies, to make the exception to the filtli observation more sen" 
sible to the learner. In this last example the article imme?^i- 
aiely foilowing, im or une, may be omitted ; in this^ase the^ 
substantive is pnt in the singular ; as, C'est une coutume de% 
plus barbares 5 Je parie d'un homme des plus malUeureus, 



166 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Eggs have been sold for 
one pound a hundred; 
it is more than four 
shillings a quarter. 

Candles are sold for nine- 
pente a pound. 

Butter is sold for ten pence 
a pound. 

This lace cost one guinea 
a vard. 

The j)oliticians dissemble. 

The ambitious sacrifice 
every thing to fortune. 

Rvery body knows it. 

One ought, in learned 
works, to join profit to 
pleasure. 

[7.] ft is everxj body's cus- 
tom. 

He tells the same story to 
every body. 

She speaks ill oj all men. 

Jill men are not liars. 
All women are net proud* 
He slanders c// women. 

He paid ail the expenses. 

All fashions are not ridicu- 
lous. 

I learn every day. 

it is the T^.^Qrlofthewhole 
city. 

[8] /Wtf inside of the house 
is very fine. 

The outside of the church 
is majestic. 

The upper part is quite 
b} u led. 

[10 j My sister plays T//207^ 



Les ceuf3^/)nt ete vendus 

une livre sterling/ecent; 

c'est . plus de quatre 

chelings le quarteron. 
Les chandeiles se vendent 

neuf sous la livre. 
Le beurre se vend dix 

sous la livre. 
Cette dentelle coute une 

guinee la verge. 
Z^spolitiques dissimulent= 
Les ambitieux sacrifient 

tout a la fortune. 
Tout le monde le salt. 
On doitj dans les ouvrages 

d'esprit, joindre /'utile 

a Z'agreable. 
C*est la coutume de tout 

le monde. 
II raconte la meme histoi- 

re d tout le monde. 
Eile parie mal de tous les 

hommes. 
Tous les hommes ne sont 

pas menteurs. 
Tout e 8 les femmes ne sont 

pas fie res. H 

II m^dMde touteslisitm- 

mes. 
11 paya tous les depens. 
I outes les modes ne sont 

pas ridicules. 
J'apprends tous les jours. 
C'est le bruit de toute la 

ville. 
Le dedans de la maison 

est tres beau. 
Le dehors de I'eglise est 

majestueux- 
Le dessus est tout gate. 

Ma soBur joue de la gui- 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



16/ 



the guitar, and my bro- 
ther ufion the violin 

He is a good player at bil- 
liards, at tennis, &c. 

We played yesterday at 
piquet. 

[11.] He has much money. 

ihave read many books. 

She has many friends. 

You take a great deal qf 
pains. 

They give themselves 
much trouble. 

He has spent a great deal 
o/* money. 

f;i2.] I shall go to China 
next year. 

He is arrived at Mexicp. 

He is come back from Ja- 
pan, Mo^ul, the Indies, 
Florida, Canada, 8cc. 

He lives at the Hague. 

flS.] Here are the two 
roses you gave me to- 
day. 

Of the four seasons of the 
year.thesummer pleas- 
.<es me nftore than the 
three others. 

I lost the fm letters you 
wrote to me. 

{14} i come from Lon- 
don, Greenwich, Chel- 
sea, Kensington, &c. 

Athalia is famous in sacred 
history, Merope in pro- 
fane history. 

Racine's Athalia and Vol- 
taire's Merofie are dra- 
matic master-pieces. 



tarre, & monfrere joue 
du violon. 

C'est un bon joueur de bil- 
lard, de paume, &c. 

Nous jouames hier au pi- 
quet 

II a bien de /'argent, ou 
beaucoup rf'argent. 

J'ai lu beaucoufi de livres. 

EUe a beaucoup rf'amis. 

Vous prenez beaucoup de 
peine. 

lis se donnent beaucoup 
de peine. 

11 a depense beaucoup 
d'argent. 

J'irai a la Chine I'annee 
prochaine, 

II est arrive uu Mexique^ 

11 est revenu du Jitpon, du 
Mogol, des Indes, de la 
Floride, c/m Canada, 6cc. 

II demeure a la Haye. 

Voici ks deux roses que 
vous m'avez doniiees 
aujourd'hui, 

Des quaire saisons de I'an- 
nee, I'et^ me plait plus 
que les trois autres. 

J'ai perdu les deux lettres 
que vous m'avez ecrites. 

Je views de Londres, de 
Greenwich, de Chelsea, 
de Kensington, 6cc. 

Athalie est fameuse dans 
Thistoire sacree, Merope 
dans I'histoire profane. 

JJ Athalie de Racine & la 
Mirope de Voltaire sont 
des chefs-d'oeuvre dra- 
matiques. 



168 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Mihon's Paj'adise Lost is 

a fine poem. 
[15.] She received me 

kindly. 
He did it through afiite. 
Speak to him without dis- 
dain. 
Ihavc a mind to go thither. 
She received roe with the 

greatest friendship. 
He did it through^/iie spite 

he had for her. 
She spoke to him ^vith the 

contempt he deserved. 
He submitted to it with the 

greatest patience. 
[16.] He is in a furnished 

lodging. 
You will find it in the boj-^v 

Is there any inkin e'/i^ bot- 
tle ? 

Here is some in the ink- 
stand. 

[17.] Paris hike capital 
city of France. 

He lives in Paris, the cap-^ 
ital citij of France. 

Lorrdon is the capita] city 
of England. 

Fie was born inLo!idOn,thc 
capital city of England. 

George III. king of Eng- 
land and elector' of Han- 
n vev, grands OTztoG eorge 
ILhas married the prin- 
cess Charlotte, daugh- 
ter to the prince of 
Meckienburgh-Strditz. 

Hei? a merchant 



Le Paradis fiei'du de Mil- 

tr^i est un beau po'eme. 

E.Ue me x^c^'iwvcc ainitie. 

11 le fi\.pMr defilt- 
Parlez lui saivs dMain, 

Vai envie d'y aller. 

Elle merecut avec la plus 

grande ami tie. ^^ 
JI le lit par le depitTqu'il 

avoit pour elle. 
Elh^ lui parla avec le me- 

pris qu'il meritoit. 
l\ s'y soumit avec la plus 

grande patience* 
II est lege en chambre 

garnie. 
Vons le trouverez dans /a 

boite. 
Y a-^t-ii de I'encre dans h 

bouteille? 
En voici^dans /'ecritoire. 

Paris est la ville capitala 
de France. 

II demeure a Paris, -vilk 
capitale de France. 

Londres est la ville capi- 
tale d'Angleterre, 

II es't ne a Londres, vUte 
capitale d'Angleterre. 

George trois, roi d'Angle- 
terre & ^.toez^rd'Hano- 
\ x^y petit f da de George 
second, a epouse la 
princesse Charlotte,y^//(2 
du prince de Mecklen- 
bourg-Strelitz. 

II est m.archand, ou c'*est 
"n m8.rchand. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



169 



He is a physician. 
She is a milliner. 

He is the merchant ivhoin 
you look for. 

He is the physician whom 
you ask for. 

He is the most upright 
merchant. 

He is the skilfullest physi- 
cian. 

She is the most accustom- 
ed milliner. 

[lS.]Give me some bread, 
some meat, some wine, 
some beer, 5cc. 

Bring some salt, pepper, 
mustard, &c. 

There is wine and waters 

Do you choose beer or ci- 
der ? 

Bread and water are suf- 
ficient for him* 

You must lay this fruit in 
straw. 

Lend me some paper and 
ink. 

Have you thread or silk ? 

Mend my stockings with 

cotton. 
I spent my money in ware. 

This thread is like silk. 
{18.1 He compares this 

stuff to velvet. 
She will not trust >such 

corrupted men. 

This cider is hke wine. 
A fine discourse often dis- 
pleases ignorant people. 



II est medecin, ou c^est un 

medecin. 
Elle est coiffeuse, ou c'est 

une coiffeuse. 
II est le marchand que 

vous cherchez. 
II est le medecin que vous 

demandez. 
II est le marchand le plus 

integre. 
II est le medecin le plus 

expert. 
Elle est la coiffeuse laplus 

achaland^e. 
Donnez-moi dupSLm^dela 

viande, du vin, de la 

biere, 6cc. 
Apportez du sel, du poi- 

vre, de la moutarde,6cc. 
Voila du vin & de Z'eau. 
Souhaitez-vous dela biere 

on du cidre ? 
Du pain & del'ea.n lui suf- 

fisent. 
II faut mettre ce friiit 

dans dela paille. 
Pretez moi c??^ papier 8c 

de /'en ere- ^ 
Avez-vous du fil, ou de /e 

soie ? 
Raccommodez mes bas 

Si\ec du CO ton. 
i'ai employe mon argent 

a de la marchandise. 
Ce fil ressemble«^e /asoie^ 
li compare cette etoffe cL 

du velours. 
Elle ne veut pas se fier a 

des hommes si corrom- 

pus. I^vin. 

Ce cidre resemble a du 
Un beau discours deplait 

souvent a des ignorans» 



170 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Give me some apples, 

pears, oranges, nuts, 

8cc. 
[19.] There are very fine 

flowers. 
I have bought fine lace. 
To write well, one must 

make use of good paper, 

ink, and pens. 

Here are some fine ladies. 

There are some fine hous- 
es and streets in Lon- 
don. 

This lord has fine lands 
and gardens. 

Th s lady has a great es- 
tate. 

This writingmaster makes 
fine letters. 

Fredrick II. king of Prus- 
sia, took a particular 
delight in having tall 
soldiers. 

His brother applies him- 
self to the belles-lettres. 

I know people of wit. 

I saw last week great 
lords in the park. 

[20.]*^ child ought to pbey 
his father and mother. 

^ king ought to be the fa- 
ther of his people 

It is a thing unheard of. 

It is an uncommon friend- 
ship, 

c^ prudent man ought to 
know how to keep a se- 
cret 



Donnez-moi des pommes, 

des poires) des oranges, 

des noix, &c. 
Voila de tres belles fleurs. 
Ltelle. 
J^ai achete de belle den- 
Pour bien^crire, illaut se 

servir debon papier, de 

bonne encre, & de bon- 
nes plumes. [les. 
Voici de belles demoisel- 
l\y B.de belles maisons & 

de belles rues dans Lon- 

dres. 
Ce seigneur ai/ebelles ter- 

res 8c de beaux jardins. 
Cette dame ^de grands 

bkns. 
Ce maitre a ecrire forme 

de belles-lettres. 
Frederick second, rqi de 

Prusse,prenoit un plaisir 

particulier a avoir de 

grands sold ats. 
Son frere s'applique aux 

belles-lettres. 
Je connois des beaux-es- 

prits. 
Je vis la semaine passee 

des grands seigneurs 

dans le Pare. 
Un enfant doit ob^ir a son 

pere & a sa mere. 
Un roi doit etre /ep^re de 

son peuple. 
C'est une chose inouVe 
G'est une rare amitic. 

Un homme prudent, ou /' 
homme prudent, doit 
savoir garder un secret 



The two last observations have been suflBcienUy 
exemplified in all the foregoing examples. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 171 

CHAPTER 11. 

Rules and Observations upon JSTotms, 

1. rpWO substantives coming together in Engli^i, 
JL and signifying different things, without a com- 
ma between them ; that expressed by of'm English 
is put in the second case in French : as, the top qf^ 
the mountain ; le sommet de la montagne. 

When of\% not expressed, the last must be the first 
case in French, and placed at the beginning : as, my 
father*s house ; la maison de monfiere- Likewise, in 
the English compound words, the first in English is 
commonly the second in French : as, a sea-fiort ; un 
port de mer. 

, 2. Adjectives follow the same gender and number 
as their substantives : as, a good book ; une bon livre : 
a good pen ; une bonne /ilume : good books ; c/ebons 
iivres : good pens ; de bonnes filumes. 

Except,' — first, y^M, late, deceased, before the article or pro- 
noun, «w, bare, before tBte, piecls,jambe$, &c. demi, half, be- 
fore its substantive — Secondly, taut, followed by an articlej, or 
by an adjective, ending with an e mute in its masculine gender, 
betore the word gens, which is feminine ; as, all people ot pro- 
bity : tous les gens de probity ; aH honest people ; tous le» 
honndtes gens. But if the word tout be either immediately 
followed by gens, or if ge?is be preceded by an adjective, not 
ending with an e mute in its masculine, then the word tout 
follows the rule, and is put in the femininfe ;* as, all old peo- 
ple : toutes les viejlles gens—- Thirdly, adjectives following 
gens i as, they are polite people ; ce sont des gens polis. 

3. When two or more substantives of dififerent gen- 
ders, and not separated by a disjunction, are the first 
case of the verb Stre^ the adjective, or participle that 
follows, ought to be in the masculine plural • as, the 
trunk, the closet, and the room, are open ; le coffrc:, 
le cabinet y 1st la chambre sent ouverts. 

4. Two or more substantives of different genders, 
immediately followed by an adjective or participles 
require commonly that the adjective, or participle, 
should agree in gender and number with the last sut^ 

'^ The Fbbkch AcjlPEHt. 



1T2 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

stantive : as, she found the trunk, the closet, and the 
room open ; etie trouva le coffrCy le cabinet^ i3> la 
chambre ouverte. 

Except vhen an adjective, or a participle past, im- 
plies an union, or a collection; such z,%^ joint ^iinUr^- 
tcni : as, the children, father, and naother united or 
joined together ; les cnfansy lefiere^ l^la mere r^unh 
on joints ensemble, 

5. Adjectives are put in French after their sub- 
stantives. 

6. Some adjectives are put before their substan- 
tives ; as, beau^ bond^ grand^ gros, jeune^ mauvais» 
mechant-, meilleur, petit, vieujc. 

There are some adjectives whieh are to be placed some- 
times before, and sometimes after their substantives. See 
page S5. 

7. Obs. Adjectives of number are placed before 
their substantives ; except when they are used as a 
surname, without an article: as, Charles /^remzer, 
Jaques second, George trois- 

8. Some adjectives govern the following noun in the 
second case, that is, require the preposition de be- 
fore it: Such are adjectives signifying desire* know- 
ledge, remembrance, ignor once, j or getting^ care^fear^ 
guilt, fulness, emfitiness, plenty, want, Sec. 

9. Some adjectives govern the following noun in 
the third case, that is, require the preposition a be-^ 
fpre it ; such ace adjectives signifying sitbmission,rC' 
lation, pleasure, or displeasure, due resistance, diffi- 
culty, likeness y inclination f aptness, fitness, advaji" 
tage, profit, 6cc. 

10. Adjectives signifying dimension: as, long, 
thick, high, deep, big, wide, or broad, which come 
after the word of measure in English, come before it 
in French, and are followed by the preposition de : 
as, a window three feet broad ; uneftnetre large de 
trois pieds. Or^ which is mere generally used, the 
Jidjectjve is turned into its substantive with the word 
of measure before it ; in this case the word of mea- 
sure, or dimension, is preceded by the preposition de: 
as unefenetre de trois pieds de largcur. When in 
this construction the verb to be, happens to precede 
the word of measure or cjinnension, it is commonly 



?:rench tongue. 



1?'; 



changed into the verb avoir, and the preposition de^ 
•which is before the quantity of measure, is left out i 
as, unejhtetre qui a trois Jiieds de largeur ; a win- 
dow which is three feet broad. 

Rules and Observations uficn JVouns exemfilijied for 
the Scholar's Practice. 



[1.] The love of life is na- 
tural to men. 

The study of languages 
is very entertaining. 

Here is my father's house. 

I saw the king's horses. 
Have you not seen the 

king's fialace P 
The queen's apartments 

are very fine. 
It Is my brother's book. 
She wears a straw-\i^X 

with a &i/^- riband. 

Is the chamber door shut ? 

We passed over London- 
bridge to go to Green- 
wich. 

I bought a fine silver-xin- 
kard. 

He is gone to his country' 
house. 

[2.] He spoke to her bare- 
headed. 

He goes dare -footed, bare- 
legged. 

The late queen was an ac- 
complished woman* 

I shall go cut in half an 

hour. 
It is half an hour past one. 
All people of honor, 

P 



L'amour de la vie, est na- 

turel aux hommes^ 
L'etude des langues est 

tres amusante- 
Voici la maison de mon 

pere. 
J'ai vu les chevaitx du roi» 
N' avez-vous pas vu k 

fialais du roi ? 
JLes apartemens de la 

reine sont tres beaux- 
C'est le livre6e mon frere. 
Elle porte un chapeau de 

Jiaiile avec un ruban de 

sote. 
La porte de la ehambre 

est elle fermee ? 
Nous passames sur le pont 

deJLondres, pour alier a 

Greenwich. 
Pai achete un beau pot 

d' argent, 
II est alle a sa maison de 

camjiagne, 
II lui parla nu tete ou tete 

niiC' 
II va 72^-pied3,72w-jambes, 

ou il va les pieds nu^^ 

les jambesTzwe-*. 
Feu la reine, oa la feue 

reine, ^toit une fern me 

accomplie. 
Je sortirai dans wVi^demi^ 

heure. 
II est une heure & dcmie^ 
Tons les gens d'honncurv 



174 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



It is the opinion of all peo- 
ple of probity. 

All honest people have 
blamed him. 

Ahnost all young people 
Hke play. 

All sorts of people do for 
him. 

All old people disapprov- 
ed of It. 

He withdrew from all the 
bad people of his neigh- 
bourhood. 

They are /io/fr<? people. 

They are prudent people. 

You must not trust m^2«- 
creec people- 

Our maid and man-ser- 
vant are very diligent. 

His brother and cousin 
are very idle. 

The window and the door 
are o/ien. 

Her body and mind are 
Vf^Wframcd. 

He tound beauty, youth, 
riches,w!sdom,and even 
virt'ae united in her per- 
son. 

[3.] My l^^ather and mother 

■di<c sick. 
My brother and sister 

have caugnt cold. 
[4.] Her eyes, mouth and 

nt;ck, are vo^vy firetty. 
She sings with a charmmg 

and delicate air. 

Why do you leave the 
windows and the door 
open ? 

He had his eyes and 
mouth opcJi, 



C'est i'opinion de torn les 

gens de probite. 
Tous les honnetes gens 

Font blame. 
Presque tous * les jeunes- 

gens aiment le jeu- 
II s-accommode de toutes 

sortes de gens, 
Toutes to vieilles eens 

Font desapprouve. 
11 se retira de toutes les 

mauvaises gens de son 

voisinage* 
Ce sont des gensftoUs. 
Cesont des gens prudens, 
II ne faut pas vous fier d 

des gens indiscrets^ 
Notre servante 6c notre 

valet sont t res diligens. 
Son frere $c son cousin sont 

paresseux. 
La fenetre 6c la porte sont 

Oliver tes' 
Elle a le corps 8c Tesprit 

hienfaits* 
II trouva la beaute, la 

jeunesse, les rlchesses, 

la sagesse. 6c memela 

vertu reunies dans sa 

pers^mne. 
Monpere6cma mere sont 

matadcs, 
Mon frere 6c ma soeur sent 

enrhumesi 
Ellc a ies yeux, la bouche, 

6c la gorge, ties belle. 
Elle chante avec un goilt 

6c une d^licatesse c/2ar« 

7nante, 
Pourquoi laissez-vous les 

fen^tres 6c la porte ou- 

verte ? 
II avoit les yeux 6v la bn'4 - 

che CUV erf r. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



1?'^ 



it is exceedingly hot and 
foggy in that country. 

The children, father, and 
mother united. 

HeaUh, honours, and for- 
tune,;omec/ together,are 
not able to satbfy thig 
heart of man. [box* 

[5] I have ^ green snuff- 

The English tongue is co- 
pious, strong ySLiid harmo- 
nious. 

The French tongue is ve» 

' ry smooth* 

She is a handsome ^ nchy 
and virtuous woman. 

Give me a clean shirtc 

A black hat, a green suit. 

white stockings, red 

shoes. 
There is a w^vyjine coachp 
He follows the English 

fashion. 
Sing an Italian air. 
People enjoy fiure air in 

France. 
Why do not you wear your 

black stockings? 
She is a charming woman. 

She reprimanded him se- 
verely. 

[.6] He is a naughty boy- 
Bad weather is tiresome 

to me. 
Hedwellsin 2ilargc house. 

London is a fine city. 



II fait dans ce pays- la des 

chaleurs et des brouij- 

lards excessifs, 
Les epfans, le pere, et la 

mere rdunis. 
La sante, les honneurs, 6c 

la foYiune Joints ensemV 

ble,ne peuventsatisfaire 

le cceur de Thomme. 
J'aiAine tabatiere verte. 
La langue Angloise est co-^ 

pAcuse^ forte & har?noni'^ 

euse, * 
La langue Frangaise^^t 

tres douce, 
C'est une fern me belle^ 

riche, et utrtucuse, 
Donnez-moi une chemise 

blanche. 
Un chapeau noir^ un habi'c 

ven^ des has blancs^ de3 

scullers rouges, [gue^ 
Voila un carrosse magnifi^ 
II suit la mode ,dngloise* 

Chantez un air Italien 
On jouit cl'un air pi.r eu 

France. 
Pourquoi ne portez-vous 

pas vosbas nrArs, 
C'est une ^emme char inanfe 
C'estune c kar7n ani e fenim& 
Eile iui a fait de sSver(^^ 
li^primandes, ou des re- 
prim andes severes. 
C*est un mechant gar^oi>= 
Le mauvais temps m 'en- 
nui e- 
II demeure dans untr 

grande maison. 
Londres est xm^bc'k vilU'- 



w&- 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



He is a man of distinguish- 
ed merit. 

^e is ^ tall fair man- 

[7] ThQ/rst man was the 
Jir St sinner. 

George III. king of Eng- 
land, and Louis XVI. 
king of France. 

[8] i am contented with 
my condition. 

It is a praise- worthy ac- 
tion. 

He is unworthy of youF 
friendship. 

She is incapable of a lie. 

Few people are satisfied 

with their fortune, 
lam freedom fear and 

danger. 
I was overjoyed at that 

newsr 
She is not contented with 

her maid. 
He is discontented mch 

his wife. 
He is accused cfmurdero 
He was loadedwzMp raises 
They are greedy c/ glory 

and riches. 
I am tired of your dis- 

coarses. 
They are enranged at his 

success. 
He is deep in debt. 
[9 J That is gaod for 

something. 
It is a fruit hurtful to 

health. 
He i. too much addicted 

to study. 
She is untity^r any thing. 



C'est un homme d'an 

grand merite. [6lond> 
C'est un grand homme 
Lt^ premier homme fut le 

premier pecheur. 
George TroiSt roi d'An- 

gleterre, dc Louis Seize^ 

roi de France, 
Je suis content de ma con- 
dition. 
C'est une action digne de 

louanges. 
II est indigneflfe* votre ami- 

tie. 
Elle est hicapablec/e men- 

s^nge. 
Feu de gens sont contens 

de leur fortune. 
Je suis exempt de ci^ainte 

& de danger. 
Je fus ravi de cette nou- 

velle. 
Elle n'estpas contente de 

sa servante. 
II est m^content de sa 

femme. 
II est accuse de meurtre.^ 
II fut comble de louanges. 
lis sont avidescf^ gloire 6c 

<:/^ richesses» J 

Je suis las eft vos discoursl, 

Ilssont enrages c/e son suc-i 

ces. 
li est charge de dettes. 
Cela est bon a queique 

chose. 
C'est un fruit nuislble a la 

sante. 
li est trop adonn^a I'etude 

Elle n'est propre a rien> ' 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



17^^ 



You are insensible to all 

the remonstrances of 

%)ur friends. 
He is fitybr any thing- 
She is not to be compared 

with, you. 
That is conformable to 

truth. 
Yours is like mine* 

1 am ready Jbr your or- 
ders. 
I am very sensible of cold. 

That cloth is like yours. 

[10.] A carpet six yards 
long and two ivide. 



Ourhouse is forty fathoms 
high, and the foundation 
is two fathoms dee/i. 

I'his lawn is a yard mde, 

A wall two feet thick* 



A street ten fathohis wide 



Our garden is a hundred 

feet long. 
That river is forty feet 

deep. 
A well forty feet deefi- 

There are fine walks inSt* 
James's Park ; they are 
at least four hundred 
fathoms long. 



Vous etes insensible r^ 

toutes les remontrance^ 

de vos amis. 
11 est propre d tout- 
Elle n*est pas comparable 

d vous. 
Cela est conforme a la 

verite. 
Le votre est seroblable aiii 

mien* 
Je suis pret d vos ordresi 

Je suis tres sensible ai^. 
Jroid. 

Ce drap est pareil ate 
votre. 

Un tapis long de six ver- 
ges, & large de deux 5 
ou un tapis de six ver- 
ges de longueuTy & de^ 
deux de largeur. 

Notre maison a quarante 
toises de hauteur & les 
fondemens out deu3C 
toises de profondeur. 

Ce hnon a une verge de 
largeur* 

Une muraille, ^paisse de 
^evix pieds, ou une mu- 
raille de deux pieds d* 
efiaisseu7\ 

Une rue large c/edix toises 
ou une rue de dix toises 
dt larg^ur, 

Notre jardin a cent pieds 
dt longueur. 

Cette riviere a quarante 
pieds de profondeur. 

Un puits d^qoarante pieda 
de profondeur. 

II y a de belles allees dans 
le Pare de St. James ; 
elles ont au moins quat^ 
cens toises c/tf longueur. 



1T3 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Have you ever seen a man Avez-vous jamais va un 
eight feet high ? homme de huit pieds dc 

hauteur ? 
A book, two inched thkk, Un livre c/e deux pouce» 
d^ ^paisseuT* 



CHAPTER in. 
MULES AJSTD OBSERVATIOJ^S UPOJ^PRO" 

SECTION I. 

Pergonal Pronouns, 

I. 1 Governing personal pronoun, in the first case, 
1* must always be put before a verb which ha& 

no other noun, or pronoun, for a first case: as,/ 

speak ; jefiavle^ 6cc. 

Except the second person singular? and the first 

and second person plural of the imperative mood, 

which a|?e used without a pronoun personal. 

2. Obs. There are some places where th« pronoun person- 
al is put after the V'erb ; when in the middle of a sentence 
they are joined like a parenthesis, with these seven verbs : 
dirty to say ; r^pondre, to answer ; r^pUguer, to reply j ve- 
par civ, to answer again ; continuer, to continue: poursuvprc^ 
to pursue ; and s^icrier, to cry oui— as, I hayanone^^an^wer^ 
ed he;^ je n'en ai point, r^pondit4L 

Except when one of these verbs is preceded by the con« 
junction mtds^ and some others followed by gae, signifying 
that, asr but yoa say that you are sick, maia V9us dites que 
YOus dtes malade. But when que signifies -what, then the pro- 
noun takes again its pl^e aft^r the verb, as, but you say, Tuhat 
avail riches without health I mais^ dites V9us, que servent les 
richesses sans la sant^ ? 

3. Obs. The personal pronoun must be put after these words, 
du8siez-vous, though you should ; fussiez-vous, thsugh you 
were ; puisaiez, ovpussiez-vous, may you ; or after any other 
such expressions, which expresses what grammarians call the 
optative mood, as, though you were rich, f ussiez-voos r«c^e i 
though you should write to^him, dussiez-vous lui ^crire; may 
y$)u see him in good health, puissiez-vous le voirenbonne santi. 

4. Obs. It is more elegant to put the personal pronoun, even 
followed by que signifying that, after the verb preceded by one: 
of these conjunctions ; aussi, but then;/>tfM^etre, perhaps ; dii 
moins,au 77Ioj/j.s, at least; en vain, in vain; k peine, scarcely, &c- 
asf, but then he reccivcdliis reward',augBir^pw«-iUa recompense. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 179 

5. The personal pronoun is always put after 
the verb in simple tenses, in an interrogation, either 
affirn-ative or negative : as, do you eat ? mangez- 
vous ? do you not write ? TzVmx'fz-vous pas .^ In 
compound tenses it is put immediately after the 
auxiliary, either in an afBrniative or negative ques- 
tion: as, did yon eat? avez-von^ mang€? did not you 
write ? n^aveZ'V ous pas ecrit ? 

6. Obs. When, in an interrogation, we raalce use of a verb 
of the first conjugation, as the verb, in sqtjh a case, ending with 
an e mute, would make an harsh sound with the following 
pronounce, we put an acute accent upon %he last e of the 
verb ; as, do I speak ? parl^-^e ? and not parle-je ? 

However, in this instance, I would adyise to make use of 
the easy way of asking a question by these words, e^t ce que^ as 
it must be done for some other verbs ; as, do I sU f,> e 

que^'e dors ? In this case the pronoun is pui bef- 

7. When a verb, interrogatively used, ^ 
vowel, we always put a^ between the vc. 
pronoun, as in the following example : do^s ii: 1. 
man^<?-^/-z7 .? has she ^aten ? a-t-dle mangi ? 

8. Obs. What we have said in the second rule, must be 
said likewise, when after those verbs comes another noun 
instead of a pronoun ; as, all men are fools, says Boileau, 
tou3 les horomes sont fous, dit Bmkau* 

The same is to be said, when ow^rfe is joined to chone to 
show the mere (fefference between two-objects; as, to under- 
stand French is another thing than to speak it; autre chose 
est de comprendre le Frangois, autre chose est de leparler. 

Likewise after ^ese pronouns, se,.gue^ le, se, que, it is some- 
times more el^ant to put the noun after the verb ; as, at 
first a large parlour presented itself before our eyes ; d^abord 
se pr^senia devant nous \m grand salon. What reason dic- 
tates, is not always tru<0 ; *ce que dicte la raison, n^es^t pas 
tmjoura vraU It is thus the parUameni would have it. C'esj^ 
cinsi que le nauka le parlement. 

9. A governing personal pronoun is superfluous 
•when any noun whatsoever is the first case of a verb : 
as, George III. is a good king ; George III. est un hon 
TDh But in an interrogation, besides the noun, we 
put the pronoun after the verb : as, does your bro^ 
ther write ^ -votrefrere ^crit-W ? 

Except when in asking a question we make use g£ 
bis idiom, est-ce-gue j in this case the pronoun islefe 



S.aa A GRAMMAR OF THE 

out, asm the foregoing example ; est ce que votre, 
frere ecrit ? 

10. Personal pronouns of the first and second per- 
son plural are commonly put before the verb, if the 
verb has for its nominative several personal pronouns 
or only one personal pronoun, in the first or second 
person of either number, joined with one or more 
Souns : as, vou and I are idle ; voiis & moinous som- 
mes fiaresseux ; vour brother and I were present, 
)votrefrere & moi nous etiouB prisms. ^ ^ 

Except when theri? is a noun substantive jomed 
'With toi or elle^ the personal pronoun is left out, and 
the verb is put in the third person plural : as. your 
brother and he are idie,'yo^r£?/r^?r&lui sont fiafesseux. 

11. Governed personal pronouns are put beiore 
the verb in French, though after it in English : as, he 
told to me ; it me diU Foreij^jners should attend to 
ihis rule, against which they are very apt to offend. 

Except ist. in the second person singular, and first 
and second plural of the imperative, in an affirma- 
tion : as, tell mb, tfzV(?s-moi~0bserve, that me is aU 
•ways put instead of moU when it comes before the 
Verb, unless it be separated from the verb by a con- 
innction • as, it is to me he gives it : c'est a moi qu tl 
% donne ; 2clly, after the verb etre, when it signifies 
to belong to, and after the verb sefier to trust : as, you 
^rust to me, vous vous fiez a moi : this house belongs to 
me ; cette malson ei^ a moi % 3dly, after the verbs son- 
ger, fienser, fiarler, when the last signifies ~^o rfzrec?. 
'one's discourse to, and a very few others, 

12 The supplying pronouns le, la, and tes^ are al- 
ways put before the verbs by which rHev are govern- 
jed, and are placr d pefore lui and leur: as, you give 
f,hem to Mm ; vous les lui donnez : whereas they are 
put aner the other personal pronouns ; as I give it to 
youije\Q^^\edonne; except in the imperative mood m 
affi: -i nive sentences: aSp give ir me ; donnez le moi« 

I3> Th^ supplying pronouns, en and y are also 
Maced before the verb, and are put r\fte.r all other 
personal pvow)\m^. nd en after y : as, I^have sent 
cWie to them thith^ ; je iair y m ai envw^' 



FRENCH TONGUEc 181 

Bxcept when^ andwioi meet together in these<;0Rd person of 
the imperative mood affirmatively used, y is put before moi i 
as, carry me thither ; meneZ'y moi. 

N. IVThe three last observations, with their exceptions, are 
fully exemplified in their proper places, aad iu the supplying 
pronouns. 

1 4 I^y which some wrongly call a personal pronoun in the 
following examples, is commonly used before adjectives, where 
the word tking^ is understood ; as, it is glorious to die for one's 
country ; U est gloneux de mourir poursa patrie. If the ad- 
jective makes a complete sense, ce is commonly used ; as, it 
as true, c^est vrai. 

// is likewise used when we speak of the time and hour; as, 
it is eleven o'clock ; it est onze heures : it is bad weather 5 iC 
iait raauvais temps. 

Except, when a question is asked with ce/ as, quelle heure 
est cela ? the ansv/er is, c^est une ijenre. Cs js commonly used 
in the beginning of a sentence, before a substantive ; as, -it 15 a 
pity, c^est dommage. 

15. //, elle^ singular, ilsy ellcs^ plural^ or ce are in- 
diiferenlly used ; Ist, before substantives exaresaine; 
the sex, quality, profession, or trade of a person : a*. 
he is a merchant ; il est marchand^ or c'est un j^iar- 
Chanel ; 2dly, before names of nations : as, they art. 
Frenchmen ; ils sont Frangois^ or ce sent des Fran- 
jgois. Observe, that, in these two foregoing in- 
stances, no article is put before the substantive af- 
ter the personal pronouns, yV, tii^% £cc. 

16. Personal pronouns, whether conjunctli^e or dis- 
junctive? in their oblique cases, are always to be re- 
peated : as, I say and declare to you^ je vqus dis b 
vous declare : take the books ami read them ; firaicz 
ies livresy ^ les listz or lise-z leso 

17. Personal pronouns are repeated before each 
verb: 1st, when they are followed by verbs in differ- 
ent tenses, as, I say, and shall always say ; je dis &c 
je dirai toiijoitrs : 2dly, when we pass from a nega- 
tion to an affirmation, or from an atTirmation to a ne- 
gation : Sdly, after the conjunctions viais^ 7ncme, cc- 
Jtendant, iieanrnoins, nonobstant^ malgrt\ tout cela^ 
aussU ainsu oUy 6cc. but when the personal pronouns 
belong to the same tense and person, they are com- 
monly not repeated : as, I say and declare ; jcc/is o 
declare. Observe here that the pronoun on is al ways 
repeated: as, people speak and act^ on/>ar/e iJf on cgit. 

■Q 



182 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

18 The pronouns lui, eux, elle, elles^ leur, are used 
at the end of a sentc ce, only wlien we are speaking 
of persons : as, is it your brother? It is; Est-ce vo- 
ire ft ere? C'est'lui. When we are speaking of in- 
animate things, we make use of the pronouns le, la^ 
les : as, is it your hat ? Yes, it is. M^t ce la voire 
chafienu ? Ouu ce VesU and not, c'est ]ui.* 

19. Obs The foregoing pronouns /m, eux, elie, leur, when vre 
tire speaking ot inanimate things, are sometimes used in the 
tniddle of a sentence,f sometimes not : there is no otlier rule 
for it than custom, and this can be learned only by use ; for, 
speakmg of a sword, I may say , je lui doia la vie, I am indebted 
to it for my iile 5 and yet we must say, speaking of the same 
sword, pendez y cetle cerise, hang that cherry to it ; not pen- 
dez-Ztti. 

20. //, Us ; elht tlles^ in the beginning of a sentence, 
are used, speaking even of inanimate things: as, 
when sneaking of a housej I say, elle est belle, 

21. LuU teur^ elley 8cc. governed by a preposition, 
are never used, speaking of irratit»nal and inanimate 
things ; as, you see that house, he lives over against 
it ; vous voyrz cctte maison, il demcure vts-d-vi^^ and 
not vis d'Vis d'eile. 

In this case the prepositions become adverbs ; but observe, 
that some prepositions never, or very sehjom, become adverbsj 
as, avec, with, sans, without, kc, therefore in this, or the hke 
expressions (I cannot do without it, he came with it,) give an- 
other turn to the sentence, je ne puis m 'en paaser,il I'a apporte. 

It may be observed th'Atapres and avec are sometimes follow- 
ed by Im^ eux, elle ov eiles; as, wlien the river overflows, it car- 
ries every thing away with it ; lorsque eette riviere sedeborde, 
elle entraine tout upres elle'; but as such sentences are as cood 
tvithout avec elle, and apris elle^ as with it, and it very often 
Siappeiis that we cannot raake use of these expressions, it is 
"hest to avoiti them by omittms? tisem absolutely, as in the fore- 
going example, where lorsque cette riviere se deborde, elle en- 
traine tout, is as good French without apne-'> e/V/as with it. 

22. Obs.Xm', e'le. and soi, at the end of a sentence, are hot to 
he usetl indifferently. Soi is very seldom used in the pluraU ■ 
When we speak of things in the masculine gender, soi, is used ; 

* See the third Observation upon supplying pronouns, and 
tl?e examples thereon. Section VI. N. 3. 

f When thin;;s are personified, or deified : as, glory, victory, 
virtue, &c. or when we make use of personal phrases, i. f 
T/hieh are applied only to persons, Mestaut. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



183 



as, the loadstone attracts iron: I'aimant attirp 1e fer k sou 
KlU mime may be used in the feminine : as, vi- uie is lovely 
by ttse-f; la vertu est aimable en elle me me. 

Speaking ot persons in a:eneral soi is to be used: as, one 
ought not to speak of one^s self, but with i»reat modesty ; on 
ne doit parler de soi, qu'avec heaueoup de noodestie. When 
-we s])eak ol' a particular person, lui and elle are used instead 
of soi ; as, thai man speaks of nobod) , but himself,- cet 
hoHirae ne parle que de lui. 

N. B. JVUme is o.ten elegantl v put after lui, eUe,eux, soi, &c. 
and even it must be put after, when it follows a reflected verb. 

Personal Pronouns exemplified for the Scholar^ s 
Practice^ 



[1] I am learning my les- 

SCfTj. 

He is writitig his exercisC' 

She is enr^broidering. 

We have a holiday. 

You are lazy. 

They make a noise, [try. 

Mij mother is in the coun- 

She ^s gone out. 

[2.] I have none, said he* 

But he ansvjrered that he 

had not seen it. 
But she replied, why do 

you concern yourself 

about it ? 
[3.] Though you should 

blame me. 
Though you were still 

more snrprised. 
[4.] Perha/18 he will say 

that he tound it. 
[5.J Have you learnt your 

lesson ^ 
[6.1 DoIteUa lie? 
[7.J Has he not been an- 
gry with me ? 
Has she not been in the 

country ? 
Does she embroider ? 



J*apprendsma le^on. 

Il6cr\t son theme. 
£lle brode. 
JVbtis avons conc;e. 
Fous etes paress^ux. 
lis font Hu bruit. [ -ne. 
Ma mere est a la campa- 
Elle est sort' . 
Je n'en a? point, dn-27 
Mais il repondit, qu'A qe 

I'avoit pas vu 
Mais, repliqna-t-e//e, de 

quoi vous melez-vous ? 

Dussiez-T^ows me blamer. 

Fussiez-T^ows encore plus 
^nrpr s. 

Peut-etre dira t i/quM I'a 
trnuve, 

Avez-vous appris votr« 
l«^con. 

Est-ce qu€]Q mens ? 

]S'a-/f-i/ pas ete fache cen- 
tre iViOi ? 

]Si'a-^e//^pas ete a la cam- 
pa^op. 

Erode-?-e//<? ^ 



n4~ 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



[^•] ^s your sister at 

home? 
iDoesyourbrother improve 

in the French tongue I 
Is your siste? sick ? 

[10.] You and I are good 

friends. 
She and I went together to 

the Park. 
My brother and I go to 

the play this evening. 
He and my brother are 

partners. 
^le and her sister learn 

French. 
[11.] She told 7ne that she 

had written to kirn* 
Do not fall violently ufion 

them. 
I gave Mm the book which 

you sent 77ie. 
1-shali tell Mm, 
Have you promised M?n ? 
1 liav% not promised htr. 
When vv'^ill you send to 
Give?7ze. , . [Mf7i? 

Bring me. 
Forgive /^i;??. 
Speak to her. 
He has promise*! it to me. 
Do not confide in Mm, 
You may confide in me. 
This book is mine. 
This thimble is not yours. 
Do not think of him any 

more. 
I am speaking fo //fm, and 

not to you. 
You gave it to me, him ? 
[12.] Will you give it to 
There are fine oranges ; 

will you sell themto her? 



Votre sceur est-elle aii 

logis ?" 
Votre frere fait-z/des pro- 

gres dans le Francois .^ 
Votre sceur est-eiie ma-- 

lade? 
Vous & moi nous sommes 

bonsamis. 
Elle & moi nous allames^ 

ensemble au Pare 
Mon frere & itioiiious al- 
iens ce sojr ala comedieo 
Lui 6c monj^ere sont asso- 

cies. 
£lk 6v sa seur appren- 

nent le Francois. 
Elle M'a dit qu'eile M 

avoit ecrit* 
Ne leur faites pas de vioj 

lence- 
le hii ai donne le livre que^ 

vous yw'avez envoye. 
Jetedirai. 

Zz« avez-vous promis ^ 
Je ne te" ai pas promis. 
Quand hii enverr ez-vous I 
Donne z-/M?i. 
Apportez-??zoi 
Pardonnes"/2^2. 
Parlez-/2/i. [mlsi 

C*est a moi qu'il Pa pro- 
Ne vous fiez pas a iui, 
Vous pouvez vous fier a 
Ce livre .est a moi. [moio 
Ce de n'est pas a vous. 
Ne songez plus d luu 

C'est a lui que je parle> 2c 

non pas a vous, 
Vous meV^vez donne. 
Le lui donnerez-vnus .•* 
Voila de belles oranges : 

les ha vendrez-Yous i^ 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



18^ 



.Show me your letter ; 

when will you send it to 

her ? 
There is a fine book ; I 

%2iV^ittoh€r, 
When will you give it to 

us ? 
You had promised z^^o mt. 
Give it tome. 
Bring it to me. 
Show it to her. 
[13.1 Will you carry som^ 

to them thither ? 
I have sent some to them 

thither. 
I shall send some to you 

thither. 
When did you send some 

to him thither ? 
Why have you not carried 

some to her thither ? 
Carry me thither* 
Give me some. 
Do not carry me thither, 
[14] What o'clock is if? 
It is two o'clock. 
It is a quarter past twa 

It is half an hourpast two. 
It is three quarters past 

two. 
J^is very fine weather. 
It is gloomy. 
It is rainy weather. 
It is time to rise. 
It is hot ; it h cold- 
// is my book. 
Ifi is my handkerchief. 
It is a fine house. 
They are your pens. 
7%ev are voting ladies. 

Q2 



Montrez-mol votre lettre; 

quand la lui enverrez- 

vons ? f 
Yoilk un beau livre : je k 

lui ai donn^i 
Quand nous le donnerez- 

vous.** 
Vous meTsiVitz promis. 
Doimez le irwi, 
Apportez-/e mo/. 
M )ntre2-/e lui, 
'Li^nv-y-en porterez vous ?^ 

Je leur y emX envoye. 

Je vous y en enverrai, 

Quand lui y en avez-vous 

envoye. 
Pourquoi ne lui y en avez- ^ 

vous paji porte ? 
Menez y moi, 
Donne z-m'en, 
lSiem*y a)enez pas. 
Quelle heure est U P 
II est deux-heures. 
// est deux heures 8c uo 

quart. [mie. 

// est deux heures & de- 
// est trois heures moins 

un quart. , 

// fait fort beau temps. 
// fait sombre. 
II fait un temps pluvW:uX' 
// est temps de se lever. 
// fait chaud ; il I'ait froid. 
C'est mon livre. 
C'est mon mouchoir. 
C^i^une belle maison 
Ce sont vos plumes./ 
Ce sontdejeunes demof^ 

sdies. u 



W5 



A GR/1.A1MAR OF THE 



It is a pity. 

They are strange people. 

It is enough. ^ 

It is not too much. 

It was without design. 

It is in spite of him. 

[15] He ha. doctor. 

^ is a goldsmith. 

He is a learned man* 

They are idle. 

i^ is a merchant* 

They are Englishmei?^ 
Frenchmen, 

[ 1 6.] Ke loves ?/z^, and has 

a regard /or me. 
I have taken and kept itc 
I know and see he?- very 

often. lyou. 

He esteems and honours 
I saw and spoke to her, 
[ 17.1 They say and assure 

that— 
You have seen and will 

always see. 
He made his exercise; but 

he did Eot read his rules. 
^he speaks to him, though 

sh^ does not like him. 
[19.] Self-^ove bhnds us, 

it is the cause of the 

greatest part of our mis- 

lortunes. 
Those Bovvers want wa- 
ter ; give them some. 



C^est dommage. 

Ce sont d'etranges gens. 

C'd'c?^ assez. 

CJf n'est pas trop. 

Ce fut sans dessein. 

C'est malgre lui. 

//est docteur,ou c'est unt 

docteur- 
// est orfevre, ou c^est un 

orfevre. 
// est savant, ou c*est un 

savant homme. 
Us sont paresseux, ou ce 

sont des paresseux. 
II est negociant, ou c*€st 

un negociant. 
Ik sont Anglois, Frangois; 

ou ce sont des Anglois^* 

des Francois. 
II m'aime 6c me considere* 

Je /*ai pris 8c Tai garde. 
Je la connois 6c la vqis; 
tres souvent. [nore- 
II vous estime 6c -vous ho- 
le /'ai vue 6c ltd ai parle. 
Its disent ec assurent que— 

VouB avez vu 6c voiis ve;r- 

rez toiyours. 
//a fait Si;n theme; maisil 

n'a pas lu ses regies. 
Elle lui parle, eefiendant 

elle ne Taime pas. 
L'amour propre nous 

aveugle, c'est lui qui est 

la cause de la plupart 

de nos malheurs. 
Voila des fieurs qui ont 

besoin d'eau ; donnea- 

tor-en. 



FRENCH TONGUJi. 



[20.] I saw a fine garden; 
it is enamelled with a 
thousand line lowers. 
These shoes are too nar- 
row ; they hurt me. 
[21.] Do you know where 
the Exchange is? He 
lives opposite to it. 
Give me my book, 1 can- 
not do without it. 
[22.] A wise man is mas- 
ter of himself. 
We make our own happi- 
ness. 
A wise man mistrusts 

hbnself. 
She is too much conceited 

of herself 
We ought not to flatter 

ourselves. 
He only loves himself 
Falsehood is odious in it- 
self, [iron. 
The loadstone attracts 
One ought not to speak 
of one's self but with 
great modesty. ; 
That man speaks of no- 
body but himself 
l^s\\\^iO\\.m,yself 
She relies too much on 

hei'self 
They betray themselves* 
You hurt nobody but yoiu'- 
self 



J'ai vu un beau jardin ; il 
est emaille de mille bel- 
les fleurs. 

Ces souliers sont trop 
etroit ; ils me blesseiit. 

Saves-vous ou est la Hour** 
se ? i/demeurex^i5-d-ri?» 

Donnez-moi mon livre; 

je ne puis xa^en passer. 

Le sage est roaitre de soi> 

On fait sa f^licit^ soi-me. 

7ne' 
Lc sage se mefie de lid 

7neme. 
Elle a trop bonne opinion 

^elle-mime. 
On ne doit pas se fiattei^ 

soi-meme, 
n n'aime que lui-mSme, 
La faussete est odieuse en 

elle-mSme, 
L'ai m ant attire le f er a sci^ 
On ne doic parler de soi, 

qu'avec beancoup de 

modestie. 
Get homme ne parle que 

de lui-meme* 
Je le veux faire moi-vieme^ 
Elle sefietropaf//e-??2e7?2e. 
[jnemes. 
lis se trahissent tux- 
Vous ne faites tort qu'a 

V0JlS-7ntVl€:> 



188 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

SECTION IL 

Possessive Pronoim^\ 

1. THE conjunctive possessive pronouns come al- 
ways before the nouns to which they are joined ; as. 
It is my snufF-box; c'est ma tabatiere. In this case, 
mon^ toriy son, are used instead of ma, ta, sa, before 
feminine nouns beg:inning with a vowel or h mute, for 
the sweetness of sound : as, my sword ; mon efiee : 
thy :ioul ; ton ame : his friendship; son amitie, Absov- 
lute possessive pronouns are put after the noun with 
the definite article, le, la, les : as, le mie?i, la mienne. 

2. When sake signifies amour in French, the Eng- 
lish possessive pronoun is to be rendered into the 
French by the disjunctive personal pronoun r as, for 
your sake ; pour Vamour de vous, and not fiour votre 
amour. 

3. When the verb etre signfies to belong to, the Eng- 
lish possessive pronoun is rendered in French by the 
disjunctive personaLpronoun : as. thac house is mine ; 
cette inaison est a moi, and not est la mienne. But, when 
the particle ce is joined to the verb Stre, the possess- 
ive pronoun is commonly used : as, thrs is my house ; 
c^est ma maison : it is bis book, aj-id not yours ; c*est 
son liv re, i^ non pas \e voire 

4. The gender of possessive pronouns does not fol- 
low that of the person who speaks, or is spoken of, 
but agrees with the particular gender of every noun 
it is joined to : as, her father is dead ; son pere esS 
THort, 

5. The possessive conjunctive pronoun is always 
repeated before a substantive, and after a conjunc* 
tion : as, my brothers and sisters i mes/reres & nies 
scsiirs : hjs father and mother: son pere 6csam<?r<?. 

6. Le mien, le tien, le sien, Sec. in the masculine g -n- 
der and snigularnumber,sometimes signify one's duet 
as, we mast give every one his due ; ilfautrendre ^ 
chacun le sien. In the pjural nuaiber and masculine 
gender they sometimes signify one's relations: as, 
your and his relations ; les votres & les siens. 

7. His, its, theirs, dccare commonly rendered into 
French, by son, sa, ses, leurs : as, plants h>ive their 
properties ; ks planks ont i^uv^proprictcs. But, whCA 



FRENCH TONGUE. 189 

its^or their .belong to a substantive preceding, they are' 
commonly rendered into French by the supplying 
pronoun en : as, these plants are good, I know their 
qualities ; ces filantes sont bonnes^ j'en connoisjea 
qualiUs, This happens when the pronoun may be 
resolved into the substantive to which it relates* as in 
the foregoing example ; these plants are good, I 
know the qualities of these plants. 

8. The conjunctive possessive pronoun, with the 
particle de before it, is used instead of the abso- 
lute possessive pronoun on all such occasions : as, an. 
acquaintance of his ; une de ses connohsances ; a 
friend of mine : un de nr>es amist 

9. The conjunctive possessive pronoun is used when 
we call or answer to friends, relations, 6<:c. : as, come,, 
daughter ; veneZimsL/iile; yes^ brother; Qui monjrere* 

10. Obs. Conjunctive possessive pronouns coming, in Eng- 
lish, after some verbs not signifjing a distemper, are resolved 
into the conjunctive personal pronoun, at)d instead of the 
possessive pronoun, we put the definitive article : as, I have 
pared my nails ; je me suis rogne les ongles : he has cut my 
hair ; il m*a coupe 7^5 cheveux. 

11. Obs. Generally, when in a sentence, a noun or a person- 
al pronoun, sufficiently denote what thing it is } ou are speak- 
ing of, the possessive pronoun is omitted as useless, and re- 
solved into the definitive article : as, I have a pain in my teeth, 
m ray stomach, in my head, in my eyes, &c. j'ai mal ai/x dents, 
a/'estoraac, k la tete, aux yeux, &c. However, when a pain 
or distemper continues for some time upon us, we may say^ 
speaking to a person acquainted^ with it, wa jambe ne gueril 
pas : my leg does not heal ; mo?i bras me fait toujours mal : my 
arm pains me stilh This may likewise happen in a tew other 
instances. Generally the two last rules take place, when 
there IS a sort of e^uivofialioTi or amphibc!o§j%. 



190 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Possessive Pronouns exemplified for the Scholar% 

Practice' 
\X\ My house is larger Ma maison est plus 

than his. grande que la siennt , 

Have you seen my garden? Avcz-vous vu wzotz jardin? 
Come and see my flowers. Vevez voir mes fleurs. 
Where ts your book ? Ou est votre livre ? 

Shew nie T/oz^r books. Montrez-moi vos livres. 

Lend me your penknife. Pietez-moi-yorre'canif. 
Our school-iellows are J^os eompai^nons d^ecole 

playing In the street, jouent dans la rue. 

Her apro^j is quite black. Son tablier est tout noir, , 
Htr fan is broken. Son ^ventail est rompu. 

Give me my shoes, my Donnez-moi mes souliers, 
stockings, wz/ handker- mes bas, mon mouchoir, 
chief, viy shirt, and ?72t/ ma chemise,6cwow cha- 
bat. peau. 

Fowr stockings have holes Fo^ bas sont trou^s. 

in them. [pens? [plumes? 

V*^hat is become of his Que sent devenues ses 
How does your sister do? Comment se porte votre 

soeur ? 
You have my needle. Vous avez mon aiguille. 

Is that your hat ? Est cc la i;o^re/chapeau ? 

1 know your sentiments ; Je connois vos sentin«ens ', 
and vou are no stranger &; vous n'ignorez pas les 
to mu.e. miens. 

The Thames got out of i^5 La Tamise est sortie de' 
channel. son lit. {jnoi. 

[2] Do it for my sake. Faites le pour Tamour de 
1 will do it for your sake. Je le ferai pour Tamour de 

vous^ 
For her sake. Pour Tamour dV//e. 

For his sake. Pour I'amour de luh 

[3 j This pen is not t/owr'^; Cette plume n'est gas a 

it is mine. vous ; elle est a moi 

Whose book \h this ? It is A qui est ce livre ? I) n'est 
not mine ; it is his, or pas a fnoi ; il est a lui, 
hefs, ou a tile. 

It is your knife,and not his, C'est votre couteau,& Hon 

pas le sien. [vous ? 
Is this your needle ? Cette aiguille est-eile a 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



191 



It is 7ny paper, and not 
ycur^s, 

[4. \ It is ray opinion and 
her^s. 

It is his brother- 

It is his sister* 

The horse broke his bridle 
and halter. 

M\ horse carries his head 
well. 

Your horse has lost his 
shoes. 

[5.] My father and mo- 
her are sick. 

His brother and sister are 
in the country. 

Fowrbrother andmi/cousin 
are very good friends. 

Her mother and aunt are 
ai^ainst it. 

[7.] Put your books in 
their places again. 

Their reasons are bad. 

I saw rhe chimney of his 
chamber ; its mantle- 
piece is of marbie. 

You have bought an el- 
bow-chair ; its arms are 
too high. 
Your stick is not easy, its 
end is too sharp. 

He has bought a sword ; 
its hilt is of silver. 

Have vou read my book ? 
Is not the type very 
beautiful. 

He ordered his country- 
house to be rebuilt ; its 
rooms and situation are 
fine. 

There is a very large gar- 
den behind his house ; 



Ce papier e&t a moi & non 

pas a vous ? 
Cest mon sentiment & k 

sien. 
Q^est son frere. 
C^est sa soeur. 
Le cheval a rompu sa 

bride & son licou. 
Mon cheval porte bien sa 

tete- 
Votre cheval a perdu sea 

fers. 
Mon peie 8c ma niere sent 

malades. 
Son frere 8c sa soeur, sont 

a la campagne. 
Votre frere & mon cousin 

sont tres-bons amis. 
^Sa mere 8c sa tante s'y op- 

poseut. 
Remettez vos livres a 

leurs places. ' [vaises. 
Leurs raisons sont mau- 
Pai vu la cheminee de sa 

chambre ; ie manteau 

fTz est de marbre. 
Vous avez achcte un fau- 

teuil ; les bras en sont 

trop hauts. 
Votre baton n'est pas com- 
mode ; le bout eii est 

trop pointu. 
II a achete one epee ; la 

garde en est d'argent. 
Avez vous lu mon livre ? 

Le caractere Wen est-il 

pas bien beau ? 
II a fait rebatir sa maison 

de campagne;lescham- 

bres 8c la situation en 

sont belles. 
II y a un tres-grand jardin 

deriieresa maison ; let. 



192 



A GRAMMAR OF TRE 



the trees of it are very 
well planted, their fruit 
is excellent. 

Where have you bought 
this book I the binding 
is very good. 

^very state has its advan- 
tages and troubles. 

He is satisfied in fiis situ- 
ation ; he knows all it^ 
pleasures. 

The art of war has its 
dangers. 

Me is not satisfied in his 
situation ; he sees all its 
dangers. 

It is a snaall house, which 
has its conveniences. 

That tree spreads its 
branches very far. 

[9.] Brother, lend me your 
pen. 

Sister, I cannot ; I am 
writing 7W2/ exercise. 

[10.] He got his hair cu.t 

You split ?ny head. 

He fell from his horse, 

and broke /^i? leg. 
They have cut o^ his leg. 
Me cannot w^lk out ; the 

gout has swelled/^iy feeto 
Wash your hands, mouth, 

and face. 
I pricked my finger with 

my needle. 
[11.] He only grins. 

f will not meddle with it 

in the least. 
^ie does not know which 

way to turnhimselt 



arbres en sent treshier* 

plantesj les fruits en 

sont excellens. 
Oil avez-vous achete ce 

livre I La reliure en 

est tres bonne. 
Chaque etat a ses agre- 

mens 6c ses peines. 
II se plait datis sa situa- 
tion ; il ^?^ connoit tous 

les plaisirs. 
L'art de la guerre a ses 

dangers. 
II ne se platt pas dans sa 

situation ; il tn voit tous 

les dangers. 
C'est une petite maison 

qui a sj£s commoditeSo 
Voil^ un arbre qui etend 

ses branches tres loin. 
Man frere, pretez-moi 

voire plume- 
Je ne puis ma soeur; j'ecris 

mon theme. 
II s'est fait couper les che^ 

veux. 
Vous me fendez la tete. 
il toiiiba de cheval, 6c se 

cassa la cuisse. 
On lui a coupe la jambe. 
II ne pent sortir ; la goute 

lui a enfle les pieds. 
Lavez-T;o7/* les mains, Iz 

bouche & le visage. 
Je me suis pique le doigt 

avec mon aiguille. 
II n-e rit que du bout des 

levres, ou des dents. 
Je ne veux pas m'en me- 

ler. 
II ne salt dc quel cote tour- 

nerl 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



19B 



He waited on the Lady in 
her coach. 

Why do you not speak ? 
Are you dumb? 

He cannot stand upon his 

legs. 
She gave me /ier word 

for%. 
She gave him her hand to 

kiss. 
He stands on tiptoe 

fie gave/z/s arm to the sur- 
geon who was to bleed 
him. 

The patient lost all Jm 
blood. 

He raised his voice. 

"^he stretched out her 
arms. 

He makes a shift to live 
by hard labour. 

You have hurt my foot 

You hurt my finger. 

Have you never had the 
toQthach? No: but 1 
have very often a pain 
in my stomach. 

I am sick. 

Hia mind is undisturbed. 

Her mind is agitated with 
a thousand fears. 

My finger is not yet heal- 
ed. 



II donna la main a la 

Dame, et la conduisit a 

son carrosse. 
Pourquoi ne parlez-vous 

pas ? Avez-vous perdu 

la voix? 
li ne peut se tenir sur ses 

jatxibes. 
Elle m'en donna sa parole. 

Elle lui donna ^a main. a 

baiser. 
II se tient sur le bout dtB 

pieds« 
II donna ^on bras au chi- 

rurgien qui devoit le 

saigner. 
Le malade perdit tout son 

sang. 
ILeleva sa voi^, ou la voiXo 
Elle €tendit ses bras, ou 

Its bras. 
II vit du travail de sen 

mains. -[pied« 

Vous fn^avez fait mal au 
Vous me faites mal an 

doigt. 
N'avez-vous [amaiseu mal 

aux dents? Non : mais 

j'ai fort souvent mal a 

Testomac. 
J'ai mal au cceur. 
II a /'esprit en repbs, ou 

son esprit est en repos. 
Elle a /'esprit agite de raille 

craintes,ou50?i esprit est 

agitc de mille craintes. 
Man doigt n'est pas ^n- 

core^ gueri* 
R ' 



194 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

SECTION III. 

Demonstrative Pronouns. 

L Ce or cette, and ces^ are joined to and go before 
^ substantive : as, this book, this man, this pen, these 
houses ; ce livre, cet homine, cette fiLume^ cdl maU 
sons, Celuiy celle^ c€U3o^ celles^ ought to be followed 
by a second case ; as, that of you, celui de voiis ; or 
the relative pronoun giii or gue : as, he who loves ; 
celui qui aime ; he whom you love ; celui que t)oiLs 
aimez, 

% Ce is used before a noun masculine beginning 
•with a consonant ; but if the noun begins with a vowel, 
or an h mute, cet must be used. It is likewise used 
before gui or que : in this case it is said of inanimate 
things only, and signifies what, or the thiwg which : 
as, what you look lor is not here ; ce que vous cher^ 
chez n'est fias id; or, the thing you look for is not 
here. 

3. Obs. The particies ci and la* are sometimes joined by 
a hyphen to a substantive : as, this man, that woman, cet 
homme-o, cette femrae-/a. They are likewise joined infthe 
same manner to the demonstrative pionouns. 

4. He who, he that, she who, they who, -^uch as» 
6cc. in the sense of that, even governed of the verb 
substantive to be, are rendered into French by celui 
gui^ celle gui, cetix gui^ which are never separated. 

5. Obs. He who, he that, &;c. whether or no thej be separ 
rated inEngHsh,are sometimes eleg;antly i-endered into French 
by the impersonal c^eH or ce Ti'est paSj according as the sen- 
tence is affirmative or negative, with an infinitive followed by 
que de before a second infinitive ; as in the foregoing example 
\ may likewise say: Ce n'^ est pas connoilre le cojur humain 
giie de se fier aux vaines promesses des hommes. 

1 say sometimes, because, first, if one of the English verbs be 
in the future tense, it is by no means to be nsed. Secondly, 
there are many cases in which it is never used ; as, they were 
punished who did it, cevx qui I'ont fait ont ete punis; to put 
the two verbs in the infiiiite mood would be noniiense. 

Ci denotes aa object near, and la at a distance. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 195 

6. The English possessive proBouns, his, her, their^ 
before a substantive in the sense of him, of her, of 
those, who, or that, are rendered into French, after 
the substantive to which they relate, by de celui qui, 
de celle gui, de ceux guU de celces qui : as, every one 
should praise the endeavours of those who seek to 
be useful to the pubHc ; cTiaciin de-vroit louer ies ef- 
forts de ceux qui ckerchent a etre utiles au public. 

7. Obs. Ce qui, ce que, what, beginning a sentence of two 
parts, commonly followed, after the first part, by ce, before 
etre, and the word etre is followed by a substantive : as, what I 
am saying to you is the truth, ce que^e vous dis, c'*est hi verite^ 
Sometimes the verb etre is followed by the preposition de, with 
an infinitive: as, what grieves him, is not to have succeeded ; ce 
qui le fache, c^est de n 'avoir pas reussi. Sometimes by que, if 
it comes before another mood : as, ce qui le fache, c^est quit 
n'a pas reussi. Ce qui is used before neuter verbs : as, ce qui 
me plait, what i>leases me ; and before active verbs, when it 
is the nominative of the verb. In other cases ce que is kxsed. 

8. Obs. Ce is not repeated in the before-mentioned case be» 
fore an adjective, or participle past ; as, what I am saying to 
you is true, ce que je vous dis est vrai. 

9. Obs. Ceci, this, cela, that, are sometimes relative to a 
single noun: as, donnez^moi ceci, ou cela, give me this, or 
that, spe^jking of any single thing whatever. Sometimes they 
are not relative to a single noun, but to an entire action; iu 
this case cela generally signifies the action before spoken of 5, 
as, we often speak ill of absent people, which rs unworthy ^ 
on parle souvent mal des absens, cela est indigne. Ceci ge- 
nerally signifies the action which is going to he mentioned; 
as, this is like to surprise you, a man who died a hundred 
and ten years old ; ceci va vous surprendre, un homme qu^ 
inourut, age de cent-dix ans, 

D.emonsir alive Pronouns exemplified for the Scho- 
lar's Practice. 

[1.] Show me that book. Montrea-moi ee livre. 

Give me that pen. Donnez-moi cette plume- 

Thesehousas are very fine. Ces maisons sont tres bel- 
les. 

These ladies have a great Ces Dames sotat tres spi- 

deal of wit. rituelles. 

[2.] 7%fl!^ man is very fan- Cet homme est tres fan- 
tastical tastique. 

l^hat child is very amia- C^r enfant est tres aima- 

ble. ble^ 



196 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Do you know ivhat has 
happened to him or her? 

Has she shown you what 
was given her ? 

You will never guess what 
was said of you- 

Guess Tt^y^anhey are about 

I know what you say. 

I know what makes you 
angry. 

[3.] Thatm2LX\ makes him- 
self beloved by every 
body. 

These people are in the 
right- 

These women are very ca- 
pricious. 

That man is in the wrong. 

Those apples are good for 
nothing. [pears. 

Give me some of those 

[4.] He does not know 
what you have written. 

He who betrays his friend 
is unworthy of friendship. 

They who despise learning 
do not know the value 0f 
it. 

He who shuns company is 
a strangertothecharms 
of society. 

She who loves nobody^does 
not taste the pleasures 
of friendship. 

Sucha^ are enemies to vir- 
tue, are strangers to it. 

Such as are idle, do not 
know the value of time. 

Thqse who are contented 
with their lot,arehappy. 



Savez-vous ce qui lui est 

arrive ? 
Yous a-t-elle raontre ce 

qu^on lui a donne ? 
Vous ne devinerez jamais 

ce qu^on a dit de vous* 
Deyinez c£ ^'z^'ils font. 
Je sais ce que vous dite§. 
Je sais ce qui vous fache^ 

Cet homme-/<2 se fait ai-» 
mer de tout le monde. 

Ces gens-ci ont raison. 

Ces femmes-/a sont tres 

capricieuses. 
Cet horn me- /a a toFt. 
Ces pommes-/c ne valent 

rien* [/«. 

Donnez-moi de ces poires 
11 ne sait pas c^ que vous. 

avez ecrit. 
Celuiqui trahit son ami est 

indigne d'amitie. 
Ceuocqui meprisentlasci" 

ence, n'en connoissent 

pas le prix. 
Cdui qui evite la compa- 

gnie> ne connoit pas Jes 

charmes de la socicte. 
Celle ^win'aime personne, 

ne goute pas les plaisirs 

de 1' amiti^'. 
Ctux qui so^- ennemis de 

la veriu, ne la connois- 
sent pas. 
Ceux qui sont paresseux^, 

ne connoissent pas le 

prix du temps. 
Cntx qui sont contens de 

kursort, sontheureu:c. 



FRENCH TONGUE 



197 



He who does not study 
will neve^d^learned- 

He who did it was punish- 
ed. 

Hiey who have done their 
exerci«es> have been 
rewarded. 
^Theywho seem to be hap- 
py are not always so. 

[6.]We should always re- 
member the cares of 
those by whom we were 
broupjht lip. 

We ought to encourage 
the endeavours of those 
who apply themselves 
to arts and sciences. 

£7.] What makes him an- 
gry is her bad humour. 

What an honest man 
ought to bewail is the 
loss of time. 

What grieves him is not 
to have succeeded- 

What rdoices me is to 
have seen you and your 
family in good health. 

[8 j What I saf to you is 

true. 
What she said to you fs 

false. 
What you have told is sur- 

prising. 
[9.] Does this please you ? 
I)ot^i>^/zG!^make you angry.'* 
That surprises me. 
What do you thiHk of it ? 
1 did never think of it. 



Celui qui n'etudie pas, ne 
sera jamais savant.* 

Celui qui a fait cela a ^te 
puni. 

Ceux qui ont fait leurs 
themes, ont ete recom- 
penses 

Ceux qui paroissent etre 
heureux, ne le sont pas 
toujours. 

Nous devrions toujours 
nous souvenir des soins 
de ceux par qui nous 
avons ete eleves. 

On doit encoiirager les ef- 
forts de cewjr qui s*^appli- 
quent aux arts 6c aux 
sciences. 

Ce qui le fache, c^est sa 
mauvaise humeur. 

Ce qu^un honnete homme 
doit regretter, c'est la 
perte du temps. 

Ce qui le hchec'est de n'a- 
voir pas reussi, ou c'est 
qu'il n*a pas reussi. 

Ce qui me rejouit, c^est dc 
V0U3 avoir vu & toute 
votre famille en bonne 
sant6. 

Cequeje vous dis est vrai. 

Ce qu^eWe vgus a dit est 

faux. 
Ce que vous ayez dit est 

surprenant' 
Ceci vous pla2t-il ? 
Qe^a vous fache-t il ? 
Cela me surprend. 
Que pensez-vous de cela ? 
Je n'ai jamais pense ac^/s^ 



* See the exception to the fifth rule, 
R 2 



198 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Keep this and give me Gardez ceci & donnez- 

that. ' ' moi cd(fi ^ 

Did you write that ? Avez-vous ecrit cela ? 

I do not like that- Je n'aime pas cela. 

That is wonderful. Cda est admirable. 

SECTION L 

Relative Pronouns, 

1. The rejlative pronoun gzwis the nominative, and 
fju'e the accusative, in speaking of all sorts of objects; 
a's, the stone which is here, iapierre qm est id j the 
house that you see, la maison que vouz voyez. 

Except that qui is used in the accusative instead of que^^ 
when it signifies what person % as, Je sais qui vous aimez^ 1 
know whom you love, or what person you iove ; and when it 
is governed by prepositions ; as, en qtd, sur quiy avec qid., 
he. In this last case lequel, &c. may likewise be used. 

2* When qui is in the second case, or comes after 
any preposition whatever, it is applied only to per- 
sons or objects used as persons, and therefore it would 
be a fault to say, c'est la maison de qwje vozisai/iar/e^ 
it is the house of which I have spoken to you. In 
this case we make use of dont, or duguel, de lagiieile, 
^c which !s used equally for all objects, and often 
more properly than de qui, or diiqud^ de laquelle^ &c. 
as, c'est la maisoii dont j^ vous ciijiarle. 

3. ji qui is sometimes used in speaking of animate 
objects, though they are not persons, or objects used 
as -persons ; ^ut, as we can never err by making use 
of auqud, klaqudle, &c. I would advise to do sa 

4. Whom, which, tjiat, though not expressed in 
Enghsh, must always be expressed in French by gm 

or que ; as, the man you see, Vhomme que vousvoyez, 

5. Lequel, lagudle^ &c. are to be used instead of g't^i* 
1st,when5^m is equivocal: 2dly,when the relative pro- 
noifii is in the second case cCtter a substantive ; as^ a 



PRENCH TONGUE. 199 

courier has been sent to court, at whose return, 07i a 
eiivoye un courier a la cour, au retour duqueL..3dly, 
when the relative pronoun expresses a choice: as, 
which will you see? lequel orlaquelle voulez-votisvoirl^ 

6- Speaking of things, in which,* in what, to which, 
at which, at what, in the sense of where, or wherein, 
are rendered into French by oil instead of dans le- 
queU laquelk^ &c. : as, the house in which, ®r where 
he lives, la maison oh it derncure ; the end at whichv 
or whereat, he aims, le but ou il tend. Prom wliicti, 
from what, are rendejed by d'ozV instead of duqueU 
de laquelle, Bcc.: as, tiie country from which Ifcome^ 
le pays d'ouj'V viens. Through which, by which, are 
rendered by, par oic, or fiar lequel^ &c. 

7. Obs. The relsaive pronoun quoi is used only in speaking 
of inanimate objects. It may be used in the third case in- 
stead of auquel, a laquelle, &c. ; as, it is a reason which I did 
not think of; c'est une raison a qiioi ^e ne pensois pas. 

However, in most circumstances d quel, k laquellejac. may 
be used equally ; of which the ear must be the judge. 

8. »/f qicoi must always be used when it has for its, 
antecedent ce and the verb etre or rien, and is follow- 
ed by a noun, or verb governing the third case: as, it 
IS to that I apply myself, c'est a quoi je m'afi/ilique ;■ 
there is nothing which I am not disposed to, ilnhj a 
rien a quoIyV T%e sols dispose, 

9. De quoi is used when it follows immediately ce 
and the verb etre, and is followed by a noun> or a verb 
governing the ^ second case ; as, it is that I complain 
of, c'est de quoi^e me plains. But, after rieii^ we make 
use of dont ; at least it is a great deal be^er : as, 
there is nothing in the world of which God is not the 
author, i/ n'y a rien aumonde dont Dicu ne soit Vauteur^ 

lO.Obs. ^uoi may likewise be used instead of lequel^laquelle, 
&c. after prepositions governing it, such as, siir,en,apres,aveCj 
&c, as, tiie reason 1 rely upon, la raison sur quoi jc me fonde. 

11. Obs. Que is used instead of de qui and a qui. It happens 
not only when there comes immediately before it the second ot 
third case of a personal pronoun, bat likewise after any other 
noun, when the sentence begins with ce ^d etre; a^jjt is # 



200 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

you that I si>eak, c'est a vous que je parle ; it is to Ilflnpbess 
tha [ aspire, c'est au bonheur gue j'aspire; it is from tS 
public that I expect the approbation, c»est du public gue i'at! 
tends I 'approbation, ^«cjat 

The true mark to know it is, when que has the signification 
o^that, as you may see by the foregoing examples ; by this 
rule there is no danger of being mistaken. Hence it may 
appear, that m such cases gue is to be looked upon as a con^ 
junction, ral:her than a relative pi'onoun. 

Relative Pronouns exemplified for the Scholars 
Practice^ 

[l.]Itis the Lady u'/io G'est 1^-Bame ^m vons a 

spoke to you, parle^ ^ ^ 

Speak to this Gentleman Parlez ^. ce Monsieur guf 

w/zo IS here. est ici 

Is this the new hat w/iic/i Est-ce 4 le ciapeau ncBf 

you bought? ^^^..vousavez^cfae"lf 

Xhe book which you lent Le livre gue vous m'avez 

me. IS very well writ- prete, est tres bienecrit. 

I know whom you mean. Je sais gui vous roulez 
XT d\te, ^ c'est 

You do not knowwho it is. Vous ne savez pas aui 
Do vou know whom I loveP Savez-Voiis gui i'aime > 
I know whom she loves. Je s^is gui elle iirne. * 
L^. J He IS a it jend m whom L 'e^t un ami en guije mets 

I put my confidence. ma con fiance, 

iie is a person in whom Cest une personne a <ju^' 

one may confide. on pent se fier. 

hne IS a Lady against C'est une Demoiseileco?^-^ 

whom nothing can be tre gui on ne peut tnal 

s.K] with truth. , parler ai-ec virite. 

L4J i know the person Jeconnois 1 a personne «wr 

y-oi> were talking to. 9'^2 vous a vez parle. 

it IS the man of whom I C'est Thomme de gui on 

spoke to you. t/o^/, je vous a.jWk 

It i^ tlie horse he spoke to C'est le chevai du^u^/ ,.,. 

you about. cforJ il v/m.^ a id..?-' 

L^.J bhe is a woman in C'est une femme sur la 

whose Jkh^viour there conduite de lagutlle n 
#s nothing' to cens-^e n'y a rien a redire. ^ 



a merchant whc-.c C^st uu ne-cciant 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



201 



honour and probity can- 
not be doubled. 

[6.] The circumstances 

you are in- 
The daoi^er he is in. 
The end she. aims at. 
The house ^ivhcre she lives 

in. 
He has got the same 

frame of irjind and sea- 

timents in. ivMch he has 

always been. 
1 know the place whence 

you come, 
These are the reasons 

from which i coiiclade. 
These are the discourses 

by which he insinuates. 
This IS tlie city through 

which I have passed. 
I kaow the means hy which 

he gained hi&pouit. 
[7.] That is the matter in 

Question. 
li'i^whatl am think- 
ing about. 
Ity^what he complains of,. 
It was what he applied 

himself to^ 
It wa3 what she exhorted 

him to. 
It is what I am sorry j^r. 
It is what 1 assure you. 
It is what \ will think 

about. 
There is nothing in which 

I am not ready to oblige 

you. 
I do not see ujion what his 

discourse is groundecj. 



rhonneur 6c la probite 

ducjuel \ ne pent y avoir 

de doute. 
Les circonstances ou vous 

ete;S. 
Le danger ou il se trouve- 
Le.but ou elle vise. 
La maison oil elle de- 

meure. 
II est dans la me me dispo- 
sition d'esprit, <k. dans 

les me vnes sentiment crit 

il a toujours ete- 
Je sais la place c/'or^ vous 

venez. 
Voila les raiscns d^oii jq 

conclus, 
Voila les discours //ar ou 

il insmue. 
Voila la viWt /lar oz^:j'ai 

passe, 
le sais les moyens/zar ou 

il parvint a ses fins. 
Voila dequol ii s'agit, 

C'est a guoije pense- 

C]est de quoi il se plaint; 
C'etoit a quoi il s'appli- 

quoit. 
C'etoit « ^z^oielle I'exhor" 

toit. 
C'est de quoi je suis fach6 
C'est de quoi je vous assure- 
C est a ^woije penserai. 

II n'y a rien a quoi je ne 

sois dispose pour vous 

obliger. 
Je ne vols pas sur quoi son 

discours puisse etrefon- 

d^. 



202 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



It is what you may rely 

on. 
It is an argument to which 

there is no answer. 

Death is an evil to which 
there is no remedy- 

Idleness is a vice to which 
young people are much 
inclined. 

This is, the reason ufioii 
which I am grounded- 

It ' s the happiness to which 
I aspire. 

These are the reasons by 
which I convinced him. 

[9.] There is nothing I am 
more sorry /on , 

There is nothing he com- 
plains of more. 

There is nothing that he 
is not capable of. 

[11.] It is to you that I 
shall speak. 

It is to her ikat I had pro- 
mised it. 

It is from his friend that 
he has received so ma- 
ny favours. 

It is his brother that he 

complains of. 
It vi^as by my friend that I 

was betrayed. 
It is to continual study 
that your brother oweii 
his great learning. 

It is to my sister that you 
have given it. 

It is to her that you have 
spoken. 

It ts from her that I ex- 
pect that favour. 



C'est sur quoi vous pou- 

vez compter. 
C'est un raisonnementrizr- 

quel il n'y a point de re- 

ponse» 
La mort est un mdAauquel 

il n'y a point de re me de. 
La paresse est un vice au- 

quel les jeunes gens 

sont fort enclins. 
C^est la raison ^ur laquelk 

je me fonde. 
C'est le bonheur apres le- 

(jrwe/j 'aspire. 
Ce sont les raiscns avec 
leaquellss]^ I'ai convaincu. 
Il n'y a rien dont je sois 

plus fache. 
11 o'y a rien dont il se 

plai-gne davantage. 
ir a'y a rien dont il ne soic 

capable. 
C'est a vous <72/;e j^ parle* 

rai. 
C'est a elle que je I'avois 

promis. 
C'est de son ami qn'^U a 

regu tant d'amities. 

C'est de son frere qu'H se 

plaint. 
Ce fut par mon ami que 

je fus trahi. 
C'est a une etude eontinu- 

elle que votre frere doit 

ses grandes eonnois- 

sances, 
C'est a ma sceur que vous 

I'avez donne. 
C*est a elle que vous avei: 

parle. 
C'est d'elle que j'attenel/s 

cette grace* 



FRENCH TONGUE. 203 

It Is to trade that he ap- C'est au commerce gu'il 

plies himself. s'applique. 

It is to the protection of C'est a la protection de 

his friends that he owes ses amis gu'\i doit sa 

his fortune. foriune. 

It is by the public that he C'est du public ^?^'il est 

h approved of, approuv^, 

SECTION V. 

Interrogatory Pronouns. 

i. Que^ as interrogative, is applied only to thingj?^ 
^nd gui, when persons are spoken of; as, what do 
you say ? qu^ dites-vous ? whom do you look for f qui 
/:herc/iez-vou8 F Both are used m all their cases as 
above, 

2. Quoi, interrogative, is used after a preposition 
or after the participle 'Cle or a ; as, what are you 
grounded upon ? sur quoi vousfondez-vous ? about 
W'hat do you busy yourself ^ de quoix'oi^^ inelez vous? 

3. If quoi be not immediately followed by a verb, i^t 
Tnay be sometimes used in the first case ; as, what is 
ihere -greater ? quoi de plus grand? It sometimes 
expresses only an emotion of the mind ; as, how I 
yoa are angry ! quoi ! vans etesfdche ! 

4. Quel, quelle^ 8cc. are said of persons and things.— 
It is to be observed, that quel is always followed by 
2ts substantive ; as, what man is it? quel homme est- 
ce ? Except wlven the noun was expressed before ; 
as, this is my opinion ; what is your's ? voila man 
sentiment ; quel estle votre ? 

5. Lequel^ &c, is also said of persons and things ; 
it is always follo%ved by a genitive expressed, or un- 
derstood ; as, which of the two will you have } le- 
quel des deux vGulez-vous ? Quel answers to what ; 
icquel^ to which. 

6. Whose, signifying to whom a thing belongs, is 
translated into French by the datJve, h. qui.; as^ 
•^^hose house is that ? ^ qniestcette ?nmso?i ? 



204 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Inter rogatory Pronouns exempliJJed for the Scho-' 
lav- s Practice, 



|1] What do you say ? 
What do you want ? 
What do you ask for ? 
What do you fear ? 
What is the matter ? 

tFhat shall we do ? 



Qwe* dites-vous ? 
Que souhaitez vous ? 
Que demandez-vous? 
Que craignez-vousr* 
Quest-ce que c^est ? 
Qu'est-ce qu'ii y a F 
Que ferojis- nrais ? 



Do you remember what Vous souvenez vous de ce 
you talked of to me ? dont vous m'avez parl6? 

Is that like what you have Cela est-il conforme k ce 
been told of ? 



Whom do you look for ? 
Who has done that } 
Who spoke to you ? 
Whom do you suspect ? 



gue v-oM^ avez entendu 
. . dire ? 

Qui f chercbez-vous ? 
Qui a fait cela > 
Quiest'Ce qui vous a parle^ 
Qui est-ce que vous soup- 
^onnez ? 
|/F7zom have you that news i^/? V^^^ tenez«vous cette 

from ? nouvelle ? 

fT^o is come ? Qui est-ce qui est venu ? 

To whom do you gtve the A qui donnez- vous la pre- 

preference? I^rence ? 

[2.] Why do you concern De quoivoi\s melez vous? 

vourself ? 
What does she complain Be quoi se plaint- elle ? 

of? 
JF7?a^ is the matter ? Z)^ r/^iOi s'airlt-il ? 

JTF/^V so much ado > A quoi bon tant de fagons? 

What do you apply your- A quoi voiis appliquez^^ 
seUto? vous? 

.How do you spend your A quoi passez-vous le 
time? tenipsr^ [dre? 

What can she expect ? yl quoi pent elle s'atten- 

* Observe here, that instead af fjr/Cj we often make use of 
qiCest ce que. In both cases the personal provioiln comec be- 
fore the verb. 

-j- Instead of qui^ in such or the like interrogations, we 
make equally well use of qui cst-ce qui in the mj mi native, and 
qui est-ce que in the accusative; in this ea&?^ the personat 
pronoun is put before the vtrli. 



FRENCH TONGUE; 205 

tVhat does lie talk of ? De qiioi parle-t-il ? 

What is she so angry for ? De quoi est-elle si facliee ? 

What are they so jealous Be quoi sont-ils si jaloux! 

of? 

What do you impute the -^ quoi attribuez voils la 

fault to ? faute ? 

Honv shall we spend our ^ quoi nous amuserons^ 

time } nous ? 

[4.1 What man spoke to Qz^a' homme vous a parle? 

you ? 

What woman have you Quelle femme avez-vous 

seen ? vu ? 

I^T/fa; lace has she bought? Quelle dentelle a-t-elle 

[read? achete r*^ 

What books have you Q?/e'A9livres avez-vous 1 us?: 

What sort of shirts does Quelles chemises porte-t- 

he w-ar t il ? 

This is my opinion ; w/iaf- Voilam on opinion ; queUe 

is his ? est la sienne ? 

This is your advice; what Voila votre avis ; quel est 

is her^s ? le sien ? 

It washersentiment; u*hat C'etoit son sentiment; qu^J. 

was your V etoit le votre ? 

What gramnaar do you Quelle grammaire lise?:- 

read ? vous ? 

[5.1 Of all the grammars De toutes lesgramrraires 

which have been print- qui ont ete imprimees, 

ed, to iy//ic/2 doyou give a laquelle ^ounez-YQiXs 

the T reference ? 1 a preference ? 

There are apples ar^d Voila des pommes & des 

|K-ars ; ivhich do you poiresr/es^z/e/toaimez^ 

like best ? vous le mieux ? 
W/if c h o'i iiicse t^ooY2i,n'' Laquelle de ces deux: 

^es will you have ? oranges voulez-Vous^ 

JF/«c/z of these twoLadies Laquelle de ces deux 

do vou think the hand- Dames trouvez-vcus la 

somest ? plus belle ? 

Whicn of all the gramma- Lequel de tous les gmm- , 

rians has written most mairiens a ^crit le pl'.is 

clearly and precisely ? clairement, andayec le 



S 



plus de precision ^ 



^06 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Which of the books you Des livres que votis avez 
haveread, do you think lus, lesquels trouvez- 
the most useful ? vous les plus utiles ? 

Whose penknife is this i A qui est ce canif ? 

Whose pen is this l A qui est cette plume ? 

Whose =at is this ? A qui est ce chapeau ^ 

Whose garden is this ? A qui est ce jardin ? 

SECTION VJ. 

Indefinite or Indeterminate Pronouns. 

L Fas un, aucun, nul, are three negative pronouns^ 
having the signification of no person or bo thing, and 
require the particle ne befare the verb : as, nobody 
spoke of it, aucun, ar pas un, or nul n^en a parte ; 
nobody knows it ; aucun, or pas un? er nul ne Le saiu 

Jstul is never used in an interrogation, or with a negation 
before it ; for we do not say, uul ne le sait4l P 

2. Obs. Auctin is sometimes used without a negation, in 
phrases of interrogation or d^aubt In such a case it may be 
rendered by quelqu'un ; as, of all those wlio know my rea- 
sons, is there anv one who has blamed me \ de tous ceux qui 
savent mes raisons, y en a-t-il aucun qui ra'ait iil^rae ? 

3. Obs. y^hen aucun and m^t are followed hy a second 
case, or a substanti^ve either expressed or understood, they 
must be in the same gender as that second case or substan- 
tive, but not in the same number ; as, none of them has been 
"there, aucun tVeux^ speaking of men, or aucune (Peiles, 
speaking of women, n^y a eti. These three pronouns, used 
as pronouns, Iiave no plural. 

4. JSful and aucun are sometimes to be looked upon 
as adjectives ; this happens when they are joined to 
asubstantive: as, he yields to no reason^ il ne se rend 
a aucune roz50?2 ; she has no pleasure, elk n^a aucun 
filaisir* JSlul may likewise be used, but aucun, m 
such a case, is a great deal better. 

5. Obs. JSTul is also a Law-term, signifying Void ; in such 
a case it has a plural, if the noun be in the plural ; as, the 
proceedings are void, les procedures sont nulles. 

6. ChacuUy each, signifies every person or thing, has 
no pluraljis indifferently applied to persons and things^. 



FRENCH TONGUE. ^07 

and follows the gender of the noun to which it isjoin- 
€d, or relates ; as> each of these women has seen it, 
chacune de ces dcuxfemnies Cci vu, 

Obs. If the noun be a collective one, and cannot be divided 
])y one or two, chacun is put in the masculine gender, though 
the collective noun be feminine ; as, the Oommons withdrew, 
each of them to their own home ; les communes se retire- 
rent ehacwi chez soi. 

JV. B. Custom does now allov/ to say un chacun, instead 
of chacnn. 

7. Personne sigBifies nobody, has no plural, is al-^ 
ways of the masculine gender, and attended by the 
particle 7ie before the verb ; as, nobody saw it, per- 
sonne ne l'*a vu. 

8. Obs. When personne signifies any body^ and is not pre- 
ceded by an adverb of denial ; such as^ not, never, &c. the 
particle ne must be omitted '^ as, did ever any boiiy find the 
philosopher's stone I persenne a-t-il jamais trouve la pierre 
philosophale ? This way of speaking insinuates that you do 
not believe the thing concerning which you inquire. Take 
notice not to confound this pronoun with the noun substantive: 
a person, wie personne, the person, la personne, which is al- 
Avays feminine. 

9. Tout has many significations ; it sometimes sig* 
nifies all, every, or the whole* When it is joined to 
a substantive, it requires the definite article before 
the foH'^rwing noun, notwithstanding ks having before 
it de or ^ : as, the whole house, toute la maison ; of 
the whole house, de toute la maison j to the whole 
house, a toute la 7?2a2>07z. 

10. The pronoun tout, used by itself, is always put 
in the masculine singalar : as, every thing almost is 
unoertain in the v/oYM,/iresque tout e&t i?icertain dans 
lemonde^ Sometimes ii has the signification oi cha^^ 
que ; as, every day, tons les jours ; every moment, li 
tout moment, Sec. But we- say, a chaqiie instant, ^ cha- 
que minute, every instant, every minute. 

11. Obs. Tout sometimes signifies although, followed by a 
word denoting the quality, office, dignity, trade, calling, cir-= 
eumstance, &c. of the subject ; in such a case, the word de° 
noting such quality, &c. which is placed after the verb \u 
EngliBh, must be placed in French immediately after tQV.% 



208 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

and the word denoting such quality, must be followed by que > 
as, though he be learned, he mistakes sometimes ; ^o7<^ sa- 
vant quHl est, il se trompe quelquefois. When tout is ren- 
dered by bi^n que, or qi/oique^ the verb must be ^ jt in the 
subjunctive; ^^ybien que, or quoiqii^il soit sova7ii, bic. 

12, Obs. When the word which is after the verb does not 
denote the quality of the subject, then for all, or although, 
must be rendered into French by Men que, or qiwlqiie : as, 
although you make use of this jiliysician, dien que, or quoiqice^ 
Yous vous serviez de ce medecin. 

13. Obs. Tout, in the sen&e of although, is indeclinable, ex- 
cept l>efore a noun feminine beginning with a-consonant. 

*4. Obs. Tout^ sometimes signifies quite, entirely ; as slie 
is quite lovely; elle est toute aimable. In this sense^ it is 
likewise declinable only before a noua feminine beginning 
^'ith a consonant. 

1^» Obs. When n*e?i signifies nothing, or not any thing, the 
particle ne must be placed before the verb ; as, I have seen 
iiotbiRg prettier ; je n'ai rien vu de plus joli. 

But when it signifies any thing, and is not preceded by an 
jidverb of denial, the particle ne is omitted ; as, have you 
ever seen any thing so beautiful ? avez-vou^ jamais rien vu de 
si beau ? 

16. Plusieurs signifies many, or several- It is al- 
ways plural : as, several have believed that the world 
was eternal, plusieurs ont cms le monde etemel. It is 
sometimes an adjective ; as, many friends, plusieurs 
amh. It is declined with the indefinite artidesc^eand a. 

17. Obs. ^ittrcj other, is sometimes an adjective; as, ano- 
ther book, «n autre livre ; sometimes a substantive, \fben it 
is preceded by eUy to which it hath a relation ; as, fen cou" 
3fiois un autre, I know another ; sometimes a pronoun ; as, ano- 
ther than you, un autre que yon^.—Jlutruiy one's neighbour, 

•othert, or other people, is used only in the second and third 
liases ; as, of others, to others, d'autrui a autrul-— Ni I'un \\\ 
Fautre, neither the one nor the other, will have the verb iix 
the singular, if the verb comes after it : as, ni Ihin ni Vautre n'eii 
sail la raison, neither the one nor the other knows the rea- 
son of it ; and in i.he plural, if it comes before ; as, ils n*en 
^'avent la raison ni Vun ni VaiUre. — IJun Vautre, one Ihr 
other, one another, is used to express the mutual action ci 
two objects on each other, and consequently it is always reci- 
procal ; as, they love one another : ils s'aiment Pun Pautre. 
Tl^e first is always in the first case — L''un <J Vautre, ox\Ci 
and the other, or lioth, has a difierent meaning; it signifies 
the union of two objects already mentioned : as, both are in 
the wrong: ; ils ont tort Vun iJ Vautre, or Vrm & Vautre ont 
tort ; it always governs the plural. Both of tjijese two words 
sfre declined with the definite article. 



FRENCH TONGUE, 20§ 

Take notice, that Pun V autre ^ comes always after the verb ; 
fi£ Vtm ni V autre ^ and Vun & Vaiitre^ in the first case, go indif- 
ferently before or after, with this difference, that, whe" thej 
are |»ut after,the personal pronoirn goes always before the verb, 
though not expressed in English ; and, when they are before 
the verb the personal pronoun is omitted, though Expressed ia 
English ; as, they are both in the -wrong, or both are in the 
■wrong, ih ont tort Pun & Paiitre^ or I'uu & I'autre onttort. 

18. QuelquCy some, signifies in the singular, that 
the object is taken indeternnnately ; as, he is always 
reading some good book, ii lit toujours quelque bon 
Irvre- In the plural, it expresses an indeternninate 
number of objects ; as he is inclined to some vices, i/ 
est adnnne a quelques vices, 

19. Obs. Sometimes ^we/^z/e signifies not the indeterminate 
number, but the indeterminate quahty or quantity of things, 
and ahswerstheEngysbexpressions,whatever, whatsoever, al- 
though, though, ever so mqch, ^c. as, although they are learn- 
ed, guelque savans qu'ils soient. Quelgue, taken in this sense^ 
has no plural before adjectives, unless they be immediately fol" 
lowed by their;substantive ; as, though they seem ever so rich, 
quelque riches qu'ils paroissent; though he has done ever so fine 
skctionSj^i^e/^weabelles actions qu'il ait faites. Hence it appears, 
how much an ^author is mistaken who «ays, that quelque car* 
never happen to come before an adjective but with etre. 

^Observe, that quelque in this case is al ways followed by que,or- 
gut, which governs the following verb in the subjunctive mood. 

20. Obs. When whatever, &c. signifying quelque in French, 
is followed immediately by a verb, or by a first case of a person- 
al pronoun, it must be separated into two words, and then 
quel has both numbers and genders, and que or qui is not re- 
peated inthe^Howing part of the sentence; as,whatever his in- 
tentions are, qu^Ues que 3oie?il ses intentions ; whateter I am/ 
quelque je sois ,• whatever they may be,(speakingof women,) 
quelles qix^elles puissent Hre, 

21. Quelqu^un^ in the sense of somebody, or any 
body is used in all its cases, in the singular masculine 
only ; as^ somebody has told it to me ; quelqu'un 7ne 
Pa dit. I know it from somebody, je k sais de quel- 
qu'un ; I have given it to somebody, /e Pai dontiek 
quelqvi'un. However, guelques-uns^ is used ah the 
nominative of the verb ; as, some persons have said 
it ;queiques-r.ns Font dit. In the other cases we make 
use of quelques personnes, and not qiielqucS'Un&. 
^ i5 'O 



210 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

22. Quelq u'ufi somttime^ signifies an indeterml-* 
aace part of a nun)ber, and is then joined with the 
i>econd case of some other noun expressed, or suffi- 
ciently understood ; or with the particle en instead 
cf the second case ; in this sense, quelgu'un is used 
3n all the genders, numbers, and cases ; as, has any 
.of these gentlemen heard any thing of it ^ quelqu'un, 
or quelques-uns de ces Messieurs at awQit-Uy or ate- 
roient-us entendu parler ? There are tine flowers, give 
me some; vcild de belles Jieurs^ domiezni'QTi (\\x^\- 
ques unes, 

23, Qbs. When whatever ,orwljatsoever,bas no relation either 
J.0 an adjective or substantive, it must be rendered b} quoique^ 
.tout ce qui, tout ceque; a^, whatever happens, quoi qu'il ar- 
rive ; whatever you please, tout ce qu'a/ vous plmra—(^uo\ 
que is ase<l only in the first case, whereas, tout ce qui, tout ce 
€jue, are used in ail their cases. Observe, that quoi que ce soit 
(whatever or whatsoever it raay be) is likewise used in all its 
cases ; as, of whatever he may speak, de quoi que ce soit 4/fiV/ 
^arle ; to whatsoever he may apply himself, a quoi que ce 
smtquHls' applique: this last pronoun^ when followed by a verb, 
requires that verb hi the subjunctive mood with que before it, 
as may be seen by the foregoing example. 

Quoi que ce soityJna sentence with the parliclewe beforethe 
verb, signifies tiothing^at all, or, nothmg whatever ; as, he talks 
of nothing whatever ; it ne parte de quoi que ce soil. 

24, Obs. Qui que ce soit, whoever, what person soever is usp 
ed in ail its cases; as, from whomsoever he may have learned 
it, de qui que ce soit quHl Vait appris: whomsoever he may ad^ 
dress himself to: ^ qui que ce soit q^tHl s^adressf^. When 
this pronoun belongs to a sentence wherein 72e precedes the 
verb, it stands for nobody wljatever ; as I shall ^eak of it to 
nobody whatever, je n'en parlerai a qui qu^e soit. Hence 
it appears, tliat quoi que ce soit, is used for things only, and 
qui que ce soit, for persons. 

25. Obs. Qui.que ce soit in the sense of quiconque, whoever, 
or what person soever, must always be followed hyit, eile&c. 
<i\*quiy and sometimes by both ; as whosoever it may be, he will 
he discovered, qiu que ce soit,\\^era. d6couvert: whosoever de- 
ceives me, shall be discovered, qui que ce soit, qui me trompe, 
il sera decouvert , but after quiconque il and qui are omitted ; 
:^ii,qmconquemt trompera, sera decouvert, and not \lsera,&C0 

26. Me?neh sometimes an adjective; as,thesairieau« 
tlior, le meme auteur : sometimes it answers to self in 
Kc^ihb I as. myself^ 7/?G?^TTjeme ; la these tv/o senses it 



FRENCH TONGUE. 2X1 

has a plural* : sometimes it answers to even in Eng- 
lish ; as, even this book, ce livre me me. 

27. Je ne sais qui, 1 do not know who, is used in all 
its cases in the singulai^ only tor persons. Je 7ie sais 
quoU I do not know what, is used in all its cases tor 
things only in the singular. Je ne sals quely is used 
in all its numbers, cases and genders, speaking of 
persons or things, and is always followed by a sub- 
stantive. 

28' One, people, men, a body, Sec. are sometimes 
rendered by on ; as, ihey, 07^ people, talk, ox\ parte : 
may a body know ^pevj-ou s avoir ? 

Soroetiraes on signifies it : in this case, the verb whicti is 
in English in the passive voice, must be changed in French 
into the active; as, it is hoped, on espere i it was said, on 
(Usoit, Moreover, as the passive voice is seldom used in 
French, in such a case the noun, or pronoun, \vhich is the 
subject of the passive verb in English, must be made the ob- 
ject of the verb in French, and the passive verb must be 
changed into the active, and put in the same tense as in Eng- 
lish ; as,^ great rejoicings have been made this week ; on a fait 
cette seraaine de grandes rejouissances, instead of de grander 
rejouissances ont et&faites. 

Indeterminate Pronouns exemplified for^ the Scho-^ 
lar^s Practice- 

{!'] JVodody sipoke to him- Ancimy pas mi^ ou 7iu! nc 

lui a parle. 
JVbbody knows it A^icun^pas iin^ ou mil ne 

lesait. 
Nobody has see^i it Axiciiny pas itn^ ou mil ne 

Ta vu- 
-Ai^obody can boast of it. ^ Aiicim^pas tm, ou 7iul ne 

peut s'en vanter. 
Of all the grammars, I DetouteslesgrammaireSj 
am a slave to none. je 7je m'attache a ai:- 

ciine. 
Did ajiy body ask for me ? Personne ne m'a-t-il de- 

mand6? 
I never saw any of them. Je n'en ai jamais vc xm, ou 

anciin, and not nul. 

* S^ r«le 29, ot the personal pronouriS, v^t xl\^ qvj] ef p. 18??, 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Did you ever see any one 
who . . . ? 

[2.] Is there any one who 
can blame me f* 

Is there any one who has 
seen it ? 

[3.] I have not resLdaTvy of 
the books you lent me. 

I did not see any oi^ the 
Ladies you spoke of. 

I know none of those mer- 
chants. 

I saw none of them* 



£4.] He ha« no resto 

She has tzo uneasiness of 

mind. 
I have no interest in it- 

[5.] The sentence was an- 
nulled. 

AH their privileges are 
annulled. 

[6.] Every one lives after 
hJs own manner. 

Ml men^YQ faulty, [py. 

All men desire to be hap- 

Every one of them v^as 
surprised. 



I know two Ladies ; they 
ha ve, each oftherUy two. 
thousand pounds a year. 

The t wo clerks have, each 
ofthemy\miicu four let- 
ters- 



En avez vous jamais v-w 
U7i ou aucun qui . , . ? and 
not nul^ 

Y en a-t-il aucun qui puisse 
me blanner } 

Y en a-t-il awczAw, qui Tail 
vu T 

Je n'ai lu uucwn des livres 

que vous m'avez prete« 
Je n'ai vnaucune des Da~ 
mes dont vouis avez parl^. 
Je ne connoisaz^cz^Tz de ces 

commergans. 
Je n'ai vu aucun dL'exxx^ for 

the masculine : aucune 

d'ellesiji^r the feminine, 
II n'a mil repos^-^aucun 

repos. 
Elle n'a nutle, ou aucune^ 

inquietude d'esprit. 
Je n'ai ?iul^ ou aucun, in- 

t^ret en cela. 
La sentence fut declaree 

niille, 
Tcus leurs ps^ivili^ges sent 

annuUe, 
Chacun vit a sa mode. 

Chacun fait des fautes» 

Chacunv^nt €tre heureux. 

Chacun d'eux fut surpris, 
for the masculine : cha^ 
cune d'elles fut surprise, 
for the feminine, 

Je cfonnois deux Demoisel- 
les ; elles ont chacuns 
deux mille livres ster- 
ling de rente. 

Les deux commis ontecrit 
chgcun quatre lettres 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



2X3 



The Commons withdrew, 

each (^them, to his own 

home. 
Each of the shires sends 

two representatives to 

Parliament. 
Put the books in order.and 

X^Mleveryont in its place, 
[7.] Nobody talks of it. 
JSIobody has seen you. 
Nobody has guessed the 

meaning of the riddle* 
JSiobody knows it. 
Nobody suspected her- 

She told it to nobody o 
He mistrusts nobody. 
She trusts nobody. 
[8-] Did ever any body 

know all the properties 

of matter ? 
Did ever any 3oc?// serious- 
ly doubt of the existence 

of God ? 
Did ever any man com* 

prehend the mysteries 

of religion ? 
[9, 10.] All is lost. 
All is quiet now. 
Every thing in nature is 

liable to change. 
He mistrusts every thing. 
She is frightened 2il every 

shadoKV* [thing' 

He is capable of every 
Can one be sure of every 

thing? 
I am compliant to every 

^hing you please. 
He is fit for any t/iing. 
They are against every th* 
Isee her and spe^k to her 

every day* 



Les Communes se retir^<- 
rent chacun chez soi. 

Les provinces envoyent 

chacune deux deputes 

au Parlement. 
Arrangez les livres, & les 
mettez chacun a sa piace^ 
Peraonne n'en parle. 
Fersonne ne vous a vu. 
Per Sonne 7Z*a devine Vi- 

nigme. 
Personne ne le sait. 
Per Sonne ne la soup^on^ 

noit. 
Elle ne I'a dit ^fiersonne^ 
II ne se mefie defiersonne^ 
Elle ne se fie k /lersonne, 
/*i?r50wnea-t-iljamaiscon« 

nu toutes les propri^tes 

de la matiere ? 
Personne a-t-il jamais 

dout^ serieusement de 

Texistence de Dieu ? 
Personne a-t-il jamais 

compris les mysteres de 

la religion ? 
Tout est perdu. [sent. 
Tout est tranquille^ pre-^ 
/'out dans la nature est 

sujet au changement- 
II se mefie de tout' 
Elie est epouvantse de. 

tout, 
II est capable de tour. 
Peut-on etre sGr de tout^ 

Je suis pret a tout ce qu'il 

vous plaira. 
II est proprek tout, 
lis s'opposent a tout. 
Je la vois, & iui p^vletous 

les jours. 



ill4 



A GRAMMAR OF TEE 



She goes to the play al- 
most every evening. 

He tiies in a passion every 
moment. 

[11, 12.J Though he be 
rich, he is not more con- 
tented. 

Although he seems angry, 
' he is not really so- 

[13, 14] She was gidte 

frightened. 
She is entirely retired^ 
[15.] I saw nothing more 

extraordinary. 
He applies- himself to 720- 

thing. 
Jsiothing is more surpris- 

I do not suspect you. of 

any thing' 
Is- there any thing more 

wonderful ? 
I doubt ^'htxh^v any thing 

is more useful- 
[16J MuTiy are not of your 

opinion. 
Many are of this opinion« 

It is the lot of many. 
It is the' vice of many. 
She told it to. many, 
[17.] Have you read the 
book ? will you hav e an- 
other ? 
If you do not like that pen, 
I shall give you another^ 

Another would be more 
grateful. 

Another would have mar- 
ried him- 



Elle va a la comedie pres - 
que tons les soirs. 

II s'eniporte a tout mo- 
ment. 

Jbz/r riche qu^'^X est, ou 
quoiqu'W soit riche, il 
n'en est pas plus content. 

Tout fache qiCW paroit, ou 
quoiqu^W paroisse fache. 
\\ ne Testpaso 

Elle fut toute epouvantee. 

Elle est toute retiree. 

Je n'ai rien vu de plus ex^- 

traordinaire. 
II ne s'applique a rien. 

Riemi'est plus surprenant. 

Je ne vous soupgonne de 

rien. 
Y a-t-il rien de plus admi- 
rable ? 
Je doute que rien soit plus 

utile. 
Piusieurs ne sont pas de 

voire opinion, 
Flusieurs sont de ce senti- 
ment. [_sieurs. 

C'est le partage de filu- 
C'estle dcfaut defilusieurs^ 
Elle Ta dit afihisieurs, 
Avez-vous lu le livre ? en 
voulez-vous tat autre '^ 

Si vous n'aimez pas cette 
plume, je vous en don- 
'nerai une autre, 

Un autre seroit plus re- 
connoissant. 

Une autre Tauroit epous^^ 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



215 



.Jlnother would have been 

deceived. 
I gave it to another, 
I know neither of them. 

Neither of them spoke to 
him. 

Neither of them does study. 



They hate one another. 
We know one another. 

They cheat one anothei\ 
They mistrust one another. 
It is uncommon for two 

authors to speak well 

of one another- 
We trust one aiiother. 

You wrong one another. 

Let us not h^jvione another. 

Each of them are good. 
Both are bad. 

Both shall be punished- 

Each of them shall be re- 
warded- 
I do not careybr either. 

She complains of both. 

He has been cheated by 

both. 
I trust to both. 

Give to both. 



^7^2 az//rf aurolt ^t^ troHip^o 

Je I'ai donne 'Attn autre. 
Je ne ccnnois ni Pun rd 

Vaiitre. 
NiVmini T autre ne lui a 
parle, ow, ils ne lui ont 
par^iS, ni Vun ni V autre, 
JViCun hi V autre n'eitidie; 
QU, ils n'etudient n'lFuTi 

niP autre. \_tre. 

lis se haissent I'^un Vau^ 
Nous nous connoissons 
Vun V autre. \tre. 

Ils se trompent A^Tz /'«2^- 
Ilsse v[\i^ex\X.ru:ndeV autre, 
W est rare a dtux aiueurs 

de rlire du bien I'ltn de 

.V autre. 
Nous nous fions Vun a 

Vautre. 
Vv us vous ^ites du tort 

Vun\ Vautre- 
Ne nous nuisons pas Vun 

a Vautre, 
L^unet Vautre sont bons^ 
Uun et V autre sont n)au- 

vais. 
Ils seront punis Vun kif 

Vautre. 
Ils seroTit recompenses 

Vzm cjf Vautre. 
Je ne me soucie ni deVun 

ni de Vautre. 
Eile se plaint de Vun tf 

de Vautre. 
II a eee trompe par Vrm 

<J* piiv Vautre. 
Je ne fie a Vun ilf a Vau- 
tre. 
Bonnez a Vu7i ^ k Vautre,. 



216 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Bhespe2ik%tGboth. 

[19.] 77ioz/^A you pretend 
to b^* ever so bold. 

Thoughhebt ever so rich, 
he is very covetous. 

W^natever h2ip'y talents a 
man nnay have, he ought 
to cultivate thena. 

however far I may be 
fto?n you, I shall not 
forget you. 

however rich you saw 
th m, tht^y are now 
ver pr,or, 

Hotvevcr cunning they ap- 
pear, thpy are sotne- 
t tries deceived. 

Though they pretend to 
ever so much honesty, 
they some J me s cheat 

Whatever friends he may 
ht'.ve, he will never 
succeed. 

Whatever smal] rewards 
you may give him, he 
Avill be gratefulfor them. 

Whatever ncht'^you have. 
Send me some nev/s,7y//c^~ 

evcr !t may be. 
H^ '^'n'^]\ be punished ivho-^ 

soever he may be. 
\}^K)*] Whoever you may 

be, they will renderyou 

jnstic . 
Whatever his sister may 

be, I will never marry 

her. 
Whateyjer her sisters may 

be, they are not so 

1 veiy as she is. 
Whcufver these conditions 



EUe parle a Vu7t 8c k Pan- 

tre, 
Qw^/^wehardi gw^vous af- 

fectiez d'etre. 
Quelque riche cju'il soit, il 

est fort avare* 
Quelques heureux talens 

qu'uvi horn me puisse a- 

voir, il faut qu'il les cul-. 

tive. 
Quelque i\o\v,r\€ que Iq sois 

de vous je ne vous ou- 

blierai pas. 
Quelque riches que vous 

les ayez vus, ils sont a 

present fort pauvres. 
Quelque rus^s ^/z^'ils pa- 

roissent, ils sont quelque 

foistromp^s. 
Quelque honnetes ^?/'ik 

pr^tendent etfe, ils 

trompent quelquefois. 
Quelques amis qu^W ait, il 

ne reussira jamajSa 

Quehpiea petites recom- 
penses que vous lni don- 
niez, il en sera recon-i 
noissant. [vous aye: 
Quelques richesses que 
Envoyez moi des nouvel- 
les^quelles (jtc\'\\t^ soient. ^ 
tl serapuni, quelqu'A soit«| 

y^Quelqtce vous soyez, otii 
vous rendra justice. I 

Quelle que soit sa soenr, je 
ne I epouserai jamais. 

Quelles que soient ses 
scenrs, elles ne sont pas 
<;i air»»ahlesqu'el1e. 

Quelles que soient ces cj^i^i' 



FREKCH TONGUE. 



t»ay be, I will never sub- 
mit to th-em* 
Whatever these goods are, 
send them to me. 

Do not rely upon the pro* 
inises of men, whatever 
t&ey may be* 

He will not hear of any 
accommodations, what- 
ever Xhty may be. 

I do not care for him who- 
ever he be. 

[21.] \%any body come ? 

Somebody told it you. , 

Did anybody speak toiiiSi 
or to her f [ther# ? 

Did you see any body 

She knows it from some- 
body» 

He took it from somebody^ 

She mistrusts somebody* 

Give this to somebody. 

They spoke to somebody. 

He wrote to somebody. 

Some fieofile say. 

iSome believe. 

I have thisnews^'om«o»ze 
fiersons, 

I told this news to some- 
body, 

[22.] Some of the prisoners 
made their escape. 

I know it from some oi 
those who were present. 

He has given some bread 
to some of those who 
were in need of it. 

Some of the robbers have 
been taken. 

Sopie of them will be 
hanged. 



XU7 

ditions; je ne m'y seu- 
mettrai jamaisi 

Relies guesQient ses mar- 
chandises, envoyez-les- 
moi. 

Ne vous fiez pas aux pro- 
messes des hommesi 
guelles ^'z^'elles soient. 

II ne veut entendre parler 
d'aucun accommode- 
ment, guei gu'il puisse 
etre. 

Je ne me soucie pas de lui, 
quel gu^il soit. 

Qutlqu'un est-il venu ? 

Quelqu'un vous I'a dit. 

^uelqu'un lui a-t-il patle ? 

Y avez vous vu qnelqu^un? 
Elle le sait de quelqu'un, 

II Ta pris de quelqu'un, 
Elle se mefie dfe quelqiCun. 
Donnez eel a ^ quelqu^un, 
lis out parl^ a guelqu'un, 
II a ecrit a quelqu'un* 
Quelqices-uns disent. 
Quelques-uns croyent. 
Je tiens cette nouvelle dc 

quelques fiersonnes, 
J*ar dit cette hoavelle a 

quelques personnel, 
QuelqueS'Uns des prFSon- 

niera se sont dvades. 
Je le sais de quelques-uns ^'t 

ceux qui etoient presens. 
II a donne du pain a quel- 

queS'Uns de ceux qui en 

avpient besoin. 
Quelques-uns des voleurs 

ont etc pris. 
QnelqueS'Uns d'euxseront 

pendus. 



ms 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Do you know any of those 

Ladies. 
J know some of them. 
Will you have anz/ of these 

oranges ? 
Crive me some. 
Buy some of those apples. 

Will you taste aw J/ of them? 

[22.] Whatever may hap- 
pen, he is always the 
same. 

Whatever you say, it shall 
be so. 

Whatever he may under- 
take* he will never suc- 
ceed. 

I know HvhateverYiQ is able 
to do. 

Do whatever you please. 

I dottot care for whatever 

he may do. 
Take whatever you like 

best. 
I am ready for whatever 

you please^ 
She applies herself to 

every thing that may 

be useful to her. 
4nything\ie'finX,^^ toyou> 

tell it me. 
Do not talk qf any thing. 

He succeeds in whatever 
he applies himself to. 

[24.] They will tell him 
the same thing, /o whom* 
soever he may address 
hi n» self. 

jHe does not pare for any 
person whatsoever* 

i saw nobody at aU. 



Connoisez-vous quelquea^^ 

unes d^ ces Dames ? 
J'en connois qudques^une^ 
Voulez-vousgw elqu es-unes , 

de ces oranges ? \unes. 
Donne z m'en qutlques- 
Achetez quelquesimes de 

ces pdmmes. 
En voulez-vous gouter 

qudquesnnes ? 
Quoi qu^W puisse arriver, 

11 est toujours le me me, 

Quoi que vous disiez, il 

en sera ainsi. 
Quoi qu'il puiss^ entre- 

prendre? il ne reussira 

jamais. 
Je sais tout ce qu^il peut 

faire. 
Faites tout ce que vous 

voudrez. 
Je ne me soucie pas de 

tout ce qu^il peut faire. 
Prenez tout ce que vous 

aimez le mieuSc. 
Je suis pret a. tout ce que 

vous voudrez. 
Elle s'applique a tout ce 

qui peut lui etre utile. 

Quoi que ce soil qu'il vous 

derive, dites-le-moi. 
Ne parlez de quoi que ce 

soit. 
t\ reussit a quoi que ce 

soit qu*\\ s'applique. 
On lui dira la me me chose, 

a qui que ce soit qu^ii s'a- 

dresse. 

II ne se soucie de qui que 

ce soit. 
Je n'ai vu qui que ce soif^ 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



2i$ 



He knows nobody at alL 

I spoke to nobody ivhat- 
ever. 

Donot talk to any body, 

[25.] Whosoever he be^ivho 
speaks to you, give hitn 
an answer, [the wrong. 

Whosoever he be^ he is in 

Whosoever speaks Eng- 
lish, shall be fined. 

Whosoever knows not his 
lesson shall be marked. 

[26.] The same author 
has made other books. 

I shall speak to him or to 
her myself. 

Write your letter your- 
self. 

They wrong themselves, 

£28.] Feofiie say, fwo/ile 
I3.\k, fieo/ile belie ve,/^eo- 
file fancy, fieofile do not 
know, 8cc. 

May one know ? 

Has one spoken to you ? 

May any one ask you^? 

Has any one seen you ? 

May one go along this 
street ? 

May one see the Queen's 
apartments ? 

Jt is said, it is reported, it 
is assured, it is doubted, 
it has been proposed, it 
has been resolved. 6cc. 

The letters have not yet 
been received. 

Gr^at preparations have 
been made for the re- 
ceptitm of . . . 

Great rejoicings have been 
made at St. James on 
the Queen's birth-day. 



11 ne connoit qui que ce soit- 
Je n'a: parle a qui que cc 

soit, [soit. 

Ne parlez a qui que ce 
Qui que ce soit qui vous 

parle, repondez-lui. 

Qui que cesoityW a tort. 
Quiconque parlera An^ 
giois, sera misal'amende^ 
Quiconqice ne sausa pas sa 

le^on, sera marqvid 
Le meme auteur a fait 

d'autres livres. 
Je lui parlerai mox-mem^^ 

Ecrivea votre lettre vous- 

meme, \mesp 

lis se font tort a eux tt^^- 

On dit, on parle, on croit, 

on s'imagine, ©^ ne sait 

pas, &C. 

Pent- on savoir ? 

Vous a-t-07z parle ? 

Peut-c?n vous demander ^ 

Vous a-t-on vu ? 

Peut-on passer par cette 
rue? 

Pent- 072 voir les apparte- 
mens de la Reii e ? 

On dit,on rapporte, on as-- 
sure, on doute, on a pro- 
pose, on a r^soiu, 8cc. 

On n'a fias encore re^ii 
les lettres. 

On a tait de grands pre- 
paratifs pour ia recep- 
tion de . . . 

On a fait de grandes re- 
jouissances a St. James* 
lejourde la naissaase 
de la Reine« 



220 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Great news has been re- On a regii de grandei^ 

ceived by the last mail, nouvelles par Tardi- 
nai re dernier, 

A courier has been dis- On a depeche un courier 

patched to the French a la cour de France. 

court. 

It is believed that war Ofi crolt qu'aw d^clarera 

nvUl be declared against la guerre a la France. 

France. 

It was sard so, but contra- On le disoit, mais onji re- 

ry news has been recei v- ^u des nouvelles contrai- 

ed this week. res cette semame-ci. 

SECTION VII. 

Supplying Pronouns^ le, eo, y. 

1. It^ or sOy are sometimes rendered by k: as, give 
^^ to me ; donnez-le-inoi ; I shall give it ioyoUjje vous 
Itdonnerai, 

2. Of ^ from, withy by^ about, &c. hbUy her, it, them^ 
some^ ant/, thenceyjrom t/ience, dec, by en, 

^. To it, there, tlierein, in it, in thein, about it, about 
them, &c. by yi as, do not speak" o/^zV to rae, ne m*en 
parleZ'pas ;« 1 will not be against \\,je ne m^y opfioserai 
fias. These pronouns are called supplying, because 
they stand not only for one preceding word, but some- 
times for whole sentences, and are chiefty used in- 
' stead of the pronouns, lui, elle ; eux,elles, 

4, Le and en a.Ye applied either to persons or things, 
and y to things only ; except in a few instances, and 
in an answer to a question ; as, do you think of me ? 
Yes, I do ; Peiisez-vous a moi ? Oni,fy pen^e, 

5. Le put after ce, when we speak of things, is de- 
clinable : as, are these your horses } Yes, they are : 
sont'Celd vos chervaux ? Qui, ce les sont, I say when 
we speak of things ; because when we speak of per- 
sons, we make use of the personal pronouns; as, are 
these your brothers? Yes, they are; sont-celdvos 

frh^es ? Qui, ce sonteux, and not ce les sont. 

It is the opinion of several that le is declinable after an ad- 
jective, in the feminine singular only , in the following and such 
like expressions spoken by women ; I was frighted, and I am 
so still : je fus effray^e & jeja suis encore : of others, tbat it 
woM be more proper to say, & je le suis cRcore, Fow^e^fl^ 



FRENCH TONGUE. 221 

Ihe Abbe Oirardy jRestaut, the FREi^eH Academy, &c. strt 
for the last ; so that there can be no doubt 

An author, in a book not long since printed, saying that 
where le sui)plies the place of a substantive, it agrees with it 
in gender and number, mistakes when he gives this instanccji 
•which is quite out of his rule : could j^ou act in the place of 
that physician ? Yes, 1 could : pourriez vous remplir la place 
de ce medecin ? Oui, je le pourrois. Every one may see, at 
the first view, that le has no relation to m^dedn, taken sepa- 
rately, but to place, or rather to the whole sentence ; oui, je 
la pourrois remplir^ meaning the place ; or rather, oui, je 
pourrois remplir la place de ce medecin. 

The best way in such cases would be, to leave out both the 
verb and the supplying pronoun, and give the following an^ 
swer in French : as, are you milliners, ladies ? Yes, we are 5 
etes vous coiffeuses, Mesdemoiselies I Oui, Monsieur; oui, Ma- 
dame ; oui. Mademoiselle, accoi'ding to the quality or the 
person you speak to, instead of saying oUi nous les sommes. Th^a 
may be done likewise m English by answering, yes, Sir ; yes. 
Madam. Bur some grammarians, like Don Quis^ote, dGltght 
in fighting against wind-mills. 

Supplying Pronouns exemplified for ihe Scholar'' $ 
Practice, 

[1] Will you give eVhim, Le lui donnerez-vous ? 

or her ? 

Have you given it him, or Le lui avez-vous donne ? 

her ^ 

I have promised zif him, or Je le liii ai promis. 

her. 

I have not promised it Je ne le lui as pas promiSo 

him, or her. 

Have you sent it to them } Le leur avez- vousehvoye? 

1 have not sent it to them* Je ne le leur ai pas envoyc^ 

Have you told it him^ or Le lui avez-vous dit ^ 

her } [her. 

I have not told it him^ or Je ne le lui ai pas dit. 

Do not tell it him, or hen Ne le lui dites pas. 

Do you know zY .^ i> savez-vous? 

She does not know it. Elle ne le sait pa3„ 

I do not know it-. Je ne ie sais pas* 

He told me somethhigi lim'aditquelquechose,/^ 

win you knov/ it ? voulez vous savoir ? 

Ask z^himj 1 will aot tell Denjannez-/(?-lui, je na 

?'^ you. veux i-^as voufi k dirft ? 

T 2 " 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Why will you not tell U 

me ? 
Because he forbade it me. 
Tell it me. 

I shall never teli it you. 
Do you believe it ? 
I do not believe it. 
She believes it, 
[2.] Give me some. 
Do not give any to him, or 

to her. 
Will you give any to him, 

or to her ? 
Do not speak of it to him, 

or to her. 
Did you talk of it to him, 

cr to her ? 
I did not say a word of it. 
Will you have any ? 
Take some, 

GxvQsoTtieto him»or tohcr. 
Will you be satisfied with 

it? 
I will not meddle with it. 
I am sorry for it, 
I am very glad of it. 
She wonders at it. 
She complains oj it. 
He is overjoyed at it, 
I will not hear any more 

about it' 
What do you say to it ? 
I wonder at it. 
She shall repent it, 
1 am sure ofU, 
Have you money ? Yes, I 

have some. 
She has Wme, 
Will you join with us ? 
I come^o??2 thence. 
Do you know any thing of 

it '^ 



Pourquoi ne voulez-vous 
pas me le dire ? [du. 
Parce-qu'il me /'a defen- 
Dites-/e«moi. 

Je ne vous/edirai jamais. 
i> croyez-vous ? 
Je ne/e crois pas. 
Elle le croit. 
Donne z m'^?/. 
Ne lui en donnez pas. 

Lui en donnerez-vous .^ 

Ne lui e?z parlez pas. 

Lui en avez-vous parle ? 

Je r\^en ai pas dit le mot. 

jS;z voulez-vous? 

Prenez ew. 

Donne z-lui en. 

En serez-vous content ? 

[ler. 
Je ne veux pas xrCen me- 
Ven suis fache. 
Ven suis bien aise. 
Elle %^en etonne. 
Elle s^en plaint. 
II s'cTirejouit. 
Je n'<?w veux plus entendre 

parler. 
Qw^en ditez-vous ? 
Ten suis surpris. 
Elle sV;z repentira, 
JV?z suis sur. 
Avez-vous de Sargent ^ 

Oui, yen ai. 
Elle n'm a point 
En voulez-vous etre .^ 
Ven viens. 
En savez-vou6 que^ue- 

chose ^ 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



22:'^ 



1 know nothing of it, \iU 
He shall know nothing of 
HsiV^you any I^ 
[3.] Have you been there .^ 
Have you thought of it ? 
I have not yet been there. 
She was foixed to it. 
Has he consented to it ? 
I shall never consent to it. 
They have been against z?. 
Do not think of it any 

more. 
The government have 

wisely provided^or i^. 
The King will not be 

against it. 
I am provided./or it. 
Will you go thither ? 
You do not look to it. 
Mind it. 
I shall mind it- 
[4.] I have added many 

new observations to it. 
Do you think of me ? Yes, 

I do. 
[5.] Are these your books? 

Yes, they are. 
Are these your pens } Yes, 

they are. 
Are those your father's 

horses ? Yes, they are- 
Are these your favours ? 

Yes, they are. 
Are these your senti- 
ments ? Yes, they are. 
Are these your reasons ? 

Yes, they are. 
Js^that your penknife ? 

Yes, it is. 
Are. they your sistera ? 

Yes, they are* 



Je Vien sais rien. 
11 Vien saura rien. 
Rn avez-vousf 
Favez-vousete.^ 

Y avez'Vous pens^ ? 
Je «V ai pas encore ete- 
Elle y a et^ forcde. 

Fa-t-il consenli ? 

Je Xiy consentirai jamais. 
lis s't/ sont opposes. 
NV pensez plus. 

Le gouvernement ^/ a sa- 

gement pourvu. 
Le Roi ne s'?/ oppose ra 

pas. 
Yy suis prepare. 

Y voulez'-^vous aller ? 
Vous \\y prenez pas 
Prenez-2/ garde, [garde. 
Vy prendrai garde. 

Vy ai ajoute plusieurs 

nouvelles re marques* 
Pepsez-vous a moi ? Qui, 

fy pense. 
Sont-ce la vos livrcs ? Oui 

ce /^5 sont. 
Sont-ce la vos plumes ^t 

Oui, ce les sont. 
Sont-ce la les chevaux de 

votre pere .•* Oui, ce Ub 

sont 
Sont-ce la vos amities ^. 

Oui, ce les sont. 
Sont-ce 1^ vos sentiments ? 

Oui, ce le8 sont. 
Sont-ce la vos raisons ? 

Oui, ce les sont. 
Est-ce la votre canif ^ 

Oui, ce^est. *■ 
Sont-ce la vos sceurs • 

Oui, ce sent e//6^. 



224 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Are these his brothers ? 

Yes, they are. 
Are these her cousins ? 

Yes, they are. 
Are these your brothers ? 

Ye», they are ? 
Is it your cousin ? Yes, it 

is. 
[6.] I have been sick, and 

1 am so still- 
Was there ever a girl 

more happy than I am ? 

Is there a girl more duti- 
ful than I am ^ 



Sont' ce la ses freres } Ouf* 

ce sont eux, 
Sont-ce la ses cousmes "t 

Oui, ce sont e//f5. 
Sont-ce 1^ vos freres ? Oui, 

ce sont eux. 
Est ce votre cousin ? Oui, 

c'estluL 
J'ai ^te m^ade,6c je le suis 

encore. 
Fut'il jamais une fille plus 

heureuse que je ne suis ? 

or rather que moi ? 
Y a-t-n une fille plus obe» 

issante que je ne suis r 

or rather que moi ? 



CHAPTER IV. 

Rules and Observations upon the Degrees of Com- 
parison* 

1. Obs.jp RAMMARIANSseem to be in a mistake 
vJT about the degrees of comparison ; for 
comparison implies a relation to anQther thing, which 
the comparison is made with ; whereas, the positive 
is the adjective in its natural state, without relation 
to another thi-ne: as, when I say, this house is pretty; 
cette makon est belle, there is indeed no comparison 
at all ; however, if by degrees of comparison we 
mean different manners of expressing the quality of 
something, there are three ; the positive, the com- 
parative, and the superlative. 

2. When the adjective is compared in an equals 
hik?:lier,or less degree* it is called comparative, which 
comparison is made in French by placing before it 
plus^ fnore ; moms, less ; sU so ; aussi^ as> &c. 

3 Plus and moins are commonly followed by the 
\i2iV^'cW que and when a verb comes after it, that 
verb has the, negative particle ne before it, butit maf 



FRENCH TONGUE. 225 

with propriety be left out : as, he was richer than was 
believed ; iletoit plus rkhe qii'on necroyoil, or qn^on 
croyoit. 

Except, 1st. when que signifies as ; 2dly, when the 
following verb is in the infinitive mood or preceded 
by a conjunction* ne must be left out ; as, he is nnore 
undisturbed in the country tiian in town ; il est plus 
tranquUle a la campagnei qu'^ la ville, or, que s'?/ vivoit 
d la ville. 

The last exception is very nice in practice ; many 
grammarians leave it out, and even one of them gives 
false notions contrary to theory and practice* He 
says in a N. B. ,*' When que signifies than in the 
** comparative degree, the verb which follows takes 
** the negative ne before it in French." 

4. Si^ so : tant, so much, as much, as many, so ma- 
ny, comparatively used, are always used negative- 
ly : as» yoii ^re not so rich as he ; vous n'etes pas si 
nche que lui j he has not so many friends as you, il 
o'a |>iis tant d'amis que vous. In other cases, aussi, 
or aiitanty is to be used ; except in an interrogation* 
where si 3,i}dtant may be used either with or without 
a negation, according to the interrogation being af- 
firmative or negative. 

5. W hen/2 to, ?noi7tSy autant^ tant, are immediately 
followed by a substantive^ that substantive must be 
preceded bv the preposition de : as, more money, 
plus iVargait ; less credit, 7?20Z72^ de cj^edit ; so nnuch 
pain, autant df: peine ; so many rings, tantde bagues. 

When the verb ajjoir^ or etrey is before /z to, moins, 
autanty &c. and the same verb follows que^ the second 
\Qxh a-voiv QX etre^ is more properly left out in the 
French, though expressed in the English : and we 
are contented with que and the pronoun only, or any 
other noun : as. you have more money than I, or we 
have ; vous avez fdits d*argent que^moi, or que nous ' 
or sometimes vous avez plus d" argent que je n'en ai, 
or qne nous n'en avons ; Miss A. is as sensible as she 
\% Mademoiselle A. est aussi sensee qu^elle^ and not 
qu^elle est. Except when que is followed by a con- 
junction, or by the same verb in the infinitive mood^ 
with a government after it, or a preposition : as, you 
have more pleasure than if you had great riches ; 
vous avez plus^de plaisir, que si vous aviez deaucoup 



226 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

de richesses, or que d'avoir beaucoufi de richesses; you 
arfi "rore happy than to be niarried. vons etes filus 
heureux que si vous etiez marie ^ or que d'etre ;nan<?. 

7, When filus and moim are adverbs of quantity, 
or meet with a noun of number, the word than whicli 
immediately follows mor^ or less, is expressed by the 
preposition fl?^; as, he has more than ten guineas; 
il a plus de dix guinees* 

8 When the quality is raised to the highest degree, 
or depressed to the lowest, it is called superlative. 

9. The definite articles, le^ la^ ^c. are put before 
plus, moins, tneilleur, frire, &c. in the superlative de- ^ 
gree: and, when the superlative is followed by the ■ 
noun with which the comparison is made, this noun j 
must be in the second case : as, he is the best of my j 
friends ; il est le meilleur de mes amis, - 

10. When the superlative is followed by a verb* ; 
that verb must be in the subjunctive mood, preceded ! 
by quiy donty or que: as, the most happy woman j 
alive ; lafemme lafdv^ heureuse qui soit ; the most > 
happy man that 1 know, Vhomme lefilus heureux que ' 
jc connoisse. 

11. Sometimes a quality is mentioned in the high- 
est degree without comparison : and this is done in 
French by placing adverbs of exaggeration before 
it: as, very rich, tres riche ; very polite, trds poll: 
infinitely dbliged, infiniment oblige. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



227 



rt 03 rt O 



Co 



s o = o 

^ c a 5 



t^ (D CD 

B o C M 
w -». X 5b 

§ «= S^ w 
i^ 3 ^ * 



Co 



I. 

3. 



.^g^^sr^^S' 




g S g s 11? 



T! "3^ -3 5 B 3 ' 

s y- c2 5 aa 

^ ^ M M ft? P 

*-» r'. ci w ?; S- 



< 

w 




9 






^5^ 



Crt! 



^ 



4 

Q 
•S 



o 
o 

a: 



- p o »5 rt g 2 > 

^|gggs"^ ^ 

BU 3 3 5 3 

C C 2 p (^N fN 

n) « 2 p p p 52- 
^ «^ ^ vS" sr j^ ^ 




228 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



The Degrees of Comparison exemplified -for the 
Scholar^ s Practice. 



[2.] hou<donismore popu- 
lous than Paris* 

France is larger than 
England, Ireland, and 
Scotland* 

The streets of London 
are wider than those of 
Paris. 

My snuffbox is prettier 
than yours. 

My books are dearer than 
yours. 

He is idler than his bro- 
ther. 

Your father is richer than 
his. 

His house is greater than 
yours. 

[3.] They are more for- 
ward than I thought. 

He gave me more moBey 

than I asked for. 
You have met with more 

obstacles than you 

thought. 
I have found it easier than 

I foresaw 
They have more friends 

than you believe. 
He has lost 7nore than he 

has won. 
You have asked for less 

than was your due. 
She has worked more than 

her task* 



Londres est plus peuple 

que Paris. ^i 

La France est filtis eten- fl 

due que I'Angleterre, 

I'lrlande & PEcosse. 
Les rues de Londres sont 

plus larges que oelles 

de Paris* 
Ma tabatiere est /jIus 

belle que la v6tre. 
Mes livres spnt /ilus chers 

que les votres. 
11 est Jilus paresseux que 

son frere. 
Votre pere ^^ifilus riche 

que le sien, 
Sa maisonest/z/«sgrande 

que la votre. 
lis sont filus avances que 

Itne croyois, or que je 

croyols. 
11 m'adonne/z/ws d'argent 

que je demandois.* 
Vous avez trouve filtis 

d' obstacles que vous ne 

pensiez. 
J*y ai trouv^/zte de facility 

que je ne pr^.voyois* 
lis ont filus d'amis que 

vous ne croyez* 
II a perdu jilus qu'il ira 

gagne. 
Vous avez demand^ moms 

qu'il Tie vous etoit du. 
Elle a fa\t filUs d'ouvrage 

gtc'on ne iiil avoit pret- 
erit. 



* In all the follov/ing examples you may suppress the ne* 
gatidn ne. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



229 



I<iid not ask for more than 

was my clue. 
Have you not undertaken 

Twor^ than you were able 

to perform ? 
She is happier than if she 

ivas married. 

He is inore contented with 

her, than if he Ivad all 

the gold of Peru- 
I am quieter in my room 

than if I were in com- 
pany. 
You look more sickly (haJi 

nvhilst you were in the 

country. 
They are less troubled in 

the country than ifthey 

were in town. 
[4.3 He is not so rich as it 

is said> 
^le is not ^0 old as you 

believe- 
I am not so idle as m'y 

brother. 
We are not so much sur- 
^ prised as you think. 
You are not so brave as 

you pretend to be. 
They are not so learned 

as they would make us 

believe- 
They are net so proud as 

to despise your praise?. 

^he isnot so vain as to lis- 
ten to your flatteries. 
'' I have not won so much as 

I thought. 
He has not lost so much 
as vou* 

U 



Je n'ai pas demand^ /i/w^ 

qu'il ne m*etoit du. 
N 'avez- vous pas entrcpris 

jilus que vous ne pou- 

viez executer ? 
Eile est plus heu reuse que 

d*eire mariee, oxx que s\ 

elleetoit mariee- 
11 est filU'S content avec 

elle que «'il avcit tout 

Tor du Peroii. 
Je suis/z/zAS'trs.r quille dans 

ma chambre que si j'^- 

tois en compagnie, 
Vai]sparoissez/2/w5 mala- 

de queloi'sque vous etiez 

a la campagne- 
lis sont moins deranges a 

la canipagne que ^Tis 

etoient a la viDe. 
11 n'est pas *2 riche qu'on 
^ le dit. 
Elle n'est pas si agee que 

vous croyez. 
Je ne suis pas ^z paresseux 

que mon frere. 
Nous ne sommes pas si 

surpris que vous pensez. 
Vous n'etes pas si braves 

que vous dites. 
lis ne sont pas si savajis 

qu'ils voudrcient nous le 

faire croire. 
Elles ne sont pas si fie res 

que de mtpriser vos 

louanges. 
Elle n est pas srvaine que 

d'ecouter vos flatteries. 
Je n'ai pas ^a72^gagne que 

je pensois. 
II n'a pas taut perdu que 

vous- 



230 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



[5.] She has not so much 
money as you think. 

We have not so much self- 
love as to prefer our- 
selves to yon 

You have not so much bu- 
siness as to hinder you 
from applying yourself 
to the study of the 
French language. 

They have not so much 
courage as they pretend 
to. 

They have not so much 
pleasure in the country 
as in town. 

[6.] I am as much surpris- 
ed as you. 

He is as learned as his 
elder brother. 

She is as lovely as her sis- 
ter. 

We are as quiet as you. 

You are as brisk as he. 
They are as rich as yoiir 

father. 
They are as witty as his 

sisters. [you. 

I have as many friends as 
He is as covetous as ever. 

§he has as much beauty 

as formerly. 
tVe have as much trouble 

as you. 
You have as many books 

as I have* 



Elle n'a pas /an^c? 'argent 

que vous pensez. 
Nous n'avons pas tamt 

d'amour-propre, que de 

nous pref^rer a vous. 
Vous n'avez pas tant d'oo- 

cupations, que vous ne 

puissiez vons appliquer 

a I'etude de la langue 

Fran^oise. 
lis n'ont pas tant de cou- 
rage qu'ils se flattent 

d'en avoir. 
Elles n'ont pas tant de 

plaisir ^ la campagne 

qu'a la ville* 
Je suis aussi surpris que 

vous* 
11 est aussi savant que son 

frere aine. 
Elle est aw«si aim able que 

sa soeur. 
Nous sommes«W55i tran- 

quilles que vous. 
Vous etes aussi vif que luL 
lis sont aussi riches que 

votre pere. 
Elles sont aussi spirituel- 

les que ses sceurs. 
y2i\autantd^2im\^(\\xe vous« 
II a autant c^'avaiice que 

jamais. 
Elle a autant de beaute 

qu'autrctois. 
Nous avons autant de 

peine que vous. 
Vous avez autant de livrcs 



que moi. ' 

And not qu^ vous etes, &c. See ruie 3. 



FRENCH TXDNGUE, 



231 



They haveaa muchhonour 

as your countrymen. 
They have as much love 

for the sciences as their 

brothers. 
Your suit is more worn out 

than mine. 
Her apron is cleaner than 

her sister's. 
You are more learned 

than I am. 
He is older than you. 
She is more lovely than he. 

You are older than she is. 
[7.] My brother has more 

books than you. 
_ We have more pleasure 

than they. 
She has more lovers than 

her sister. 
I have lost more than ten 

guineas. 
She has brought him for 

her portion more thaii 

ten thousand pounds. 
She has less vivacity than 

her sister. 
We have less trouble than 

you. 
They have spent more 

than a thousand pounds 

a year. 
He owes more than four 

thousand pounds. 
He has written more than 

ten letters to-day. 
I am more than half per* 

suaded of it. c 
My brother is more than 

twenty years old. 
I am no more than twelve 

years old. 



lis ont autant rf'honneur 

que vos compatriotes. 
Elles ont autant rf'amour 
pour les sciences que 

leurs f re res. 
Votre habit est plus use 

que le mien. 
Son tablier est filus blanc 

que celui de sa sceur. 
Vous etes plus savant que 

iTioi. 
II est plus ag^ que vous, 
Elle est plus aimable que 

lui. 
Vous Hesplus ag^ qu'elle, 
Mon frere a plus de livres 

que vous. 
Nous avons/2/w5 de plarsir 

qu'eux. 
Elle a/2/M5ci'amansque sa 

soeur. 
J'ai perdu plus dedix gui- 

nees. 
Elle lui a apporte en man- 
age plus de dix mille li- 
vres sterling. 
Elle a moins de vivacit€ 

que sa sceur. 
Nous avons moi?is de peine 

que vous. 
lis ont d^pense plus de 

mille livres sterling par 

an. 
II doit plus de quatre mille 

livres sterling. 
II a ecrit plus ^/f dix lettres 

aujourd'hui. 
J'en suis plus d'a moitie 

persuade. 
Mon frere a plus de vingt 

ans. 
Je n'ai pas plus de douze 

ans. 



232 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



I have oiore friendship for 
him than he has for me. 

She has more money than 
I have. 

I have not more cunning 
than they. 

I take-more painsthan you. 

You have less pride than 
he. 

He is tkc moat skilful phy- 
sician in the whole city. 

[8.] He is the idlest of 
them all. 

She is the loveliest of them 
all. 

England has given birth 
to the most sl^iliul philo- 
sophers in Europe. 

She is the most lovely lady 
1 know. 

It is the greatest piece of 
folly you can ever com- 
mit. 

He is the greatest ninny 
you ever saw. 

llie French is the most 
useful language one can 
possibly learn. 

I am vertj glad of it. 

I am very much concern- 
ed at it. 

He is a x;ery polite man. 

He is very diligent. 

She is very lovely. 

I am much indebted to you. 

I am infinitely obliged to 
you. 

His father is very rich. 

We are very much per- 
' suaded of it- 



J'ai /i/w5 d'amitie poiir lui 

qu'il n'en a pour moii 
Elle a plus d*argent qiie 

moi. 
Je n'ai pas }\lus de finesse, 

qu'eux. 
Je prends fdus de peine 

que vous. 
Vous avez moins ci'orgueii 

que lui. 
C'est le filus habile m^de- 

cin de toute la ville. 
C'est le plus paresseuxde 

tons. 
C'est la plus aimable dfc 

toi>tes. 
L'Angleterre adonnenais^ 

sance aux plus habiles 

philosophes de I'Europe 
C'est la plus aimable De- 
moiselle que jeconnoisse. 
C'est la plus grande sottise 

c/ue vous/iz^i^^iez jamais 

faire. 
C'est riiomme le plus sot 

que vous puissiez voir. 
Le Frangois est la languo 

laplus utile qu^onpuisbe 

apprendre. 
J'en suis dien aise. 
J'en suis rrts-mortifie. 

C'est un homme ires polL 

II est tres diligent. 

Elle est tres aimable. 

Je vous suis ^rt-5-redevabIe. 

Je vous suis infiniment 
oblie;e. 

Son p^rc est tres riche. 

Nous en sommes tres per- 
suades- 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



I am your most humble 
servant. 

Your most obedient ser- 
vant. 

[ft] He is tJie best man in 
the world. 

Your pen is better than 
mine. 

French fruit is better than 
English ones. 

[10.] It IS the best reason 
you can tell him- 

They are the best people 

in the world- 
His exercise is better done 

than your's. 
The least thmg makes me 

catch cold. 
His writing is very bad ; 

but yours is ivorse. 

Let the worst come to the 

worst 
I shall do it to the best of 

my power. 
He obliged me the least of 

any. 
It is the least thing you can 

do. 



Je suis voire ^r(?s-humble 

serviteur. 
Votre ^re«-obiessant seiVi- 

teur. 
C'est le meilleur horn me 

du monde. 
Votre plume est mdUeure 

que ia mieime. 
Les iruits de France sont 

meilleures que ceux d'- 

Angleterre. 
C'est la meilleure raison 

que vous puissiez lui 

donner. 
Ce sont les meUleurs gens 

du nionde. 
Son theme est inieiioc fait 

que le voire, 
1^3. moindre chose m'en- 

rhume. 
Son ecriture est tres mau- 

vaise ; mais la votre est 

pire. 
Aufiis aller. 

Je le ferai le mieux qu'il 

me sera possible- 
II m'a oblige le moins de 

tons. 
C'est le moins que vous 
., puissiez faire. 



U2 



234 A GRAMMAR OF THK 

CHAPTER V. 
Rules and Observations vpen Verbs, 



^ 



ri^HE verb agrees in person and number with its 
i subject or nominative case. AH nouns what- 
ever in grammatical construction, are of the third 
person; as, the air preoossesses, the behaviour en- 
gages ; ^'air previent les- manierea eng agent. 

Except when an address is made to a person or thing ; then 
the noun (answering to what is called the vocative case in 
Latin) is of the second person ; as, vain promises of men;^ 
you have deceived me 1 vaines promesses des honmies, voua 
m'avez tromp^. 

2. Two or more nouns in the singular number have 
verbs agreeing with them in the plural number ; ^ as» 
the father and the mother have consented to it ; k 
jiere ist la mere y ont consentu 

Except when thej^ are joined by the disjunctive 
conjunction ou ; as, on le fiere ou la mere y a consentL 

S. The verb following the conjunction ni is put in 
the plural, when the two nominative cases oi the 
verb do or receive the action in the same time ; as, 
neither mildness nor force can move him ; nila dou- 
ceur ni la force ne peuvent Vemouvoir. 

The singular is used in such like cases ; as, ni M. le due, ni 
M, le eonte ne sera ambassadeur, neither the duke nor the 
earl will be ambassador ; because there was to be only one 
ambassador. 

4. Obs. If many nouns or pronouns, singular or plural, are 
separated by mais Hen ^ tout jusqii'd^ & meme, &c. then the 
verb agrees in number and person with the noun or pronoun 
which follows those words ; as, not only his estate and health, 
but also his reputation has suffered by it ; non-seulement ses 
biens & sa sant6, mais encore sa reputation en a souffert. 

* Sometimes, after an enumeration of particulars, the verb 
follows in the singular number ,^ and is understood as applied 
to each of tlie preceding terms ; as, supper was delicious ; 
sprightliness, good Immour, were spread round the table: le 
souper fut d^licieux ; Tenjouement, la belle humeur, st ?*<f- 
fmi(Ut autour de la table. 



ERENCH TONGUE, :2oo 

5. Collective* partitive nouns, as, infinite^ nombre 
la filupart, qiianiiU^ troufie^ multitude ^\ &c. followed 
by a noun in the plural, require the verb in the plu- 
ral : as, most part of men are of that sentiment ; la 
plufiart des homines, sont cfe ce sentiment. 

When they are used by themselves, they generally govern 
the verb in the plural, if they bave a relation to a noun in the 
plural which is understood. La plupart, according to the 
French Academy , almost always governs the vierbin the plural,, 
whether the noun to which it relates be in the plural or not. 

N. B, A.11 those collective nouns, followed by a noun in the 
singular, require the verb in the singular. 

6. Whencf is the nominative to the verb etre^ it is 
generally put in the singular : as, it is we, c'estnowi-; 
it is you, c'est vous : except the verb be followed by a 
third person in simple tenses : as, it is they ; ce sont 
eux. In an interrogative sentence the verb is com- 
monly put in the singular : as, is it they ; est-ce eux 1^ 

7. After the determining pronoun qui, the verb is 
put in the same number and person to which it re- 
lates : as, you who speak, vous qui parlez : we who 
tstudy, nous qui etudions. 

8. The verb is commonly repeated in French, 1st. 
when the first memberof the sentence is affirmative, 
and the second negative ; or the first negative, and 
the second affirmative,; as, one ought to expect every 
thing of God, and notlrng of one's self, on doit atten- 
dre tout deDieu, ^ ne rien attendre de soi-jneme ; our 
reputation does not depend on the caprice of men, 
but on the prnise-worthy actions which we do, notre 
refiutation ne defiendpas du caprice des kommes, mais 
elle depend des actions louables que nousfaisons, 

* They are called partiiive,aT\c[ not general, because they 
denote some parts of a whole. For want of making this d'li- 
iinciion, Restaut seems to contradict himself; t or, /»a^e 34 of 
his French Grammar, 9ih edition, he says, that /ore ^, peuple, 
armee, are collective nouns; and page 174, he says, that when 
the verb has for its uomifiative a collective noun in the singu. 
lar, used by itself, or followed by a noun in the plural, the 
verb is put in tlie plural, which is false ; because yor^^, peu- 
pie, arm^e, always govern the verb in the singular. 

f Bxcept froaa these, le quart, la moitie^ Ic tisrs^ which a^* 
^ays goTern the verb in the siDgiilar. 



236 A GRAMMAR OF THE ^ 

2dly. When the verb is active in the first member, 
and passive or reflected in the second ; as, lazy men 
are not esteemed, because they do not deserve it ; 
on n^estime fias lesfaineanSyfiarcequHls ne miritent 
pas (Tetre estimes. 

N. B. Three things are chiefiy to be considered ia. 
verbs, viz, the use of tenses, the use of moods, and 
the government of verbs. 

SFXTION I. 

The use of Tenses. 

l.The present denotes the actual or habitual action 
or passion of the subject; as, ;Vrm, which answers 
to the Enghsh, 1 write, I do write, I am writing. 

This tei>se is often used in familiar discourse instead of the 
future, but then it must be joined to some words which denote 
futurity ; as, 1 shall be with you in a moment, je suis a vous 
dans ua moment. It is also used as in all other tongues, par- 
ticularly in the French, in orations, poetry, or set discourses^ 
instead of some other tenses, to represent an action past in a 
more lively and emphatical manner. 

2. The imperfect tense represents the time of aa 
event under two points of view, (or relative circum- 
stances,) 1st- As present at the time of an event 
past, and mentioned fn the second part of a sentence. 
2d. As past in respect to the time when we speak ; 
as, I was reading when you came into my room ; je 
lisois quand vous entrates dans ma chambre. The 
action of reading is past in respect of the time, of 
which I speak, but I mark it as present in respect of 
the thing of which I speak, which is your entrance 
nto my- room. This tense is always resoivabie iu 
English by nvas ,ov were, with \.\it fiarticifile firescnt. 

The imperfect is used, when we speak of an action entirely 
past, reiterated several times ; as, when I was at Paris, \ 
went very often to the Opera, quand j'etois a Paris fallois 
fort sou vent a TOpera. 

2dly, It is used when an action meets with an impediment, 
as, I iiad a design to speak to him, but -^^ivois dessein de lui 
parler, mais— 



FRENCH TONGUE. 237 

3dly, When we have been witnesses of some action, aiid 
•tl»e verb is followed by guand, lorsc/iie, or such like word ; as, 
I was in London when George III. was crowned ; j^eiois a 
Loiidres quand George 111, fut couronn^. 

4thly, When we speak of the good or bad qualities of dead 
creatures, rational or irrational ; as, Lewis XIV. loved war 
too much ; Louis XIV. aimoit trop ia guerre. But when we 
speak of persons still living, and no time is mentioned, we use 
the compound of the present, as the King of Prussia made 
great conquests ; le Roi de Prasse ajait de grandes conqu^tes; 

5tlily, When we speak of the age of a dead person ; as, 
George II. was 77 years old when he died ; George II. avoit 
77 ans quand il mourut. 

Cthly, When we speak of the inconstancy of somebody ; 
as, this man did alter every day his design ; cet homrae 
changeoit tous les jours de dessein. 

7thly, It is used after si instead of the subjunctive mood, 

expressed by should, could, would, in Knglish ; as, if yoii 

' would come, si vous vmiliez venir ; if virtue should reign, si 

]a vertu r^gnoit : this tense answers;to, 1 did vvriUe, I used to 

write, J Vcrit'Ot'5. 

3. The prbterperfect denotes an acfion' entirely 
past» in a time also entirely past : as, he ^vas happy 
last week, last month, last year; il iwx. fieureux la 
^c?naine /lassSe, le viois ftasst, ranrte fiassee. If the 
time be not entirely past, we make use of the com- 
poued of the present tense: as, he was happy this 
week, this month, this year ; il a etc hcureux cette 
semaine-ci^ ce ?7iois'Ci, cette armee-cU 

The preterperfect is used when we spesJc of an action done 
but once or very seldom, and the time is specified : as, Ed- 
ward ill. took Calais the 3d of x\ugust, 1347; Edouard 111. 
prit Calaiis, le 3 J'Aout, 1347. If the time be not specified, 
we may indifterentiy use the preterperfect, or the compound 
of the present ; as, Edouard III. apHs Calais, or prit Calais. 

We commonly make use of the compound of the present 
tense before depuis^ since ; as, there has been a great battle 
since I saw you ; il y a eu une gvande bataille, depuis que je 
ne vous ai vu. Sometimes we make use of thiB tense instead 
of the compound of the future ; as, will you have done soon ? 
avez'vous bientot fait, instead of aurez-vous bientdt fait ? 

4. The future is used as in other languages. 



238 



A GRx\MMAR OF THE 



The tenses of Fei'bsy exemplified for the Scholar's 
Practice, 



[Chap V. 1.] The sun 

shines. 
The summer is a very 

agreeable season, [me. 
Winter does not please 
The stars begin to ap- 
pear. 
The days are very much 

lengthened. 
These meadows are very 

beautiful. 
[2.] The brother and sis- 
ter wej^e against it. 
The father and mother 

have consented to it. 
[3.] Neither he nor she 

have spoken to him, or 

to her. 
Either your brother, or 

your sister, has told it 

you. 
[5.] A vast number of 

people are duped by 

one arioiher. 
A great number of ships 

are ready to sail. 

Most part of the goods 
have been sold. 

[6.] It is I who have seen 
it. 

It is we who have hinder- 
ed him. 

It is you who have made 
the noise. 

It is they who have heard 
it. 



Le soleil luit. 



L'ete est une saison tres 

agreable. 
L'hiver ne me fllatt pas. 
Les etoiles com?nencent k 

paroitre. 
Les jours sont tres aloh- 

Ces prairies sont tres bel- 
les. 

Le frere & la saur s'y 
sont opposes. 

Le pere & la mere y ont 
consenti. 

Ni I'll ni elle ne lui ont 
parle. 

Ou votre frere, ou vctre 
soeur, vous Pa dit. 

Une infinite de gens sort3 

les dupes les unsdes au- 

tres. 
Un grand nombre devais- 

seaux sont prets a faire 

voile. 
La plupart des marchan- 

dises out €X.€ vendues. 
C'est moi qui Vai vu. 

CWnous qui Vavons em- 

peche. 
C'est vous qui avez fait le 

bruit. 
Ce sont eux c^mVont en- 

tendu. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



239 



|Sect* 1. 2.] When I was 

young, I much loved 

play. 
She had a great many a- 

dorers in her time. 
I had a mind to write to 

him. 
He had 2i mind to come 

and see you. 
When I was in London, I 

nsed to go very often to 

the play. 
£3.] You scarce were gone, 

when he arrived- 
i eocfiected nothing else. 

He wa5 afraid to interrupt 

you. 
;She was not so angry as 

she seemed to be. 
%nDas in the Park when he 

spoke to you. 
f was in London when the 

duke of Cumberland 

died, 
fie seemed much surpris- 
ed at that news. 
Where were you,when the 

King was crowned ? I 

was in France- 
He was very sprightly in 

his youth. 
He had B. great many 

frieuds in London. 
He was not persuaded of 

what he said. 
£5.} My father was seven- 
ty years old when he 

died. 
His mother ^(75 forty years 

old when she married 

aerain. 
U'l ^fyow would sfieak to 

him, (JT to her* 



Quand jVVoi^jeune, j'm- 
7nois beaucoup le jeu, 

Elleax'oir beaucoupd'ado- 

rateurs dansson temps. 

Yavois envie de lui eerire. 

II avoit envie de venir 

vous voir, 
Quand i*etois ^ Londres, 

y allots tres souvent a la 

comedie. 
A peine ^^z>z-vous parti, 

qu'il arnva. 
Je ne m^attendois k rien au- 
tre chose. 
II avoit peur de vous inter- 

rompre. 
Elle T^V^ofr pas <*' fach^e 

qu'elle le Jiaroissoit. 
Vetois au Pare quand il 

vous pari a. 
y^tois a Londres, quand 

le due de Cumberland 

mourut. 
II Jiaroissoit fort surpris 

de cette nouvelle 
Ou €tieZ'\ous, quand le 

Roi fut couronne? y^tois 

en France. 
II etoit tres vif dans sa 

jeunesse. 
II avoit beaucoup d'amis 

h. Londres. 
II n^etoit pas persuade de 

ce qu'il disoit. 
Mon p^re avoit soixante 

6c dix-ansj quand ii 

mourut. 
Sa mere avoit quarante 

ans quand elle se rema- 

ria. 
Si vous lui parliez^ 



9A0 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



If you tvould write to him, 
or to her. 

I/' she would be angry at it. 

If I should go and see him. 

J/^ he would emfiloy the 
half of his tiwHi. 

If she would apply her- 
self to music. 

If we could know* 

If they would afiply them- 
selves to so me thin i^ use- 
ful. 

If they would listen to 
fiatterfes. 

[8.] I have writteii^\y. let- 
ters to-day. 

Have you seen him to- 
day ? 

I did not speak to him, or 
to her» to-day. 

Where have you been to- 
day ? 

I have been in the Park. 

I 5a7y him to-day. 

She went to the play this 
week. 

He has not studied this 
week. 

I wm^ into the country 
this week. 

You have lost your time 
this week. 

What have you done this 
week ? 

W^e have spent a great 
deal of money this week. 

You have done more work 
than I this week- 

This month has not been 
v'ery sharp. 



Si vous lui ecrlviez, 

Si elle s'enfdchoit. 

Sije Valloia voir. 

5'il employoit la moitie de 

son temps. 
Si elle s^appliquoit a la 

musique. 
Si nQus> savions. i, 

5*) Is s^appliquoient a quel-* 

que chose d'utile. 

5i elles pretoknt Torcille 

aux flatteries. 
J'ai ecrit six lettres au- • 

jourd'hui. 
L'ax'^z vous Yu aujour-- 

d'hui ? 
Je ne lui ai pas pa7'le au- ] 

jourd'hui. 
Ou avez' vons 6t€ aujouv- ■ 

d'hui? 
J'ai ete au Pare. 
Je Vai vu aujourd'hui. 
Elle a ete a la comedle 

cette semaine. 
li u^a pas etudid cette se- 

maine-ci* 
Vai et^'ii la campagne cet- 
te semaine- ci. 
Vous avez perdu votre 

temps cette semaii^e-ci, 
Qu'avez vous fait cette - 

semaine-ci? 
Nous avons depense beau- \ 

coup d'argent cette se- 
maine-ci. 
Vous avez fait \A\x^ d'ou- 

vrage que moi cette se^ 

maine-ci. 
Ce mois-ci n'a pas ete 

tres rude. 



FRENCH TONGUE, 



241 



It ivas very hot this 
month; [month. 

It has rained all this 
It did n')t snow this month. 
It itHis exceeding cold 

this month. 
They have had a plentiful 

harvest thirs year. 
This year has notdeen ve- 
ry favourable to me. 
You have beeti very lucky 

this year. 
They have lost a great 
deal of money this year. 
I have been in France this 

year. 
She died this year. 
He has been very sick this 

yea I 
He is amrived from the 
West-Indies this year. 
I wrote six letters yester- 
day.* 
Did you see him yester- 
day ? 
I did not sfieak to him, cr 

to her yesterday. 
Where did you go yester- 
day ? I went to the Park. 
I saw him yesterday. 
] met with her yesterday 

in the street. 
She vjent to the play last 

week. 
He didnoX.sttidyl^.-'X week- 

I went into the country 

last week. 
You lost your time last 

week. 



II a fait tres chaud ce 

mo!S-ci. 
n afilu tout ce mois-cf. 
11 n'c pas ncige ce mois~ci. 
W 2ifait tres froid ce mois- 

ci. 
lis ont ez^une molsson a- 

bondante cette annee-ci .. 
Cet^e annee-ci ne m'^ pas 

M tres favorable.^ 
Vous avez M tres heu- 

reux cette annee-ci. 
lis ont perdu beaucoup 

d'ar}2;ent cette annee-ci- 
Vai M en France cette 

ann^e-ci. [ci. 

Ellee5'^ morte cette annee- 
11 a et6 tres malade cette 

annee-ci. 
Westrevenu des Indes-Oc- 
cidentales cette annee-ci. 
V^crvvis hier six lettres. 

Le vites ■ vou s h ier ? 

Je ne lui fiarlai pas hier. 

Oufdtes-VQus hier ? IqJus 

au Pare. 
Je le vis hier. 
Je la rencontrai hier dans 

la rue. 
Elle fut k la comedie la 

semaine passee. 
II i^etudia pas la semaine 

passee. 
^^fus a la campagne la 

semaine passee. 
Vous fierdite^ votre temps 

la &emaine passee. 



* 1 repeat purposely, the foregoing examples, to render the 
'iifferent use of the tenses more intelligible to the learner. 



^^ 



A GRxlMMAR OF THE 



What did you do last 

week ? 
We s/ient a great deal of 

money last week. 

You did more work than I 
last week. 

Last month was not very 

sharp. 
It was exceeding hot last 

month. 
It rained all last raontlv 
It did not snow last month. 

It was exceeding cold last 
month. 

They had a plentiful har- 
vest last year. 

Last year was not very 
favourable to me. 

You were very lucky last 
year 

They lost a great deal of 
money last year* 

I went to France last year. 

She died last year. 

She was very sick last 

year. 
He arrived (rotn the West- 

Ir dies last year. 
1^9-1 How /lave yon done 

since f had the pleasure 

o> s-eing you ? 
I have been very sick since 

i arrivedfrom the East- 
Indies. 
I have received no tidings 

of him, since he went 

away* 



Quey?^e5-vous la semaine 

passee ? 
Nous defiensdmes beau* 

coup d'argent lasemaine 

passee. 
Voxx^Jites plus d'ouvrage 

que moi la semaine 

passee. 
Le mois passe n^fut pas 

tr^srude. 
11^^ tres chaud le mois 

passe. 
Wplut tout le mois passe. 
II neneigea pas le mois 

passe. 
II ^t tres froid le mois 

passe. 
lis ontez^une moisson abon- 

dante I'annee passee. 
L'anr.^e passee ne mejict 

pas tres- favor able. 
Vous futes tres heureux 

Pannee passee. 
Ils/2erfi^zr6'n;beaacoup d'ar- 

gent I'annee passee. 
J'allai en France I'annee 

passee. [see. 

EUe Twown/^ I'annee pas- 
YA^fat tres malade Taia- 

nee passee . ^ 
II arriva des Indes Occi- 

dentales I'annee passee. 
Comment vous etes vous 

Jiort^^ depuis que je n'ai 

eu le plaisir de vous voir? 
Vai et6 tres malade flf^/ze//* 

queje J^uis arrive des 

lodes Orientales. 
Je Viai pas re^u de ses nou- 

vellesj depuis qu'il est 

parti. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 243 

Have you seen hirrs, since Uavez vous vu, depuls 

he arrived from France ? qu'il est arrive deFrance ? 

'W\ii'i^ have you bee7iySince Ou ar-e-z-vous ete, defium 

you went out ? que voas etes sorti ? 

SECTION II. 

The Use of the Suhjunctive Mood. 

1. Tiie subjunctive mood is used after que or qui, preceded 
by a verb denoting doHbtjwish, lear5Command, iirohibition,&c. 
such are craindre, prier, douter, souhaiier, permettre, com- 
mander, defendre, &c. as, his father hath forbidden him to go 
thither ; son pere a d^fendu qii^W y alidt* But when anjr of 
those verbs govern a noun or pronoun, the verb following is 
put in the infinitive mood commonly with tlie i)reposition de 
before it ; as in the foregoing^ example, son pere lui a defendu 
d'l/ aller. 

^. The subjunctive mood is likewise used after 9«e preceded 
by some impersonal verbs : as, 1 must go thither ; il faut que 
j'y aille. See the 9th observation upon impersonal verbs. 

3. There are someimpersonal verbs which govern theindic^ 
tive mood : such are, il paroit, il y a apparence, he. and those 
which denote any thing more positively. But, when the same 
impersonal verbs are used negatively or interrogatively, they 
govern the subjunctive mood ; as, it is true that, you are mar- 
ried ; il est vrai que vous etes marie ; is it true that you are 
married ? est-il vrai que vous soyez marie ? 

4. The subjunctive mood is used after verbs preceded by 7ie 
or 54 used in a doubtful manner, and followed by que or qui; as, 
I do not believe that he has done it ; je 72e crois pas qu'il Vait 
fait ; if you think 1 am an honest Dian, si voas croyez que je 
sois honnete homme. Some grammarians pretend,ihal, speak- 
ing in the last instance positively, tlie verb follov/ing que is 
put in the indicative mood ; as, si vous croyez que je suis 
honnete homme.* 

5. The indicative mood is more properly used in the forego- 
ing ease, after the verbs direy enoncei\ ciffirjner, and such like; 
as if you say that he is an honest man ; si vous dites qu'il est 
honnete homme; except when the verb dire is followed by 
que, and a verb implying a command or prohibition ; as, tell 
him to come ; dites-lui yw'il vitnne. 

6. The subjunctive mood is used after the verb il semble, it 
seems; as, it seems that you are an^vy ; il semble que vous 
soyez f^che. But if that verb has before it a pronoun, or a 

* (N. B. In this last instance {i has the import of puisquej 
and signifies G5.) 



■;4,4 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

governed word after it, the indicative mood is to be used ; as 
ii nie semble, Qv'il semble k la conipagnie que vons ibiG^ fdch^. 

7. A verb t'oilowing- another which is in the subjunctive 
mood, must also be |)ut lu the same mood afier.^we or qui ^ 
as, do you believe that he expects 1 shall come ? croyex-vous 
c]u'il ^'attende qwi^ je vieinie > 

8. The subjunctive mood is used, 1st, after quoique quelque, 
qutlqueyhc, signifying whomsoever, whatsoever, &;c. as, though 
you are rich ; quoique vous soyez rmhe: though you are ever 
so rich . quelque riche que vous soyez. See the l9th and i^Oth 
observations upon indeterminate pronouns, page 209. 

2dly, After que used instead of repeating the conjunction 5^ 
in the second member of a sentence ; as, if you study and take 
pains ; si vous etudiez & que vous pr^eniez de la peine. See 
ihe 5th observation upon conjunctions, si & que, chap. x. 

Sdiy, After the pronoun qui or que preceded immediately 
by a superlative : as, it is the best news you can tell me ; c'est 
!a meiileure nouvelle que \'ous puissiez me dire. 

4thly, After que used instead of de ce que, which governs 
the indicative mood : as, 1 am sorry he is not come ; je suis 
fache ^«'il ne so// pas venu, or de ce i^M'il u^est pas veim. 

Stilly, After the relative pronoup. qui or que between two 
TOrbs, so as to express some desire, need, or necessity ; as, I 
^eek a woman who is handsome, rich, and wise ; je cherche 
une femme qui soit belle, riche, & sage. 

Othly, We elegantly make use of the compound of the pre- 
lerperfect of the subjunctive mood after si, instead of the com- 
pound of the imperfect of the indicative ; as, if I had been in- 
ibrmed of it soo ler, that would not have happened ; si yen 
eusse eie averti ])hUot, cela He sei'oit pas arrive. 

9 The verb m hich is in the future in Englisli, is put in the 
present in French, whenever it ought tb be put in the subjunc- 
tive mood ; as, tlo you tliink that he will tome ? croyez-vous 
qu'il vienne ? 1 do not believe thdj he will M'rite ; je ne oois 
pas qu*il derive. Except after the verbs savoir, assurer, kc» 
where .«, signifying whether, must be used iostead of que ; as 
doyouknowif, or whether, he will come ?savez-vouss'il'yie72f/rfl^ 

10. The verb which, according to the aforesaid rules is put 
in the subjunctive mood, must be put in the ])resent tense of 
that mood, if it be preceded by a vei'hin the presenter future 
tense ; us, do you believe that he will guess it ? croyez-vous 
qu'il lei devine? will you believe how that be has written ? croi- 
rez-vous a present, qu'il ait 6crit ? If the first verb be in any 
other tense, or in a compounded one, the preterfect of the sub- 
junctive mood is to be Used ; as, what would you have him do ; 
Que voudriez-vous qu'il/t/ ? 

This tense is likewise used when the verb which is in the 
subjunctive mood is follov/ed by the conjunction «/, and a verb 
ih the imperfect tense, or a conditional expression, though the 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



U5 



first verb be in the present ; as, do you believe tbat he coul d 
guess it, if you would not tell it him ? croyez^-TOUs qu'M \f& 
devi?idt, si vous ne ie lui disiez pas ? I doubt whether he 
would have succeeded without the help of his friends, je 
doute qu'il eiit reussi sans le secours de ses annis^, 

K. B. As there are some conjunclions which require the 
subjunctive mood, and are every where the same, it will not 
be arniss to lay them down here as I have met with them in 
other grammars. 

Conjunctions governing the Subjunctive Mood^ 



Afin que, pour que, 
avant que, — 

sans que, — 

quique, bien que, encore que? 
soit que, — 

suppose, ou supposons que, 
au, ou en cas que, 
a la bonne heure que, 
non que, "> 

non pas que j 
ce n'est pas que, 
pourvu que, — 

a moins que, — 

pour peu que, — • 

de peur que, — 

de crainte que, — 
Icin que, — 

bien loin que, •— 

irialgre que. — 

nonobstant que, — 
Dieu veuille que> 
Flaise ou plut ^ Dldu que, 
a Dieu neplaise que, 
sinon que, \ 



- that, to the end thaL 

- before, 

- "Without that, 
though. 

— Tjhether and oro 
suppose that, 

— in case that, or if, 

— I grant that- 

— not timt. ^ 

— it is not that, 
— provided. 

— unless. 

— if ever so littlc^ 
— for fear that, 

— lest, 

— y^?'- 

— - very far from. 

— for all that, though. 

— notwithstanding tha t , 

— God grant. 

— wojild to God, 

— God forbid. 

— . save, but. 



si ce n'est que, 

N. B. These two last govern the subjunctive mood when 
they are preceded by a verb expressing a commandment, de- 
sire, uncertainty. In other cases they govern the indicative- 
mood ; as, I want nothing of you but to do your duty ; je ne 
veux rien autre thou! de vous, sinon que, oxi, si ce n'est que^ 
"VOUS fassiez votre devoir ; I have answered him nothing, but 
that I had executed his orders; ;V ne lui ai repondu autre chose 
sinon'que, ou si ce n'est que, j'avois execute ses ordres, 
X 2 



L^'46 



A GRAMMAR OP THE 



The Subjunctive 



Mood exemplified far the Schor 
Zar's Practice. 



[1.] I was afraid htwQuld 

coTne* 
I doubted he would 'write 

to you. 
I did not doubt but he 

would be very glad to 

see you. 
lier mother commanded 

her to marry him. 

His father has forbidden 
him to play* 

Her husband permitted 
her to go to the play. 



[2 ] I must write to him. 
It ?s convenjent for you to 

sfieak to her. 
It is of consequence for 

him to keeji good com- 
pany. 
There is no way for her 

to escape. 
It is surprising that she 

/i»s succeeded. 
It is just that he should be 

rewarded. 
It is unjust that he should 

be punished. 
It is fit that you give him 

warning. 
It is necessary for him to 

go thither. 
Jt is unseemly that you 

should go alone. 
It js astonishing that he 

knew nothing of it 



Je craignois qu'il ne v^nt, 

Je doutois qu^il vous ecrh- 

vit. 
Je ne doutois pas qu'il ne 

fut bien aise de vous 

voir. 
Sa mere a commande 

qu'elle VSpousdty on lui a 

command^ de Vepouser. 
Son pere a defendu qu'il 

joudt^ ou lui a defendu 

dejouer. 
Son mari a permis qu'elle 

alldt a la comedie, ou 

lui a permis d^'aller a la 

comedie. 
II faut que je lui derive. 
II convient que vous lUi 

/larliez. 
II est de consequence qu'il 

Jreguente la bonne com- 

pagnie. 
II nV a pas moyen qu'elle 

^chapfie. 
II est surprenant qu'elle ait 

reussi. 
II est juste qu'il *02V recom- 
pense. 
II est injuste qu'il soit puni, 

II est a propos que vous 

Vavertissiez. 
II est necessaire qu'il y 

aille. 
II est indecent que vous 

alliez seul. 
II est etonnant qu'il n'en 

stit rien. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



247 



it is lucky that she is not 
' dead. 

It is impossible for him to 
recover. 

It is next to impossible 
that she should de igno- 
rant of it. 

[3.]It seem s that you know 
him. [truth. 

It seems that he sfieaks 

It seems that he is an ho- 
nest man. 

It seem s that she is su r pris- 
ed. 

It seems that he is angry. 

It is likely that he knew 
her. 

It is likely that you saiif 
him. 

It is likely that he vjrote 
to her. 

It is likely that she loved 
him. [him. 

It is true that I sfioke to 

It is true that he suw her. 

It is true that she wrote to 
him* 

It is true that my father 
knotvs him. 

It is certain that he 25 dead. 

It iscertain thathei^come 
from Flanders. 

It is certain that he does 
not know him. 

It is certain that he told 
him that news. [her. 

It is sure that he ivrote to 

It is sure that he knows 
his lesson. 

It is said that the king of 
Spain is dead. 

It is thought that he'^^ 
made his fortune. 



II est heureux qu'elle ne 

soit pas morte. 
11 est impossible a^l en 

revienne. 
II est presque impossible 

qu'elle ne le sac he. 

II paroit que vous le coii- 

noisscz* 
II paroit qu'il dit vrai. 
II paroit qu'il est honnete 

homme. 
II paroit qu'elle est sur- 
prise. 
II paroit qu'il est f^che. 
II y a apparence qu'il Va 

connue. 
II y a apparence que vous 

Vavez vu. 
II y a apparence qu'il \m 

a €zv\K' 
II y a apparence qu'elle 

Va aime. 
II est V rai que j e 1 u i ai par le . 
II est vrai qu'il Va vue. 
II est vrai qu'elle lui a 

ecrit. 
II est vrai que mon pere 

le connoit. 
II est certain qu'il est mort. 
II est certain qu'il est re- 

venu de Flandre. 
II est certain qu'il ne le 

connoit pas. 
II est s(ir qu'il lui a dit cet 

te nouvelle. 
II est sur qu'il lui a €cv\V 
II est sur qu'il sdzYsale^on^ 

On dit que le roi d'Es- 

pagne est mort. 
On croit qu'il a faitsa for 

tune,. 



,24a 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



[4,] *It does not seem thaD 

you know h'lxn* 
It does not seem that he 

sfieaks truth. 
It does not seem that he 

fs an honest man. 
It does not seem that she 

is surprised. 
It does not seem that she 

is angry. 
It is not likely that he knew 

her. 
It is not likely that you 

saw him. 
It is not likely that he 

wrote to her. 
It is not likely that she 

loved him. 
It is not true that I spoke 

to him. 
It is not true that he saw 

her. 
It is not true that she wrote 

to him. 
It is not true that my fa- 
ther knows h\m. 
It is not certain that she is 

dead* 
It is not certain that he is 

come from Flanders. 
It is not certain that he 

does not know him. 
It is not sure that he told 

him that news. 
It is not sure that he wrote 

to her. 
It is not sure ih^Xht knows 
his lesson. 



11 ne paroii [>as que vguj 

li- connoissiez. 
II ne paroit pas qu*i) dise 

vrai. 
II ne paroit pas qu'il soiS 

honnete horn me. 

II fie paroit pas qu'elle soiC 

surprise. ^ 

II ne paroit pas qu'elle soiCi 

fachee. I 

II n'y a point d^apparencel 

qu'il l^ait connuf. | 

II n'y a point d'apparence^| 

que vous Vayez vu. 
II n'y a point d'apparence 

qa^I lui ait ecrit. 
II nV a point d'apparence 

qu'elle i'ait aime. 
n n'est pas vrai que je lui 

aiparie.. 
II n'est pas vrai qu'il Vait 

vuec 
II n^est pas vrai quelle lui 

ait ^crit, 
II n^est pas vrai que moa 

pere le connoisse. 
II n'est pas certain qu'elle 

soit raorte. 
II n'est pas certain qu'il 

soit venu de Flandre. 
Unrest pas certain qu'il ne 

le connoisse pas. 
II n'est pas sur qu'il lui aip 

dit cette nouvitlle. 
II n'est pas sur qu'il lui ai3 

6c nt 
I\ n'est pas sur qu'il sa^Jie 
sa legon, 



* The twenty-one preceding examples are varied here pur* 
posely, to render the third rule, and the exceptions IhereiM'i 
mt)st inteUigible lo tlie learner 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



249 



It is not said that the king 

of Spain is dead. 
It is not th(>ught that he 

has made his fortune. 
[5 ] He tt'^ld me that he 

will write toy o\i. 
I sli^ll teil him that vou 

are come to see him. 
Tell him I will come and 

see him. 
Did you tell him that I 

saw you ? 
Do not tell him that I ivill 

go to the play. 
Do not tell him thai; you 

saw me. 
Tell him that I went out. 
Tell him that I came to 

sp- ak to him. 
J shall tell him that you 

sfioke to me. 
I shall tell him that you 

knew your lesson^ 
Tell him to come and see 

me. 
Tell him not to call to da.y. 

Tell him to write his exer- 
cise fair. 
Tell her ^o;^o/dher tongue. 
Tell hi Oi to bring bis books. 

Tell him to learn his les- 
son. 

Tell him to give you my 
penknife back again. 

Tell him to give you pa- 
per. 

I shall tell him to write to 
you. 

I shall tell him to take 
care of you. 



On ne dit pas que le roi 
d*Espac:ne sgit mort. 

On lie pense jAs qu'il aU 
fait sa f( rtufle. 

li m'a dit qu'il vous ^crira, 

Je lui dirai que vous etes 

venu pour le voi. 
Dites-lui q\ie je viendrcd 

le voir. 
Lui Hvez-vous dit que je 

vous ai vu ? 
Ne lui dites pas que yirai 

k la con.ei^ie. 
Ne lui dites pas que vous 

m^avez vu. 
Dites lui que je suis sorli. 
Dites-lui que je suis venu 

pour lui parler. 
Je \y\\ dirai que vous m'rz 

vez parle. 
Je lui dirai que vous sq- 

vicz votre legon- 
Dites-lui qu'il vienne me 

voir. 
Dites-lui qu'il ne vienne 

pas aujourd'hui. 
Dites-lui qu'il mette son 

theme au net* 
Dites-lui qu'elle se taise. 
Dites-lui qu'il apfiorte ses 

livres. 
Dites lui qu'il afiprenne sa 

legon. 
Dites-lui qu'il vous rende 

mon car i if. 
Dites-lui qu'il vous domie 

du papier. 
Je lui dirai qu'il vous 

ecrive. 
Je lui dirai qu'il ait soin 

de vous. 



50 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Do not tell him to come. 
Do not tell her to wtite to 

me. 
Will you tell him to drin^ 

his bill? 
Will you tell him not to b^ 

angry } 
I shall tell him not to be 

uneasy. 
I shall tell her to send you 

your book. 
I shall tell them to tnake 

you an answer. 
I shall tell him to be mo- 
derate. 
[6.] She seems to be an- 

It seems that you knonxf 

him. 
. It seems that he is in the 

right. 
It seems that she is in the 

wrong", 
it does not seem that you 

are so aged. 
It does not seem that she 

is isicic. 
It seems to me thai, you 

are sorry- 
It seems to me that he is 

very learned. 
It seems to him that she 

is very pretty. 
A covetous man thinks he 

never has enough. 
Your brother thinks he is 

rich enough. 
[8.] If he comes and asks 

for me, tell him I am 

not at home. 
If you study, and if you 



Ne lui dites pas de venig 
Ne lui dites pas qu'elle 

m*ecrtve, 
Lui direz-vous qu'il af\ 

/2or/e son me moire ? 
Lui direz-vous qu'il ne 

soit pas fache ? 
Je lui dirai qu'il soit tran- 

quille. 
Je lui dirai qu'elle vou& 

envoy e votre livre 
Je leur dirai qu'ils vous- 

fasscnt reponse. 
Je lui dirai qu'il soit hio- 

dere^ 
II semble qu'elle soit ik- 

chee, 
II semble que vous le con- 

7ioissiez. 
II sembie qu^il ait raisoji* 

II semble qu'elle ait tort. 

II ne semble pas que vous 

soyez si age. 
U ne semble pas qu'elle 

soit malade. 
II me semble que vous etes 

fache. 
II 7ne sembie qu'il est fort 

savant 
II lui semble qu'elle est 

fort jolie. 
II semble a un avare qull 

n'a jamais assez. 
II semble a votre ^fr ere 

qu'il est assez riche. 
S'il vienc c:<: qu'il demande 

apres moi, dites- lui que 

je ne sais pas au logis. 
Si vous etudiez, 6c qiw 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



25 i 



take pains you will learn 
the French language in 
a short time. 

He is the most conceited 

nian I know. 
She is the handsomest 

Lady you ever 8a%v. 

1 am sorry he is sick. 



i am glad she is better. 

I am surprised that he is 
not come. 

I am overjoyed that he 
has won his law suit. 

i am surprised that she 
has married him. 

She is grieved that you 
send her no news. 



I am surprised at his hav- 
ing made his fortune in 
^0 short a time. 



Give me a handkerchief 

that is clean. 
I look for a servant ivhom 

/may trust. 
He looks for a woman 

who is rich. 
She looks for a husband 

w/20 w handsome. 
£9.] Is it sure that he will 

come to-day ? 



Yous/irejiiez de la peine, 

vous apprendrez le 

Francois en peu de 

tempb. 
C^est rhomme le plus suf- 

fisant que je connoisse. 
C'est la plus belle Demoi« 

selle que vous at/^zja- 

inais vue. 
Je suis fache gu^ il salt ma- 
lade, ou de ce qu'\\ est 

walade. 
Je suis bieu aise $^^'elk s€ 

fiorlc raieux. 
Je sois surpris gu'il ne soit 

pas venu, ou de ce gu'il 

n'cst pas venu. 
Je suis ravi quW ait gagHtf 

son proces, ou de ce qu'W 

a gagne son proces. 
Je suis surpris gz^'elle Van 

epouse, ou de ce 5'u'eiie 

Va d^Giise, 
Elleest chagrin e g^/^' vous 

ne \\x\ donniez point de. 

nouvelles, ou de ce que 

vous ne lui domiez pas 

de nouvelles. 
Je suis surpris, qti'A ait 

fait sa fortune en si peu 

de temps, ou de ce qu'W 

a fait sa fortune en si 

peu de temps, 
Donne z-moi un mouchoir 

qui soit blanc 
Je cherche un domestique 

^ qui jefiuisse me fier, 
II cherche une femme gwi 

soit riche. 
Elle cherche uti mari qiu 

soit beau. 
Est-il sui qu'il viemie : 

aujourd'huil 



252 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

[10.] Dny<^u believe that Crovez vovis qu'elle aille 

^h< will go to the play ? a ia co~iedie ? 

I do no( believe th^t she Je i\t crois pas qu'elle sok 

will be a'.grv with yow. fach^e centre vous. 

J'Joubt that he will wiite Je doute qu'il vous ecrive. 

to you 

Is it sure that he will go to Est-il sur qi^il aille en 

France next spring? France au printemps 
prochain? - 

Jt is not sure that he will II n'esi pas sGr qu'il revi- 

come back this sumnjer. enne cet ete. 

Do >ou think that he wll Croyez vous qa'il a/z/zr<f7z- 

learn French in four ?zf leFrangoisenquatre 

months ? nnois ? 

Bo you think that he will Pensez-vous qu'il soit a la 

be in the country next canripagne la semaine 

"^veek ? prochaine ? 

SECTION IIL 

The Government of Verbs. 

1. Active verbs govern the first case : as, I read 
the books ; Je lis les livres. Pas^sive verbs govern 
the second case ; as, he is esteemed by all men : ii 
est e5^im<? de tout le monde. 

They aho govern the first case with the preposition, /^ar, 
speaking of some action of the hody : as, he was killed by 
robbers ; it a et^ tue par des voleurs. In speaking of ac- 
tions, which partake both of the sentiments of the mind, and 
motion of the bod\ , we com rtionly make^se of per, though 
we say^jJ est entour6 de gens ennuyeux, he is surrounded by 
troubi^me people ; here entour^ expresses only, that trou- 
blesome people are round about him. 

% Verbs that signify to give, or to take away, gov- 
ern the first case of the thing, and the third case of 
the. person : as, I have given him the book: Je lui 
ai donn4 le livre ; they have taken his sword from 
him,J^9 lui ont ote sonepee. 

3- Many verbs govern the infinitive of a verb, with 
the preposition de before it ; which happen when to 
in English may be changed into of, from, by or with « 
as, he hindered me from working ; i^ w^empeeha dc 
travailler. 



FRENCH TONGUE, 125$ 

4. Many verbs govern the infinitive with the pre- 
position a before it ; in this case, to in English almost 
always may be changed into in, or for ; as, help nfie 
to do it, or in doing it ; aidez moi a lefaire^ 

5. Some verbs have the preposition fiour before 
their infinitive, which happens, when to denote the 
design, end^ or reason of the passion or action of the 
verb.— Therefore, to^ can be changed into in -order 
to, with a design to, to the end that ; as, I came in 
order to see you, or with a design tm see you ; je suis 
venu pour vous voir. 

6. There are five verbs after which xle or a are in- 
differently used before the infinitive ; as, contraindre^ 
tontinner, discontinuery essay er, forcer. 

The verb obliger in the sense of to force, to excite^ to en- 
gage, is followed by the preposition a before the infinitive ; as, 
i will oblige him to do it ; je Fobligerai k le fai-re : when it is 
used passively, it is followed by the preposition de ; as, he was 
obliged to do it^ il fut oblige de le faire. 

When the verb tdchfr signiHes to aim, it requires the pre- 
position a before the infinitive ; as, iie aims to hurt rae : il ta« 
che a me nuire : otherwise it requires the preposition de ; as, 
i will endeavour to please you ; je tacherai de vous plaire. 

Wlien the verb s^efforcerm used in the sense of to strive, to 
strain, to make use of all one's strength, it reqeires the pre- 
position a before the next infinitive; but, when it is used in 
the sense of to endeavour, to make use etf one's industry, it re- 
quires the preposition de ; as, he strove to run ; ii s'est efforce 
^ courir ; he endeavours to please her ^ il s'efforce de lui plaire. 

When the verb iarder is used personally, it requires the 
preposition k : if impersonally, the preposition de ; as, do not 
tarry ; ne tardez pas k revenh' : I long t© see her ; ii me 
tarde de la voir. h\ this sense it is always joined to a tbivd 
•case, and may be followed by que, with the verb m tlie su1:>^ 
junctive mood ; as, i4 me tarde que je ne la voye. 

The verb comniencer is sometimes followed by de, according 
to the French Jlcademy ; the ear is the judge in such a case. 
When it siguifies to begin by, it is followed by par ; as be 
^)Ggan by reading jE^sp's Fables.; il commeriCa/)ar j^re les 
Fables d'Esope. 

The verb mcmgner requires tlie preposition de before tlie 

infinitive, when it is used negatively ; ns, I wi^ not fail to 

<lo what you please ; je ne manquerai pas de faire ce que vous 

^ voulez : or, when it signifies to be near, to have like ; as, I 

iiad like to fall ; j'ai manque de tomber. In tljis sense it is al- 

^ ways used affirmatively, and in familiar discourse. 

But when it is used affirmatively in the seriS^ of imt to dh 
Y 



254 A GRAMMAR OF THE ' 

^hat one ought, it is followed by the preposition a / as, he 
has Tailed to do his doty ; il a manque k faire son devoir. 

7. De is used betore the infinitive of verbs, to which 
are joined certain nouns without ah article ; such 
are avoir conge, permission, envie, coutume, besoin, 
sujet, raison, droit, tort, occasion, (^c- de. 

8. Infinitive moods governed by th^ verb etrCy fol- 
lowed by a noun governing the second case, take also . 
de before them ; as, I am glad to see vou ; je suis 
bien aise de vons voir. But if the verb etre be follow- 
ed by an adjective which governs the third case, the 
verb which is in the infinitive takes before it the pre- 
position a ; as, he is ready to go thither ; il est pret 
k y alter. 

, 9. When etre^ signifying tobe, is followed by a noun, 
and preceded by ce, the following verb» in the infini- 
tive mood, is preceded bv que de ; as, it is a folly to 
forget one's self ; c^estunefolie que de seineconnoitre, 

10. De is put before the infi <iiive, after venir and 7ie 
faire que^ signifying to have just, or be just ; as, I left 
hjsn just now ; je vjens de le quitte?\ orje ne fais que 
de le quitter. These two verbs '^re frequently used 
thus in the present and imperfect tense> but in no 
other. 

1 5 c A\?> put after the verb venir, signifying to begin, or to 
sei about flo'mg something ; as, when 1 began,^ or sat about, 
tc ?e^V ^ quahdje vins k parler. This verb i^ used \n al! its 
te: V >, and is commouly placed after some conjunctions. — 
S metimes it signifies nothing in English, and is added to the 
French verbs ; as, when he will know that ; quand il viendra 
h. savoir cela. . 

\'2. A is put before infinitive moods or verbal nouns govern- 
ed hy etre, preceded by ce, and used m the sense ot to be 
one's turn, one's business, or one's duty : as, it is your turn to 
drink : c'est k vous k boire. 

1 3. The verb coming after assez or trop very often re^fwres 
the preposition powr before it . as, he has vanity eriough to be- 
lieve it ; il a sfssez de vanit^ pour le croire. Sometimes it 
takes the preposition de ; as, it was not sufficient to outraj^Q 
him ; ce n'etoit pas assez de I'outrager ; sometimes no prepo- 
sitiou at all ; ag, this insults me enough, or too much ; c'est 
assez Oil c 'erst trop m'iasulter. Hence it appears how much 
grammarians are in the wrong, in spying that assez or trop 
always requires the preposition poz/r before the next infinitiver 
i.Tifio'-V 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



255 



14. In all governed words, false cases are to be 
avoided; as, that pleased arid charmed the pv'mte.cela 
jfilut au prince ^ le charma ; and not cela filut ksf 
charma le/irince ; because filaire goveras the third 
case of the person, and charmer the first. 

15. There are some verbs which take no preposi- 
tion after them before the infinitive mood : as, aller^ 
venir, e?ivoyer, savoir-faire, oser, voir,fiGuvoir, vou- 
loir, croirci pretendre, devoir^ ecouter, entendre, dai- 
gner, &c. 

Government of Verbs exemplified for the Schotar^s 
Practice, 



[1.] I like Pope's works. 
You like apfilessindfiears. 

He is beloved by all his 
relations. ' 

He is respected by all his 
pupils. 

He was robbed by two 
rogues. 

He is surrounded with flat- 
terers. 

[2. J I gave it to him* 

When will you give me 
my book ? 

Will you give it to Um t^ 

I did not give it to him. 

She took it from him, 
'Take this knife from him* 

Do not take it from her. 

[3.] Make an end of play- 
ing. 

I have not blamed youybr 
having kept him com- 
pany. 

He has censured him for 
having written. 

Cease to reproach me with 
ray foible. 

Warn her to take care of 
her reputation » 



J'aime lesceuvres dePope. 

Vous aimez iesfiommes l^ 
les jioires, 

II est aime de tous ses pa- 
rens. 

II est estime de tous ses 
eleves. 

II f ut \Q\€fiar deux coquins* 

II est entoure de flatteurs 

Je le lui ai donne. 
Quand me donnerez-vous 

mon livre .^' 
JLe lui donnerez-vous ? 
Je ne le lui ai pas donue. 
Elle le lui a 6te. 
Otez-/wj ce couteau, 
Ne le lui otez pas. 
Finissez de jouer. 

Je ne vous ai point blame 
de Tavoir ir^quente. 

II I'a censure c/'avoir ecrit. 

Cess.ez de me reprocher 

mon foible. 
Avertissez-la de prendre- 

soin de sa reputation* 



2o6 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



I advised him to ask her 

pardon. 
Why did you defer /o pay 

him ? 
I wrote to him to send me 

my books. 
I wasfrighteBed/oseehim. 
Excuse mQfrom learning 

my lesson to-day. 

Do not undertake to unde- 
ceive her. 

Try to persuade her. 

He was constrained to pay^ 

He deserves to be punish- 
ed. 

He has neglected to study. 

I forgot to bring my books- 



He pressingly invited me 
to dine with him. 

Bid you promise ^o go thi- 
ther ^ 

I advised him to be more 
diligent. [him» 

She refused to speak to 
intend to go to France 
next year. 

Endeavour to please her. 
Take care not to tell h^r 

that you know me. 
I repent o/^having sold my 

book- 
She cannot forbear lying. 

Makchaste^opreveuthim. 

Make haste to write your 
letter. 

He Batters himself that he 
knowsalmost every thing 
which happens in the 
city. 



Je lui ai conseiiJe de hxi 

demander pardon. 
Pourc|uoi avez-vous diffe- 

y€ de le payer ? 
Je luiai ecrit de m'euvoyer 

tnes livres. 
Je fus efiraye de le voir. 
Dispensez-moi d'^appren-- 

dre ma legon aujour- 

d'hui. 
K^entreprenez pas de la 

desabuser, 
Essayez de la persuader. 
^1 fut contraint de payer. 
II merite d'etre puni. 

II a neglige d'etudier. 
J'ai oubjie c/'apporter mes 

livres. 
II m'a press^ de diner avee 

lui. 
Avez-vous promis d\ al- 

ler? 
Je lui ai recommande d'- 
etre plus diligent. 
Elle refusa de lui parler. 
le me propose rf'aller en 

France Tannee pro- 

chaine. 
Tachez de lui plaire. 
Gardez vous de lui dire 

que vous me connoissez. 
Je merepensc/'ax/ozr vendu 

mon livre. 
Elle ne peut s'empecher 

de mentir. 
Hatez-vousof^le prevenir^ 
D^pechez-vous flf^ccrire 

votre lettre> 
II se flatte de savoir pres- 
que tout ce qui se passe 
dans la YJlle, 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



257 



1 take upon myself the 

care q/ speaking to him 

of it. 
[4.j He learns fencing. 
You love to play. 
He seeks to wrong me. 
Give me some drink. 
I am disposed to obey 

you. 
He has encouraged him 

to undertake that work. 
She has engaged him to 

play. 
You have excited me ^o 

eat. 
I have exhorted him to be 

wise and dutiful' [ters. 
Help me to write my let- 
Think q/*paying me. 
You- expose yourself to 

fall sick. 
He prepares himselfyor 

his departure. [me. 
She delights in tormenting 
[5.] I did not do it to 

make you uneasy. 
I told it him to mspire 

him with emulation. 
He cam^ to see you. 
la order to be happy, one 

must be contented 
I shall do every thing to 

please you. [do it 

[6.] I shall oblige him to 
You will never oblige him 

to submit to her. 

Oblige him to see her. 
He was obliged to- do it. 
1 was obliged to go out. 
He will be oblrg^^ ^"^ see 

her. 



Je m^ charge de lui en 

parler. 

[mes. 
II apprend a faire des ar- 
Vous aimez a jouer. 
II cherchee me faire tort- 
Donnez-moi a boire. 
Je suis dispose a vous 

obeir. 
II I'a encourage d entre- 

prendre cet ouvrage. 
EUe Ta engage a jouer. 

Vous m'avez excite d 

manger. 
Je I'ai exhorte a etre sage 

& obeissant. [l^ttres^ 
Aidez-moi a ecrire mes 
Songez a me payer. 
Vous vousexposez a torn- 

ber malade. 
II se prepare d partir. 

[menter» 
Elle se plait a me tour- 
Je ne I'ai pas fait poux 

voiis faire de la peine. 
Je le lui ai d.\ipour lui don- 

ner de remulation. 
Il v'mi fiour vous voir. 
Pour ett-e heureux, il faut 

etre content. 
Je feral tout /2GW vous 

pi aire. 
Je I'obligerai a le faire. 
Vous ne I'obligerez ja- 
mais a se soumettre ^ 

elle. 
Obligez le d la voir. 
II fut oblige de le faire 
Je fus oblige de sortir. 
II sera oblige de la voire 



15^: 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



You will oblige me if you Vousm'obligerez,5i*vou$ 

will please to excuse voulez bien m'excuser 

me to her, aupres d'elle. 

He aims to hurt me. II tache a me nuire. 

They aim ^0 deceive you. llstachentavoustrompen 
I shall endeavour ^o bring Je taclierai de le ramener 

him to his duty. a son devoir. 

Do not tarry. Ne tardez pas a revenir. 

Do not defer to speak to Ne tardez pas a luiparler. 

her. . |i 

Why do you delay going Pourquoi tardez-vous a y r 

thither? aller? }' 

Hong to see her. Jl me larde de la voir. * 

I shall begin to apply my- Je commencerai a m'ap- 

self to the French Ian- pliquer au Frangois. 

guage. 
I begin to understand Je commence a compren- 

French a little. dre un peu le Frangois. 

He began to have/ more 11 comtnenga ef'avoir plus 

care. de soin. 

We began by breakfast- Nous commengames par- 

ing before ^ve went out. dejeuner avant de sor- 
tir, 
I shall not fail ^0 do what Je ne manquerai pas cf^ 

you please. faire ce qui vous plait. 

Do not fail to be in such a Ne manquez pas de vous 

place. trouver en tel lieu. 

He has failed ro do his du- II a manque a faire son de- 

ty. ,voir. 

£7.] You are in the wrong Vous avez tort dc yous 

to complain. plaindre. 

You are in the right to be Vous avez raison cJ'etre 

angry with him. fache contre lui. 

Have you not a mind to N'avez-vous pas envie dc 



take a little wa)k ^ 

I have leave ^0 go out. 
I want to see him and 
speak to him. 



faire un petit tour de 
promenade ? . 
J'ai permission de sortir. 
J'ai besoin de le voir & de 
lui parler. 
You have no occasion ^o Vous n'avez pas sujet c?^ 
complain of me. vous plaindre de moi- 

* See the note to th^e sixth rule^ page 253. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



259 



Take care ta do your ex- 

erche. 
[8.] I am very glad ^o see 

you in good health. 
I am overjoyed to hear 

that all your family is 

well. 
I am sorry to see you sick. 

He is very near his death. 
He is very capable of 
teaching mathematics. 

He is incapable 0/ wrong- 
ing any body. 
She is worthy to beloved. 
I am tired mth writing. 
Are you able to walk t 

[her ? 
Are you sure of pleasing 
It is easy to guess. 
This fruit is good to eat. 
He is much inclined to 

slander. 
You are not exact in 

learning your lesson- 
Are you ready to go ? 
She plays upon the harp- 
sichord very well. 
I am assiduous in reading 

Teleraachus. 
He is the first in prattling. 
It is to no purpose ?o speak 

to him about it- 
[9.] It is a misfortune to 

have no friends. 
It is a folly to despise 

others. 
[10.] I have just break- 
fasted. 
1 \i2istjust written my let- 
ter. 



Ayez soin de faire votre 

theme. 
Je suis bien aise d€ yous 

voir en bonne sante. 
le suis ravi d'apprendre 
que toute votre famille 
se porte bien. 
Je suis fache de vous voir 
malade- [fir. 

II est sur le point de mou- 
II est tres capable c/'en- 
seigner les mathemati- 
ques. . 

II est incapable de faire 

tort a qui que ce soit. 
EUe estdignefl^'etre aimee, 
Je suis las d'ecrire. 
Etes-vous en etat de mar- 
cher ? . i 
Etes-voussurcfelui plaire? 
Cela est aise a deviner. 
Ce fruit est bon a manger. 
Jl est tres enclina medire* 



Vous n'etes pas exact a 
apprendre votre le^on. 
Etes-vous pret a partir ? 
EUe est Jiabile a toucher 

du clavecin. 
Je suis assidu a lire Tele- 

maque. ^ 

II est le premier a babiller. 
C'est temps perdu que de 

lui en parler. 
C'est un malheur que de 

n'avoir point d'amis. 
C'est une folic que de me- 

priser les autres. 
^ Jeviensde dejeuner, owje 
ne tais que de dejeuner. 
JevienboJ'ecrire ma lettre, 
ow je ne fais que ffe 
crire ma lettre. 



260 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

I have>.^ left him. Je viens de le quitter, ouje 

He had,W dined. I. "^^l^^^ 

She was,W arrived. ^'tTd^r^; ou 

elle ne faisoit que c/'ar- 

^'^the^coacr' ^ °"' "^ NrsTenionsrf.sortir dull 
tne coach. carrosse. ot. nous ne fai- H 

sions que de sortir du 
I't. ■ , . carrosse. 

If his wife should know Si'4Tmme'w«ozV ^ sa 

about it tell her that I %arler,S^i que " 
^_« not .gnorant of it. „e I'.gnore pas. ^ •* 

obeyme.^""' ^^^ '° <^'est a vous i m'ob^ir. J 
- It IS your part tn play. Cast a vous ^ jouer. 

It,s h,s tiirn^os ay athome Cast a luia resterau Wis 
Whose turn is it to drink .' A qui est-ce a boire ^ 
I .s her turn to write. C'eit k elle a ecr rl-' 

'c:rr"'^\SL'"^"'"^ ^° ^torSlr^^^ ' "^^^^ ' '^ 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



261 



It is not her business to 

find fault with it. 
It is not their business to 

take you from your 

work. 
[13.] He has too much 

pride to own his faults. 
She has still beauty 

enough to ph ase. 
You have not money 

enough to bear great 

expenses. 
He is too proud to ask her 

pardon. 

Jt will be sufficient Rewrite 

to me ab9ut it. 
It will be sufficient to tell 

It him in two words. 
It is sufficient to warn her. 
It is too much to ask of me. 
It was insulting him too 

much. 
It was too much to deplore 

your misfortune. 
Cease from conversing 

with him ; it is to do 

him too much honour. 
. [14.] I saw her and spoke 

to her. 
That play pleased and 

charmed the Queen, 
She pleases Sccharms him. 



Ce n'est pas a elletz y trou- 

ver a redire., 
Ce n'est pas a eux a vou& 

distraire de votre ou- 

vrage. 
II a trop d'amour propre 

fiour avouer ses fautes. 
Elle a encore assez de 

beaute ^oz^r plaire. 
Vous n'avez pas assez 

d'argent pour faire de 

grandes depenses. 
II est trop orgueilleux 

pour lui demander par- 
don. 
Ce sera assez de m'en 

ecrire. 
Ce sera assez de le lui dire 

en deux mots. 
C'est assez de I'avertir. 
C'est trop me demander. 
C'etoit trop Pinsulter. 

C'etoittrop deplorer votre 

malheur. 
Cessez de lui parler ; c'est 

lui faire trop d'honneur> 

Je I'ai vue & lui ai parleo 

Cette comedie plut a la 

Reine ^ la char ma. 
Elle lui plait 6c /'enchame^ 



CHAPTER VI. 

Rules and Observations upon Impersonal Verbs. 

1. 1 MPERSONAL verbs are used only in the thir^l 

X person singular ; they are twofold : son^e are 

ipnpersonal by their nature ; such are never used 



a 



262 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

but in the third person singular ; as, il neigCy ilfileut : 
others are sometimes impersonal, sometimes person- 
al. They are personal when il, in French, has a re- 
lation to some foregoing noun ; as, drawing is an 
honest amusement, it becomes young ladies ; le des- 
^sein est un amusement honnete, il convient aux jeunes^ 
Demoiselles ; il has a relation to dessein. They are 
impersonal when it has no relation to a foregoini^ 
noun ; as, le dessein est un amusement honnete^ li con 
uient que lesjeU7ies Demoiselles s^y afifiliquent, 

2. The verb ilpleut : besides the use made of speaking of rain 
may be used impersonally in a figurative sense, speaking of se- 
veral other things which may be supposed to fall like rain : as, 
ilpleut des pierres, ilplut de la manne dans le desert. And in 
a familiar discourse to express the eagerness of departing, we 
sortjetimes gay proverbially, je jiartirai demain, quand ilplew^ 
vroit des h^pjardefs. In this case when it follows the substan- 
tive, it agi^s with it in number, according to the French| 
Academy; so speaking of a bloody battle, we may say, les^ 
niousquetades y pletivoient ; so spake cardinal Mizarin^s rela-' 
tions who used to send them a great quantity of mqney : il faut 
«roire que Tor & VsLVgeni pleuvent en France. 

3. Some personal verbs are used impersonally in thp third 
person singular, though their following nominative he in the 
plural : as, many occasions are found ; il se trouve \Aen des oc- 
casions, ffr il y a bien des occasions, 

4. // y a, there is, there are, some are, many are, 
may be follovved by a noun in the plural > as, there 
are few people who apply themselves to their own 
tongiie ; W y a fieu d^e gens qui s^apfiliquent a leur 
profire langue, . . 

Sometimes en is added to it : in this case it has a relation to 
some preceding noun : as, il y a des gens qui apprennent le 
Latin :il y en a qui negligent leur propre langue ; there are 
people wholeara Latin : there are some who neglect their 
own tongue. 

When we speak of something present, as if pointed with the 
finger, there is is rendered into French by voiJd : as, there is 
a handsome Lady ; voild une belle Dame. 

N. B. F«i/fi^eZas,and after him the Abb6 G/rar^/, will not allow 
that il est mid:ht be used instead of tZt/ a. However, they agre« 
thviiil n^est may sometimes be used instead of i/7i'// a, & some- 
times not : as in this following example, there is nothing which 
pleases me more;il rCest rien qui me plaisedavantage: whereas 
it is not used in the following, there is but honour in serving 
one's country, Un't/aqiie de Thonneur^ servirsa patrie, andnpt 



FRENCH TONGUE. '263 

il n-estque; but as grammarians are divided here among them- 
selves, ladvisethe learner toraakeyseof z/z/ a instead of il est^ 
and particularly of i? li^y a instead of il ripest, until he is perfect 
enough in the French tongue to know in what circumstance 
the one may be used instead of the other ; and even Vau^e- 
laSf Corneil'e, and the Abbe Gvtard, do not agree about such 
circumstancesr 

5. The impersonal ily a is likewise used to denote a quan- 
tity of time. In this case, ago, since, these, and for, are ren- 
dered into French by z/yo beginning the sentence; afterwards 
comes the number, followed by gue ,' as, I have been in Lon- 
don these three years ; tl i/ a trois ans que je suis a Londres, 
If the impersonal be transposed, que is omitted ; as, je suis k 
Londres ily a trois ans. In an interrogation — ^combien y a-t-il^ 

que — is commonly used. 

6. Verbs construed with the indeterminate pronoun on, are 
not properly impersonal, though used only in the third person 
singular; because on may be resolved into a substantive ; as, 
on parle, or les hommes' parlent. It may even be resolved 
into a pronoun : as, I will see you to-raorrow i on vous verra 
demain, or je vous verrai demain : consequently all verbs may 
be preceded by on, except those which are impersonal by 
their nature ; as, for example, we never say, on neige. 

7- The auxiliary verb to be, follo^-ved by the ad- 
jectives necessary or requisite, when it may be re= 
solved into one must, is commonly rendered into 
French by Ufaut with the following verb in theinfini- 
tive mond ; as. it is necessary to, or one must love 
one's neighbour ; il faut airner son prochaiit. 

8. 11 faut, signifying one's want, is followed by a substan= 
tive, preceded by one of these articles, tin, de, ties, dii, de la == 

; as, to write well, one tnust have good paper, ink, and pens » 
' pour bien ecrire, il faut de bon papier, de bonne encre, & de 
bonnes plumes. In this case, when a personal pronoun is ex- 
pressed in English, it is put, in French, in the third case, be- 
tween il 2Lndfaut ; as, he wants books ; il lui faut des livres., 
When a noun is expressed in English, signifying the subject 
who wants, it is likewise pat in the third case, but after thfi 
noun which is the object ; as, my brother wants books ; ii 
faut des livres a mon frere. 

9. The verbs, to be necessary, must and should, sig- 
nifying duty, and preceded by a personal pronoun, or 
any other noun, are rendered into French by the 
verbs il faut, il faudrok, il faudra, 8cc* according to 

\ the corresponding tense in English ; in this case, It 

' faut is followed by que, then comes the pronoun, or 

the noun; and the verb? following both, is put in th*^^ 



:264 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

subjunctive mood ; as, I must go, il faut que Paille - 
my brother must go, U faut que monfrere aille. *i 

10. It is, followed by with, is expressed in Frencll 
by Hen est, and the two following nouns are put id 
the second case and separated by comme ; as, it is 
with you as with me ; il en est de vous comme de mot 

Rules and observations upon impersonal verbs ex 
emplijiedfor the Scholar^s Practice. 

[l-l It is very fine wea- ///azV tres beau temps au 

therto-dayc jourd'hui. 

How is the weather ? Quel temps j^2Y/// « 
It rains, it snows, it freez- II pleut, il neige. U gele, 

es, it thaws, it thun- il degele, il tonne, ii 

ders, it hails. ^rele 

It is hot, it is cold. Il/ait chaud, ilfait froid. 

It is bad weather. ///ai^mauvais temps. 

It is clear weather, Ilfait un temps clair. 

It is dark weather, Ilfait un temps obscur- 

The wind blows. Ilfait du vent, 

[2.] It has rained to-day // a filu a verse aujoar^ 

as fast as it could pour. d'hui. 

It snows in great flakes- Ilneige a gros flocons. 

The moon shines: Ilfait clair de lune. 

It is dirty. IlfaU sale. 

What o'clock is it ? Qu elle heure est il ? 

Tell me if you please, Dites-moi s'il vous plait, 

what o'clock U is ? quelle heure U est ? 

It is twelve o'clock (at Ilestm\6:u 

noon.) 

J/f25 a quarter past twelve. II est midi & un quart. 

It is half an hour past // est midi & demi. 

twelve. 

It is three quarters past 7/ ^5^ une heure moins un 

twelve. quart. 

It is one o'clock. II est une heure. [quart- 

It is a quarter past one. // est une heure 6c un 

It is half an hour past one. // est une heure & demie. 

It w three quarters past II est deux heures moins , 

one, 8cc. un quart, &c. | 

It is not late. II n' est pas tard. J 

Itis early. II est de bonne heure. I 

It IS tim^ to gf^ Il est temps de partin \ 



% 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



265 



[3.] Reports are spread in 
the city, that— 

Many opportunities are to 
he met with. 

[4.] TJiere are occasions, 
where delay is of the ut- 
most consequence. 

There are few people who 
know themselves. 

There are handsome Wo- 
men in London. 

There is some danger in it. 

There is no doubt of it. 

There is some profit to be 
hoped. 

Some books are very use- 
fu], 7na?iy are very dan- 
gerous for youth. 

Some women are very ca- 
pricious. 
There is a handsome Lady. 
There are fine oranges. 
There are strange reasons. 
There is a very rich shop, 

is.'] How long have you 

been in England ? 
Mow long is it since you 

saw him ? 
Mow long has he been 

dead ? 
I have been in England 

these three years. 
He has been dead theie 

two years. 
I have not seen him these 

four years. 
She has been married ybr 

these ten year& 



11 s'est refiandu un bruit 

par la ville, que — 
Use trouve\i\tXi des occa- 
sions. 
Ill) a des occasions, ou le 

delai est de la derniere 

consequence. 
II y a pen de gens qui se 

connoissenteux-memes. 
liy a de belles Femmes 

a Londres. 
Ily a ^xx danger. 
// rz'z/ a point de doute* 
It y a Am profit a esp^* 

rer. 
Ily a des livres fort uti- 
les ; it y en a beaucoup 

de dangereux pour la 

jeunesse. 
Ily a des femmes tres ca- 

pricieuses. 
Voild une belleDemoselle. 
VoUd de belles oranges. 
Voild d 'e t ran ges rai son s. 
Voild une boutique tres 

riche. 
Combien y a-t-il que vous 

etes en Angleterre ? 
Combien y a-t-il que vous 

ae I'avez vu ? 
Combien y a-t-il qu'il est 

mort ? 
Ily a trois ans que je suis 

en Angleterre. 
// y a deux ans qu'il est 

mort. 
Ily a quatre ans que je 

ne I'ai vu> 
//t/ a dix ans qu'elk est 

manpe. 
Z 



^66 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Her husband has been 
s\ckjbr these five years. 

My brother has made his 
fortune twenty years 
ago in the Indies. 

Where were youlen years 
ago ? 

[7.] Every man should 
love his neighbour. 

[8.] I want pens. 

i want nothing now. 

He wants time to learn 
his lesson. 

[9.] You must go thither. 

She must speak to him. 

He must know it. 

'&L\emust learn French. 

They must study. 

Are you not obliged to go 
out ? 

Is he not obliged to ac- 
company you ? 

He must not go out. 

You mustholdi your tongue. 

You should go and see him. 

It would be necessary for 
you to know him 

Would il T\ot be necessary 
for her to go thither ? ^ 

Would it not be necessary 
for us to know your rea- 
sons ? 

It wi(l be necessary for you 
to sneak to his father. 

ft will be necessary for her 
to apply herself to his- 
tory. 

Will it not be necessary for 
her to prevent him ? 

Mv brother must go to 
Franc^. 



Ily ^ cinq ans que son 

mari est malade. 
Ily a vingt ans que mon 

frere a fait sa fortune 

dans les Indes. 
Oil etiez-vous ily a dix 

ans ? 
Ilfaut aimerson prochain. 

// mefaut des plumes. 
Ilwemejautv'i^n a present. 
// luifaut du temps pour 

apprendre sa lecon. 
Ilfaut que vous y alliez. 
///aw^qu'elle luiparle. 
I/Jaut qx^'i] le sache. 
Ilfaut qu'elle apprenne le 

Francois. 
Ilfaut qu^h et^djent. 
Mefaut ?7pas que vous 

sortiez ? 
"Mefaut it pas qu'il vous 

accompagne ? 
II vxefaut pas qu'il sorte. 
II faut que vous vous 

taisiez. 
Ilfaudroil que vous allas- 

siez le voir. 
Ilfaudroitqwe vous le con- 

nussiez. 
^efaudroit il pas qu'elle 

y allat ? 
l!^ejaucIroit'ilp:is que nous 

sussions vQs raisons ? 

Ilfaudra que vous parliez 

a son pere. 
Ilfaudra qn'elle s'applj- 

queariiistoire. 

^efaudra-t-il pas qu'elJe 

le previenne •' 
Ilfaut que mon fr)re aille 

£n Francer 



FRENCH TONGUE, 26T 

My sister must stay at Ilfaut que ma soeur reste 

home. au logis. 

[10.] It is with poets as //ew^s^despoetescomme 

with painters, des peintres. 

It if witli you as with me. // en est de vous comwe 
de moi. 



CHAPTER VIL 

Rules and Observations upon the Participles. 

PARTICIPLES are either active or passive ; 
therefore I shall take notice of them separately 
in the two following sections. 

SECTION L 

The active or present PartiQiples, 

1. The participle active or present is always inde* 
clinable : as, a woman fearing God, and loving her 
husband ; unefemme craignant Dieu ^ aimant son 
mart. Except in a very few law terms. 

2. Now-a-days we seldom make use of a participle active, 
except etant and oyant, which are by some used before a par- 
ticiple passive : as, having met with his brother, he spoke to 
him; ayant reuconXv6 son fr^re, il lui parla. Except again^ 
when it is preceded by en : as, in going, or whilst I was goingp 
en allant; in eating,or whilst I was eating,e72 mangeant. Some 
call it a gerund, and they are in the right. However, it mat= 
ters very little how it is called. 

£n, in this case, may be resolved into English by whilst, or 
when, which may likewise be rendered into French by com- 
me, lorsque, or quand: the first requires the following verb in 
the imperfect; the two others in the present, or in any other 
tense: as, I never speak in eating, or whitet, or when I eat ; 
Je ne parle jamais, lorsgite, ou quund]^ mange, and not, com- 
ine je mange. But we say, as 1 was at dinner, he came to see 
me ; comme je dinois, il vint me voir. - 

3. Some participles are, by use, become adjectives, 
and some substantives: as, a detracting man, a de- 
tracting woman; t/;z homme viii^\^^Xi\.yUrte femme me^- 
disante, or un medisant, une medisante. In such a 
caise they are declinable. 



268 A GRAMMAU OF THE 

4. Participles which are become adjectives by use, take 
sometimes after them the second or third case; thus we ma^' 
say with Vmigelas^ in his remarks on the French tongue, 
these stuffs are not at all like those 1 saw yesterday, ces etoftes 
ne sont pas approchantes de celles que je vis hier : his, or her, 
temper is so repugnant to mine,that— son huraeur est tellement 
repugnante a la mienne, que — But they never take the first 
case therefore we do not say, these are reasons concluding the 
same thing, ce sont des raisons concluantes la meme chose 5 
though we say, ce sont des raisons concluantes. 

In the last, and in all doubtful cases, it is better to resolve 
the participle into a verb, with the pronoun relative preceding 
it; as, ce sont des raisons qni concluent la meme chose : or 
^vithout a pronoun as in other examples cited by Vatigelas'^ 
ces etoffes n^approehent pas de celles que je vis hier; son hu- 
meur r ^ pitgne teWementk la mienne, que — Therefore do not 
say with Boyev^ I have seen them eating and drinking, ^'e/es 
ai vu mangeant & buvant ; or with Vaugelas, mangeans & 
btivans, but^'e les ai vus qui mangeoient & buvoient. 

SECTION II. 

The Participle Passive or Past. 

To show exactly, in what instances the participle 
passive or past is declinable or not, makes one of the 
greatest difficulties of the French tongue. The fol- 
lowing observations will set this nicety, hitherto so 
perplexed, in a clear light. 

I. The participle passive is declinable, 1st, when 
it is used adjectively > as, men despised ; des hommes 
meprisi^s : they are loved ; iis so?it aimes, ou elles 
sont aimees. 

2dly, It is declinable, when it is preceded by a 
noun or pronoun which it governs in the first case : 
as, the letters which I have received ; les lettres que 
fai regues. 

3dly, When with the auxiliary verb etre, it forms a neuter 
' reciprocal, or reflected verb, not governing a first case, or fol- 
lowed by any other word making but one sense with it: as, 
they have addicted themselves to trade; ils se sont adonn^s 
au negoce. But we do not say, she put herself to death, elle 
s'est doim^e la mort ; because la mort is a first case. If the 
verb has no governed word after it, the practice of the rule is 
still more certain. 

The difficulty is to know whether the pai'ticiple, followed 
by an infinitive mood, ought to agree with the foregoing noun 
or pronoun. As no grammarian explains this matter m « 



FRENCH TONGUE. 269 

clear and intelligible manner,* and as it is besides of great use^ 
I shall give some observations about it in the following rule : 

11. The participle, followed by an infinitive moods 
is declinable if it governs the foregoing noun or pro- 
noun ; if the noun or pronoun be governed by the in- 
finitive mood, the participle is indeclinable : this rule 
is plain and certain. No^\% to know whether the 
participle, or the infinitive mood, governs the forego- 
ing noun or pronoun, mind these following obser- 
vations : 

1st, If the infinitive be preceded by a preposition, 
the participle governs the noun or pronoun, if they 
may be put, without altering the sense? between the 
Jparticiple and the infinitive : as, the soldiers whom 
they have constrained to march ; les soldats qu^on 
a contraints de marcher : we may say, they have 
constraiwed the soldiers to march ; on a contraint 
les soldats de marcher. Again, the history which I 
gave you to read ; IViistoire que je vous ai donnee a 
ii^e : we may likewise say, I gave you the history to 
read ; je -vvus ai donne Thistoire a lire. 

On the contrary, the infinitive governs the forego- 
ing noua or pronoun, if they cannot be put before the 
participle and in the infinitive : as^ we never ought 
to swerve from the good way which we began to fol- 
low ; il lie fan t jamais s^ e carter de la bonne route que 
Con a commence a suivre ; we cannot say, on a coin-- 
mence la bonne route a suivre ; but 07i a commence a 
iidvre la bonne route* 

* Grammarians give false and inadequate rules about this 
matter. They say, commonly, that the participle passive is 
indeclinable when a pure infinitive follows it ; by a pure in- 
finitive they understand an infinitive used without a proposi- 
tion or any other v/ord. How much they are in the wrong- 
appears by the examples of the second rule. 

Some say, that " the participle is indeclinable, when the 
pronoun is governed of a verb coming after the tense com= 
pound, and not of the tense compound," This rule is not 
clear, and leaves a learner in darkness ; neither is he able to 
know when tlie pronoua is thus governed ; consequently, 
this rule is very inadequate. 

According toothers, the participle is indeclinable when 
there follow* irnraediately a verb in the infinitive, Tjliis rule 
i^ false in mfiny cases. 

■ " '19, 



270 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

2dly, If the infinitive be not preceded by a preposi- 
tion, the participle governs the foregoing noun or 
pronoun, if the infinitive may be turned into the par- 
ticiple present in English, or rendered into French 
by qui, and the imperfect of the indicative mood^ 
without altering the sense : as, I saw her painting ; 
je Cat vue fieindre : I heard her sing ; je Cai enten- 
(}inQ. chanter : the ladies whom I saw passing; les 
Dames que fai vues passer : the soldiers whom I 
saw^oing ; les soldats que fai vus partir. In all the 
foregoing examples I may say, without altering the 
sense; j> Vai vue qui peignoitjjV /'cii entcndiie qui; 
chantoit, &c. 

On the contrary, the infinitive governs the noun of 
pronoun, when the infinitive cannot be turned into 
the participle present, or rendered by qui and the 
imperiect tense :.thus, speaking of a lady, whose 
picture was drawn, we say, I saw her picture drawn - 
je Cai \\xpdndr(: : of a song, I heard it sung ; je i'ai 
entendu chant erT^QversiX ladies came to the door, I 
did not suffer them to be retused ; filusieurs Dames se 
sont presentees d laporte, je ne Les at pas laisse ren- 
voyer, 

HI. The participle passive is indeclinable. 1st, 
When followed immediately by another participle 
past: as, his disobedience had mounted to the highest 
pitch of insolence ; sa desobcissance s^est trouve 
moRtee auplus ha lU point de iHyisolence^ 

2dly, When it is immediately followed by que or 
gui: as, the consequence which I intended that you 
should draw from it ; la consequence que fai 'preien- 
du que vous en tirassiez, 

3dly, When the participle and the auxiliary verb 
are ased impersonally : as, the hot weather we have - 
had ; les chaleurs quhl a fait. 

4thly, When it cannot be joined to a substantive, , 
as its adjective ; therefore the participles /2«r/e, agi^ 
6tt^ craint^ plain t^ &c. are never declined. 

5thly, When it is followed by its case governed : 
as, 1 have received the letters; fai regu les lettres. 

Gthly, The participles/zz^ ivompouvoir^ voulti from 
vouloir,e\i\\^v because they are not used adjectively or 
because an infinitive is understood* which governs the 
preceding noun : as, I made all the endeavcurs I could: 



jii 



FRENCH TONGUE. 271 

faifait tons les efforts guefai pu : /aire is understood 
aftei /zw. 

IV. It is the opinion of some grararaacians, that when the 
subject or nominative case of the verb comes after, the parti- 
ciple is indeeliftable ; but good authors, such as the Abbe Gt- 
rard and cV Olivet^ Messieurs Ducios, jMarmo?it€t,hc. make it 
declinable : as, there is a good lesson which onr misanthrope 
bas received ; voil^ une bonne lecon qu'a re^ue notre misan. 
thrope ; Marmontel; the impression wlilch the recital of your 
inisfortunes made on me ; rimpresMon que m'a faite le r^cit 
iie vos malheurs : ibid. 

The participles in the foregoing examples are declinable^ 
|)ecause, according to the second observation, the foregomg 
nciunsare governed by the participles. However, it is, gene- 
rally speaking, better to put the nominative before the verb, 
particularly in reflected verbs. 

V. The participle is commonly indeclinable, when 
It is followed by an adjective which it governs, and 
which has a relation to a preceding noun, and n>akr s a 
part of it: as, Amasis is the only one of the Egyptian 
kings who conquered the isle of Cyprus and render- 
ed it tributary ; Amasis est le seul des rois d'hgyfite 
qui ait conquis Vile de Cij/ire W qui Vait rendu tribu- 
iaire ; Roliin. 

VI According to the second observation we wnt«5, 
the ladles whon\ you cartve to see ; les dames que vous. 
etes venu voi7% because the foregoing noun is govern- 
ed by the infinitive. 

The same is to be said, if a personal conjunctive pronoun bg 
put before alle and veJiu, followed by a verb in the infm^ave 
mood ; thus we vv^rite, she came to see you ; elle vous est venu 
voir. Whereas, in transposing the pronoun, and puttiiij4 it 
immediateH before the word that governs, it, which is more 
'generally and better used, the participle is dechnable, accord^ 
ing to the third observation of the first rule ; thus we write, 
elie est venue vous voir. 

N. B. In some cases of the last rules custom is divided; gram- 
nianans on this head are far from agreeing vy^ith one another, 
and sometimes with themselves. The second rule and the qM- 
servatiop^s may resolye many a doubtful case. 



2n 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Rules and Observations exeinplified for the Scho- 
lar's Practice, 



[Sect. I. !•] A man fea?^- 

ing God. 
A woman loving her hus- 
band. 
A Lady d/ifihjing herself 

to study. 
[2.] He died in eaitig his 

breakfast. 
Why do you speak whilsC 

you are eating ? 
I saw him nvhilst I walked 

in the park. 
Fortune x^Jickle, 
[3.] She is a clmrming La- 

dy. 
She \%2i slandering:^ \^va2iX\. 
[4.] His or her temper is 

so refiugnant to mine, 

that— 
These are reasons con- 
cluding the same thing. 
[Sect. II. 1.] The idle are 

desjmed. 
She was endowed in her 

youth with wit and 

beauty. 
Unpolite men are hated 

by all. [king- 

He is cherished by , the 
Have you seen the stock- 
ings I bought ^^ 
I have seen the shirts you 

bought. 
1 shall speak to him of 

the affair you covnnuni- 

catedto mr. 
I have read the letter you 

wrote to me. 



Un horn me qui cramt Dieu* 

Une fern me qui aime son 

mari. 
Une Demoiselle qui s*ap- 

plique a I'etude. 
11 mourut ^;z dejeunant, 

Pourquoi parlez-vous r?:; 
mangcant, 

Je le vis en me firomenan:: 
au Pare 

JLa fortune est changeante. 

C'est une Demoiselle char- 
mante, [sante. 

C.'est une femme ynedi- 

Son hunieur refmgne tene- 
ment a la mienne, que- 

Ce sont des raisons^^wzro^z- 

cluent la me me chose. 
Les paresseux sgnt inepri- 

ses, 
Elie etqit dans sa jeu- 

nesse douee cf'esprit Sc 

de beaute. 
Les impolis sont Imis de 

toute le monde. 
II est chin du roi. 
Avez-vous vu les has que 

j'ai achetes 1^ 
J*ai vu les chemises que 

vous avez achete^s, 
Je lui parlerai de Taffaire - 

que vous m'avez com- ' 

muniquSe, 
J'ai lu la lettre que voiTs 

m'avez ecrite. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



275 



Have you re^d the books 

I lent you ? 
It i ^ a piece of news I 

have not read in any 

newspaper. 
I have not yet read the 

papers you sent me, 

I had no time to give you 

an answer totht. letters 

yoia wro/<? me. 
These are not the same 

hats I saw. 
You do not know the pain 

I had to persuade her. 
Do you know the reasons 

he told me ? 
The laee you bought is 

very line. 
I have not learned the 

lesson you gave me. 

You speak to him of scien- 
ces which he has never 
learned. 

You speak of a woman I 
kneiv* 

These are the things I 
n^ver foresaw. 

You talk of an aifair I 
have notjbrgotten. 

These are as good fruit 
as you ever have eaten. 

This is the best liquor I 
ever drank. 

These are the most hon- 
est people you ever 
knew. 

The jewels you showed 
me are very rich. 

The woman he has mar- 



Avez vous lu les livres 
que je vous hifiretes F 

C'est une Douvelle que je 
n'ai lue dans aucun pa- 
pier de nouvelles. 

Je n'ai pas encore lu les 
papi*:rs qae vous m'a- 
vez envoy es. 

Je n't- paseu le temps de 
fa^re reponse aux lettres 
que vous m'sivezecriteSe. 

C : ne sont pas les memes 
chapeaux que j'ai vus> 

Vousnesavez pas la peine 
quej'aiei^a iapersuader= 

Sa vez- vous ks raisons 
qu'il m'a dites? 

La dentellf^ que vous avez 
achete est tres belle, 

Je n'ai point appris la le- 
^on que vous m'avex 
donn^e, 

Vousluiparlez de sciences 
qu'il n'ajamaiso/z/znse^* 

Vous parlez d^unefemme 

que j'ai connuc- 
Ce sont des choses que je 

n'ai ]2Lm^\^ firevues. 
Vous parlez d'une ffaire 

que je n'ai pas ouhliee, 
Ce sont d'aussi bons fruits 

que vous ayez jamais 

inang6s, 
G*est la meilleure liqueur 

quej'aie jamais /5^^e. 
Ce sont les plus honnetes 

gens que vous ayez ja- 
mais connus, 
Lesbijouxque vousm'avez 

montres sont tres r ches- 
La fern me qu'il a efiou^ec 



274 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



ried has brought him a 
handsome fortune. 

There are the books you 
lent me. 

1 have found my gloves 
again which I had lost. 

It is a thought I have read 
somewhere. 

She has afifilied herself to^ 
the French tongue- 

They have addictedihem- 
selves to trade. 

They have ruined them- 
selves by foolish expen- 
ses. 

They have drownedihtm- 
selves. 

The garrison has sunm- 
dertd at discretion. 

She gave herself x^/z to de- 
,spair. 

^"^^ presented herself to 
me with all the charms 
of beauty. 

The soldiers whom they 
have constrained to sub- 
mit. 

What is become of the 
books which I gave you 
to read i^ 

The lesson which I gave 
you to learn is not diffi- 
cult. 

Where are the letters 
which 1 gave you to 
write ? 

I expect the Ladies whom 
I invited to dinner to- 
day. 

We ought not to swerve 
from tlie good way which 
we began to follow. 

The tongue which you be- 



lui a apport^ un biea 

considerable. 
Voila les livres que vous 

v[i^2iV^z firetes* 
J'ai retrouve mes gants 

qu e j 'a voi s fierdiis^ 
C'est une pen see que jVi 

lue quelque part. 
Elle sVst ajifiliquee a la 

langue Frangoise. 
lis se sont adonn^s au com* 

merce. 
lis se sont ruin^s par de 

foUesdepenses. 

lis se sont noyes. 

La garnison s'est rfndue 

a discretion. 
Elle s'est abandonnee ao 

desespoir. 
Elle s'est presentee a moi 

avec tons les charmes 
^ de la beaute. 
Les soldats qu^on a con^ 

traints de se soumettre» 

Que sont devenus les li- 
vres que je vousai don- 
nas a lire ? 

La legon que je vous ai 
donnee a apprendre, 
n'est pas difficile. 

Oil sont les lettres que je 
vous ai donnees a ecrire I 

J'attends les Dames que 
y2i\ prices de venir diner 
aujourd'hui. 

II ne faut jamais s'ecarter 
de la bonne route que 
Ton B.com?nchc^k suivre. 

La langue que vous avez 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



275 



g(tn to learn is very 
useful. 
The Lady whom you left 
q^seehig is very witty. 

The history which I be- 
gan to read is very en- 
tertaining. 

I mnu her painting. 

I heard her sing. 

The Ladies whom I saw 
passing. 

The soldiers whom I sa%v 
gomg. 

1^07^ them arriving 

I scTiVf her picture drawn. 

It fs a song which I heard 
suag this week. 

&veFa! Ladies came at 
the door, I did not suf- 
fer them to be refused. 

The house which he or- 
dered to be built, is very 
fine and well situated. 

What news have you 
heard ? 

This is the news I have 
heard. 

It is a thing that I have 
seen done. 

Have you seen the new 

suit of clothes which he 

I prdered to be made for 

j [^] She has see7i herself 
/betrayed by her own 

relations. 
I'hey h2i\e found them- 
I selves sun'oufided by 
their cnemiei?- 



commence d'apprendre, 

est fort utile. 
La Demoiselle que vous 

avez cessS de voir est 

fort spirituelle. 
L'histoire que j-ai co77i' 

menci a lire est tres 

amusante. 
Je Tai vue peindre. 
Je I'ai e7U€ndue chanter. 
Les Dames que j'ai inies 

passer. 
Les soldats que j'ai vus 

partir. 
Je ies 2i\vus arriver. 
Je Tar vu peindre. 
C'est une chanson que j-ai 

entendu chanter cette 

semaine. 
Plusieurs Dames se sont 

presentees a la porteje 

ne les ai pas laisse ren- 

voyer. 
La maison qu'il -eifait ba- 

tir, est tres belle & tres 

bien situ^e. 
Quelle nouvelle avez-vous 

entendu dire ? 
Voila la nouvelle que j'ai 

entendu raconter. 
C'est une chose que j'ai 

vu faire. 
Avez-vous vu Inhabit neuf 

qu'il 2ifait faire ^ 



Elle s'estT'z^ trahie de ses 
propres parens. 

lis se sont trouvis environ- 
71C-S par leurs ennemis. 



fire 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



The books I hav^ ordered 

to be sent to me. 
The lesson which I com 

munded that you should 

learn. 
The consequence which I 

intended that you should 

draw from it. 
I have been sick during 

the hot weather we 

have had' 
The rain wq have had this 

week» has spoiled the 

roads. 
I have read those books. 
I received your let<:er. 
Have you se€n\\\e Queen ? 
Why have you i\vxtra7is- 

laied your faille ? 
She has not learned her 

lesson 
She used her best endea- 
vours. 
I have granted her all the 

pleasures she desired. 
[4] The i repression which 

the recital of your nntis- 

fortunes made on mfe. 
The ^rouble which your 

law-suit ^at;f me. 
The letters which your 

brother 'ryro^^ to me. 
The friends which your 

mo\.\i^Y firocured me. 
The surprise which his 

presence occasioned me. 
[5.] The English rd^^J^r^ J 

themselves masters of 

Qnebec. 
They have rendered them- 
selves famo'js in war,. 



Les livres que j'ai ordmi- 
ne qu*ox\ m'evivoyat. 

Lalegon queyaico?nmand^ 
que vous apprissiez. 

La consequence que j'ai 
pretendu que vous en ti- 
rassiez. 

J'ai ete malade pendant 
les chaleurs qu'il ayazV. 

La pluie qu'il a fak cette 

semaine-ci, a gate les 

chemins. 
Pai lu ces livres-la. 
J'ai re^u votre lettre. 
Avez-vous vu la Reine I 
Pourquoi n*avez-vous pas 

traduit votre fable ? 
Elie n'a pas appris sa le-; 

^on. 
Elle 2. fait tons les efforts 

qu'elle a pu. 
Je lui ai accords tous les. 

plaisivs qu'elle a voulu, 
I/impression que m^ajaite 

le r^cit de vos mal- 

heurs. 
La peine que m'a donnee 

votre proces. * 

Les lettres que m'a iaites^ 

Monsieur votre frere. 
Les amis que m*a/?rocwre>^ 

Madame votre mere. 
La surprise que m'a occa 

sionnee sa presence. 
Les Anglois se sont rendul 

maitres de Quebec 

lis se sont rendu fameux^ 
dans la guerre. 



M 



FRENCH TONGUE. ^77 

She has rendeted herself Elle s'est rendu c^lebre 
celebrated by her wit par son esprit & par sa 
and beauty. beauti^. 

The garrison has 5wrrew- La garnison s*est rendu 

dered prisoners of war. prisonniere de guerre. 
She is come to see us. Elle estT^e72W^nousvoir,ou 

elle nous e^tvefiu voir. 
They are^-owc to see him. Elles sontallees le voir, on 

elles le sont all^ voir. 
They are CGme to see me> Elles sont venues n\e voir^ 
pwellcs me sontz;^ 72Wx;oi'r. 



CHAPTER VIIL 

Rules and Observations npon Adverbs. 

1, 4 DVERBS, being simple, arc commonly pjaced 

1\. before adjectives and participles : as, this wine 
is very good ; ce vin est tr^s ton. When they are 
compound, they are commonly placed after : as, he 
is arrived seasonably ; it est arriv^ 4 propos. 

2 When adverbs, simple or compound, are joined 
to a verb, they are commonly placed after it : as, she 
Joves him tenderly ; elle l^aime tendrement. But 
-when the advetb is simple^ and joined to a verb in a 
compound tense, it may be placed before or after the 
participle, though it is better to place it before : as> 
^//e /'a tendrement ami^. Except davantagey more, 
-yvhich is always put after the participle. 

The following adverbs, bien, mieux, tro/i, mql.Jbrt^ 
touj ours, jamais, and some more, are placed between 
the auxiliary and the participle ; and vfh^n jamais or 
toujours rtieet with another adverb, they are always 
placed first : as, he always spoke well of you ; il a 
toujours bien parU de voUs, 

3. Beaucotlfi, jfteu^ tro/i, assez, and such like ad- 
verbs of quantity* take sometimes before them the 
particles de or a, in the manner of nouns : as, it is 
the custom of many people ; c^est la coutume de beau* 
Goup degena: of few people ; de peu de gens : ih^t 
4 a. 



2n A GRAMMAR OF THE 

happens to too many people ; cela arrive a trop cie 
gens : to too few people ; a trop peu de gens. 

4. In the negative sentence, we generally make use 
of two negative words : as, ne-filus^ no more, ne-fioint^ 
not at all ; nefias, x\ol ; ne^rien, nothing ; ne-jamais^ 
never ; ne-nullement, by no means ; ne fiersonneyUe^ 
pas uTZy ne-auciin, nobody, &c. 

5. jVe, which is the first negalioii, does always follow the 
subject of the verb, and whatever depends on it, if the sub- 
ject be a noun; as, nian being born feeble, is never free from 
trouble; I'homrae etant n6 foible, finest jamais exempt de 
p^iue. If the subject be a pronoun personal, and the sentence 
interrogative, the sentence begins with ne ; as, do you know ? 
ne savez-vous pas ? In compound tenses the second negation 
is always put between the auxiliary^and the verb : as, 1 have 
Slot read your book ; je ?t'ai pas lu votre livre. If the verb 
be in the infinitive mood, the two negatives come before it : 
as, not to tell you a lie ; pour ne pas vous dire u« mcnsonge. 

6. We make use of the particle Tie, without its second ne- 
gative word in the following cases : 

1st, When the negative ni follows; as^ I neither love nor 
hate him, je ne IVime ni ne ie hais. 

2dly, After the conjunctions k fnoins que, unless, de penr 
giie, de crainte que, lest, or for fear that ; as, unless he - 
comes, a moins qu'il ne vienne. 

3dly, \heYque preceded by the verbs empScher, to liinder, 
or keep from ; craindre, to fear, and others expressing fear 
in mentioning an eft'ect not desired ; as, he fears that, or lest, 
he should come to-day, il craint qu'il ne vienne aujourd'hui. 

But if ohe wishes that the thing s|)oken of should happen, 
then tbe verb that follows craindre, or such like, expressing 
fear, must be attended with two negatives ; as, il craint qu'il 
726 vienne p^s aujouiirhui. 

4thly, Before que taken in the sense of sinon, besides, no- 
thing, but, only ; as, I desire no recompense only, or but, the 
pleasure of obliging you, je ne desire pour recompense, que 
le plaisir de vous obliger. 

5 till y, After que ne taken in the sense of why not ; as, why 
do not you answer ? quo ne repondez-vous ? 

Gthly, After ne fi<ivoiv used for ne pouvoir, or when it im- 
X»lies"an uncertainty of the mind ; as, I dp not know whether 
he will succeed, je ne sais s'ii reussini. ' 

But if it implies a full ignorance of the thing, it requires 
commonly two negatives ; as, I do not know if he is come, je 
7fe saif: /)as s'ii est venu. 

.7th'y, After the verbs oser, cesser, and pouvoir, used ne- 
gatively ; as, I do not dare to write to him, je n'ose lui ecrire. 
in ai: interrogathe phrase a second negation is commonly add- 
ed j as, n'osez-vousj^as III) ecrire ? 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



2Y9 



Sthly, After the verb ily a, followed by a compound of the 
present tense in a negative sentence ; as, I have not been in 
Paris these ten years : il y a dix ans que je n^ai et€ k Paris : 
even if it be followed by any other tense, the second negative 
is still omitted ; as, I had not been in Paris for a year; il y 
avoit un an que je li'ctvois^ie k Paris. 

9thly, When, in a negative sentence, the particle cfe signU 
iies a part of time ; as, 1 will not see him for a year 5 je tie ie 
Verrai d'un an. 

lOthly, There are some expressions where we indifferently 
make use of a single or double negative, particularly after si ^ 
as, si vous ne voulez m'y conduire, or si vous ne voulez pas 
m'y conduire ; if you will not carry me thither : si vous ri^ 
venez cette semaine, or, si vous ne venez j&as cette semaine i 
if you do not come this week, &c. 

Rules and Observations upon Adverbs exemplified 
for the Scholar's Practice, 



[1.] I saw him very often, 

[2.] You are in giYat haste. 

You are arrived very sea- 
sonably. 

AtpresenU let us see. 

For the present, I am very 
easy. 

•A^ow, I will tell you. 

Come to-day and see me. 

Quicky make haste, [play. 

1 went yesterday to the 

i saw her the day before 
yesterday. \ly, 

I have known hXmfonner- 

He arrived lately. ' 

She died not long ago^ 

You must write to her be- 
fore, 

I shall speak to you to- 
morronu, 

I shall have done a/?^r^o- 
morrow. 

Come back 500^2. 

You shall be my friend 
hereafter. 



Je I'ai vu tres souvenir 
Vous etes tres presse. 
Vous etes arrive fort a 

profios, 
A present^ voy ons. 
Pour le present, je suis 

ties tranquille. 
Maintenanty je vous dirai. 
Venez me \d\vaujourd*hiiL 
Vite, depechez-vous, 
Je fus hier k la comedie^ 
Je la vis avant-hkr. 

Je I'ai connu autrefoU> 
II arriva dernierement, 
Elie mourut defiuis fieu^ 
Il faut lui 6erire anfiara- 

vant. 
Je vous parlerai demain, 

J'aurai fini afires demai?u 

Re venez bientot, 
Vous serez desor?nais moB 
ami. 



280 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Henceforth it will always 
be so. 

At fir St he spoke thus. 

I have been often astonish- 

She died suddenly* [ed, 

Po you sometimes read ro- 
mances ? 

I read them i}ery seldom. 

On a sudden he presented 
himself before my eyes. 

J shall come back, the 
latest at ten O'Clock. 

Run there with all speeds 

I never consented to it. 

I shall always be faithful 
to you. 

It is done/or ever and ever* 

She tornoents him contiw 
ually, 

I shall speak to him at 
leisure. 

I commonly breakfast at 
nine o'clock. 

At what o'clock do you 
commonly dine ? 

We dine almost always at 
three o'clock. 

I never hardly go out be- 
fore dinner. 

I shall meet him 072^ time 
or other- 

You go to bed too soon* 

You rise too late. 

Rise betimes* 

H*ve vou not seen him 
yet ? 

We shall be then in the 
country. 

We shall then make our- 
selves merry. 

From that time I perceiv- 
ed his cheating tricks* 



Dorenarvant il en sera tou^ 

jours de me me, 
D^abordW parla ainsi. 
J'ai €ti souvent etonn^. 
Elle mourut subitement, 
Lisez-vous quelquefois des 
' romans .^ 
J 'en lis tres rarement. 
Soudain il se pr^senta de- 

vaut mes yeux, 
Je reviendrai a dix heures, 

aufilus iard. 
Courez y aufilus vtte, 
Je hV 2i\ jamais consent!. 
Je vous serai toujours fi- 

delle. 
C'en est f^hfiour toujours. 
Elle le tourmente continue 

ellement. 
Je lui parlerai a loisir* 

Je dejeune ordinairement a 

neuf heures 
A quelle ^ure dinez vous 

commun^ment ? 
Nous dinons firesque tou- 
jours k trois heures. 
Je ne sors firesque jamais 

avant le diner. 
Je le rencontrerai tot oic 

tard. 
Vous allez t7'o}i tot au lit. 
Vous vous levez trofi tard, 
Le vez- vous de bonne heure, 
Ne I'avez vous/za* encore 

vu ? 
Nous serons alors k la 

campagne. 
Pour lors nous nous di- 

vertirons. 
Des-lors je m'apper9us de 

ses foqrberies. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



282 



I have not seen her since. Je ne Tai pas vue defiuis. 

When will you Come ? Quand viendrez-vc. s ? 

J\'ow and then we play at Nous jouons aux cartes dc 

cards. temjis en temfis. 

We have made ourselves Nous nous sommes divelP- 

merry all the night, i'ls toute la nuit- 

lie has been robbed at Jl a ete vole en fileinjour^ 

noonday, ou eii filein midi. 

I shall send it you the first Je vous renverrai aupre-- 

opfiortunity, mkrjour, 

I shall be ready to serve Je serai pret en tout temps 

you at all times, a vous servir. 

Where are you goint* ? Oii allez-vous ? 

Whence do you come from? V^^ou venez-vous ? 

Which way have you pass- Par oii avez-vous passe ? 

Come here, [ed .^ Venez ici. 

Get outjro7?i hence, . Sortez d'ici. 

Come this way, Venez par ici* 

Stay there, Kestez la. 

Do not ^iwfrom hence, Ne bougez pas de Id. 



Go that way. 

Look above, 

-Go up stairs. 

Your pen is tinder here. 



Allez par 'Id. 
Regardez Id haut, 
Allez en haut. 
Votre plume est ici dessous- 



'^ee yonder i\i2i\. beautiful Regardez /a*<3a5cettebe He 



Ho wen 
She com escrow above* 
I Gomey*ro7H below. 
Take \t upward. 
Hold it downward. 



fleur. 
Elle vient d^enhaut, 
Je viens d^en has. 
FrenezAepar en haut* 
Tenez-le/?cr en bas. 



This old house is very line Cette vieille maison e&t 

witldn, tres belle en dedans* 

This house is very fine Celle-ei est trejs belle en 

without, dehors, *" 

Hotvfar shall we go ? Juscju'qu irons-nous ? 

I have read this book as J'ai lu ce XwvejusquHci. 

far down as here* 
Let us read asfar down as Lisoas jusque-ld. 

there. 
You will find him there- Vous le trouvereza^^a:fK^ 

abouts* virons. 

You go veryjar. Vous allez bien loin, 

A a 2' 



282 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



He lives hard by. 

I bought \ljust by. 

I hive followed him c/o^e. 

Come nearer. 

GodefofrJ^ will follow you. 
Walk behind. 
You Will nowhere ^nd the 
hke. 

Put this ouery and that un- 
der. 

He struck me behind. 

You would be rich else- 
where. [where. 

You will be contented no- 

She will be admired eve- 
ry where. 

His house is on this side. 

His garden is on that side. 

They seek for him on all 
sides. 

They have agreed on both 
sides. 

He runs about and about- 

She goes up and down. 

Go on the right 

Do not go on the left. 

Go straight along. 

He tell into the dirt all 
along. - 

They went together to the 
coffee-house. 

We yeat one another by 
turns. 

Let us drink abotU. 

Do not sptak all at once. 

They run helter-skelter. 

They ran in a crowd to see 
the King. 

You set every thing down 
tofisy-turvy. 

And ht likewise. 

Give him e^cr so little of it. 



II demeure ^oM^^roc//^. 
Je I 'ai ache te ici fires. 
Je Tai suivi dt pres 
Approchez vous de plus 

pres. [vrai. 

A.'^Xtz dev ant y je vous sui- 
Marchez derriere. 
Vous n'en trouverez mdle 

part de semblable. 
Mf.ttez ceciG?&?s7^«.6ccela 

dessGUs. 
II m'a frappe^ar derriere. 
Vous seriez richtailleurs. 
{le part. 
Vousneserez zowu.vxnul- 
Elle sera admiree par- 
tout. 
Su maison est en de^n. 
Son jardin est au deld. 
On Ic cherchec?^ tons cotes. 

lis se sont accordes depart 

^ d^ autre. . [tre. 

II cour*. d^un cote i^ d*au^ 
EUe va gd i^ Id, 
Aliez d droite. 
N'allez pas d gauche, 
Aliez tout droit' 
II tomba tout de son long 

dans la boue. 
lis sont alles ensemble an 

caffe. 
Nous nous traitons tour d 

tour, 
Buvon^s d la rondc' [fois, 
Ne parlez pas tous d la 
Us coureni pele mile. 
Us Q,(^\x\\xxQ.\\Xcnfoule pour 

voir le Koi. 
Vous mettez tout sans des- 

sus dessous, 
Etlui aussi ou parcille7nenL 
Donnez-iui en tantsoitpeu. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



283 



You give him much. 

Give her but little. 

I have not much of it. 

Have you enough ? 

I have . eaten sufficiently. 

You gave me too miich. 

You gave him too little. 

By little and little he will 

become a doctor. 
Do you owe him 50 much? 
I have owed him more 
I may have it at another 

placeybr less. 
I have been, atmost^t\s\zQ 

at her house. 
Do not fail to write to her 

at leasto 
Fou bought it too dear* 

I have not sold \X\i\mdear. 
[you. 
I am infinitely obliged to 
He was almost killed. 
You must ask it of him i'^ 

aU means 
She Intolerably nvelL 

Why do you not answer 

me ? 
How does your sister do ? 

She is -very welL 

She has been verij well^ 

since she went into the 

country. 
I am admirably welL 

My ipother is very ill. 
You have done nvisely. 
You accuse mejalsely. 
He thoroughly knows the 
French language- 



Vous lui en donnez beau-- 

coufi. 
Ne lui en donnez ^wer^s. 
Je n'en ai /las braucou/u 
En avez-vous assez ? 
J'ai mange suffi^amment. 
Vous m'en a vez ^ro/zdonne. 
Vous lui en avez donne 

trofifieu, 
Peuafieu ildeviendra doc» 

teur. 
Lui devez-vous tant F 
Jr lui ai du davantage. 
Je i'aurai ailUurs a moins. 

J'ai ete deux fois chez elle 
tout au plus ^ 

Aumoinsy ne manquezpas 
de lui ecrire* 

Vous i'avez achete troli 
Cher, 

Je ne le lui ai pas vendu 
chcr^ [oblige, 

Je vous suis in/iniment 

Jl ixxtpresque tue* 

II faut que vous ie lui de- 
man die z absolumrnt. 

FAltseporte/tassablemen^ 
bien, 

Pourquoi ne me repon- 
dv'Z- vous pas ? 

Comment se porte Made- 
moiselle votre Jsoeur ? . 

Elle se porte 7/e.9 bien. 

Elle se porte tres bitn^ de- 
puis qu'elle est a la cam - 
pagne. 

Je me porte Jiarfaitemcnt 
bien^ ou a merveille. 

Ma mere se porte tres mal 

Vous avez agi sagement* 

Vous m'accusez afaux^ 

\\ sait le Fran<^ois a fov,d. 



284 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



You wiW hardly persuade 
her. 

She consented to it luith 
reluctancy. 

She went againat her will, 

I agree to it heartily. 

She \%se€iiref7om all dan- 
ger, 

I have told yoa my* senti- 
ment openly. 

He has given us a descrip- 
tion to the life' 

He fell upon his back, . 

They "wtnt gro/iing along. 

You have put on your 
stockings the wrow^szcfe 
outwards^ 

He did- it ow fiurfiose. 

I didllot do it designedly. 

Bo you speak ingood ear-^ 
nest '^ 

I tell it you seriously^ 

I did it in a joke» 

I did it in jest « 

She told itybr/^^w* 

You have done iXinahurry, 

I hav^e done it unawares. 

You speak at random. 

J*et the worst come to the 
worsts you can only lose 
your labour. 

They are narrowly\o{\<f^e(S. 

I shall ingenuously ovv^n it. 

I won it fairly. 

I am quite persuaded of it. 

He would by all means 
make mestayf'jrdinner- 

You V book is,Z72 all rts/iects 
better 

I warn you friendly* 

Let us amicably ^^XilQ our 
aiTuirs^ 



A peine la persuadere^ 

vons. 
Elle y Gonsentit a regret, 

XcmMVo- 
Elle y est allee a contre 
I'y consens (^e bon cotur, 
Elle est a convert de tout 

danger. 
Je vous ai dit mon senti- 
ment a de convert. 
II nous a fait une descrip- 
tion an naturel. 
II tomba a la renverse- 
lis pJlerent a tdtons* 
Yous avez rais Vos bas a 
fenvers. 

11 1'a fait ex fires; 

Je ne Ta.pas tait a dessein. 

Paries- vous de bonne foi^^ 

Je xowsle Ah serieusemeiih 
Je le ^%fiour rire, 
Je Tai dit/fowr badiner, 
Elle I'a dit en bad^ant, 
Vous ! 'avez fait h la hate. 
Je Tai fait par me garde, 
Vous parlea an hasard, 
jlufiisallery\o\jisnei>ouvez 
perdre que votre peine* 

lis sont loges a r^troit, 
Je I'avouerai de bonriejoi. 
Je I'ai gagne de bon jeu, 
J'en suis toitt-d-fait per-?^ 

suade. 
II voulut a t out e force mi 

faire rester a diner. 
Votre >ivre est meiileur aJ 

tons egardS' 
Je voiis avertis en ami. 
Regions nos affaires a 

Camiabk' 



FRENCH TONGUE, 



$85 



He awaked mddcnly. 
Let us live infieace. 
You may sleep quietly. 
Will you return ^mfity ? 

l^efree^ as if you were at 

your own house. [/t/. 
She has resisted him stout- 
Did you go thither on foot? 
She was on horseback 

when I saw her. 
Yes, indeed^ I have been 

there. 
Perhaps he will come So-. 

day. 
He probably does not 

know it. 
Put them sefiarat€ly<t 
i have put them out of the 

way, 
I have left them afiart, 
I know it better than you. 
Trade goes on wor^ and 

worse, 
I know it a$ well as you. 

My mother is not so sick 

as she was- 
His affairs go better qnd 

better. 
He shall dearly pay me 

for it, 
I am thirty years old, nei- 
ther more nor (ess. 
■ ^bove ally do not forget to 

bring paper- \vate, 

I shall speak to her ihfiri- 
[3 ] It is the opinion of 

many people. 
It is the custom of few 

people. 
That happens to many 

people. 



Il se r^veilla en sursaut. 
Vivons enfiair. [Jios, 

Vous pduvez dormit en re- 
Vousen retournerez-vous 

a vide ? 
Ag'S^^ez librement, comme 

SI vous etif z chez vouSo 
'E4\\e\\ii2iHsist6for,t^ferme 
Y allates-vou.< d pied ? 
Elle etoit dehevcU^ quand 

je la vis. 
Qui, en v^rit^ y^y ai ^te, 

Peut-etre viendra-t^il aM» 

jourd'hui. 
Jprobablemer^t il ne le salt 

pas. 
Mettez-les separiment^ 
JTe ies ai n^is a Vecart. 

Je Ies ai laisses ^part. 
Je le sais rmeux qut: vouSo 
Le commmerce va depi^ 

en pis, 
Je le sais aussi bien que 

VQUS. 

Ma mere se porte moina 
mal qu'elle ne faisoit. 

Ses affaires vont de mieux- 
en mieux. 

II me le payera cher.; 

J'ai trente ans, riipkis ni 

moins, 

Swtouty n'oubliez pas d^ < 

apporter du papier, [lier, 

Je lui parlerai en partial^ 

C'est Topinion de beau» 

coup de gens. 
C-est la coutume de pea 

de gens. 
Qela arrive ^ beaucpup 

de gens. 



28^ 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



[4.] I have 720^ learned 
my lesson. [inore, 

I shall speak to him no 

I have 720^ seen him at all. 

He knows nothing, 

I never knew him. 

By no means consent to it» 

I did not^Qtcmy body there. 

[5.1 Have you not seen 
my brother > 

Have you 720^ written your 
exercise ? 

Have they not yet break- 
fasted ? [it } 

Has she ?2Q^ consented to 

Has he not spent all his 
money ? 

Has he not sent f©r him ? 

[6.] I neither Iwe nor 

hate him. 
Ineither see her r^or speak 

to her. 
Unless you come with me 

JLest he should' die. 
I shall hinder him from 
playing. 

I am afraid he is sick. 

Be sure that he does not 

go out- 
I am afraid he will not 

come to day- 
Why do you fear she will 

not write to you ? 

She fears he does not love 

her. 
^hc f -:ars he is not in good 

h#altht 



Jen'ai/?r/5 appris ma le=- 

con. 
' Je ne Ini parlerai /ilus. 
Je ne I'ai point vu. 
11 ne sait r/(?;e. 
Je ne V2l\ jamais connu. 
A^y consentez nullement.. 
Je ?^V ai vu fiersonne. 
J\*' a.v t Z' vous flas vu-mon 

frere ? 
A'^avez-vous/2/z5 ecrit vo^ 

tre theme? 
^'ont-ils pas encore d^- 

jeun^ ? 
JS/'y-R't-eUepas consent! ^ 
JV'ii t'il pas depense tout 

son argen t ^ :, 

A'e Ta-t-il pas envoy! 

chercher? 7 

Je ne Taime ?iine le hais^ 

Je ne la vois ni ne lui^ 

parle- 
^ moins que von s ne ve* 

niez avec moi. 
JDe crainte qu'il ne mourut* 
J'empecherai qu'il nejouef, 

Qiiy Je rempecherai de 

jouer. 
Je Grains qu'il ne soit ma- 

lade- 
Prenez garde qu'il ne': 

sorte. 
Je crains qu'il ne viennd 

pas aujourd'hui. 
Pourquoi craignez-vous- 

qu'elle ne vous derive 

pas .? 
Elle craint qu'il ne Taime 

pas, 
Eile apprehende qu'il we 

soit pas en bonne sant^> 



fRENGH TONGUE. 



28f 



I desire no recompense 
but the pleasure of 
obliging you. 

It is only through idle- 
ness. 

I know only him. 

It.was but a false alarm„ 

It is only a jest 

We are but two. 

I spoke but two words to 

him. 
IJearnedFrench but three 

moBths. 
I heard only that news. 

We did stay there only 

one hour. 
She wrote only sis lines. 
V/hy do not you answer ? 
W/iydonot you study ? 
iVhy do not you write ? 
?f7/z/ does not he go tiii- 

the r himself? [er? 

IW?7/ ishe^cf come so<-.i> 
JV/iy does ?zoi^ she rise eai'- 

Jier? n 

I cannot go thither. 
i cannot keep pace with 

you. 
You cannot speak to hm 

to-day, 
I cannot stay any longer. 

(Cannot you foixe him to 
I do 720/^ f/dr^ to speak to 

her. ^ - 

I do 720^ dareXo contradict 

him. 
He does7zo^ dure (otake it 

upoi! hirnselt. 
SliL does 720^ dare freely to 

declare her thoughts. 



Je 7i€ desire pour recom- 
pense que le plaisir de 
vous obiiger. 

Ce n'est que par pure fai- 
Rcantise. 

Je ne connois que lui. 

Ce 7i'etoit (/z^'une fausse 
alarm e. 

Ce n'est ^i^'un badinage. 

Nous72e sommes que deux. 

Je ne lui ai dit que deux 
mots. 

Je Tz'ai appris le Fran^oi.s. 
que trois mois. 

Je Tz'ai appris que cette 
nouvelle. 

Nous/z'y restames ^'i^'une 
hcure, 

Elle n^A ecvitque six lignes. 

Que ne repondez-vous ^ 

^it<??z'etudiez-vous ^ 

yMe7z'ecrivez-vous ? 

Quen'y va-t-il lui-meme i 

Que 7z'est-il venu plutot ? 

Que ne se le\^e-t-elle plus 

matin ? 
Je ne/nds y alien 
Je nejnds vous tenir pied. 

¥ a us tie fi o uvcz 1 u i p a r 1 e r 

aujourd'hui. 
Je ne peux rester plus 

long- temps. 

A'6' fiouvez- vous 1 'y force rt 
Je 7z'o5c lui parler. 

Je vJose le contredire^ 

II n'os'c s'en charger. 

Elle n^ose declarer lib re- 
meot ses pensees< 



!2S8 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



Do not you dare to write 

to hinri ? 
Does not he dure to go to 

the play ? 
Does not she dcire to take 

the least pleasure? 
J have not ^em him these 

tenvears. 
J had ?*Jp^ spoketi to her for 

two yt^arsc 
X have not beeti at the 

play these three years* 
I had not been in the Park 

for four yearsi 
1 shall mi see him for a 

year. 
J shall not speak to them 

for two yeiats. 



Wosez'\o\x^pas\\x\ ecriref 

Mose t'\\ fiu^ aller k Igi 

comedie ? 
JSl^ose-t-eWe pas prendre 

le moindre plaisir ? 
II y a dix ansqueje n^ 

I'ai yu. 
il y avoit deux ans que je 

lie lui avois parle. 
II y a trois ans queje w'ai 

^,te ^ la comedie. 
II V avoit quatre ans que 

je n*avois ^te au Pare. 
Je ne ie verrai rf'un an. 

Je ne leur parlerai d^ 
deux ans» 



CHAPTER IX. 

M.ulu and Observntions upon Prepositions 



n 



SOME prepositions gpyern the first case ; some 
the second ; and some «he third* 

i. 1 he following prepositions exemplified govertu 
the first case 



Avaht »-^ 
apr«s -^ 
devant -^ 
avec — 
chez '"-^ 
centre ^ 
:dans ^^ 
en ^e- *°^ 
jdtepuis*^ 

i^tridr^ 



le deluge, — — 
vous, '•^ "^ — 
lui, ^ ^^ -^ — 
son ftere, *^ *— 
vous, ^^ •— ^"^ 
la muraillej — = -- 
la chambre, *^ 
An^leterre> >— 
sion artiv^f*, s^ «^ 
k commencement J 
!e jardin^ ^^ -^ 

dess<)«S5 la table? *-^ 



bejcre the deluge, 
after you, 
befote him, 
with his brtthei\ 
at your house 
against the '^iL 
in the\yoom<' 
in Engiand* 
since his arii^uL 
from iht beginning, 
behind the garden. 
'" over or under the fa- 
ble. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 
Aerftre* laporte^ — between the door, 

etivers sonprochainj^^owoTcJowe'* 

(^ neighbour. 



environ- 



sAa 



— • cent guinees, < about a hundred 
C guineas, 

^xcepte ou horrais son pere, except his father, 
moyennarit— unesomme d'argent,yor a^t/^/i of money. 

C notwithstanding^ 
nonobstant, ou C \ < 

malgre ^samcre, ^ 

malgpe elle, -- — 

outre sonlogement, 

par — -— terre, - 

parmi les riches, — 

pendant — Thiv^r, 

durant r- la paix, 

pour — — sa pension,— 

sans amis, 

selon, ou suivant votre avis, 



or in spite of 
'^ his mother' 
against her will 
besides his lodging, 
by land' 
among the rich, 
during the winter^ 
during the Jieace, 
for mis pension* 
withoi^jfriends, 
J according to your 

advice. 



sous 

sous 

tou chant — 

vers 



les decombres, under the rul)bish, 
le toit, — under the roof 

cette affaire. {'''^^^"^^ *'"" 

le sair, — about th^ evening. 

Con this side, or on 

pardeca, oz^par">,^„ Ai^^ "S ihat side of the 
dela jlesAlpes, ^ ^^^^ 

a t ravers — le corps, — through the body. 

The following prepositions gpverii the second case. 

s.^ « 1 i« .^«- <i round, Gt about the 

Autour delamaison, ^ ^^^;^ 

aupres — — de lui, near him* 

faute d'argent, — for want of money, 

lelong — •— . de la haie, — along the hedge, 
pres, ou proche du Palais Koyal,wear the Royal PaL 

de quoi, — after whim. 

du cabinet, — out (f the closet. 

de ses ennemiSj/or^o/w his enemies, 

dela Bourse, J %^^^^i^^^^ 



ensuite — 
liors - 
loin - 

^•is-a vis 



S00 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

And all others which are composed of a substan- 
tive preceded either by a , aw, or en. Except a traveri^^ 
"whfch governs the first c*se ; as above. 

3. The following prepositions j;:overn the third case.- 
Conformement a I'usage, — agreeable to cufitomu 

guant a moi» — ■ — as for my parU 

jusqu'aux — nues, — to^the clouds. 

par rapport _ . ses pratiques, \ '^V^^^ *« 

Reinarks upon Prepasitionsr 

1. Some prepositions are placed before infinitives, as well a¥ 
before nouns ; some when placed Ivefore infinitives, have no 
preposition after them, others have the p reposition Vi^, and 
some the preposition a Those ♦vhich tuke no tueposition af* 
ter them befo5:e an infinitive, are tipres^par-, sans, and/»owr g'§ 
as, after having talked without book, apres avoir parle srt;i»l 
savoir ce qn'il disoit Those which take the preposition dJgl 
after Ihem before^pi infinitive, are hors, hormis, excepte, km 
la reserve, Wj||^au lieu, fkute, k force, an p^rit, and^perhapflti 
some others r^, far from blaming you, loin de voas blamer.! 
Those which take the particle c}, are suuj and jusque i as, if 
can but begin again, sauf d rt commencer. 

2. En is never followed by the article, though we say, in a 
familiar way of speaking, he is dea^i, il est ali^ en I'autre 
jnoiide^ upon what account, en /'honneur de quel saint. 

Dans is always followed by the article, except before pos- 
sessive pronouns, pro])er names of authors quoted, and proper 
nsmes of towns : as, I have read it in Cicero's, je Pai lu dans 
Ciceron ; seek in my popket, cherchez dans ma poche. We 
indifferently make use of en nr dans before personal pro- 
nouns: as, in him, tw lui, or dans \uu But we say, penser 
en soi-m&me, to reflect within one's self. 

£l7i, before nouns of time signifies the time emi^oyed in 
doing a thing ; and dans, the time after expiration of which 
the things will be done : as, I could do it in' eight days, or I 
"would spend no more than eight days in doing it, je le ferois 
en buit jours; I will do it eight days hence, je le feral dans 
huit jours. 

4. Chez, followed by a pronoun, or a proper name of a 
person, signifies somebody's house : as, he is in my house, in 
your house, &c il est chez moi, chez vous, &c. It is preced- 
ed hy de, when it signifies coming from ; as, I come from 
your house, ]e viens de chez vous. 

5. Dedn7is, dehors, dessns, dessous, and anparavant, are al- 
ways adverbs. an<,l never prepositions : consequently they have 
Bo cs^se after them, except when dedans and dehors^ dcssm 



FRENCH TONGUE. 291 

SLjaddessous, are either joined together, or have the particle da 
' or par before them ; as, both Avithin and without the house, 
dedans & dehors la maison ; both upon and under the chair^ 
dessus & dessous la chaise ; from under the bed, de dessous 
lelit. 

6. When the definite article precedes dedafis or delwrs.^ 
dessus or dessous, those words are used substantively, and <?an» 
sequentiy require the followipg noun in the second case; as, 
the inside, or the outside of the house^ le dedans ou le dehori^ 
(k la maison. 

7. Jusques, or rsither Jusgve (to, as far as, till) coming be- 
fore a vowel, its final e or es is omitted, aud an apostrophe in 
put in its stead ; as, to death, jusqu' h la mort. This is to be 
observed even in declamation ; as, how long ? jusqu' a quand? 
and not jusques a quand ? as likewise the other conjunction ^ 
till, until ; as, jusqu'k ce que, which govern the subjunctive; 
and not jusques a oe que. 

8. Even, or very, in English, is sometimes rendered into 
French, by jusqu'd; as, even the king,.jusqu'auroL In this 
sense it signifies an emphatic expression of a collection, or 
Universality of objects, either mentioned or understood ; as, 
when I say, even the kings are mortal, jusqu* aux rois sont 
mortels ; it signifies all men, even kings are mortal, tous les 
homme^jusgu^aux rois sont mortels. 

9. Savf, which signifies an exception to something, governs 
the first case, speaking of things ; as, without prejudice of hi^ 
claim, saaf son droit. It governs the third case, speaking of 
persons ; as, sauf ait demandeur k se pourvoir, but the plain- 
tiff, or petitioner, is at liberty to sue, or make application. A 
law expression. 

10. When 6e/bre signifies opposite to, in the presence of, or 
denotes precedency it must be rendered into French by de-^ 
vant ; as, opposite to your house, devant votre maison ; m 
the presence of the king, devant le roi ; dukes are beforcj 
earls, or have the precedency of earls, les dues ont le pas sur 
les comtes; its contrary is derriere, behind, in all other 
cases, be/ore is rendered into Frencii by avant .• as, we were 
happy before the war, nous etions heureux ava7it lii guerre ; 
virtue must be preferred to every thing, la vertu doit aller 
avavt tout : its contrary is aprcs, after. 

11. Avaiit, followed by que^ is a conjunction, which governs 
the subjunctive : as, beVore you were bom, avant que vous 
fussiez ne ; followed by de, it governs the infinitive ; as, be- 
fore death, avant de mourir, 

12. Fres, aupres, near, govern the 2d case, thoup:h we may- 
say, in common conversation near St. Paul's, presTe^^^eSt. 
Paul. Presmust always be used instead of aupres, speaking 
of time or age : as, it is near twelve o'clock, il est pres de 
midi • she is near thirty years old, elle a pres de trent^e ans: 



292 A GRAMMAR OF THE j 

13. As custom will not always suffer aupres to be used^, m 
when speaking of places, particularly after trop, si, assez, plus^ 
Irien, I advise the learner to make use ot* pres .• as, he lives 
near the church, il demeure j&res de V^glise ; though aupres, 
may be indifferently used in such a case. 

14. JPres in the sense of save, excepting, governs the thini 
case, and must be placed after the noun which it gdverns : as^, 
except a crown, k un ecu pres ; excepting that, k celapres. 

15. Aupres must always be used instead oi'pres, 1st, wlren 
we speak of somebody put near another, as his master, friend, 
counseilor, or servant ; as, j'ai mis mon fils anpres de mou 
frere, 1 have put my son liear my brothery ^>^z. as his tutor, 
master, friend. 

2dly, When we mention in what esteem a person is with 
a^iother, or what interest he has with him : as, he is in favour 
with the king, my lord, that lady, il est bien aupres du roi, 
de moriseigneur, de cette dame ; he can do what he will with 
him, il a tout pouvoir mipres de lui. 

3dly, When we mention by whom a person is entertained, 
sheltered,&c. :.as, he is gone to live with him, il s'estretir6 aw- 
pres de lai ; he is quite safe with him, il est en surety m^res 
de lui. 

16. The preposition^ to and towards, when they signify ia 
regard to, must always be rendered into French by ewt^e/'s / 
as, he is ungrateful to God and men, il est ingrat enz^^r^ Dieu 
& en vers leshommes. In all other eases towards must be ren- 
dered by vers ; as, he went towards Islington, il est alle vers 
Islington. Vera signifies likewise about ; as, about the begin- 
ning of the spring, vevs le commencement du printemps. 

17. When from and to denote simply the distance from one 
place to another, they are rendered into French by de and a/ 
as, it is fivt miles from London to Greenwich, il y a cinq milles 
d'j Londres d Greenwich. When they denote the quality of 
the distance, they are rendered by depuis and jusgiie / as, he 
walked from London to Greenwich, il alia a pied depuis Lon- 
dres Juaqu^ a Greenwich. When they denote succession of 
place, they are rendered by de and en : as, he goes from 
town to town, il va de ville en ville. 

18. A, each, and every, before a noun denoting cHstribution 
of people, time, or place, are rendered into Frenchby par - 
as, two crowns a piece, deux ecus par tete ; three guineas a 
week, trois guinees par semaine ; four shillings a mile, qua- 
tre chelings par mille. 

19. Vis-d'Vis and d Vopposite, over against, govern the 2d 
case, though we say in common conversation, vis-k-vis Tho- 
tel d€ ville, over against Guildhall. The first is applied both 
to persons and things, the other to things only. 

20. The participle active in English, preceded by without, 
is Tendered into French by sam^ sometimes followed by a sub- 



FRENCH TONGUE._ ' 29^ 

siantive without an article ; as, he spoke tQ him without featv 
iog, il lui paria sa?is crainte. Sometimes by an infinitive with-? 
out a preposition ; as, il lui paria sans craindre. Sometimes 
hy que, and the following verb in the subjunctive mood : as, 
il lui parla sans qu^ii craignit : and even this last must be 
used when the participle active in English, is preceded either 
by a pronoun or any other noun. 

•21. As, in English, with a verb in the indicative mood, or on 
and upon with a participle active, are rendered into French, 
sometimes by mr followed by ce que : asj you wrote to me 
that, — SUV ce que vous m'avez ecrit, que — Sometimes by 
comme ; as, I walked in the Park, comine je me promenois 
au Pare. Sometimes by a followed by a substantive % as, on 
my arriving at London, k raon arrlvee a Londres, 

:22. The prepositions de, cofWe^ sur, sous, and sans, are 
commonly repeated in French, though they are not inEnglish;^ 
as, there were many books upon the table and chair, il y avof^: 
beaucoup de livres swr la table k sur la chaise. 

23. J?, par, pour^ avev^ dans, &c. are cotnmonly repeated 
when the nouns are not synonynious, or pretty nearly of th^ 
same signification ; as, by mildness and reason, />nr la douceur 
& par la raison : par is repeated b«;c£iuse douceur and raisou 
are neither synonymous, nor nearly of the same signification. 
But in this instance, in luxury and voluptuousness, dans la 
mollesse & la volupte, thp preposition ie, for the contrary rea- 
aon, not repeated. 
Further Remarks ufion the Pre}iositton a a^zc/de. 

N. B. The preposition de, and the article /e, are contracted 
into da ; de and les mioxles : of the father, dupere, of the fa*, 
thers, despees ; instead of dele pere, de les per es : the same 
contraction of the article is made with the preposition a : to 
the father, an pere, to the fathers, aux peres ; instead ol a h 
pere a les peres. 

The lU'eposition de (of) before, indicates the second state, 
a is the sign of th^ third state, see page 74. 

1. Two nouns substantive in English joined together, an,d 
making but one word, the firat expressing the manner or form 
of a thing, and likewise the use which it Is designed for, the 
first must be the second in French,with the preposition ^before 
it, or it must be changed into a verb in the infinitive mood ; 
aSj.a dining-room, une salle a manger j^2i patch-box, wit boite h 
mouches. But if the first expresses the matter which the thini:; 
spoken of is made ofj it requires the preposiiion de : as, silk 
stockings, des has de soie ; a silver pot, -un put iV argent. 

2. A is sometimes used, Ist, instead of a?, or to before narne-i 
of places, which admit of no urticle ; as, vivre a Paris, aiier^ 
JaOndres, s'ai-reterk Amsterdam. 

'3dly^ Ti^stead qt "ivith : as, to paint with QiK pei^dre k I'hnilr 
J3 b^ 



294 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

3(1 ly, Instead of /or .• as, a coach for six persons, un car- 
rosse a six places. 

4thly, Instead of after .• as, to live after the English fashion, 
vivre a I'Anglolse. ,. 

5thly, Instead of on : as, on the right hand, a main droit ; jj 
on the left hand, a main gauche. f { 

6thly, Instead of i/i .• as, a suit in fashion, un hahit a la mode, 

7thly, Instead oiby : as, step by step, pas k pas. 

Sthly, Instead of according to, followed by the substantive 
avis ; as, according to my opinion, a mon avis. 

9thly, Instead of io .* as, to judge of him by his mien, r^ juger 
de lui par la mine. 

lOthly, Instead of a^ / as, at two o'elock, d deux heures. ft 
is sometimes used without being expressed in English. 

3. U^ia often put after a substantive instead of sowie, expre^?- 
ed or understood ; as, a bit of bread, of meat, un raorceau de 
pain, ele viande. Moreover it is sometimes used, 1st, after the 
indeterminate pronouns, guelqu'tm,persontie, nen.quoi^^Q, 
before an adjective ; as, there is n«body so lucky as he is, il n'y > 
a personne vie si heurcux que lui: there is something inexpress- 1 1 
ibly gracious in his discourses, il y a je ne sais quoi de gra- [ 
cieux dans ses di scours. 

2dly, IJefore the proper names of places, having no article, 
which one is going or coming from ; as, revenir de Paris, par- 
tir de Londres. 

Silly, Instead of in : as, he vent away in the night, il paptit 
de nidt. 

4thly, Before a participle past in such and the like expres- 
sions ;as, there were ten thousand of them killed or wounded^ 
i^j en eat dix raille de tu^s ou c/e blesses. 

5thly, Instead of by : as, he is taller by the whole head, i( 
est plus grand de toute la tete. 

»6thly. Instead oiioiih: as, he ran with all his might, il eou- 
rut de toutes ses forces. 

7thly, Instead of m, after, instead of: as, be behaves in or 
after, this manner, il se conduit de cette raani^re; were 1 in- 
Slead of vou, si j'et^is de vous. 

8thly, instead of on.- as, to live on fish, vivre Jepoisson. It 
is likewise usetl without being expressed in English. 

There are some other uses of the prepositions de and a / it 
would be too tedious to relate them here, as having been suffi- 
ciently explained in the , foregoing grammatical rules and ob- 
servations. 

Rules and Observations upon Prepositions^ exen}- 
plifiedfor the Scholar'' s Practice, 

I was here before you. J'etois ici avant vous. 
You are come after me. Vous etes venu apres mpi. 
Get out o/my sight. Otez-vous de ^evatit mbi. 



FRENCH TONGXJE. 



I saw it behind the house. 
He vjtnX.tvUh his brother. 
I have been at your house. 
HaVe you been *at his 
house ? [hcfuse. 

I have not been at her 
Why did you not come to 

our house ? 
He has succeeded a^am*^ 

all hkelihood. 
You will find my stock- 
ings in the closet. 
He is m England. 
Since his arrival he has 

always been ill. 
I foresaw the conse- 
quences of it, from the 
beginning. 
My knife is over or under 
* the table. [two. 

Let us share between us 
l^et us have charity to- 
wards our neighbours* 
} have spent about a thou- 
sand guineas. 
They are all dead, excefit 
* my father. 
Jie will do it^r a sum of 

money. 
She likes him, nolwUh- 

standing his humour. 
She would marry hira in 
sfiite of all her relations. 
y\ spend two guineas a 
week besixks my lodg- 
ing. " 
We travelled by land. 
I left it among my papers. 



295 

Je I'ai vu deniere\?i maison 
II est all^ avec sob frere. 
J'ai €i6 chez vous. 
Avez-vous et^ chez lui ? 



We take a walk every iday 
during the summer- 

The people suffer a great 
deal during war. 

I gave it/or you. 



Je n'ai pas ete chez elle. 
Pourquoi n'^tes-vous pas 

venu chez nous ? 
II a re«ssi coTi^e toute ap- 

parence. 
Vous trouverez m.es bas 

dcms le cabinet. 
II est en Angleterre. 
jbejiuis son arrivee il a 

toojours et^ malade. 
Pen pre\^is les consequen- 
ces des le Gommence- 
ment. 
Mon couteau est dessus ou 
c/essowfi la table, [deux. 
Partageons entre nous 
Ayons de la charite enva^s 

notre prochain. 
J'ai d^pense envirbn mille 

guin^es. 
lis sonttousi»orts,^^c<?//^e 

ou hormis mon pere. 
II le fera moyennant une 

somme d'argent. 
Elle V2\xxity7ionobstant son 

humeur. 
Elle vouUitl'^pouser mat- 

grS tous ses parens. 

Je d€pense deux guinees 

par semaine oiUre mon 

logement. [terre. 

Kous voyageames par 

Je Tai laisse parmi ines 

papiers. 
Nousnous premenons tous 

les jours penda7it V^id- 
Le peuple souffre beau- 
coup durant la guerre. 
Je I'ai donne/zowr vous. 



296 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



He is without friends and 

iMoney. 
I have done according to 

vour advice* 
Eight nnen have been bu- 
ried under the rubbish. 
Leave that dish ufion the 

table. 
He spoke to me concern- 
ing that affair. 
I shall go and see you 

about the evening. 
He has been run^ through 

the body. 
[2.] He raaibles every 

night about the house. 

A Juan hVdfvt^Jbr ivant of 

^mouey. [hedge- 

He tollowed me along the 

There are fine buildings 

along th& Thanrjes. 
Let as walk along the 

r:ven 
I met him near the royal 

palace. 
He folio sved me out ot the 
city. [try. 

1 am far from my coun- 
Cooie near «T;e. [hrc 

Keep yourself ?iear the 
She lives ovcr-against the 

Excaa/ige. 
^"Ifter which there was a 

I have suffered a great 
deal on her accou ;t. 

She died, to the great re- 
gret of aii her umily. 

Cut them close to the 
ground. 

Sit down near ^ny brother. 

Ht iiade his escape by 
?7ieam of the night. 



II est sans argent & san$' 

amis. 
J'ai fait selon, ou suivant 

votre-avis. 
Huit hommes ontete ense* 
velis sou^ les decombres. 
Laissez ce plat sur la 

table. 
II m'a parle touchant cet- 

te affaire. 
J'irai vous voir vers le soir^ 

II a regu un coup d'epee 

a trovers le corps. 
II rode toutes les nuits an- 

tour de la maisoii. 
Faute d'argent, on raeurt 

de faim. [haie- 

li me suivit le long de la 
ii y a de beaux batimens 

le long de la Tanuse. 
Prom enons- nous le long 

de la riviere. 
Je i'ai recontre pres du 

palais royal. 
11 me suivit hors de la 

ville. 
Je suis loin de mon pays. 
Veaez aupres e moi. 
1 enez- vous az//?ri5 du feu^ 
Elle di meure vis-k-vis de 

la Bourse. 
Ensuite de quoi il y eut \ju 
^ bal. 
J'ai beaucoup souffert a : 

cause d'elle. 
Eiie uiourut, au grand re- 

gi^ci de toutt- sd famille. 
Cobpez-les kJieurA^ ter-^ 

re. fmon frcre, 

Ass*:yez-vous a cote de 
il s'echappa a la fatcuv 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



297 



The bridge was built at 
the ex/iense of the city. 

He |>reteiids to be in the 
right, in sfiite of good 

. sen^e. 

They dress themselves it/^ 
(er the Yr^wzh fashion. 

^s to what you tel], 1 heard 
no talk about it. 

She has done it %mthout the 

knowledge oihtv mother. 

You shall not have liunder 

fifty guineas. 
He has sold all l\is estate, 
excefit a small house. 

We are sheltered here 

from the rain. 
There has been a battle oti 

this side of the Alps, 
He went to the Qther side 

of the Pyrenees. 
Nobody is screened from 

slander. 
Dakes are above earls. 

I am below you- 

Let us go and meet hioi. 

He has favoured all his 

family "by his will, his 

wife ex ce filed. 
^Ve^have brought it about 

by strength of arffis. 
I shall deiend you, at the 

fieriloi my life. 
He was stopped m^A^ 772 i^- 

dle of the street. 
He ordered his coantry- 

house to be built evm 

ivith tJ^ gi'cnmd. 



Le pont fut bati aux de^ 

pens de la ville. 
II veut avoir raison, e^i 
depit du bon sens. 

lis s'habillent ^ la mode 

de France, ou a la Fran- 

goise. 
A i'tgard de ce que vous 

dite^, je n'en ai pas en- 

tendu parler. 
Elle I'a fait a Vinson de S4 

ir.ere. 
Vous ne i'aurez pas a morns' 

de cinquante guiiiees. 
II a vendu tout son bien, a 

la reserve d'une petite 

maison. 
Nous sommes ici kTabri 

de lapluie- 
II y a eu une bataille en 

deed des Alpes. 
II est all^ an deld des Pyre- 
nees. 
Personne n'est a caircert 

de la medisance. 
Les dues sont au dessus_ 

des comtes. . 
Je suis an dessous de vous. 
Allons au dex^ant de lui- 
llafavorisetoutesafamil- 

lepar son testament, a 

Cexcluslon de sa fern me. 
Nous en sommes .venus a 

bout k force de bra<^. 
Je vous dfcfendrai, au peril 

de ma vie- 
II fut arrete au milieu de . 

la rue. 
II a fait batir sa maison de 

campagne arf r de chaus- 



S98 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



He lends rooney at the rate 

of five per cent. 
[3.J As for my part, I do 

not care for it. 
They have been pursued 

as/ar as the wood. 
I do not like to rennove on 

account oi my customers. 

[Rem. 1.] jifter having 
talke^d ivithout book* 

To show you how much I 
am concerned for all 
your interests, 

I give you leave to do 
whatever you please, 
excefit geing out. 

Full liberty isgranted him 
to spend his money, but 
not to squander it nway. 

Far from disapproving of 
your conduct, i would 
h'ive done the same. 

He does nothing else but 
prattle, instead of learn- 
ing Jiib Jesjon. 

For want of asking it of 
him, you will lose your 
m'^nev. 

By dint of walking we ar- 
rvt' i bi?rore night. 

He has entered an action 
against him, at ihefieril 
p/" losing all his estate. 

I shall teil her my senti- 
ment, at the risk of dis- 
plea'-inj^ ner. 

I caj: only begin again. 

H? I :ok 60 much liberty 
us to tell her that she 
had told a lie- 



II pre te di^Y argent a raison 
de cinq pour cent. 

Quant a moi, je ne m'en 
soucie pas. 

On les a poursuivisyw^gz^'- 
au bois. 

Je n'aime point a deloger, 
par rapport a mes pra- 
tiques. 

Apres avoir parle sans sa« 
voir ce qu'ii disoit. 

Pour vous montrer com- 
bien je prends part a 
vos uit^rets. ^ 

Je vous permets de faire 
tout ce qu'il vousplaira, 
hgrmis de sortir- 

II a tout pouvoir de depen- 
ser son argent, a la 
reserve de le prodiguer* 

Loin de d^sapprouver vo- 
tre conduite, j'auroia 
fait la me me chose. 

II ne fait que causer, au 
/2ej^a"apprendre sa lecon- 

Faute de le lui demander, 
vous perdrez votre ar- 
gent 

A force de marcher, nous 
arrivamesavantia nuito 

II lui a uitente un proces, 
aup^ril de perdre tout 
son bien. 

Jelui dirai mon sentiment, 
aurisque deluidcplaire, 

Saufk recommencer. 

11 s'emancipa 7*w55'zi'a lui 

dire qu'elle en avoit 

nxenti. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



m 



1 haVe fead it in Virgil. 

I am sure that she is now 
in Paris. 

My father w abroad. 

Are you sure that he is 
not in the city ? 

I have left it in the cham- 
ber. 

I have shut it up in my 
trunk. 

. Put that in my closet. 

There is nothing in the 

bottle. 
[2.] Rr fleet well wig/iin 

yourself. 
I see nothing in him which 

displeases me. 
There is nothing in her 

which you can blame. 

Is there any thing in them 
which may give occa- 
sion to your suspicions ? 

[3.J I could do it in ten 
days. 

You would spend rnore 
than a fortnight in do- 
ing it. [days. 

I shall have done ifi tour 

I shall send it you in a 
week's time. [house. 

[4.] I come Jrom your 

I came Jrom his or her 
house. 

[5.] I have looked for it 
ivithin or without the 
house. 

There is a Spanish lea- 
ther both ufion and un- 
der the chairs. 



Je I'ai lu dans Virgile. 
Je suis sur qu'elle est a 

present dans Paris. 
Mon pere n'est pas enville, 
EteS'Vous sur qu'il ne soit 

pas dans la cite ? 
Je Tai laisse dan^\2i cham- 

bre. 
Je Tai enferme dans r*'on 

coffre. 
Mettez cela dans mon ca- 
binet. 
II n'y a rien dans la bou- 

teille. 
Reflechissez bien en vous- 

meme 
Je ne vois nen en^ ou dans 

lui qui me deplaise. 
II n'y a rien en, ou dans el- 

le que vous puissiez bla- 

mer. 
Y a~t-il quelque chose en, 

ou dans eux qui puisse 

donner lieu k vos soup- 

gons ? 
Je le ferois en dix jours. 

Vous ne le feriez pas e;i 

quinze jours* 

[jours. 
J'aurai fait dans quatre. 
Je vous J'enverrai dans 

huit jours. 
Je viens de chez votls. 
Je venois de chezluu ou de 

chez elle. 
Je Tai cherche dedans iD' 

dehors la maison. 

11 y adu marroquin dessjis 
6c dessous les chaises'. 



'MO'' 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



He drew hivti from under 

the table. 
[6.] The outside of his 

country house is very 

pretty. 
Give me the u/ifierpart of 

the bread. 
You will oblige me, if vou 

give me the loiver part 

of the pie. 
The fruit falls q^the trees. 
[7.] I shall love you till^ 

death. 
[8.] All meny€ven Kings 

themselves, are liable 

to sickness. 
All men despise him, er/^^i 

his relations. 
[9.] Without prejudice to 

my claim. 
But the plaintiff is at li- 
berty to sue. 
[10.] Why d'o you leave 

that heap of dirt before 

your house? 
They are not covered in 

the presence of the King. 
You have the precedency 

of him. 
We were happy before 

the war. 
Virtue should be prefer- 
red to every thing. 
[12.] It is near two o'clock, 
bhe is near twenty years 

old. 
He lives near St. Paul's. 
[IS.] Does he W^Q^onear 

you ? 
You live very 7i€ar one an- 
other. 



II le tira de dessous la ta-* 

ble* 
Le dehors de sa maison de 

campagne est fort beau. 

Donnez-moi le dessus du 

pain. 
Vous m'obligerez, si vous 

me donnez le dessous du 

patd. 
Le fruit tombe des arbres. 
Je vous 2L\m^YSL\ jusqu'k la 

mort. 
Tous les hommes, jusgu* 

aux Rois, sont sujetsi 

des rnaladies* 
Toutle monde le m^prise/ 

jusqu^ k ses parens. 
Saufmon droit. 

SauJ au demandeur a se 

pourvoir. 
Pourqnoi iaissez-vous ce 

tas de boutdevant^/oirQ 

maison ? 
On ne se couvre pas c/e.- 

vant le Roi. 
Vqus etes devant lui. 

Nous ^tions heureux a-. 

vant la guerre. 
La vertu doit aller avant 

tout. 
II estpres de deuX heures. 
Elle apres de vingt ans- 

[Paul. 
II deraeure pres de St. 
Demeure-t'il si pres de 

vous ? 
Vous demeorez bien pres 

run de Tautre. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



301 



Come nearer me. 

You are not near enough 

to me. 
(14.] She consented to 

every thing, that ex- 

cefited. 
He has paid me all, excefit 

six guiiieas. 
[15.]I have put my daugh- 
ter under her care. 
He is in favcur with the 

King. 
He can do what he will 

with him. 
She is gone to live with 

him. 
You are safe with him. 

£16.] He is ungrateful to 
me. 

I have not been ungrate- 
ful to you. 

I intend to go to France, 
about the beginning of 
the spring. 

Come about midniglit. 

She went out about noon. 

[17.] How many miles is 
itj^rom London ^o Wind- 
sor ? 

Greenwich is five miles 
from London. 

We walked /rom London 
to Greenwich. 

We came in a coach yrom 
the Tower to the Park. 

r 

Hegoesy7'omtown Motown. 
They go from house to 
house, 

C 



Approchez-vous/z/ws/ire^ 

de moi. 
Vous n'etes Xidi^assezpree 

de moi. 
Elle consentit a tout, a ce- 

la pres, 

II m'a tout paye, a six gui- 

nees fires, 
J*ai mis ma fille aufires 

d'elle. 
II est bie*i avjires du Roi. 

II a tout pouvoir aufires 

de luii 
Elle est allee aufires de 

lui. 
Vous etes en surete aufires 

de lui. 
II est ingrat enveri moi. 

3e n'al pas et^ ingrat en- 

vers vous. 
J'ai dessein d'aller en 

France vers le Goiii- 

mencement du prin- 

temps. 
Venez va^s minuit. 
Elle sortit vers midi. 
Combiendemilles ya-t-il 

de Londres d, Windsor ? 

II y a cinq miiles de Lon- 
dres a Greenwich. 

Noasallame3apiedc/(f/2«/5 
IjOVi^vQsjusqu^d Green:* 
wich. 

Nous vinmes en carrosse 
dffnds la Tour jusqu^- 
au Pare. 

11 va de ville en ville. 

lis vont de maison en mal- 
son- 



S02 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



two 



tlS.l We ^ent 
crowns a piece. 

They give him two gui- 
neas a month. 

Every mile will cost you a 
shilling. 

{19.] Sit over-against me. 

1 bought my ring over- 
against the Exchange. 

£20.] He v^ent.iuithout tell- 
ing me 2Lny more. 

She spoke a long vvhile 
without my taking no- 
tice of it. 

We went out, without her 
fierceiving it. 

He wrote to you, nvithoui 
my knowing any thing 
of it. 

He cheated us without our 
susfifcting any thing* 

She used him ill, without 
fiis comfilaining oj it, 

[21.] ^«you wrote to me 
that— 

jls I walked in the Park. 

On my arrivin^g at Loudon, 
[22.] There are many 

books upon the table 

and the chair. 
She has married him a- 

gainst my will and yours. 
It was not the sentiment oJ 

her father and mother. 
He threw so^/e under the 

table and chairs. 
He came to school with- 

out books and paper. 



Nous depensames deux 
ecus fiar tete. 

lis lui donnent deux gui- 
nees /lar mois. 

lis vous en coGtera un 
cheling fiar milJe* 

A^seyez-Yousvis'^'Vis de 
moi. 

J'ai achete ma bague vis- 
a-vis de la Bourse. 

li part it sans m*en dire da- 
vantage. 

E: epadalongtemps^saws 
guefy firisse garde. 

No?issortimes,san5 gw'elle 

s'en appergut. 
II vous ecrivit, sans que 

j'en susse la moindre 

chose. 
II nous trompa, sans que 

nous soufipnnassions la 

moindre chose- 
Elle le maltraita,5aw5 qu^il 

s'en filaignit^ 
Sur ce que vous m'aves 

ecrit que— 
Comme je me promenoi^ 

au Pare, 
./f mon arriv^ea LondreSa 
11 y a beaucoup de livres 

sur la table & sur la 

chaise. 
Elle Ta epouse contre ma 

volonte 6c60«^r^lav6tre. 
Ce n'etoit pas le sentiment 

de son pere Scflf^ sa mere. 
II en a jete sous la table & 

sous les chaisQs. 
II eht venu ^ I'^cole sans 

livres 6c sans papier* 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



[23 ] He has succ€f ded in 
if by his opuleiice and 
riches. 

H^ makes himself to be 
feared by his wealth 
and violenQe. 

Go into the dining-room. 

Wh-jre have you put my 
patch-box ^ 

He has made her a pre- 
sent of a diamond riv>g« 

Bring the vinegar bottle- 
[box? 

Where is the powder- 
Give me my gold-iringed 
petticoat. 

I go to Paris. [don. 

It is dear living in Lon- 

Jie has been in Amster- 
dam. 

The wainscot is painted 
with oil. 

She works wz^y^tbe needle* 

We had a coach for six 
persons- 

Let us take a coach for 
four persons. 

He has got a coach and 
four. 

I like to live after the 
Enghsh fashion. 

She is dressed afoer the 
French fashion. 

Go to the right hand, af- 
terwards you will go on 
to the left. 

I ordered a fashionable 
suit to be made for me. 

How ! you are in the 
fashion. 

tet; us go step by step. 



II y a reussi fiar so« opti^ 
lence 6c ses richesses- 

II se fait craindre/zar son 
opulence dc/iar ses vio- 
lences, [manger. 

Entrez dans la salle « 

Ouavez-vousmismaboite 
a mouches ? 

II hii a tait present d'une 
bagui^ de diamans. 

Apj)ortez la bauteille k 
vinaigre- 

O'i est la boite a poudre ? 

Donnez moi ma jupe a 
franges d'or. 

Je vais a Paris. [dres. 

11 fait cher vivre a Lon- 

II a 6i6 a Ami^terdam- 

Le lambris est peint u 

I'huile. 
Elle travaille a I'aiguille. 
Nous avions un carrosse k 

six places* 
Prenons un carrosse ^ 

quatre places. 
II a un carrosse ^ quatre 

chevaux. 
J*aime a vivre ^ TAn- 

gloise. 
Elle est vetue a la Fran- 

^oise. 
Aliez^ droite,ensuite vous 

prendrez a gauche. 

Je me suis fait faire ua 

habit a la mode. 
Comment I vous voila a l& 

mode- 
Allons pas a pas. 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



C?o two and two. 
According to my opinion, 

she is not in the wrong. 
To judge of hinn by his 

mien he is an honest 

.man. 
I was here at ten o'clock. 
He wears silk stockings. 
He has a fine marble- slab 

in his room, 
ffive me my black velvet 

petticoat. 
Give him a bit q/* bread. 

Do you choose a bit qf 
meat ? 

A bit of cheese will be suf- 
ficient. 

There is something inex- 
pressibly gracious in his 
discourses. [ed. 

Somebody will be punish- 

Is there any thing finer 
than the sky ? 

I shall leave London next 
year. 

I come^o7n Paris- [nights 

He went away in the 

We shall arrive there in 
the day-time. 

I shall set out to-morrow 
early in the morning. 

She is taller by the whole 
head. 

She is beloved by every 
body. 

He ran with all his might. 

I love you ivith all my 
heart. 

Does he behave in that 
manner ? 

Were I instead of you. 

We live on fish. 



Allez deux a deux. 

ji movi avis, elle n'a pas 

tort. 
A juger du lui par Ja 

mine, il est honnete 

homme. 
J'etois ici k dix heures. 
II porte des has cfesoie. 
II a dans sa chan^bre une 

belle table de marbre*, 
Donnez-moi ma jupe de 

velour noir. 
Donnez-lui un morceau 

de pain. 
Sou,haitez-vous un raor- 

ceau de vianrle ? 
Un morceau dc framage 

suffira. 
II y a je ne sais quoi de 

gracieux dans ses dis- 

cours. [punj. 

11 y aura quelqu'un ck 
y a-t-il rien de plus beau 

quele firmament.'* 
Je partirai de Londrfis 

Tann^e prochaine, 
Je viens de Paris. 
II partit de nuit. 
Nous y arriverons rfe jour. 

Je partirai demain de^ 
grand matin. 

Elle est plus grande dt 
toute la tete- 

Elle est aimee de toutle 
monde. [ces. 

II courut flf^ toutes ses for- 

Je vous aime de tout mon 
coeur. 

Se conduit-il de cette ma- 
nic re ? 

Sij'^toisc/c vous. 

Nous vivons de poisson. 



FRENCH TONGUE. S0& 

riiey live 07i nothing but lis ne se nournssetit q,ue 

me it. dc viande. 

It is the greatest foily m C'tst de la derniere folic. 

the vvL'rld. 

My rascally servant told M'^vR coquin de valet M a 

him every thmg tout dit. 

I shaii not cotjc bnck Je ne reviendrai de quatre^ 

these four mont'r^. mois. 

There is no such ^ ng. Jl n'v a rien de tel» 

lie goes better and better. II va de mieux en mieux* 

SUe goes worse and worse. Elie va de pis en pis. 

I learn music every other J'apprends la musique de^ 

day, deux jours Tun. 

They meet exfery third llss'assembient^etrois en 

year. trois ans* 

I sh .11 be married a year Je serai marie dans un au 

hence, ' d'lcl 



CHAPTER X. 
OBSERTATIOISS UPON THE CONJUNCTIONS Si 

AND QUE, 
l.rilHE verb following the conditional si is never put in th^ 
S_ subjunctive mood; and it is put in no other tense of the 
inilicy tive but the present and the imperfect : cousequefttlr th& 
fuuire in English is changed into the present in French : as, you 
shaU be satisfied if you call tomorrow: ' vous screz satt- f«i». si 
votis venezA&OLiAm.'' The imperfect of the subjunctive mood 
is changed into the imperfect of the indicative ; as, if you 
would call to-morrow: ' si vous verdez demain,' or ^ si vous vou* 
Uez venir demain,' and not ' si vous viendriez,^ nor ' si vous 
vcnidriez venir.' 

2. Sometimes, instead of the compound of the imperfect of 
the indicative, we elegantly make use of the compound of the 
-preterperfect of tUe subjunctive mood after «j .• as, if J h^vd 
known it sooner, that would nut have happened ; '^ si je Peusse 
su plutot, ceia ne seroit pas arriv^,' instead of ^ si je l^avQis 
s!.i,' &;g. 

3. Whensi signifies whether, it may be used in any tense: 
as, do you not know whether he would come if—, * ne savez- 
vous pas s'ii viendroit si'-—: I do not know whethei- he 'vilt 
come to day : ' je ne sais s'il viendra aujourd'hui.'* Except 
the compound of the preterpertect of the indioaiive, the 
present, and the compound of the present of the subiunctive 
iiiood, where it is never used. 

*See the exception to the 9th observation on the use of the 

subjunetivft Dioodj page 244. 

C g2 



306 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

4. From the last observation it follows, that the conjunctions 
-whether and or are most commonly rendered into French hy d 
and ou: as, ask him whether he has done that or no; * deman- 
dez-lui s'il a fait cela ou non.' They are sometimes rendered 
into French, whether by que, or by oy. que or que alone : aSj 
you will not be punished whether you have done that or no ; 
* que vous ayez fait cela, que, or ou que vous ne I'ayez pas fait, 
vous.ne serez pas puni.' It may likewise be rendered this way 5 
'^ vous ne serez pas puni, soit que vous ayez fait cela, aoit que, 
or ou que vous i^e Tayez pas fait' It is better not to i-epeat soit, 
at least in conversation. Take notice, that whether and or, 
rendered by que or eoit que, govern the subjunctive mood in 
French. 

5. We make use of qtte instead of repeating the conjunc- 
tion si, or some of the other conjunctions, but more particu- 
larly those of which que makes a part. In the first case que 
is followed by the subjunctive mood ; as, if he comes, and it 
you speak to him ; ' s'il vient, & que vous lui parliez,^ In the 
second case, the verb is put in the subjunctive mood, when que 
supplies the place of a conjunction which requires that mood: 
and in the indicative mood, if it supplies the place of a con- 
junction which requires the indicative ; so that it follows tkfj 
npture of the conjunction of which it is a part.* 

Examples where que governs the indicative. When I have 
told and assured you ; ' quandje vous ai dit, & que '^e vous ai^ 
assure ;* as, he maintained it, and 1 did not believe it; *coni- 
me il le soutenoit & que je ne le croyois pas.' 

Examples of the subjunctive. He is very far from reading 
and writing well ; ' il s'en faut bien qu'il Use & qt^W ecrive 
bien;' provided he comes, and be in good health ; * pourvii 
qu'il vienne, & ^w'il 502^ en bonne sante.' Many more in- 
stances will be met with in the following examples. 

As the three first observations have been sufficiently ex- 
oroplified in the tenses aad moods of the verbs, I shall here 
exemplify only the fourth observation, and the conjunctiop 
que throughout its different significations and purposes. 

THE CONJUNCTION QZTE EXEMPLIFIED FOR 
THE SCHOLAR'S PRACTICE. 

[3.] I do not know whe- Je ne sais s'il viendra oic 

^//er he will come ornot. non- 

Do you know iv/ieCher he Savez vous &'il a fait cela 

has done ttiat or not ^ ou non ? 

Tell me if lie has done it Dites moi s'il I'a fait cu 

or not, non. 

* This distinction is v6ry nice, yet neglected by all gram- 
marians ; some of them give inadequate and contrary rules. 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



'207 



I do »ot kRow whether it 
be on the right h?aid or 
the left. 

•One does not know whe- 
ther he speaks true or 
not. 

I doubt nohether she will 
accept the DfFer they 
make her or not. 

[4] It matters little ft^A<?- 
ifier he goes away m' 
stays. 

Whether he wins or loses, 
he is always of a cheer- 
ftjl temper. 

80 that you did see him, 
nnd speak to him. 

In such a manner that you 
have sold your gouds in 
time, and made a great 
profit. 

By what I see, and you tell 
me, he will have much 
ado to bring it about. 

Ha lives niggardly, c^j/'he 
was never to die, and 
had more than an hun- 
dred years to live. 

Wlien 1 saw him, and told 
him my reasons, he ap- 
proved of my behaviour. 

While you play, and lose 
your time, he learns his 
lesson. 

Whilst I was speaking to 
him, and showedMim he 
was in the wroni^, our 
discourse was suddenly 
interrupted by an un- 
foreseen accident. 

Because you would oot fol- 
low m v advice and wotild 



Je ne sais si c'est a droite 
on a gauche. 

On ne sait «'il dit vrai (^• 
non. 

Je doute si elle acceptera 
ou non i'offre qu'on iui 
iait. 

II innporte peu gu^il parte 
ou ^'i^'jldemeure. 

Soit quW gagne ou gu^\\ 
perde, il est toujours de 
bonne humeur. 
Si bien gue you^ Tavez vu, 
& que vinis \ni avez [>dt\6 
De manih'e que vous avez 
ve*.duvos srarchiindihes 
a temps, & que vous 
avez fait un grand j ^rofit. 
A ce queje vois, & que vous 
me dites, d aura bien de 
la peiiiC a^n venir ^ bout. 
II l^isine^ coimne ^M ne de- 
voit jamais mourir, & 
qu^W cut plus de cent 
ans a vivi e. 
Quand je le vis & que je. 
iui dis mesraisnns, iiap- 
prouva ma conduite» 
Pendant qu^ ^ow'^ )Q\\tz^ & 
que vous fierdez v</tre 
temps, il apprend sa 
legon. 
Tandis que jg. Iui parlois, 
& que]e, hnjesois voir ie 
tort qu'il avoit, un acci- 
dent impr^vn uitertom- 
pit tout a coup notre 
discours. 
Farce que vous n^avez pas 
voulu siiivre mon aYis,^ 



3D8- 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



listen only to your own 
whim, you do not de- 
serve my farther con- 
cern for you. 

.^^soo'riaslhsLVQdmedy and 
wrUten a letter, I shall 
go and speak to him. 

As S0071 as I saw tliat I 
could Hot make him un* 
derstand reason, and 
that he was too irmch 
prij possessed against 
me, I went out without 
saving any thing, 

IVhy do you not unitate 
yo-ur sister, and aji^ily 
yourseii to the FrencFi 
tongue as she does ? 

./Is it xiOiX because you are 
jazy> and you shim, la- 
bour and pain ? 

After thai we drank tea 
and played at cards, 
we went a vvalk.ing» 

Perhaps he will ci^rae and 
see you to-day, and give 
you an account ot bis 
reasons. 

According as you tell me, 
and I have heard, she 
has a great deal of wit 
and merit. 

Besides that her hroLher 
does not study, and that 
he loves play too much, 
he has not so much wit 
as she. 

As long as we h a ve wealth , 
and spe^id high, we ue- 
\er w^.nt friends. 



que vous n^avez ^^^ul^ 
^couter que votre ca- 
price vous ne merite-' 
pas que je rn'interess:^ 
davantage a vous. 

Des que j'aurai dice, 6c 
que yaurai ecrit une 
lettre, j'irai lui parler- 

Aussitot que jc vis qur je 
4}e p^>'Uvois lui fane en- 
tend re raison, 3c qu% 
eioit trop prcveim coiare 
moi^ j,e sortis sho^ dir^^ 
mot- 

D^Qu vkni; qiwvQM^ wlnn-^ 
tez pas votre - 
que vous ne vou: 
quez pas au FraFscois- 
com me elle -^ 

N'est-ce ' pas parce que 
vous e|;es paresseux, & 
que vous evites ie tra- 
vail &: ia peine? -^ 

Afires que nous eumes pris 
le the, 5c que nous eume^ 
joue aux cartess nou2 ai- 
inmes a la promejiade- 

Fetit-Hre qu'il viendra 
vous voir aujour^'h!ii,6s 
^'7^'il vonarendra compSie 
de ses raisons. 

Selon ce que vous me dites^ 
^quefai entenda dire^ 
eiiea btraucoupd'esprit 
& de merite- 

Outre que son frere n'etu- 
d\Q pas ^qii^Aaime trop 
a jouer, il n'a pas tant 
d'esprit qu'elie. 

Tant qu*on a du bien, & 
quhmjuit dela deper.se, 
on ne manque jamais?: 

"" d'aini^' 



FRENCH TONGUE. 



3d9 



Inprofiortion as you studv, 
and learn the French 
tongue, you will find 
more beauties in it^ 

Since vfe are together and 
it is very fine weather, 
let us go and take a little 
walk in the country. 

God forbid that I should 
blame your behaviour, 
and reproach you with 
it. 

Would to God that you 
may be in good health, 
and succeed in all your 
enterprise!?. 

For all that you know him, 
and he has cheated you^ 
you still converse with 
him. 

He is far from being hap- 
py and contented in the 
midst of his wealth. 

Go aiid speak to him lest 
he should be angry and 
reproach you. 

Unlessyou go and see him, 
Sinds/ieak to him, he will 
not be satisfied with you* 

I shall go into the country, 
next week, 'provided I 
be well, and it be fair. 

Js/ot r/6o^ I praise him, and 
afifirove of his arro- 
gance. 
In case that he comes, and 
. asX:«ne\vs of my brother, 



A mesure que vous etudie- 
r*^z 6c que vous aji- 
fircndrez le Frangois, 
vous y trouverez plus 
de beautes. 

Puisque nous sommes en- 
semble, & qu'WJait for^ 
beau temps, allons taire 
un petit tour de prome- 
nade ^ la campagne. 

A.Di€u ne fiiaise que je 
blame votre conduite, & 
que je veuille vous en 
faire un reproche. 

Plaise a Dieu que\(m%vo\x^ 
portiez bien, & que vous 
leiississkz dans toutes 
vos entreprises. 

Malgr^ que vous le con- 
noissiez & ^w'il vous ait 
trom e, vous ne cessez 
de lui^arler. 

// s^cnfaut bien qu'W soit 
heureux 6c content au 
milieu de ses richesses. 

AUez lui parler, de crainte 
qu^W ne soit fache. & 
qu^\\ ne vous fasse des 
reproches. 

A moins que vous n'alliez 
le voT, & que vous ne 
\u\parliez, il ne sera pas 
content de voub. 

J'irai a la campagne la se- 
ns ai^eprochaine /zowr- 
-uu que je me porte bien/ 
6c qu*\i fasse beau. 

Mm pas que y- le loue 6c 
que yapprouve son ar- 
roga?iCe. 

Au cas qu^W vienne, 6c qu^il 
demande des nouvclle^ 



m' 



A GRAMMAR OF THE 



tell him thathe will ar- 
rive in a week. 

Though he denies it, and 
declares that he has not 
seen it, I can assure you 
of the eontraryo 

Tq the end that you may 
be contented and have 
no occasion to complain 
of me, I will give you 
more than I promised 
you. 

Though he told me of it> 
and his brother conErm* 
ed it^> I believe nothing 
of it: 

Though he be young and 
rich, she does not love 
him. 

Before you give your opin- 
ion, and determine, be 
without partiality and 
f repossession^ 



de mon frere, dites^Iui 
gu'il arrivera dans huit 
jours. 

QuoiquHl le nie,& qu'W de-* 
clare ne Tavoir pas vu^ 
je puis vous a&surer du 
contraire. 

A fin que vous soyez con- 
tent & ^24^ vous vCayez 
pas sujet de vous piarn» 
dre de moi, je vous don- 
nerai plus que je ne? 
vous ai prom is. 

Bien qu'W me Tait dit 6c 
que son frere me Vai^ 
Gonfirme je n'en croi& 
rien. 

Encore qu'W soit jeune & 
qu'il ait du bien, elle ne 
Taime pas. 

Avant que vous disiez vo- 
tre sentiment, et quis- 
vous f/^d&z,soyes sans 
partiaiite et sans pre- 
vention. 



■FRENCH TONGUE. 311 

PART IV. 



i'RACTICAL IRREGULARITIES OF THE 

FRENCH TONGl>E^ 

ALPHABETICALLY DTSPOSEDj 
WITH THE 

CHOICE OF WORDS AND PHRASES, 

APPROVED BY THE BEST AUTHORS, 

AKD ESPECIALLY 

BY THE DECISIONS 

OF THE FRENCH ACADExMY= 

j^bandonne. 

^fipHISword, in the masculine gender, comtnonly 
jL signifies forsaken, given over: as, un homme 
rMbandonney a man who is forsaken ; iin malade adan- 
donne^ sl sick person, given over by his physicians. 
When it isapphed, in the feminine gender to personsj 
"It always signifies a bad womano 

Jlffectionner. 

We "say affectionner une c hose ^ to love, to like a 
' thicg : but we do not s^vy affectionner 7r?ie/ier.sonne, to 
love, to like a person, if the person be of an equal, 
or higher rank : the genius of the French tong«je does 
not allow it. However, qffectionn^, in a passive sig- 
nification, may be used, speaking of an inferior, with 
regard to his superior : as, ceeerviteur est fort qffhc^ 
tionn^ a son mature, this servant is much attached to 
bismast^re 



312 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Bouhours and Corneille observe, that voire qfflc- 
tionne serviceur^ your affectionate servant, is only 
used with regard to persons of an inferior rank. 

Alder. 

When the veyb aider governs the first case, it is 
taken in the sense of to help one with money, coun- 
sel> &c. : a^i/ /'a aide a (}dttr sa maisotiy ke lielped him 
to build his house, viz* with money. But, when it 
governs the third case, it is taken in the sense of to 
help a man overloaded . as, il lui a aid2 d fiorter sa * 
charge^ he helped him to carry his burden, 

AUer, Venir. 

The first is said of the place where one is, with 
uelation to the place where one is not. The second* 
on the contrary, is said of a place where one is not, 
with a relation to the place where one is : as, sup- 
posing the person spoken of be in London, I say, un 
tourier est alle de Londres a Paris en trots jours, tS> 
il est venu de Paris a Londres dans le mime esjiace de 
Hmfis ; a courier went from London to Paris in three 
days, and*came from Paris to London in the same 
space of time. 

This verb is likewise used, speaking of the place 
where one dwells in : as, meeting somebody, I say to 
him je vous /irie. Monsieur, de venir diner demain 
ckez moiy pray, Sir, come and dine to-morrow with 
me. 

However, there is a distiction to be made here : 
if it be another body's house, aller must be used ; 
as, it meeting somebody, I say, ^Monsieur A.vous firie 
dialler deniain dtner cliez lui. But, in thPs case, when 
the person who speaks is likewise to gO to another 
body's house, venir is used : as, Munneur A vous 
jirie de venir demain avec ?noi diner chez lui. 

This verb allcr is likewise used to denote what is, 
or was to happen ; it signifies to be going, to be ready: 
as, je vais ^crire^ I am ?^oing to write ; il va sortir, 
he is just gomg'out; il alloit rendre Vdme^ he v/as 
lleady to give up his last. 

V^nir^ on the ^.ontrary, signifies a tiling just done: 



FRENCH TONGUE. 313 

as, J€ viens tie lui icrire^ I have just written to liim ; 
jevenois de diTier^^uand voiis — . I had just dined 
whea you — 

Kefaire que de may be used instead of venir in the 
aforesaid sense: o^sje ncfais que de luiicrire ; je nc 
Jhisois que de diner quand X'c/z^s-^These verbs are 
used in that sense, only in the present and imperfect 
tenses of the indicative mood. 

VeniTy followed by an infinitive with «, signifies, as 
I observed elsewhere, Part III § IIL to begin, or to 
set about doing, something : 2is>, quand je viTis d M 
parier, when I began to speak to him- This rerb 
may be used in all its tenses. 

Again, though the verb alierh^ neuter, it seems to 
be in some cases, an active one. or, at least, to have 
an active signification : as, oiler son chemniy to go 
one's way ; alter son tram, to b- the same, to conti- 
nue in the same way , aller son memeflaSy to go on in 
the same manner ; but in that case, a preposition is 
understood before the substantive. 

jiller, joined with the particle y, and used imper- 
sonally, signifies to be at stake, to b( concerned : as, 
your fortune IS at stake, ily va de votre fortune ; 
your life was concerned in it, il y alloit de votre vie. 
When, in this signification we make use of the im- 
perfect of the subjunctive mood, t/ is left out: as, 
though my fortune should be at stake, quand il trdit 
dema fortune ; though my life should be conctrne4 
in it, fjua nd il iroit de vm vie, FRE'^en Ac ad E3I y . 

Alors, JLors, 

The second is never used without beihg followed 
by que^ 'anless it be preceded bv these two partfcles 
des, or pour ; in these cases deslors signifies from 
that time, ^^ml/iour-lors, then, Xors<7W(^signifies when: 
as, lorsque je le iris, wiien I saw him. Some say des- 
lors cjuejele Vis, as soon as I saw him : but this ex 
pression is very bad ; we say des queje le vis, .^tors>. 
signifires tllen, kntl is never followed by (ruv\ 
D d 



^14 A <iRAMMAR OF THE 

Ancwn. Vieux, Antique. 

The second is commonly used speaking of old per- 
sons, and things worn by use : as, this man is very 
old, cet homme est bien vieux ; this suit of clothes is. 
very old, cet habit est bien vieux. The first has a rela- 
tion to the century which one lives in : as, Aristoteest 
filus ancien que Ciceron^ Aristotle is more ancient; 
th i rully. It signifies likewise an advantage ac- 
q'j e I by time: as$ c^est une maison ancienne^ or une 
Jhmille ancienney it is an ancient family- But when 
■we speak of a building, we say, une vkiile maisouy 
an old liouse ; and not une maison ancienne, 

T'tougli we equally. sav le Vieux for I ancien Testa- 
meac, the Old Testament; d^anciennes^ or devieilles 
hist ires, old histories ; de vieux^ or d^anciens manu- 
scr>:^' ; de vieux ^ or d^anciens RomanSy &c. however 
we dj not equally say le Jeune, for le JSTouveau Tes- 
tament : and so for the others; though j^wn<? be the 
CO ■ ry of vieux, which may be used equally witli 
■ ^£intien in such cases as above. > 

Nr ither do we equally sav d*anciens, or de vieux 
Irvres ; d^andena. or de vieux tableaux. We say d^an^- 
ciens livres, d'anciens tableaux,^ of books or pictures 
■whxh the authors and painters of antiquity have 
made ; 2iud. vieux livres, vieux tableaux, of books or 
pictures used and spoiled by time, of what age so- 
ever they may be. 

The third is made use of speaking of medals, sta- 
tutes, and pictures, when we speak 6f them as mon- 
uments of antiquity. It is likewise used speaking c^ 
some pieces of architecture done after the ancieufi 
;way,<. f 

When we speak of a collection of the laws of th^el^ 

Visigoths, Burgundians, &C. we'say,i^5 lojs antiques^ 

But when we speak of other Roman or French laws,^ 

"we say, les his anciennes. We say, likewise, cou-^; 

-tumes anciennes, ceremonies anciennes.. 

Anneefiassee. Ann^e quivient, 

L^anneefiass^e is used only with relation to the year 
-which immediately precedes that which one lives in: 

vas; je fits malade Cannee fia^^ee^ I was sick last yearo 



FRENCH TONGUE. 315 

tfdnnt^e qui vknt is used when we speak of the year 
imnediately following that which one lives in : as, 
fimi a Amsterdain Vannee qui vient^l shall go to 
Amsterdam next year. 

An cas. 

This word signifying in case, is always followed by 
qu€ : aS) au cas cfiCU meure^ in case he should die- 
We equally say, en cas qu'il meure. If, after caSy a- 
substantive follows, we make use of &i co^ followed 
by de ^ en cas dc morty in case ot death jand not au cas 
de mort. 

Beaueoufl. 

This word signifying many, is never used alone: as, 
\^e do not say, U donnoU fieu a beaucoufiy he did give 
Ettle to many ; we add^a beaucoufi defiersormes^ or d 
b^aucoup, de gen^. 

When a personal pronoun is before beaucoup, in 
such a case it may be used alone : as, nous sommes 
beaucou/ifVous eies beaucoup^ we are many, yuu are 
many; because d^az^ow/i has a relatioato the fore- 
going pronoun.— The same is to be said when the in- 
determfnate pronoun en is before beaucaup : as, U yen 
a beaucoup, there are many, ^tj is in the place of 
gens ov per^onnes ; as in the foregoing example, U y 
a beaucoup de gens. 

When beaucoup is taken in the sense of much^ a 
great deal^ and comes after an adjective, it must al- 
ways be preceded by the particle de : as, voire bou-^ 
qv£t est plus beau de beaucoup que ctlui de voire 
frere^ your nosegay is niuch finer than that of your 
brother. But, when beaucoup is before the adjecuve^ 
de may be left out. 

We say Us*enfaut beaucoup^ to express that there 
is a great difference between persons and things, and 
it signifies to be far from, to come short of sometring^ 
as, he comes far short of being so handsome as > 'U, 
il n^ est pas si beau que vouSy Us^enfaut beaucoup. This 
last gallicism may begin the sentence, and then the 
first is preceded by que and the following verb is put 
in the subjunctive mood: as, ils'en fccut beaucmijh 
qu'il soit aussi beau que vous* 



316 A GRAiMMAR OF JHE 

W e ^ciy iW en fautdebeaucoufi, to express adeficiea- 
cy in something : as, you think that you returned me 
every thiog, there is a great dea^l wanting;, vouscroy- 
ez m^cwoir tout fiay€^ it s^en font de beaucou/?, 
French Academy. 

Chamfu 

This word, in the singular, signifies a piece of ara- 
ble ground, commonly not encompassed by walls. 
But, when it is taken in the plural, it is applied to all 
sorts of ground such as meadows, woods, 8cc. taken 
together: thus we say, to lead the cattle into the fields, 
tnener les bestiaux an chqm^i. It likewise signifies 
every other place which ss not in the csty or suburosf 
thus we equally say une maison de camfiagne^ or utw 
maison des dmrnjio^ a country-house: however, the 
first is most in use. 

When this word is joined to the verb avoir and 
preceded by the article, it sig^nifies to have courage ; 
thus we say of a man who is oot a coward, U a du 
Cceur. '^When it is preced<ed by thepreposition a it 
sip^nifies to espouse a/* affair ; avoir une affaire a cceiir. 
When it is precedeL y the prepositio^! svr, it signi- 
fies to resent a thing, avoir une chose sur le cceur. 

When we make use of the word cceur to express ge- 
nerosity or goodness, we join to that word an adjec- 
^ive. or some other word : as, Ua le cceur bknfaityit 
a le cceur bon^ c'est un bon cam\ he is a good natured 
man. 

Likewise, though c^est u?ihom?7iedecc£ur signifies, he 
?s a courageous maa,- yet, when we add tout' to the 
word cceur. it signifies a generous man ; as, iiest tout 
cgezvi\ he IS a very generous man. 

Ck)m7ne, 

This word is used in difftrent naanners : it is used 
instead of ainsi que^ de meme que dans, le temfis quCy 
par exemple^ d cause que ou fiarce que, jiresque en 
-qu^que sorte ; as, like, as it were, m the tiaae that, for 
e«aii)ple, because, in some manner. 



i 



FRENCH TONGUE, Sir 

Mserafiunl commes les autres. 

He shall be punished like others. 

Cela fiaroit com me vieux. 

Tills seems' as if it were old. 

Comme ilarrivoiU 

In the time th^t he arrived. 

Comme ila toujours aime le bienfiublk^ it ri^o. jamais 
voulu coTisentir, dfc. 

Because he always loved the public good, he never 
would consent, 6cc. 

// est comme le ressort de toiite cette intrigue. 

He is in some manner the spring of this intrigue. 

It is likewise used instead of cornment^ signify ing- 
how, or in what manner, after some other phrase: as, 
itverra co?n?ne je lui parleraiy lie will see in what 
manner I shall speak to him. But, when how, or in 
■what manner, begins a phrase, co^nment must be 
used : as, in what manner did he succeed ? Corn-. 
nierJ a-t-il r^ussi ? and not comme^ 

Davantage, Plus, 

Ftus is never used at the end in tn affxrmatiye 
sentence : as, give me some more ; donnez 7?i'en dcu^ 
vantage^ and not filti-s. Unless it be preceded by de : 
as, I will give you something more for it ; je vous en 
donnerai cjuelque chose dejilus. 

Flics or davantage is indifferently used at the end of 

a negative sentence, with this difference, that filus 

requires only ?ze before it, whereas davantage^ re- 

JJ quires 72^ anijias : a.s,je n'en vetix pas davantage^Qt 

jen'en veuxfilus, I will have no more of it. 

Davantage is never put in the m.iddle of a sen- 
tence before a substantive, whereas /^te may be so: 
as, the Romans have more plain dealing than the 
Greeks : les Romams ont plus de bonne foi que le^ 
GrecSy and not davantage de bonne foi, 

Hovever, davantage may sometimes be used, a5, 

well ^splus, in the middle of a sentence before que :. 

as, you are in the wrong to reproach me with bemg 

)iasty, I am iiot mo^e so than you, vmis amz tort dfr 

Bd-2 



'qIs a gramm/vr of the 

7ne refirocher cVetrc vifje ne k suk fias davatUage^ox 
jent' le suis/iasfihis quevoiis. 

Except from this observation, when davoiitage is 
followed by an adjective or substantive ; in this case 
filiis must always be used, as in the foregoing esasri- 
pJe, adding the adjective after plus : an, je ne suis 
fiasfilus emfiort^ que voue^ and not je ne suis pas da- 
vantage ) I have ao more friends that v. u -, je n^M 
fmsftlus d^amls que vous, and not davantage. 

Durante 

This pt^eposition is sometimes mdifferently put ei~ 
tlier before or after its regimen ; as, durant deiu^ 
mais, Qv deux mois durante during two months ; dur- 
ing his litV, sa vie durant. But We always say, du^. 
TGuit lejouTy durant la nuit. 

Enclin, 

This word signifies inclined- It is used in morals^ 
and rather speaking of something bad : as. U est en- 
dlin aujeu, he is inclined to gaming, 

Ihouijh w^ say encUn^ yet we ^^.y^mcUner, iTKluta-. 

tlOTU 

Ensutore^s^), 

Thia verb is used only in the third person singu- 
Jai" and plural : as, tout ce qui s^ensuit^ d\\ that fol- 
lows from thence ; les accidens gut s'e?isu€vroient^ the 
accidents which would ensue. 

Ervitable, 

Some Freach authors have made use of that word, 
but it \% very seldom used- However, we say, in&ui- 
table i unavoidable. 

Wt have in th^ French tongue several compound- 
ed words which are used? thouerh their simple are 
not : as, inexorable^ inexorable ; implacabley mplaca- 
ble ; irreconciliable^ irroconcilabk ; insatiable^ insatia- 
ble , indubitable, unquestionable; inGjffhblc^ intW^blt; 
pypnvmquabie^ iataiUbie> etc. 



FRENCH TONGUE 319 

When tEis word comes before a noun, it is a pre- 
position, consequently iiideclinable : as, excefite ceux 
Ict^ except those ; excefite ma saur. except my sister. 
But, when it comes after the noun, it is a partici le 
past, consequently decHnable ; as, 7na saur excefitecy 
my sister excepted. 

Fable. 

When this word is used to signify the fabulous his= 
tots of the sods 'ind semi-gods, it has no plural : as, 
impoete doil savoirla Fahle^ a poet oue^ht to know the 
history ot (he ^ods and semi- gods; la Fable est fort 
amusantey Mythology is very entertaiujhg 

But, 4^ w€ say, in the ^XyiriAlJes fables sont agreables 
c?* M/^tf, the fables ^pleas ma d us* f 1, • uniier- 
stand the fables of jEso/i, Fhcsdrus, La/bntaine, Gay, 
and other authors. 

The ¥f ore) fable is sometif? es ustid in a figurative 
sense: as, le fiauvre homme sert de fable ist de risee a 
tout lemonde ; the poor simpleton makes himselt a 
Qomajon.taik and a laughing slock. 

Fleurir, 

This "ferb may be taken in a proper or figurative 
sense ; in the first, it signifies to blossom ; in the se- 
cond, it signifies to flourish, to be in repute- 
When it is used in its proper sense it has no irregu- 
larity at all ; but when it is used in its figurative 
sense, it has an irregularity in all the p^ rsons of the 
irr>perfect tense, and in the r)articiple ot the present : 
as une urm6e fioiissante^ a flourishing amy ; Horace 
fioiissoit SOILS Cesar ^ Horace flourished in the timt of 
Caesar. 

In the present tense we S3.v feurissmt : as, les arts 
If les sciences feurissent dans notre siecle ; arts and 
sciences flourish m our age. 

Ga^er, 

Though Vv^e S2iygagner une bataille^ to j<et victory in 
a battle^ yet wc do not say gagner im cembatt to express 



:;^Q^ A GRAMMAI^ OF THE 

tke same thing. We raay say et7'e victorieux dans mi- 
€077ibat. 

Gens. 

There is scarce another v/ord tobe met with, lia- 
ble to so many irreg\ilantie&. See page 1 nowhere 
notice is taken of some of them. 

Gen* is never said, as in English^of a determinate 
number of people, unless it be attended with an ad- 
jective ras, two honest people ; deux honnetss gens. 
^b\^^^^^Ty we say, a thousand people believe it ; inilte 
gens le croicnt. In this case milk is taken for an inde- 
terminate number, viz. a great many. 

Gd-Tzs sometimes signifies oner's retinue ; in this case 
it may be used with a determinate number : as, 1 see 
but four of my servants, where are the others ^jenc 
vois que quatre de raes genSy on sont les autres ? 

Gens sometimes signifies people who are Of the 
same party or club; in this sense it is likewise used 
with a determinate number: as, fotir of our club 
are come ; quatre denos gensr sont arrfo^s^ 

Gens, in the sense of nation, is only used in this 
phrase : the law of nations, le droit des gens» It is 
still used in the same sense, in the singular number, in 
some^iecesof poetry, such as fishes: 2i%Ja gent aqua" 
tique^ to express fishes and whatever lives in the 
water. Lafontaim, 

Grace. 

When this word is alone with the verb ^aire an4 
an article, it signifies favour, kindness : as, do me 
t\i^{?LWf)\iV ; faites-moi la grace. 

When It is without an article, it signifies toforgive^ 
to remit : as, the King has forgiven him ; le Roi lui a 
fait grace ; you owe me a- hundred guineas, but I re^ 
mil ym the half ; vous me devez cent gwMes, mats 
jt vousjais grace de la 7rmUie, 

When grace is used in x!le singular, with de before 
it, it sigLaivrL^ J*'av, <>♦ be so kind as — : as, prayj tell^ 
Hit, de grace, dites-moi. 

Gmr^usedin the smgular^ with the adjective bonnf^r ^ 

fi 



FRENCH TONGUE. SSl 

Signifies gracefulness : as^ he salutes "with graceful- 
ness. Usalue de bonne grdce : she has a good grace, 
elk a bonne grdce. 

When, in the ^ame number, it is preceded by the 
adjective ^wawi^oi^e, it signifies quite the contrary: as, 
admire his awkwardness, admirez sa mauvaise grdce* 
Sometimes, in this last sense, it only sigtufies what 
is contrary to decency, to reason : as, there is no 
r«ason to Cf>ni plain of me, vous avez mauvaise grace 
de vous filaindre de mot 

VJ\itv\ graces is used in the plural, it signifies the 
Qraces. (three goddesses, who according to the Eoets, 
were the companions of Venus ;) 2dlv, ^he beauties 
of language : as^ les graces de la langue Franpise. 

If, in the sfame number, th(^ word bonnes is arided 
to it, it signifies benevolence : as. he ha*- got the 
benevolence of his master ; il a les bonnes graces de 
son maitre. ; ' 

F, Bouhours^ observes here, that though we say 

fagner les bonnes \Lrdces de quelqu^un, to get r.ne's 
tnevolence ; vet we do xvA sav, to express the con- 
trary, either gagner^ov encouiir les mauvai$es graces 
de quelqu^un ; custom says he» allows the ont- , and 
not the other ; in such a case we ^2iyfierdre les bonnes 
graces de quelqu'un, to lose tme's benevolence. 

Etre engrdcirs aufires du Prince^ ou de qiielqiie fier- 
Sonne fiuissantey signifies to be in favour with the 
K.in^, or some powerful person. 

Ftre dans les bonnes graces d'unt. Damc^ signifies to 
be beloved by a lady. 

J^ai 6U je suis alle. 

We make use of the first expression to signify that 
\ve are, or were no more in the place we are sp ak- 
in g of . as, Madam went to tie play to-day, Ma- 
dame a cte a la com^die aujourd^hui ; but, when soine- 
body IS, or was still m the place we are speaking of, 
then we make use of the com round dialler: as, 
Madam is gone to the play, Madame est allee a la 
cqmedie. 

Moreover, if some word denoting a motion be add- 
ed tf it, we make use of the compound of oiler, 



33^ A: GRAMMAR OF THi5 

though tli^ person is no more in the place we ai^e^ 
speaUing of- as, he went to Paris in two days, U est 
alle a Paris en deux jours. We ] ike wise say in conver- 
%^\\sM\ f aurois 6U s ovje serois alle'e vous voir, I would 
have j^one to see you y jefus: or fallai hier a Vojiera^ 
l^enl yesterday to the opera; tRj^NCH AcADEivnv 

Main. 

This word has m^ny eurious significations. 

Dormer la main ct une chose ^ to consent to a thkig. 

Ttndrektmain, to beg alms, also to lend an^ help- 
in hatid to assist one \ as, lend him your helping 
l[k^w^^tendezlui la mam. However^ donncTy ov pr^'^ 
ter la main a quetqu^un is less equivocal. 

En ve?iir aux 7?aateax^cc/'e7Z7z<??J3ij to fight witli the?- 
enemy. 

Fairemain basse surfemwmi, to put all tathe swords 

Mettre la main sur quelqu'un Qe bdttre^ylo lay hands ^ 
upon one, to beat him,. 

Tenir la main haute, t© keep a strict hand over one;^^ 
to- treat him severely. 

Prendre en mam la cause dequelqu^un^ to take one'^ 
parr. 

Prendre d toutes mains, to catch every way. 

JBonnei^ a main a un cheval, to^ivQ a horse the 
bridle. 

Donner de main en wai;z, to hand about. 

Mettre la main d la plume yX^ begin to write. 

Mettre la main au chapemtr^ dVefUe^ to put the hand 
to the hat, in order to saiuie somebody; to put the 
ha! JO to one's sword. 

Metirele chafieaud la matn^ to put off one's hat 

Mettre i^pee a la maiuy to draw a sword - also t© 
figh*^ -vith a sword. 

Etre en math pour Jaire une chose, to be in a conve- 
niePA sit'.ation, to make use of one's hands easily. 

Lever la main, to take one's oath before a judge, tD 
lay one*3 hands upon the Biblfe,to lift up one's hand. 

Jlvoirles armes bien a la mcun^Xo be skilful in bodi- 
ly pk' rci*^^'^ ^'^ith the asms. 

Faire credit de la main a la bourse, to trust no far- 
ther rhan one can see^ 

Un coup'de main ^igniries a bold action ; in this sense^ 
it is joined to the verb/afe. When it is joined to th^^ 



Tcrb -dormer^ iv^^snirtt^s to pui o.e's hand to some- 
thing^ > order to help one, and is applied only to 
thingj? : h*-, donnez-y un couji de main. 

Un hommede 'main, signifies a man who is fit for .a 
bold and hazardous enterprise. 

Des coups de main, handy blows. 

Afi'eines mxdns, largely, plentifully c 

Sous main, underhand, secretly. 
: Combat de 7nai7i a main, a close light. 

Sous la main, under one's nose. 

Cela est fait a la main, that, is done with concerto 

hMaisom ^ 

Speaking of people of quality, or of gentlemen of 
an ancient and noble extraction, we sayi maison : as, 
he is of Montmorency's extraction, il est de la mai- 
son de Montmorenci Bu,t, speaking of citizeris and 
people of business, we make use of the vjox6famiUe, 

Sometimes we make use of the wordj^m?//^, instead 
oi maiso7iy when some following word heightens it: 
as, the royal family ; :lafamilie Tcyale. 

Take notice, that %vhenvje say ^ la. fa?mll€ y^oyale^ 
we meati by this expression, therKing, the Queen, 
their children, and grand-children- But when we 
say/s maison roya-le^ we commonly mean the other 
princes and princesses of the blood- 

La maison xluMoi signifies the King's household^ 
servants, or troops. 

Take notice again, that, though we say, la maison 
royalty or, la.Maison.du Mqi, yet. we never savj lafa- 
mille duroi, 

Famille is used instead of maism, even speayng of 
.ancient nobility, when we mention it. with relation to 
medals : as, the consular medals are distinguished by 
the Roman families, les medailles consiilaires se distin- 
guent par les fapiilles Romaines, It is for this reason, 
perhaps, that we say, la famille des Sclfiions, la fa- 
mUle des Cesars, etc. and not, /a maisor, des Sapiafts^ 
even when we do not speak of medals ^ 

T\% word famille is likewise used when we-^pe'pj 



324 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

of one's nearest relations : a?, he has fallieh out with 
his relations, il s^estbroujll^ avec safamille, 

Maison ^x\(^famiire are sometimes used promiscu- 
ously, speaking of oneS servants and household : as, 
she is a woman who takes care of her household > 
c'est une.femjne qui a soin de sa maison^ or fdfnille. 
However the first seems to be more extended, and 
has a nearer relation to the household goods* 

We a] ways say, etablir sa maisofiy a . J /aii^e une 
bonne maison, and itoxfamUle, to grow tich. 

Metier. 

This word is low in its proper, and elegant in its 
iieurative sense. According to Balzac, painters are 
offended at this word, for we do not say, le metier de 
^eintre, the profession of a painter. 

However, generals of the army boast of that call- 
in<? r as, the profession of arms, the profession of war; 
le metier des armes, le mitierde la guerre. 

We likewise say, speaking ol works : there are 
only people of that calling, who may be judges of it ; 
il n'y a que les gens du metier, qui en fioient bonsjuges. 

In this sense it must be used with the definite arti- 
cle, because gens de metier signifies quite another 
thing, viz. handicraft men. 

Mont. 

This word is never used alone, except when we 
speak of the mountains which separate France from 
Italy ; for we say les Alfies, or les monts only, after 
som*' preposkions, but very seldom ; as, on this side 

the K\\i'&^ en decades monts, j\ 

In other circrmstances we say, lemont Olymfie, /a I 

mont lAban, le mont JEtna, le motit St, Godardj bu# 

we say, la moniagne dn Calvaire, 



JVo77is de A^ations ^ de Langues, 



I! 



There is. perhaps, nothing where variety of cus- 
tom is more visible, than in the nouns of someiiations 
and languae:;es ^ 

Arabe, Aaabe^ud, The first is applied to njen arid 



FRENCH TONGUE. 325 

women : as, un Arabe, unefemme Arahc- The se- 
cond is tiever applied to persons. But to the Arabian 
oharacters. Speaking of the language, we say. VA- 
rabe, or la langue Arabique, We say une* figure 
Arabesque, an Arabian figure. 

Barbarie^ We have no nouns to express a man of 
Barbary, iov un Barbare, is always taken figurative- 
ly, and signifies a barbarous man. Barbe signifies 
a Barbary horse. So we are obliged to say, speak- 
ing of people of Barbary, ks fieufiles cle la Barbarie. 

Chaldeen, Chalddique. The first is said of the 
persons and their language ; the second of their lan- 
guage only. 

Dorieriy Dorique ; Ionie?i, lonique. The first is ap- 
plied only to persons : as, Ics Doriens, les loniens j 
-une Dorienne, unc loniennQ* The second is applied 
to the language. Speaking of architecture, we say 
Grdrt Dorique^ ordre lonique, 

Hebreu, Hebra'iquc. We say, speaking of the 
people, un H^breu, les Hebreuxr This word is not 
use'i in the feminine gender ; thus we must say, la 
femmt d^un Hebreu, la filte d'un Hebr0,, lesfemmes 
t!f lesjllles des Hebrcux- Speaking nf the language, 
we say VH^breu, or la langue Hcbrciique* Speaking 
of manuscripts, we only say des manuscrits Hebreux ; 
but speaking of Hebrew types, we say des carac- 
teres Hebrdiqiies, 

Juif, Juddiqut. We say un Juif, uneJidve^ speak- 
ing of the modern Jews. We say xnvre a la Jtiive^ 
to live like Jews, with relation to their manners ; and 
vivre a laJuddique^ with relation to their ceremonies 

MorCy Moresque, We say, un Morey a Moore ; " 
une Moresque^ a she Moore, and not 2ine Alore ; 
though we say une femme More. We say Ic More^^ 
speaking of the language. Moresque signifies a 
Moorish dance> also a Morisco work in painting. 
. Pcrse^ Peraan^ PcrsicHi Pcrdqiie, We common- 
ly say Its Perscs, speaking of the ancient people c^t 
Persia : and Pa^sans, speaking of the modern ones. 

In the singular, we always say iin Persan, and not 
un Perse. Printed cloth of Persia is called de la. 
Perse, and not Per supine. I'hr latter is applied iis 
Venetian blinds- 

E e 



326 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

However, when we speak of Persian stuff, we may 
say une etqffh de Perse, as we sav une etoffe de la 
Chine. We say la langue Persienne. or le Persien^ 
speaking of the ancieut language, but we say la langue 
Persane, or le Permn^spesikin^ of the modern language. 

We always say, d la Persienne to signify after the 
Persian way, 

Persique is said of the gulf which separates Persia 
from Arabia : as, le golfihe Persique, It likewise sig- 
liifies an order in arcliitecture. 

Speaking of the ancient kings, Cyrus. Darius^ 8cc. 
S9^ call them indifferently roide Perse^ or roidesPer^ 
s^s ; but now-a-days, we say only le roi de Perse, 

Syrien, Syriaque, This first is used speaking of 
the people, t^n Syrien^une Syrienne; Vhe secondspeak- 
ing of the language, le Syriaque^ or la langue SyriaqU€>^ 

Teuton^ Teutonique, Tudesque. 1 he first is said of 
the people and of the language : the second of the 
language, and when we speak of the Order : as, VOr- 
dre Teutonique^ tl>e Teutonic Order. Tudesque is 
only used speaking of the language of the ancient 
Germans, % 

These are the irregular nouns of nations and lan- 
guages. The others are equally applied to the peo- 
ple and to their language : as, les EthiofiienSy VEthi- 
opkn ; les MoscoviteSy le Mbscovite ; les Grecs, le 
Grec ; les Latins, le Latin y 8cc. 

Des JVbmbres Cardinaux^ 

What belongs to the manner of counting_them has 
been said already, see page 40. However, there are 
many other remarks to be made concerning these 
numbers. 

It is to be otjserved that vingt^ when it is multi- 
plied by another preceding number, whether follow- 
ed by a substantive or not, takes an s after the i : as^ 
quxiti^e-vingtSy eighty ; quatre-vingts guin^es, eighty 
guineas ; but the a is omitted, when it is followed by 
another cardinal number ; as, quatre-vingt-trois, eigh- 
ty-three. 

To know in what cases the other numbers are ei- 
ther declinable or indeclinable, see page 42. 

Instead of sepx^nte, seventy ; octante, eighty ; and 
nonante^xm^Xy ; wealways fi^y ^soixante Hf dix.guaf re- 



FRENCH TONGUE. 227 

vingtSy quatre-vingtdix. Except when we speak of the 
interpreters of the Bible, we say les septante^ though 
thev were seventy-two ; but when We add interpreter 
de la Bible y we say les soixante et douze interpretcs dc , 
ia Bible. 

We hkewhe say, les septante semaines de Daniel^ 
the seventy weeks of the prophet Daniel. We may 
say six vingts. one hundred and twenty ; and sonoe= 
t\nttssept-vingtSyor)e hundred and forty ; huit-vingts^ 
one hundred and sixty; but wc never say deux vingts^ 
forty ; trois vingts^ sixty ; cinq vingts, a hundred ; 
c?^.rx;m^^*, two hundred. Mter six vingts^ we say 
cent vingt et un, cent vingt deux, &;c« 

After mille we say onze centy douze cent — ^to deux 
mille. Except when we speak of the year of our 
Lord, wf) write mily and not mille ; after 7nil we say 
Van onze centy one thousand one hundred ; Van mil 
deux centy one thousand two hundred ; Van mil trois 
cent, one thousand three hundred. &c. However, we 
sav douze cents hommesy twelve hundred men ; treize 
centsjiommesy thirteen hundred menj 6cc. 

When we speak of the place endowed at Paris, by 
Lewis IX, king of France, for three hundred blind, 
or when we speak of the blind thetnselves, we say, 
les quinze vingts, and not les trois cents, 

Sometinnes wc make use of couple 2LV\6paire instead 
of deuxy but not indifferently : couple and paire are 
said of things of the same kind which may be sepa- 
rated: as, a couple of partridges^a couple of chickens; 
une couple or une paire dejierdriXyUne couple y or unc 
paire de poulets. Couple is never said of things which 
are considered as inseparable : as, a pair of glnves, 
a pair of ruffles, a pair of stockings, &c. unepairede 
gants, une paire de manchettes, une paire de basy 6cc» 
not une couple de gants, &c. Couple is hkewise said 
of persons united together by love or marriage j in 
this sense it is always in the mascuhne gender : as, 
beau coupky couple fide He. 

We make use of the word quarteron^ when we awe 
speaking of things which are reckoned/z^ cent, it sig= 
nifies the fourth part of a hundred : as, a quarter of a 
hundred pins, un quarttron d^^pingles. This word is 
Bkewise said of things which are weighed \ it then 



328 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

signifies the fourth part of a pound : as, a quar^ter of 
a pound of butter ; un quarteron de beurre. 

We make use of the word quintal to express a hun- 
dred weight ; it is only used when we are speaking 
of Sonne merchandises which are weighed. 

Millier is said of a thousand weight, as a thousand 
weight of iron, brass, 6cc. un millier defei\ de cuivre^ 
6cc. 

When we speak of time, we say, huitjours^ or une 
.semaine, eight days, or a week, quinzejours^ or deux 
aemaines, fifteen days, or two weeks- However, we 
always say, trots semqines, three weeks ; un 7nois, a 
inontli,d?z^, sia:, seJitsemaineSy five, six, seven weeks ; 
deuce moiSy two months ; 7wufse?nainesy two months 
and a week ; deujc rnois et demiy ten weeks ; ti'ois 
moi^, three months, and noiun quart d^a7i ; quatre^ 
cinqy six moiSy four, five, six months, and so on to un 
an. Then we commonly reckon by months : as, 
treize moiSy quatorze, quinze moiSy &c. to deux ans, 
though we may say, this child is one year and one 
month, or eighteen months old, cet enfant aunaneC 
unmois^ ovun an et demiy in these two cases only. 

We Tiever sav il estdouzeheures^ it is twelve o'cJock, 
but il est vnidiy il est minuit, 

Des JVbmbres coilecti/S' 

Numbers, which grammarians call collective, are 
huitainey neuvainey dizaine, douzaine, quinzainey ving- 
tainey trentainCy quarantainey cinquantainey soixantaine, 
centaine. 

Huitaine signifies eight days ; it is used in Law ; a 
la huitainey eight days hence. 

JVeuvaine signifies a nine day^' devotion ; it is now 
scarcely used in poetry, as it was formerly, to signify 
the nine Muses. 

Dizaine and Douzaine signify a collection of tep 
and twelve : as, une dizaine ou une douzaine de jiom- 
miSy ten or twelve apples ; Douzaine signifies a dozen, 
anfl demi' douzaine, half a dozen ; but we never say 
demi-huitainey demi-dizaine, to signify four or five. 

Quinzainey vingtaincy trentaine, Sec. a collection of 
fifteen, twenty, thirty, 6cc. 

Quarantaine is likewise said of the forty days which 



FRENCH TONGUE. S29 

persons, coming from a place where the plague is, 
are obliged to spend, before they get into the town 
where they intend to go. 

There are sotme other collective numbers :as, ter*^ 
cet,, quatrain^ sizairiy huitairiy dizain^ guinzain, trentai?!. 

The five first are only used, speaking ot some 
pieces of poetry. The first signifies a triph t, the se- 
cond a stanza of four verses, the third a stanza of sis 
verses, etc* 

Quinzain and trergain* are used at tennis. Quin- 
zainis said when both players have fifteen, and tren- 
tain when they have thirty. In this sense they are 
indeclinable : as, they have both fifteen ; lis sont 
quinzain, 
, Des JSTombres ordinaux. 

Ordinal nlimbers are firemitry second^ trosieme, 
g?iatrie?ne, cinquihue^ sixieme, i^c. 

Though we do not say unibnie alone? it is, how- 
ever used after other numbers instead ol premier : 
as, we do not say uingt l^ firtmier, twenty- first, trtnte 
^ fire mier^ etc* but we say vin^^ ^ unieme^ trente ^ 
unieme. 

Neither do we say vingt et second, trente et second^ 
but we say, vingt-dtuxieme^ trente-deuxieme. 

Speaking of a sovereign, wemake use of cardinal 
numbers: as, Guillaitme trois, George trois^ JLouis 
quinze^ and not Guillaume troisiemey iP'r, as in Boy^ 
er^s Grammar* However, for first and second, we' 
make use of ordinal numbers: as^ George preinier, 
Fr^d^rlc seconefc Speaking of the Emperor Cnarles 
V^y^e s^^y, Charles Quint, 

We commonly say livre trois, chafiitre quatrcy ar- 
ticle cinq^ verset huity nombre dix, /laragrufihe cinq^ 
page soixante ; \\ovftvtVy speaking regularly, we 
make use of the ordinal numbers in such cases: as^ 
Irure troisiemey chapitre quairiemey etCo 

When two. uncertain numbers follow one another, 
the first is a eardinalj the second an ordinal nuaiber: 
as, this is in the third or fourth chapter ; tela est 
dans Ic trois ou quatrwme chapitre ,• he is the seventh 
or ei^hthEarl in the kingdom; t/es^ le sept ou huitieme 

* These words quinzain and tre7itain, are formed by cor* 
raption frorn qiauzC'^^, trenie-k^ to sigoify quince '^-q^inzf^y 
tren(€-h>'trente^ 



mo A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Conte du royatime' Except premier et stcond^ whicb 
are always to be used in such cases. 

When quatrwme^ cinquiemey sixieme^ ^Cv are pre- 
ceded by the indefinite article un^ they signify the 
fourth, fitth, sixih, Sec. part of a thing ; but when 
they are preceded by the definite article la^ we join 
the word fiartie to the noun of number : as, h qua- 
friemey cinquieme^ six le me fiartie. 

When y/e ask for the day of the month, we com- 
monly say quel quantieme avons-naus dumois ? or 
quel jour avons-nous du mois ? We likewise sd.y quel 
quantieme etes- vgus de voire classe ? what place 
have you got in your school? When we speak of the 
day of the month, we indifferently make use of the 
ordinal or cardinal numbers : as, it is the fourth of 
the month ; t§^t le quatre\ or quatneme^ du^mois. 

Des J\onr€ firo/ires^ 

It would be too tedious, and to no purpose^ to relate 
all the proper names which suiter an alteration ia 
French. _ ^ 

Vaiigelas and particularly Mvnage, have made a 
complete list oi them They who are desirous to 
know such irregularities may consult these two au- 
thors. 1 will lay down here some general rules con«- 
cerning this matter. 

1st, Proper names of kingdoms, empires, provin- 
ces, &c. commonly take the French appellation : 
thus, England is called l^ Angles t7re ; Wales, la pro- 
uince de Guiles; lve\si,m\i l^Ireiande j Scotland, /'j£- 
£Osse. 

2(My\ Proper names of cities and towns have com- 
monly no variatson, though sometimes pronounced in 
a different manner : as, Bristol, 6cc. Except a few 
of the most renowned places : as, London, JLojidres. 

Neither are foreign proper names of men ever 
subject to any alteration over the whole world : thus> 
Master White in English, is Monsieur White in 
French ^ Master Black is^^ Monsieur Biack, ^c and 
nol Monsieur le Blanc^ Monsieur le JSIdire, t^c. 

These observations-are only upon ancient Hebrew, 
Oreek. Latin, and Gothic proper names that occur 
In history p because the foregoing never change. 



FRENCH TONGUE, 331 

3dly, Such foreign names as arenmch celebrated 
are commonly adapted ti^ the geruis of th- F- ' ch 
language ; as, Homkre^ Pindare, Firgiie, Horace, &c» 

4thly Acomposed noun doesnot cofu* nnu - < . «ve 
its termination : as, Peirordiis Priscus^ Marcus 
Varroy^c, But if one or other of these iwi r is 

much celebrated, it commonly follows Me ;. - v i -^f 
the French tongue : as, Jules Cesar ^ Marc Antoi e^ 
Quinte Curce^ &c. If the noun be con i^oset' ^ t thr , 
it rir ver changes its termination : as, Marcus TuUius 
Cicero, Cams Julius- G^sar^^c, 

A^uagdy JVu^e, JS/ue, 

These words, taken in a; proper sense, signify the 
very same thing ; but, whtrn they are take in a figu* 
ratiVe sense, they are not used indifferentlv, and as 
synonymous expressions ; for we sav» to extol -on e- 
body to the skies, ^l^ver quelqu^un jusqu^aux nues, 
2iX\^ not nuages ; ard we say, truth d^j spates the 
clouds of error, la vMte dissipe les nuages de Ver^ 
reur^ and v^oinues ; the clouds \vhich darken the rm- 
derstanding^/rs nuages qui qffusquent l^entendement i 
a cloud of dust, un nuage de fiou^sierC' 

We say, fieuratively, he has a mist before his eyes> 
ilaunnuagedevant lesyeuxyand t)otnue» 

To wear out one's patience, to put him in a pas* 
i3ion,yair^ sauter qu^lqiCun aux nues^ arid not nuages. 

To be extremely surpnsed and astonished, tomber 
des nues-i and not nuages. 

We say, of somebody who is out of countenance, 
not knowing to whom he is to address himself in a 
company, ilsemhle tornber des nues, and not nuages s 
and, of a man» who is not known lo, or own^d by any 
body, il est tomb^ des nues. 

. VVe likewise say, in a bad sense, of a man who, in 
his writings or discourse,. soars in such a manner as 
tolose himself, and m^ke others 1 se the r?>aii. suiyect 
of his writings or speech, U sefierd dans les nues^ and 
VLOtnimges. 

'We sa^ , in a figurative sense, une nu^c sefoimc^ la 
nu^€ crevera^^nd not nuage, nor nuc^io express that 



332 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

an enternrise, a plot? a conspiracy, a punishment, or 
a war, Sects ready, and near breaking out. 

We likewise m^l^e use of the word nii^e to express 
a multitude of persons, birds, or animals, that are 
supposed to bi • in flocks : as, there came a cloud of 
barbarians who laid waste all the country, i/T;m^ 
nne nu^( de barbares qui disolerttit tout It fiays ; a 
multitude of witnesses, une nu^e de timoins, and 
not un nuage or nue. ^ 

Ge'ierally speaking, we make use of the word nu^ 
age^ when we speak of what dims the sight, and 
hinders it from seeing objects distirxtly. It is like- 
wise used TO express the doubts, the uncertainty, and 
ignorance of the mind. 

Original 

This word used adjectlvely is said of something 
new, not done after a model : as) an original pic» 
ture, un tableau original ; th^t is not imitated, it is 
original ; cela n^est fias imitS, cela est ofiginaL 

We likewise say, /ze;f5<^e 'jriginale, anew thought^ 
and wh ch is not taken from any author. 

Wh n thib word is used substantively^ it is said of 
things which are the first m their kind, and are not 
copied after others ; such are masterpieces of art/ 
ancient manuscripts, or letters written or signed by 
those who are the authors of them : as, this picture 
is an original one ; ce tableau est un original; furigi-^ 
nai Hebrtu, l*original dune lettre. 

We likewise say, speaking with mockery^ of a 
ninny and ridiculous fellow, c^est Un original. 

This word is likewise used in a good sense, speak- 
ing seriously : as, it is after so great an original, that 
Plato !•> beco^-ne a philosopher, c^est sur un^si gfand 
original i qtct filaton est devenu fihilosdfili^ ; Socrates 
is an origin ai of wisdom, Socrate est iin original de 
sagesse. In this sense it is always attended either* 
by an adjective expressing the meaning of it, or by 
a case governed after it. 

This word is hkewise used, speaking of languages, 
erf texts, or of wr tings : as. les lang2ies origrnales, les 
textes originaUx^ les pieces originates* 

Origmal is sometimes appUea to a person wbosepie* 



FRENCH TONGUE. 333 

ture has been drawn : so, in seeing a picture, you 
may sav, I like better the person than the copy^ 
faime ?ni€tcjc7 r original que la co/iie. 

Part^ Partie, 

These two words, signifying a part, a share, a 
portion of a whole, have several odd constructions, 
and are not to be used indifferently the one for the 
other. We say, une fiartie d/un livre^ tine fiartie du 
corfis humainy a part of a book, a part nf the human 
body ; une part (T enfant dans la succession y a child's 
portion in the succession* 

As these words are used several ways in a proper 
sense, it will not be amiss to set the most part down, 
without the English annexed to them, as these words 
are easily understood, when a learner comes so far 
as to learn this part. 

We say : * on a fait trols parts de tout le bien de la 
succession. Quand il y a tant d'heritiers, les parts 
sont petites. Vdla votre part, & voici la mienne, &c. 
Ceder sa part. Prendre sa part. II a eu tant pour 
sa part &: portion. Doniiez-moi ma part. Prendre 
sa part. Le plus fort fait la part au plus foible. II 
en a eu tant a sa part, tant pour sa part. Entrer en 
part avec quelqu'un, etre de part avec lui. S'il y a 
du profit, j'en aurai ma part, Sec' and not fiartie. 

We say : ' partie d'un corps politique. Le tout est 
plus grand que sa parties Les parties subtiles, gros^ 
sieres, homogenes, hetdrogenes, &c. L'union des 
parties, I'arrangement des parties. Les quatre par- 
ties du monde. Ce prince perdit une partie de son 
royaume.-Cette grammaire est en quatre parties- 
Une partie de Tarm^e etoit encore campee, Tautre 
etoit en marche.— II n'avoit qu'une partie de ses trou- 
pes. II avoic tant d'argent, mais il en a donne une 
partie. II a vendu une partie de ses livres. Il a em- 
ploye une partie de sa vie a cela, etc' and not fiart. 

We say indifferently la filUfiarty la plus grand fiarty 
la plus grande fiartie, to expvess the greatest number, 
the most part. 

Besides the foregoing irregularities, /zcr^ nnd fiartie 
are used, both in a proper and figurative sense, in 
several other expressions ; most part of them are to 
be met with in dictionaries, 



534 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

PartL 

This word joined to the verb firendre has many 
significations. 

Prendre fiarti signifies to turn soldier ; in this sense 
it isco'r»uio'ily followed bv the word regiment : as, it 
afiris fiarti dans un tclri foment. It likewise signifies 
to eng.ige one into one's service: but when we express 
with whom : as, he has en^agefl himself in the ser- 
vice of nr>v lord N , it afiris parti avec milord -AC 

Prendre son fiarti sn- ifies to »e solve, to take one's 
last resolution : as, faipris monparti^ lam resolved 
npon it. VVhf n it is used in this sense, it is followed 
by nothing else. 

Prendre un parti likewise signifies to take a reso- 
lution, with this difference, that it requires always 
aft^r it either an adjective or a personal prono\m, to 
make a complete sense : as,z7 c/xris un parti avanta- 
geu3pY<^v un parti qui est avantageuxy he took an ad- 
t^'/tayjeous resoUition. 

Prendre le fiarti signifies to take a resolution, to 
choose, and is commonly followed either by a verb 
in the infinitive mood preceded by de^ or by a rela- 
tive pronoun : as, I choose to be silent, fai pris le 
parti de me tavre. 

When prendre le parti is followed by a noun in the 
second case, it signifies to defend, to protect : as, one 
ought to protect oppressed innocence ; Ufaut pren- 
dre le parti de Vinnocence opfirim^e. 

Prendre le /?e2rri,Tol lowed by a noun in the second 
case, hkewise itsji ufies one's c'lUing, profession, &c.i 
thus we s^A.\ prendre le parti de I'^glise, le parti des ar- 
mea, le parti de la robe^ to turn clergyman, officer » 
lawyer. 

Passer, 

This v^rb is liable to several irregularities* We 
say sometimes indifferently ^a!S*f rand 5<?/iass^; as, 
le temps passe y or le temps se passe ^ time goes away ; 
la beauts passe ^ or la beaute se passe bien v£te, beauty 
fa-. < very soon. lii this sense ii is conjugated m its 
CO pound teases by the auxdiary etre ; as, le temps 
est pass4^ 

However, the one is sometimes better used than the 



FRENCH TONGUE. 335 

other. When we speak of beauty in general, we say 
la beauti fiasse ; but, when we speak of a handsome 
persoM whose beauty decays, we say better, sa heauti 
sefiasse. 

We say better des couleurs qui se fiassenty than des 
couleurs qui passenty colours which fade. 

When we speak of time only to express the rapi- 
dity with which it flies away, and without nr>«= n; uinTng 
in what manner we sperd it, we say le temps' passe^ 
les jours passent^ les ann^es passent 

But when we speak of time with relation to the use 
we make ot it, we make use of se passer ; a part of 
our life flies away in desiring the vi ore, .\nd thf other 
part in lamentinp' the past, unepartie de notre vie se 
passe d d^sirer ravenir, Vautre a regretter le pass4. 

We do not say indifferently il e^t pass^e and il a 
fiass^y he is gone by. 

When passer has either a case gover-^ed. or rela- 
tion to places or persons, we say it a pass ^^ eith r in 
apropj^r or fis^urative sense : as, he t a^sf'd ':hi9 way, 
U a passe par ici ; the troops have pa ^ed through 
Germany, les troupes out pas s^ par rAllemagne. 

Passer, in its compound tenser, is corijjgaiecVhy 
the help ot the verb avoir, when it is used i • a figu- 
rative sense, and has a relation to so.tie^hirg: as, 
after his second part he passed to bs mnclus^on, 
apres son second point il apassi a sa conclusion, 

WiYien passer has neither a case gov rn^iL nor re- 
lation, it is conjugated by th? help o» etre : as, the 
troops have passed ; les troupes sont pass^es. 

These two following expressions, a pass^, est paasi^ 
speaking of words or expressions uved \\\ a lanjruav e, 
have quite a contrary signification : as, for exan*p]e, 
€€ mot apassSi signifies that this word did takts w^^.s 
received ; whereas the other expression, ce mot est 
pass^y signifies that this word is obsolete, and qr. te 
out of use. 

Generally the ^ord passer is always conjugated in 
its compound tenses with the verb avoir, when «c is 
used actively. 

Likewise, when it signifies to be reputed, account- 
ed for> though, in this sense, it is not used actively ? 



336 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

as, Cromwell was reputed the pjreatest politician o£ 
his age» Crom%udl a pass ^ pour le phis grand iioliUque 
de son siede. 

Passioner, 

Passioned used adjectively, is said both of persons, 
and things which have relation to persons : as, un 
homme passionn6. des senti?nens passionnes^ des ex- 
pressions passionn^esy un air passiomi^. 

When this word is said oi things, it never has a 
case governed after it : as, des sentimens passion^s^ 
^c. But if it is said of persons? sometimes it has a 
case, sometimes not ; when it has no case, it is com- 
monly taken in a bad sense : as, tm honime passionne^ 
a man prepossessed with passion : when it has no 
case after it, it signifies fond of a thing, and then it 
has a good or bad sense according to its case : as, 
un homme passionne pour la volupte, pour la gloire^ 
pour Vhonneur, 8cc. a man fond of voluptuousness, of 
glory, of honour, 

Passionne does not govern its following case, 
which is always a substantive in the second case : 
thus, we do not say he is greedy of glory, of specta- 
cles, 8cc. ilest passionne de la gloire, des spectacles. 
However, when its case comes before it, which is al- 
ways in this case a pronoun, it governs commonly the 
second Case ; this is the fruit of those spectacles of 
which you are so fond, voild le fruit de ces spectacles 
dont vous etes si passionn&\ he loves nothing but 
glory, and is so fond of it, that he thinks on nothing 
else, il n^aime que la gloirc^ et il en est sipassio7iney 
qu'il ne pense d autre chose. 

Personnage, 

This word is only applied to men, and not to wo- 
men : as, the greatest men of antiquity ; les plus 
grands personnages cle VaniiquU^ ; he is one of the 
most illustrious men of this age;, cV^^ un des plus 
zUustres fiersonnages de ce siecle. 

We say in a familiar discourse, laughing at some- 
body, c^est un sot personnage, c^est un ridicule person- 
naget he is a sUly fellow, a ridiculous man. 

V^^htviperi^onnaYei^ preceded by the definite articTej 



FRENCH TONGUE. SSf 

without some modifying word before or after it, it is 
commonly taken in a bad sense : as, I knpw the fel- 
lov/j je connois le fiersormage, 

Feinture, Portraity Tableau, 

These three words when they are taken figura- 
tively, have the same sense, and signify a descripcionj,. 
a picture of some person or thing ; but when they are 
taken in a proper sense, they signify difterent things. 

The first is said, 1st, of what is painted upon a 
%vall, wainscot, 6cc. ; 2dly,of the art of painting ; Sdly^ 
of the colour in general which is made use of in 
painting. 

The second is said of a picture which is drawn to 
represent any thing after life. 

The third is said of any picture upon wood? clothe 
brass, Sec. presenting an history, landscape, buildr 
ing» hunting, storm, shipwreck, &c ; even what is 
drawn out of fancy, or after a statute, bust, medal, 
i3cc. is called tableau and not fiortraity the latter al- 
ways signifying a picture drawn after life. 

Tableau is not always equally said of a fiortraH^, 
.Who did ever call a miniature, or some small picture 
drawn after life,2w tableau ? This last word implies 
something large. - 

Persuader, 

When the verb signifies to convince, it commoni/ 
governs the first case of the person> and the second 
case of the thing: as, I have convinced him of this 
truth, je Vaifiersuad^ de cette vMt^ ; he convinced 
me of the sincerity of his intentions, il nCaperauadi 
de la %incirit6 de ses intentions. 

But when this verb signifies to advise, it govern^ 
the third case of the person, and is always followed 
by a verb in the infinitive mood, preceded by the pre- 
position de : as, I will advise him to go thither ; je bd 
persuaderai d*y oiler: I have put him upor. stud^. or 
I have induced him to study, jjV hiiai tiri^si(cd^ d'^etn- 
dier,' - . • ' 

Ff 



S38 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

Perturbateuu 

This word is not joined with all sorts of substan- 
tives. We say un fierturbateur durefios public^ de 
V^taU de V^glwe; a disturber of public repose, of the 
state, of the church ; but we do not say un fierturba- 
teur dufieufile^ a disturber of the people. 

Likewise we say troubler le reflos fiublid rordre^ 
Titat^ l^iglise^ un royaume^ to disturb public repose, 
order, the state, the church, a kingdom ; but we do 
not say troubler le fieufiU^ un ^tat, une province ^ to 
disturb the people, a state* a province ; though we 
say exciter des troubles fiarmi le fieufile^ to disturb 
the people, to excite disturbances among them ; ecc- 
dterdes troubles dans unitat, dans une fir ovine e, &c. 

According to the French Academy, fierturba-- 
ieur is scarcely used but in this phrase, fierturbqtfup 
du refios fiublic. 

Piquet^ (se.J 

TThis verb signifies, 1st, to be offended, to be angr^ 
at : as, he is offended at the least thing, il se fii^e 
de la momdre chose^ 

2dly, It signifies to pretend to, to set up for : as, a 
truly learned man knows every thing, and pretends 
to nothing, un homme vMtablement savant sait tout 
C3* ne se pique derien ; he pretends to write and speak 
well, il se pique de bien (Retire ^ de bienparier. 

We say of a man who made, on some occasion, his 
generosity appear in emulation of another; ils^est 
piqu6 d'honneur. This verb, in the three foregoing 
cases, is always followed by the preposition de. 

Politesse. 

This verb is used in a figurative sense only ; for 
-me say, the politeness of the court, lapolitesse de 
la cour ; and we do not say, la politesse des perlesy 
la politesse du marbre, but le poll ; though we say, du 
marbre poli^ polished marble. 

What\7e have said 6f the vfovd politesse may be ap- 



FRENCH TONGUE. 33d 

plied to many other substantives which are only used 
ina figurative sense, though the adjective from which 
they are derived be used both in a proper and figu- 
rative sense ; such are, among others, teudresae^ droi^^ 
ture. Though we ssiy, du pain t€ndre,ne\s breads 
and colonne droite^ a straight coluaiD ; yet we do nos 
say, la tendressc du fiairiy la droiture d'une colonne, 

Freds. 

When this word is usecTadjectively, it signifies pre* 
cise, fixed : as, a fixed time, temfis fir^cis ; a fixed 
day, jour fir^cis ; a fixed hour, heure fir^cise. 

We say of a man who is concise and exact in his 
discourses, j7 tfs^ yor^/^r^ds dans ses diacours^ what 
you say is very plain, ce que vous dites Id estfortpr^cis^ 

But when it is used substantively it signifies the 
substance, the summary of what is the main, the 
chief, the most important thing in an affair, science, 
book, 8cc. : as, there is the whole substance of this 
book, voild tout le precis de ce Ivore. 

Fropre. 

When this word signifies fit, good, apt, it is follow* 
cd either by the preposition d or ntur : as> a man fit 
to war, un homme propre a la guerre, ov pour la 
guerre ; an herb fit to heal wounds, un herbe propre 
a gu^rir des plaies^ or pour gu&rir des plaiea. 

However, when it is followed by an active verb, 
having a passive signification, it is always followed by 
a : as, a truth fit to be preached, une vMt^ propre d 
precher ; fruit good to be pickled> du fruit propre a 
confire, or d etreconfit. 

When ^rq/jre is taken substantively, it signifies a 
particular quahty, which distinguishes a thing from 
all others: as, the property of birds is to ^y^le propre 
des oiaeaux est de voter* 

Railleric, 

When this word is used with the verb entendt^^ 
and without any article : ajs, entendre raillem i it 



340 A GRAMMAR OF THiE 

signifies to give a good interpretation to a raillery^ | 
not to be ofiVnded at any thing. | 

When it is used with the same verb entendre^ and^ 
with the definite article : as» entendre la railierie ; it 
signifies to be acquainted with the art of jeering : as, 
ilentend la railierie. 

We sometimes say reallerie a part, seriously, in 
earnest 

Recherche, 

This word is not equally applied to all things ; for 
-we do not say /aire la recherche d^une chose fierdue^ 
d^une chose ^garSes to inquire after a thing which is 
lost or strayed ; though we say, Jaire la recherche de 
la vie de (^uelquhcUf to make an inquiry after the life 
and actions of somebody ; faire la recherche d'une 
fille, to express the pursuit one makes to marry a 
girl, to court her. In this sense we likewise say, re- 
c here her une fille en manage^ or only la rechercher. 

We do not say, in a proper sense, the seeking after 
the treasures which the sea encloses in its depth, la 
recherche des tr^sors que la mer renfenne dans ses 
ahtmes* However, we say ir? a figurative sense, la re- 
cherche des biens de la terre ^ dts tr^sors, the pursuit 
after wealth and treasures. 

We likewise say, les recherches de Vantiquite, the 
inquiries after antiquity ; ilfaut toujours travailler a 
la recherche de la xyMte, we must always be busy 
about the inquiry after truth. 

It likewise signifies a thing curiously inquired after: 
as, this book is full of curious inquiries, celivre est 
filein de recherches curieuses. 

Though we do not say of a thing lost or strayed, 
faire la recherche, yet we may make use of rt'c/zerc/zer 
to seek again, to look for a second time : as, you did 
not seek well every where, you must seek again, 
vous TLavezfias bien cherche fiar touty ilfaut recher^ 
cher. 

R^gl^, R^gulitr, 

These two words have many odd constructions. 



ERENCH TONGUE. 241 

They ate both said of persons and things, but with 
Afferent significations. 

We say, a man regular in his study and conduct, 
un homme r^gl4 dans ses Etudes, 131" dans sa conctuite. 

We likewise say, des mceurs T^gleesy good manners ; 
une vie r^gl^e, a pure and innocent life ; une horloge 
bien r&gl^e, a clock that goes very right ; un refias 
76gl^^ a repast not too expensive ; des heures r^gUes^ 
stated hours, &c. 

We say, une femmc-tres pieuae 49* tres-r^guliere ^ 
sa conduite a toujours etejbrt figulierey to express 
that a woman is very pious and regular in her con- 
duct. We do not say, in this sense, c*€st unefemme 
rSgUe ; this word has quite a different meaning i 
however, we say, c^est un homme regl^, he is a sobe^ 
man. 

We say regulier of things which are done in an^ 
uniform and regular manner, particularly of those" 
which are done according to the rules of art. Thus 
we say) une firo endure reguliere, a regular proceed- 
ing ; une beaute rSguliere, a regular beauty ; u?Z' 
mouvement regulier a great and uniform motion ; 
-uerbes r^guUers ; bdtiment regulier ^les mouvemens 
r^gulters des corps celestes^ etc. 

D^regleis the contrary oiregU ; it is applied, Istg 
to matters of morality : as* un homme d^regUy a dis- 
ordered man ; des mceurs d^regles, une vie deregleej, 
<iisorderly manners of life : 3dly, to things which are 
not according to the ordinary course of nature and 
art; thus we bay, w/z temps deregl^, avoir le pouls 
deregle, une horioge d^reglee, une montre der^glee, 

Irregulier is the contrary of regulier. It is scarce- 
ly applied to persons but in ecclesiastical matters. It 
signifies an irregular man, one who, by reason of 
some misdemeanor, some natural defect, or some 
ecclesiastical law, cannot be admitted into orders, or 
officiate, if ne be in orders. 

However, irr^^w/id'T" is frequently used, speaking of 
things: as, une procedure irregulier e^ un bdtiment ir- 
regulier y un discours irr^gulur, des manier^s irr^gt> 
liereBi fGrtification irriguUere^ poeme irr^p-tHf^ , etc. 
Ff S^ . ^ 



342 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

According to the French Academy, we may 
likewise say, un esprit irregulier, a wit out of order, 

Rcndre, 

Rendre justice a quelqu'un signifies to do one j ustice* 
to j^ive him his due. Rendre la justice signifies lo 
exercise or to administer justice. 

Ti\\^ verb is never followed by a participle passive : 
as, these are the means to nnake you known, c'est le 
7noyen de vous rendre connu : we must say, de vous 
Jarre connoitre. 

Some French authors have put a participle after 
this verb, as for example, one of thena says, la vertu 
rendcheri de Dieu, virtue makes you beloved by God. 

Such expressions are very vicious. The verb 
rendre in that sense, is only to be joined with pure 
adjectives: as, Iron^aimabh, iihcstre, ridkide^ odituxy 
celebre^ etc. or substantives. 

Neither do we say, with a French author, rendre 
la guerison^ to heal one ; bfcausfe people had no heal- 
ing bef6re they were sick; and we make use, in this 
sense, of the verb rendre^ only s[^eaking of things 
which were lost, and of which we were deprived. 

Hence it follows, that we may say, rendre la sante\ 
to restore one to his health ; i^endre lavie, to restore 
one to his life; because we enjoy health and life be- 
fore we are deprived of both. We say rendre la vue^ 
les forcesy la libertey la parole^ l^apjietit, 

Richesse, 

This word, used in the singular, signifies some* 
times opulence, riches : as, commerce makes all tbcv 
riches of that country ; le comintrce fait toiue la 
richesse de ce pays-la. Sometimes it signifies in po- 
etry, the exactness and justness of the rhymes; as, 
the exactness of rhyme contributes a i2:reat deal to 
the beauty of poetry ; la richesse dela rime coniribiie 
beaiicoup d la beauts de lafio'esie. 

Sometimes it signifies the copiousness of a lan- 
guage : as, the copiousness of the Enghsh language^ 
la rkhe^^se de la tangue Angloi^e. 



FRfiNCH TONGUE. 34B 

Richesses, in the plural, and in a proper sense, al- 
ways signifies great riches. 

S^tisfah'c- 

■ This verb sometimes €;overns the Rrst case, and 
sometimes the third. There arc some cases where 
it eoverns the first case and not the third : as, all the 
\vealth of the world is not able to satisfy the human 
lieart, m^s les biens du monde ne sont /las ca/iables 
de saiisfaire le cosur hiimam; 

We likewise say satis fair c ses fiasnons, sa cojeir, 
ami ambition, sa -vaiiUe, sa curiosUe etc ana nor 
mHsfawe a ses -passions, &c. to satisty, to content 
^ne's passions, anger, ambition, &c. 

There are -.ome other cases where it governs the 
f bird and not the first case : as, sa^is/aire a son de- 
voir, to discharge one'stdutv ; satisjairea ime obliga- 
tion, to acquit an obligation ; satisfaire atix person- 
ties cju'on a offemecs, to make reparation to per- 
sons we have otfended. . ^ ■ , v, 

However, we sav,in the first czAse, satifijmre les per- 
tonnes a qui on doit, to pay people to whom we owe. 
The general rule to know wlien aatisjatre governs 
the first or the third case, is this ; when it is used in 
the sense of to pay or content, it governs the hrst 
case ; and when it is used in the sense ot to make re- 
paration, or discharge a duty , it governs the taird case. 

SiippUtr. 

Thoueh this word be more respectful and submis- 
1^1 ve than prier, vet we do not say sufipker Dieu, to 
beseech God ; we say prkr Ditu-^ However, speak- 
ineto God, we say, very v^^W^je te^uppiie, o mon 
Dim I nous te laififdions, 6 Dieu de Misericorde . 
- Such is the oddness of custom for the use ot this 
word, that we do not dare to make use of the word 
firier, speaking to a king, or to persons of a much 
hieher statio ■ than ours ? though we make use ot it 
speaking to God : for we do not^ay //n^r/^ m, but 
i.uppUcr le tqI 



344 A GRAMMAR OF THE 

TtU 

Some are wont to say faime tons les hons livres, 
tels qu'iis aoient ; \ like all good books, whatev^ 
they maybe. Such an expression is wrong; we 
ought to say quels quails soknt, Tels quails soient 
signifies such as they are. Moreover it governs the 
indicative, and not the subjunctive mood; conse- 
quently) it must be tels quHls sont, 

Vaillant, Valant. 

These two words are subject to the caprice of cus- 
tom. There are some cases where we make use of 
the first and others where we make use of the second; 
as, for example, we say, it a cent miile ^cus vaillant^ 
he is worth a hundred thousand crowns i it a en men - 
dies dix milk ^cus vaillant, his personal estate is 
worth ten thousand crowns. And we say, je lui ai 
donn6 dix tableaux valant deux guinees la fiiece^ and 
jiot vaillant ; I have given him ten pictures worth 
two guineas a-piece. 

When it signifies what a man is worth, either in 
his real or personal estate, we make use oi vaillant; 
but, when it implies what a thing is worth, we make 
use of valant. This reflection may easily be ap- 
plied to the foregoing examples* 

VeilltT' 

Veiller une fiersonney to watch a person, has two 
different significations : it signifies to spend a night 
with a sick person to take care of him ; it likewise 
signifies to watch, to observe one, to have a watch- 
ful eye upon him. 

In this sense we likewise say veiller sur une fier- 
sonne^ surles actions, sur la conduite de quelqu^un. 

Vfiller governs sometimes the third case ; it then 
signifies to take care, and is properly applied only 
to things : as, je veillerai dvos affaires^ 1 will take 
care of your affairs. 

Venrt^ a bout. 

When this verb is applied to things : as, venir a 
bout d'une chose^ it signifies to bring a thing about> 
to succeed : as, il e^i vem^ d boict dc son dic^mn. 



FRfi^CH TONGUE. 345 

When it is applied to persons it signifies sometimes 
to reclaim one : as, this child cannot be reclaimed ; 
on ne sauroit venir a bout de cet enfant. 

Sometimes it signifies to overcome one's enemies, 
to strike them home : as, it vkndra a bout de tons 
ses ennemis- 

Fent, 

Though we say, with the article, vent du nord, 
north- wind ; vent du sud, south-wind ; yet we say, 
with the preposition de only, vent d'est^ east-wind ; 
vent d'ouest, west- wind* 

Fille. 

We say, in familiar discourse, of somebody, i e^st. 
a la ville, to express that he is not in the country ; 
and il est en viUe, that he is not at home, when we are 
speaking. 

Fin* 

We say vm de Bourgogne, de Chantfiagney d^Es- 
fiagne^ de Portugul, de Piemont^ etc* and we say, vhi 
du Rhin^ and not vin de Rhin. 

Fouloir, 

This word which commonly signifies to be willing, 
to have a mind to, has several other significations : 
it signifies first, to command : as, the king commands 
you to obey, le roi veut que vous obeissieZ' 

Secondly, to desire, to wish : as, they v\ ill give you 
whatever you desire, on -vous donnera tout ce que 
•vous voudrez. 

Thirdly, to consent, to agree ; as, yes, I consent to 
it; ouU je le veux bien, it you agree to it, he will 
agree likewise, si vous le voulez il le voudra aussi. 

Fourthly, a necessity : as, this affair must be con- 
ducted with prudence, cette affaire veut etre con- 
duite avec prudence ; this picture must be seen in its 
proper light, ce tableau veut etre vu dans son jour. 

When the word Hen, preceded by the article, is add 



346 A GRAMMAR OF THE, &c. 

cd to it, it signifies to have an affection for somebodr^, 
to wish him well: 2iS,ilvous veut du bien. Whea 
the word 7tial is added to it, it signifies the contrary,, 
as : il vous vtut du maL 

We say en vouloir a quelqu^un^ to express adesire 
of hurting somebody i as, I know that he aims to 
hurt you,yV saia qu^ilvous en veut. 

We say, a qm en voulez voua? Whom do you ask .^ 
■whom do you look for I A qui en -vent-U? What ails 
hin> ? What does he complain of? 

Que veut dire cet homme signifies, what means this 
man ? What does he ask for ? And, to show a mere 
surprise, we sometimes say que veut dire cela .? What 
means that ? In the same manner^ we say, of words 
or things which we do not understand, que veut dir^ 
€e mot ? Que veut dire ce firoceede .? 

This word, besides its various significg^tions^ which 
are to be met wt^h in dictionaries, has several others* 
Petdre une chose de vue^ signifies to cease to see a 
thing : as, le vaisseau s*^loigna e^ ptu de temfis^ et 
nous le fierdimes de veu. We likewise say, of an 
affair, on Va perdue de vue, to express that we do 
not know what is become of it. 

Avoir vue sur quelqu^un signifies, in a figurative 
sense, to have a right to observe somebody, in order 
to rule and conduct hijm ; and avoir la vue surquel-^ 
qu'un signifies to have a watchful eye upon somebody^ 
to watch his conduct We say, avoir des vues pour 
quelqu^uH^ to have a design to procure somebody aa- 
advantage ; avoir des vues sur quelqu^un^ to have a 
design to employ him to do something ; and avott 
des vues sur quelque chosey to have a design to ob** 
tain a thing. 

There are some other practical irregularities^ 
the most part of them have been taken notice of isi 
the third part of this Grammar. 

^r? -1 n'A 

FINIS. 



Deacidified using the Bookkeeper procsL 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: Sept. 2006 

PreservationTechnologiea i 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATIOl| I 

1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
(724) 779-21 1 1 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 




003 117 586 



